This is org.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.0 from org.texi.

This manual is for Org version 8.2.9.

   Copyright © 2004–2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts
     being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a)
     below.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled
     “GNU Free Documentation License.”

     (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.”
INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs editing modes
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Org Mode: (org).      Outline-based notes management and organizer
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY


File: org.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)

Org Mode Manual
***************

This manual is for Org version 8.2.9.

   Copyright © 2004–2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts
     being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a)
     below.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled
     “GNU Free Documentation License.”

     (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.”

* Menu:

* Introduction::                Getting started
* Document Structure::          A tree works like your brain
* Tables::                      Pure magic for quick formatting
* Hyperlinks::                  Notes in context
* TODO Items::                  Every tree branch can be a TODO item
* Tags::                        Tagging headlines and matching sets of tags
* Properties and Columns::      Storing information about an entry
* Dates and Times::             Making items useful for planning
* Capture - Refile - Archive::  The ins and outs for projects
* Agenda Views::                Collecting information into views
* Markup::                      Prepare text for rich export
* Exporting::                   Sharing and publishing notes
* Publishing::                  Create a web site of linked Org files
* Working With Source Code::    Export, evaluate, and tangle code blocks
* Miscellaneous::               All the rest which did not fit elsewhere
* Hacking::                     How to hack your way around
* MobileOrg::                   Viewing and capture on a mobile device
* History and Acknowledgments::  How Org came into being
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation.
* Main Index::                  An index of Org’s concepts and features
* Key Index::                   Key bindings and where they are described
* Command and Function Index::  Command names and some internal functions
* Variable Index::              Variables mentioned in the manual

 — The Detailed Node Listing —

Introduction

* Summary::                     Brief summary of what Org does
* Installation::                Installing Org
* Activation::                  How to activate Org for certain buffers
* Feedback::                    Bug reports, ideas, patches etc.
* Conventions::                 Typesetting conventions in the manual

Document structure

* Outlines::                    Org is based on Outline mode
* Headlines::                   How to typeset Org tree headlines
* Visibility cycling::          Show and hide, much simplified
* Motion::                      Jumping to other headlines
* Structure editing::           Changing sequence and level of headlines
* Sparse trees::                Matches embedded in context
* Plain lists::                 Additional structure within an entry
* Drawers::                     Tucking stuff away
* Blocks::                      Folding blocks
* Footnotes::                   How footnotes are defined in Org’s syntax
* Orgstruct mode::              Structure editing outside Org
* Org syntax::                  Formal description of Org’s syntax

Visibility cycling

* Global and local cycling::    Cycling through various visibility states
* Initial visibility::          Setting the initial visibility state
* Catching invisible edits::    Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts

Global and local cycling

* Initial visibility::          Setting the initial visibility state
* Catching invisible edits::    Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts

Tables

* Built-in table editor::       Simple tables
* Column width and alignment::  Overrule the automatic settings
* Column groups::               Grouping to trigger vertical lines
* Orgtbl mode::                 The table editor as minor mode
* The spreadsheet::             The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities
* Org-Plot::                    Plotting from org tables

The spreadsheet

* References::                  How to refer to another field or range
* Formula syntax for Calc::     Using Calc to compute stuff
* Formula syntax for Lisp::     Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp
* Durations and time values::   How to compute durations and time values
* Field and range formulas::    Formula for specific (ranges of) fields
* Column formulas::             Formulas valid for an entire column
* Lookup functions::            Lookup functions for searching tables
* Editing and debugging formulas::  Fixing formulas
* Updating the table::          Recomputing all dependent fields
* Advanced features::           Field and column names, parameters and automatic recalc

Hyperlinks

* Link format::                 How links in Org are formatted
* Internal links::              Links to other places in the current file
* External links::              URL-like links to the world
* Handling links::              Creating, inserting and following
* Using links outside Org::     Linking from my C source code?
* Link abbreviations::          Shortcuts for writing complex links
* Search options::              Linking to a specific location
* Custom searches::             When the default search is not enough

Internal links

* Radio targets::               Make targets trigger links in plain text

TODO items

* TODO basics::                 Marking and displaying TODO entries
* TODO extensions::             Workflow and assignments
* Progress logging::            Dates and notes for progress
* Priorities::                  Some things are more important than others
* Breaking down tasks::         Splitting a task into manageable pieces
* Checkboxes::                  Tick-off lists

Extended use of TODO keywords

* Workflow states::             From TODO to DONE in steps
* TODO types::                  I do this, Fred does the rest
* Multiple sets in one file::   Mixing it all, and still finding your way
* Fast access to TODO states::  Single letter selection of a state
* Per-file keywords::           Different files, different requirements
* Faces for TODO keywords::     Highlighting states
* TODO dependencies::           When one task needs to wait for others

Progress logging

* Closing items::               When was this entry marked DONE?
* Tracking TODO state changes::  When did the status change?
* Tracking your habits::        How consistent have you been?

Tags

* Tag inheritance::             Tags use the tree structure of the outline
* Setting tags::                How to assign tags to a headline
* Tag groups::                  Use one tag to search for several tags
* Tag searches::                Searching for combinations of tags

Properties and columns

* Property syntax::             How properties are spelled out
* Special properties::          Access to other Org mode features
* Property searches::           Matching property values
* Property inheritance::        Passing values down the tree
* Column view::                 Tabular viewing and editing
* Property API::                Properties for Lisp programmers

Column view

* Defining columns::            The COLUMNS format property
* Using column view::           How to create and use column view
* Capturing column view::       A dynamic block for column view

Defining columns

* Scope of column definitions::  Where defined, where valid?
* Column attributes::           Appearance and content of a column

Dates and times

* Timestamps::                  Assigning a time to a tree entry
* Creating timestamps::         Commands which insert timestamps
* Deadlines and scheduling::    Planning your work
* Clocking work time::          Tracking how long you spend on a task
* Effort estimates::            Planning work effort in advance
* Relative timer::              Notes with a running timer
* Countdown timer::             Starting a countdown timer for a task

Creating timestamps

* The date/time prompt::        How Org mode helps you entering date and time
* Custom time format::          Making dates look different

Deadlines and scheduling

* Inserting deadline/schedule::  Planning items
* Repeated tasks::              Items that show up again and again

Clocking work time

* Clocking commands::           Starting and stopping a clock
* The clock table::             Detailed reports
* Resolving idle time::         Resolving time when you’ve been idle

Capture - Refile - Archive

* Capture::                     Capturing new stuff
* Attachments::                 Add files to tasks
* RSS Feeds::                   Getting input from RSS feeds
* Protocols::                   External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org
* Refile and copy::             Moving/copying a tree from one place to another
* Archiving::                   What to do with finished projects

Capture

* Setting up capture::          Where notes will be stored
* Using capture::               Commands to invoke and terminate capture
* Capture templates::           Define the outline of different note types

Capture templates

* Template elements::           What is needed for a complete template entry
* Template expansion::          Filling in information about time and context
* Templates in contexts::       Only show a template in a specific context

Archiving

* Moving subtrees::             Moving a tree to an archive file
* Internal archiving::          Switch off a tree but keep it in the file

Agenda views

* Agenda files::                Files being searched for agenda information
* Agenda dispatcher::           Keyboard access to agenda views
* Built-in agenda views::       What is available out of the box?
* Presentation and sorting::    How agenda items are prepared for display
* Agenda commands::             Remote editing of Org trees
* Custom agenda views::         Defining special searches and views
* Exporting Agenda Views::      Writing a view to a file
* Agenda column view::          Using column view for collected entries

The built-in agenda views

* Weekly/daily agenda::         The calendar page with current tasks
* Global TODO list::            All unfinished action items
* Matching tags and properties::  Structured information with fine-tuned search
* Timeline::                    Time-sorted view for single file
* Search view::                 Find entries by searching for text
* Stuck projects::              Find projects you need to review

Presentation and sorting

* Categories::                  Not all tasks are equal
* Time-of-day specifications::  How the agenda knows the time
* Sorting agenda items::        The order of things
* Filtering/limiting agenda items::  Dynamically narrow the agenda

Custom agenda views

* Storing searches::            Type once, use often
* Block agenda::                All the stuff you need in a single buffer
* Setting Options::             Changing the rules

Markup for rich export

* Structural markup elements::  The basic structure as seen by the exporter
* Images and tables::           Images, tables and caption mechanism
* Literal examples::            Source code examples with special formatting
* Include files::               Include additional files into a document
* Index entries::               Making an index
* Macro replacement::           Use macros to create templates
* Embedded LaTeX::           LaTeX can be freely used inside Org documents
* Special blocks::              Containers targeted at export back-ends

Structural markup elements

* Document title::              Where the title is taken from
* Headings and sections::       The document structure as seen by the exporter
* Table of contents::           The if and where of the table of contents
* Lists::                       Lists
* Paragraphs::                  Paragraphs
* Footnote markup::             Footnotes
* Emphasis and monospace::      Bold, italic, etc.
* Horizontal rules::            Make a line
* Comment lines::               What will *not* be exported

Embedded LaTeX

* Special symbols::             Greek letters and other symbols
* Subscripts and superscripts::  Simple syntax for raising/lowering text
* LaTeX fragments::          Complex formulas made easy
* Previewing LaTeX fragments::  What will this snippet look like?
* CDLaTeX mode::                Speed up entering of formulas

Exporting

* The Export Dispatcher::       The main exporter interface
* Export back-ends::            Built-in export formats
* Export settings::             Generic export settings
* ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export::  Exporting to flat files with encoding
* Beamer export::               Exporting as a Beamer presentation
* HTML export::                 Exporting to HTML
* LaTeX and PDF export::     Exporting to LaTeX, and processing to PDF
* Markdown export::             Exporting to Markdown
* OpenDocument Text export::    Exporting to OpenDocument Text
* Org export::                  Exporting to Org
* Texinfo export::              Exporting to Texinfo
* iCalendar export::            Exporting to iCalendar
* Other built-in back-ends::    Exporting to a man page
* Export in foreign buffers::   Author tables and lists in Org syntax
* Advanced configuration::      Fine-tuning the export output

HTML export

* HTML Export commands::        How to invoke HTML export
* HTML doctypes::               Org can export to various (X)HTML flavors
* HTML preamble and postamble::  How to insert a preamble and a postamble
* Quoting HTML tags::           Using direct HTML in Org mode
* Links in HTML export::        How links will be interpreted and formatted
* Tables in HTML export::       How to modify the formatting of tables
* Images in HTML export::       How to insert figures into HTML output
* Math formatting in HTML export::  Beautiful math also on the web
* Text areas in HTML export::   An alternative way to show an example
* CSS support::                 Changing the appearance of the output
* JavaScript support::          Info and Folding in a web browser

LaTeX and PDF export

* LaTeX export commands::    How to export to LaTeX and PDF
* Header and sectioning::       Setting up the export file structure
* Quoting LaTeX code::       Incorporating literal LaTeX code
* LaTeX specific attributes::  Controlling LaTeX output

OpenDocument Text export

* Pre-requisites for ODT export::  What packages ODT exporter relies on
* ODT export commands::         How to invoke ODT export
* Extending ODT export::        How to produce ‘doc’, ‘pdf’ files
* Applying custom styles::      How to apply custom styles to the output
* Links in ODT export::         How links will be interpreted and formatted
* Tables in ODT export::        How Tables are exported
* Images in ODT export::        How to insert images
* Math formatting in ODT export::  How LaTeX fragments are formatted
* Labels and captions in ODT export::  How captions are rendered
* Literal examples in ODT export::  How source and example blocks are formatted
* Advanced topics in ODT export::  Read this if you are a power user

Math formatting in ODT export

* Working with LaTeX math snippets::  How to embed LaTeX math fragments
* Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files::  How to embed equations in native format

Advanced topics in ODT export

* Configuring a document converter::  How to register a document converter
* Working with OpenDocument style files::  Explore the internals
* Creating one-off styles::     How to produce custom highlighting etc
* Customizing tables in ODT export::  How to define and use Table templates
* Validating OpenDocument XML::  How to debug corrupt OpenDocument files

Texinfo export

* Texinfo export commands::     How to invoke Texinfo export
* Document preamble::           File header, title and copyright page
* Headings and sectioning structure:: Building document structure
* Indices::                     Creating indices
* Quoting Texinfo code::        Incorporating literal Texinfo code
* Texinfo specific attributes:: Controlling Texinfo output
* An example::

Publishing

* Configuration::               Defining projects
* Uploading files::             How to get files up on the server
* Sample configuration::        Example projects
* Triggering publication::      Publication commands

Configuration

* Project alist::               The central configuration variable
* Sources and destinations::    From here to there
* Selecting files::             What files are part of the project?
* Publishing action::           Setting the function doing the publishing
* Publishing options::          Tweaking HTML/LaTeX export
* Publishing links::            Which links keep working after publishing?
* Sitemap::                     Generating a list of all pages
* Generating an index::         An index that reaches across pages

Sample configuration

* Simple example::              One-component publishing
* Complex example::             A multi-component publishing example

Working with source code

* Structure of code blocks::    Code block syntax described
* Editing source code::         Language major-mode editing
* Exporting code blocks::       Export contents and/or results
* Extracting source code::      Create pure source code files
* Evaluating code blocks::      Place results of evaluation in the Org mode buffer
* Library of Babel::            Use and contribute to a library of useful code blocks
* Languages::                   List of supported code block languages
* Header arguments::            Configure code block functionality
* Results of evaluation::       How evaluation results are handled
* Noweb reference syntax::      Literate programming in Org mode
* Key bindings and useful functions::  Work quickly with code blocks
* Batch execution::             Call functions from the command line

Header arguments

* Using header arguments::      Different ways to set header arguments
* Specific header arguments::   List of header arguments

Using header arguments

* System-wide header arguments::  Set global default values
* Language-specific header arguments::  Set default values by language
* Header arguments in Org mode properties::  Set default values for a buffer or heading
* Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties::  Set language-specific default values for a buffer or heading
* Code block specific header arguments::  The most common way to set values
* Header arguments in function calls::  The most specific level

Specific header arguments

* var::                         Pass arguments to code blocks
* results::                     Specify the type of results and how they will
                                be collected and handled
* file::                        Specify a path for file output
* file-desc::                   Specify a description for file results
* dir::                         Specify the default (possibly remote)
                                directory for code block execution
* exports::                     Export code and/or results
* tangle::                      Toggle tangling and specify file name
* mkdirp::                      Toggle creation of parent directories of target
                                files during tangling
* comments::                    Toggle insertion of comments in tangled
                                code files
* padline::                     Control insertion of padding lines in tangled
                                code files
* no-expand::                   Turn off variable assignment and noweb
                                expansion during tangling
* session::                     Preserve the state of code evaluation
* noweb::                       Toggle expansion of noweb references
* noweb-ref::                   Specify block’s noweb reference resolution target
* noweb-sep::                   String used to separate noweb references
* cache::                       Avoid re-evaluating unchanged code blocks
* sep::                         Delimiter for writing tabular results outside Org
* hlines::                      Handle horizontal lines in tables
* colnames::                    Handle column names in tables
* rownames::                    Handle row names in tables
* shebang::                     Make tangled files executable
* tangle-mode::                 Set permission of tangled files
* eval::                        Limit evaluation of specific code blocks
* wrap::                        Mark source block evaluation results
* post::                        Post processing of code block results
* prologue::                    Text to prepend to code block body
* epilogue::                    Text to append to code block body

Miscellaneous

* Completion::                  M-TAB knows what you need
* Easy Templates::              Quick insertion of structural elements
* Speed keys::                  Electric commands at the beginning of a headline
* Code evaluation security::    Org mode files evaluate inline code
* Customization::               Adapting Org to your taste
* In-buffer settings::          Overview of the #+KEYWORDS
* The very busy C-c C-c key::   When in doubt, press C-c C-c
* Clean view::                  Getting rid of leading stars in the outline
* TTY keys::                    Using Org on a tty
* Interaction::                 Other Emacs packages
* org-crypt::                   Encrypting Org files

Interaction with other packages

* Cooperation::                 Packages Org cooperates with
* Conflicts::                   Packages that lead to conflicts

Hacking

* Hooks::                       How to reach into Org’s internals
* Add-on packages::             Available extensions
* Adding hyperlink types::      New custom link types
* Adding export back-ends::     How to write new export back-ends
* Context-sensitive commands::  How to add functionality to such commands
* Tables in arbitrary syntax::  Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs
* Dynamic blocks::              Automatically filled blocks
* Special agenda views::        Customized views
* Speeding up your agendas::    Tips on how to speed up your agendas
* Extracting agenda information::  Post-processing of agenda information
* Using the property API::      Writing programs that use entry properties
* Using the mapping API::       Mapping over all or selected entries

Tables and lists in arbitrary syntax

* Radio tables::                Sending and receiving radio tables
* A LaTeX example::          Step by step, almost a tutorial
* Translator functions::        Copy and modify
* Radio lists::                 Sending and receiving lists

MobileOrg

* Setting up the staging area::  Where to interact with the mobile device
* Pushing to MobileOrg::        Uploading Org files and agendas
* Pulling from MobileOrg::      Integrating captured and flagged items



File: org.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Document Structure,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

1 Introduction
**************

* Menu:

* Summary::                     Brief summary of what Org does
* Installation::                Installing Org
* Activation::                  How to activate Org for certain buffers
* Feedback::                    Bug reports, ideas, patches etc.
* Conventions::                 Typesetting conventions in the manual


File: org.info,  Node: Summary,  Next: Installation,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Introduction

1.1 Summary
===========

Org is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining TODO lists, and doing
project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.

   Org develops organizational tasks around NOTES files that contain
lists or information about projects as plain text.  Org is implemented
on top of Outline mode, which makes it possible to keep the content of
large files well structured.  Visibility cycling and structure editing
help to work with the tree.  Tables are easily created with a built-in
table editor.  Org supports TODO items, deadlines, timestamps, and
scheduling.  It dynamically compiles entries into an agenda that
utilizes and smoothly integrates much of the Emacs calendar and diary.
Plain text URL-like links connect to websites, emails, Usenet messages,
BBDB entries, and any files related to the projects.  For printing and
sharing notes, an Org file can be exported as a structured ASCII file,
as HTML, or (TODO and agenda items only) as an iCalendar file.  It can
also serve as a publishing tool for a set of linked web pages.

   As a project planning environment, Org works by adding metadata to
outline nodes.  Based on this data, specific entries can be extracted in
queries and create dynamic agenda views.

   Org mode contains the Org Babel environment which allows you to work
with embedded source code blocks in a file, to facilitate code
evaluation, documentation, and literate programming techniques.

   Org’s automatic, context-sensitive table editor with spreadsheet
capabilities can be integrated into any major mode by activating the
minor Orgtbl mode.  Using a translation step, it can be used to maintain
tables in arbitrary file types, for example in LaTeX.  The structure
editing and list creation capabilities can be used outside Org with the
minor Orgstruct mode.

   Org keeps simple things simple.  When first fired up, it should feel
like a straightforward, easy to use outliner.  Complexity is not
imposed, but a large amount of functionality is available when you need
it.  Org is a toolbox and can be used in different ways and for
different ends, for example:

     • an outline extension with visibility cycling and structure editing
     • an ASCII system and table editor for taking structured notes
     • a TODO list editor
     • a full agenda and planner with deadlines and work scheduling
     • an environment in which to implement David Allen’s GTD system
     • a simple hypertext system, with HTML and LaTeX export
     • a publishing tool to create a set of interlinked web pages
     • an environment for literate programming

   There is a website for Org which provides links to the newest version
of Org, as well as additional information, frequently asked questions
(FAQ), links to tutorials, etc.  This page is located at
<http://orgmode.org>.

   The version 7.3 of this manual is available as a paperback book from
Network Theory Ltd.  (http://www.network-theory.co.uk/org/manual/)


File: org.info,  Node: Installation,  Next: Activation,  Prev: Summary,  Up: Introduction

1.2 Installation
================

Org is part of recent distributions of GNU Emacs, so you normally don’t
need to install it.  If, for one reason or another, you want to install
Org on top of this pre-packaged version, there are three ways to do it:

   • By using Emacs package system.
   • By downloading Org as an archive.
   • By using Org’s git repository.

   We strongly recommend to stick to a single installation method.

Using Emacs packaging system
............................

Recent Emacs distributions include a packaging system which lets you
install Elisp libraries.  You can install Org with ‘M-x package-install
RET org’.

Important: you need to do this in a session where no ‘.org’ file has
been visited, i.e., where no Org built-in function have been loaded.
Otherwise autoload Org functions will mess up the installation.

   Then, to make sure your Org configuration is taken into account,
initialize the package system with ‘(package-initialize)’ in your
‘.emacs’ before setting any Org option.  If you want to use Org’s
package repository, check out the Org ELPA page
(http://orgmode.org/elpa.html).

Downloading Org as an archive
.............................

You can download Org latest release from Org’s website
(http://orgmode.org/).  In this case, make sure you set the load-path
correctly in your ‘.emacs’:

     (add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/lisp")

   The downloaded archive contains contributed libraries that are not
included in Emacs.  If you want to use them, add the ‘contrib’ directory
to your load-path:

     (add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/contrib/lisp" t)

   Optionally, you can compile the files and/or install them in your
system.  Run ‘make help’ to list compilation and installation options.

Using Org’s git repository
..........................

You can clone Org’s repository and install Org like this:

     $ cd ~/src/
     $ git clone git://orgmode.org/org-mode.git
     $ make autoloads

   Note that in this case, ‘make autoloads’ is mandatory: it defines
Org’s version in ‘org-version.el’ and Org’s autoloads in
‘org-loaddefs.el’.

   Remember to add the correct load-path as described in the method
above.

   You can also compile with ‘make’, generate the documentation with
‘make doc’, create a local configuration with ‘make config’ and install
Org with ‘make install’.  Please run ‘make help’ to get the list of
compilation/installation options.

   For more detailed explanations on Org’s build system, please check
the Org Build System page on Worg
(http://orgmode.org/worg/dev/org-build-system.html).


File: org.info,  Node: Activation,  Next: Feedback,  Prev: Installation,  Up: Introduction

1.3 Activation
==============

Since Emacs 22.2, files with the ‘.org’ extension use Org mode by
default.  If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, add this line to
your ‘.emacs’ file:

     (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.org\\'" . org-mode))

   Org mode buffers need font-lock to be turned on: this is the default
in Emacs(1).

   There are compatibility issues between Org mode and some other Elisp
packages, please take the time to check the list (*note Conflicts::).

   The four Org commands ‘org-store-link’, ‘org-capture’, ‘org-agenda’,
and ‘org-iswitchb’ should be accessible through global keys (i.e.,
anywhere in Emacs, not just in Org buffers).  Here are suggested
bindings for these keys, please modify the keys to your own liking.
     (global-set-key "\C-cl" 'org-store-link)
     (global-set-key "\C-cc" 'org-capture)
     (global-set-key "\C-ca" 'org-agenda)
     (global-set-key "\C-cb" 'org-iswitchb)

   With this setup, all files with extension ‘.org’ will be put into Org
mode.  As an alternative, make the first line of a file look like this:

     MY PROJECTS    -*- mode: org; -*-

which will select Org mode for this buffer no matter what the file’s
name is.  See also the variable ‘org-insert-mode-line-in-empty-file’.

   Many commands in Org work on the region if the region is active.  To
make use of this, you need to have ‘transient-mark-mode’
(‘zmacs-regions’ in XEmacs) turned on.  In Emacs 23 this is the default,
in Emacs 22 you need to do this yourself with
     (transient-mark-mode 1)
If you do not like ‘transient-mark-mode’, you can create an active
region by using the mouse to select a region, or pressing ‘C-<SPC>’
twice before moving the cursor.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you don’t use font-lock globally, turn it on in Org buffer
with ‘(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)’


File: org.info,  Node: Feedback,  Next: Conventions,  Prev: Activation,  Up: Introduction

1.4 Feedback
============

If you find problems with Org, or if you have questions, remarks, or
ideas about it, please mail to the Org mailing list
<emacs-orgmode@gnu.org>.  If you are not a member of the mailing list,
your mail will be passed to the list after a moderator has approved
it(1).

   For bug reports, please first try to reproduce the bug with the
latest version of Org available—if you are running an outdated version,
it is quite possible that the bug has been fixed already.  If the bug
persists, prepare a report and provide as much information as possible,
including the version information of Emacs (‘M-x emacs-version <RET>’)
and Org (‘M-x org-version RET’), as well as the Org related setup in
‘.emacs’.  The easiest way to do this is to use the command
     M-x org-submit-bug-report RET
which will put all this information into an Emacs mail buffer so that
you only need to add your description.  If you re not sending the Email
from within Emacs, please copy and paste the content into your Email
program.

   Sometimes you might face a problem due to an error in your Emacs or
Org mode setup.  Before reporting a bug, it is very helpful to start
Emacs with minimal customizations and reproduce the problem.  Doing so
often helps you determine if the problem is with your customization or
with Org mode itself.  You can start a typical minimal session with a
command like the example below.

     $ emacs -Q -l /path/to/minimal-org.el

   However if you are using Org mode as distributed with Emacs, a
minimal setup is not necessary.  In that case it is sufficient to start
Emacs as ‘emacs -Q’.  The ‘minimal-org.el’ setup file can have contents
as shown below.

     ;;; Minimal setup to load latest 'org-mode'

     ;; activate debugging
     (setq debug-on-error t
           debug-on-signal nil
           debug-on-quit nil)

     ;; add latest org-mode to load path
     (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name "/path/to/org-mode/lisp"))
     (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name "/path/to/org-mode/contrib/lisp" t))

   If an error occurs, a backtrace can be very useful (see below on how
to create one).  Often a small example file helps, along with clear
information about:

  1. What exactly did you do?
  2. What did you expect to happen?
  3. What happened instead?
Thank you for helping to improve this program.

How to create a useful backtrace
................................

If working with Org produces an error with a message you don’t
understand, you may have hit a bug.  The best way to report this is by
providing, in addition to what was mentioned above, a _backtrace_.  This
is information from the built-in debugger about where and how the error
occurred.  Here is how to produce a useful backtrace:

  1. Reload uncompiled versions of all Org mode Lisp files.  The
     backtrace contains much more information if it is produced with
     uncompiled code.  To do this, use
          C-u M-x org-reload RET
     or select ‘Org -> Refresh/Reload -> Reload Org uncompiled’ from the
     menu.
  2. Go to the ‘Options’ menu and select ‘Enter Debugger on Error’
     (XEmacs has this option in the ‘Troubleshooting’ sub-menu).
  3. Do whatever you have to do to hit the error.  Don’t forget to
     document the steps you take.
  4. When you hit the error, a ‘*Backtrace*’ buffer will appear on the
     screen.  Save this buffer to a file (for example using ‘C-x C-w’)
     and attach it to your bug report.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Please consider subscribing to the mailing list, in order to
minimize the work the mailing list moderators have to do.


File: org.info,  Node: Conventions,  Prev: Feedback,  Up: Introduction

1.5 Typesetting conventions used in this manual
===============================================

TODO keywords, tags, properties, etc.
.....................................

Org mainly uses three types of keywords: TODO keywords, tags and
property names.  In this manual we use the following conventions:

‘TODO’
‘WAITING’
     TODO keywords are written with all capitals, even if they are
     user-defined.
‘boss’
‘ARCHIVE’
     User-defined tags are written in lowercase; built-in tags with
     special meaning are written with all capitals.
‘Release’
‘PRIORITY’
     User-defined properties are capitalized; built-in properties with
     special meaning are written with all capitals.

   Moreover, Org uses option keywords (like ‘#+TITLE’ to set the title)
and environment keywords (like ‘#+BEGIN_HTML’ to start a ‘HTML’
environment).  They are written in uppercase in the manual to enhance
its readability, but you can use lowercase in your Org files(1).

Keybindings and commands
........................

The manual suggests two global keybindings: ‘C-c a’ for ‘org-agenda’ and
‘C-c c’ for ‘org-capture’.  These are only suggestions, but the rest of
the manual assumes that you are using these keybindings.

   Also, the manual lists both the keys and the corresponding commands
for accessing a functionality.  Org mode often uses the same key for
different functions, depending on context.  The command that is bound to
such keys has a generic name, like ‘org-metaright’.  In the manual we
will, wherever possible, give the function that is internally called by
the generic command.  For example, in the chapter on document structure,
‘M-<right>’ will be listed to call ‘org-do-demote’, while in the chapter
on tables, it will be listed to call ‘org-table-move-column-right’.  If
you prefer, you can compile the manual without the command names by
unsetting the flag ‘cmdnames’ in ‘org.texi’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Easy templates insert lowercase keywords and Babel dynamically
inserts ‘#+results’.


File: org.info,  Node: Document Structure,  Next: Tables,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top

2 Document structure
********************

Org is based on Outline mode and provides flexible commands to edit the
structure of the document.

* Menu:

* Outlines::                    Org is based on Outline mode
* Headlines::                   How to typeset Org tree headlines
* Visibility cycling::          Show and hide, much simplified
* Motion::                      Jumping to other headlines
* Structure editing::           Changing sequence and level of headlines
* Sparse trees::                Matches embedded in context
* Plain lists::                 Additional structure within an entry
* Drawers::                     Tucking stuff away
* Blocks::                      Folding blocks
* Footnotes::                   How footnotes are defined in Org’s syntax
* Orgstruct mode::              Structure editing outside Org
* Org syntax::                  Formal description of Org’s syntax


File: org.info,  Node: Outlines,  Next: Headlines,  Prev: Document Structure,  Up: Document Structure

2.1 Outlines
============

Org is implemented on top of Outline mode.  Outlines allow a document to
be organized in a hierarchical structure, which (at least for me) is the
best representation of notes and thoughts.  An overview of this
structure is achieved by folding (hiding) large parts of the document to
show only the general document structure and the parts currently being
worked on.  Org greatly simplifies the use of outlines by compressing
the entire show/hide functionality into a single command, ‘org-cycle’,
which is bound to the <TAB> key.


File: org.info,  Node: Headlines,  Next: Visibility cycling,  Prev: Outlines,  Up: Document Structure

2.2 Headlines
=============

Headlines define the structure of an outline tree.  The headlines in Org
start with one or more stars, on the left margin(1) (2).  For example:

     * Top level headline
     ** Second level
     *** 3rd level
         some text
     *** 3rd level
         more text

     * Another top level headline

Some people find the many stars too noisy and would prefer an outline
that has whitespace followed by a single star as headline starters.
*note Clean view::, describes a setup to realize this.

   An empty line after the end of a subtree is considered part of it and
will be hidden when the subtree is folded.  However, if you leave at
least two empty lines, one empty line will remain visible after folding
the subtree, in order to structure the collapsed view.  See the variable
‘org-cycle-separator-lines’ to modify this behavior.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See the variables ‘org-special-ctrl-a/e’, ‘org-special-ctrl-k’,
and ‘org-ctrl-k-protect-subtree’ to configure special behavior of ‘C-a’,
‘C-e’, and ‘C-k’ in headlines.

   (2) Clocking only works with headings indented less then 30 stars.


File: org.info,  Node: Visibility cycling,  Next: Motion,  Prev: Headlines,  Up: Document Structure

2.3 Visibility cycling
======================

* Menu:

* Global and local cycling::    Cycling through various visibility states
* Initial visibility::          Setting the initial visibility state
* Catching invisible edits::    Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts


File: org.info,  Node: Global and local cycling,  Next: Initial visibility,  Prev: Visibility cycling,  Up: Visibility cycling

2.3.1 Global and local cycling
------------------------------

Outlines make it possible to hide parts of the text in the buffer.  Org
uses just two commands, bound to <TAB> and ‘S-<TAB>’ to change the
visibility in the buffer.

‘<TAB>’     (‘org-cycle’)
     _Subtree cycling_: Rotate current subtree among the states

          ,-> FOLDED -> CHILDREN -> SUBTREE --.
          '-----------------------------------'

     The cursor must be on a headline for this to work(1).  When the
     cursor is at the beginning of the buffer and the first line is not
     a headline, then <TAB> actually runs global cycling (see below)(2).
     Also when called with a prefix argument (‘C-u <TAB>’), global
     cycling is invoked.

‘S-<TAB>’     (‘org-global-cycle’)
C-u <TAB>
     _Global cycling_: Rotate the entire buffer among the states

          ,-> OVERVIEW -> CONTENTS -> SHOW ALL --.
          '--------------------------------------'

     When ‘S-<TAB>’ is called with a numeric prefix argument N, the
     CONTENTS view up to headlines of level N will be shown.  Note that
     inside tables, ‘S-<TAB>’ jumps to the previous field.

‘C-u C-u <TAB>’     (‘org-set-startup-visibility’)
     Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer (*note Initial
     visibility::).
‘C-u C-u C-u <TAB>’     (‘show-all’)
     Show all, including drawers.
‘C-c C-r’     (‘org-reveal’)
     Reveal context around point, showing the current entry, the
     following heading and the hierarchy above.  Useful for working near
     a location that has been exposed by a sparse tree command (*note
     Sparse trees::) or an agenda command (*note Agenda commands::).
     With a prefix argument show, on each level, all sibling headings.
     With a double prefix argument, also show the entire subtree of the
     parent.
‘C-c C-k’     (‘show-branches’)
     Expose all the headings of the subtree, CONTENT view for just one
     subtree.
‘C-c <TAB>’     (‘show-children’)
     Expose all direct children of the subtree.  With a numeric prefix
     argument N, expose all children down to level N.
‘C-c C-x b’     (‘org-tree-to-indirect-buffer’)
     Show the current subtree in an indirect buffer(3).  With a numeric
     prefix argument N, go up to level N and then take that tree.  If N
     is negative then go up that many levels.  With a ‘C-u’ prefix, do
     not remove the previously used indirect buffer.
‘C-c C-x v’     (‘org-copy-visible’)
     Copy the visible text in the region into the kill ring.

* Menu:

* Initial visibility::          Setting the initial visibility state
* Catching invisible edits::    Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) see, however, the option ‘org-cycle-emulate-tab’.

   (2) see the option ‘org-cycle-global-at-bob’.

   (3) The indirect buffer (*note (emacs)Indirect Buffers::) will
contain the entire buffer, but will be narrowed to the current tree.
Editing the indirect buffer will also change the original buffer, but
without affecting visibility in that buffer.


File: org.info,  Node: Initial visibility,  Next: Catching invisible edits,  Prev: Global and local cycling,  Up: Visibility cycling

2.3.2 Initial visibility
------------------------

When Emacs first visits an Org file, the global state is set to
OVERVIEW, i.e., only the top level headlines are visible(1).  This can
be configured through the variable ‘org-startup-folded’, or on a
per-file basis by adding one of the following lines anywhere in the
buffer:

     #+STARTUP: overview
     #+STARTUP: content
     #+STARTUP: showall
     #+STARTUP: showeverything

   The startup visibility options are ignored when the file is open for
the first time during the agenda generation: if you want the agenda to
honor the startup visibility, set ‘org-agenda-inhibit-startup’ to ‘nil’.

Furthermore, any entries with a ‘VISIBILITY’ property (*note Properties
and Columns::) will get their visibility adapted accordingly.  Allowed
values for this property are ‘folded’, ‘children’, ‘content’, and ‘all’.

‘C-u C-u <TAB>’     (‘org-set-startup-visibility’)
     Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer, i.e., whatever
     is requested by startup options and ‘VISIBILITY’ properties in
     individual entries.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) When ‘org-agenda-inhibit-startup’ is non-‘nil’, Org will not
honor the default visibility state when first opening a file for the
agenda (*note Speeding up your agendas::).


File: org.info,  Node: Catching invisible edits,  Prev: Initial visibility,  Up: Visibility cycling

2.3.3 Catching invisible edits
------------------------------

Sometimes you may inadvertently edit an invisible part of the buffer and
be confused on what has been edited and how to undo the mistake.
Setting ‘org-catch-invisible-edits’ to non-‘nil’ will help prevent this.
See the docstring of this option on how Org should catch invisible edits
and process them.


File: org.info,  Node: Motion,  Next: Structure editing,  Prev: Visibility cycling,  Up: Document Structure

2.4 Motion
==========

The following commands jump to other headlines in the buffer.

‘C-c C-n’     (‘outline-next-visible-heading’)
     Next heading.
‘C-c C-p’     (‘outline-previous-visible-heading’)
     Previous heading.
‘C-c C-f’     (‘org-forward-same-level’)
     Next heading same level.
‘C-c C-b’     (‘org-backward-same-level’)
     Previous heading same level.
‘C-c C-u’     (‘outline-up-heading’)
     Backward to higher level heading.
‘C-c C-j’     (‘org-goto’)
     Jump to a different place without changing the current outline
     visibility.  Shows the document structure in a temporary buffer,
     where you can use the following keys to find your destination:
          <TAB>         Cycle visibility.
          <down> / <up>   Next/previous visible headline.
          <RET>         Select this location.
          /           Do a Sparse-tree search
          The following keys work if you turn off ‘org-goto-auto-isearch’
          n / p        Next/previous visible headline.
          f / b        Next/previous headline same level.
          u            One level up.
          0-9          Digit argument.
          q            Quit
     See also the option ‘org-goto-interface’.


File: org.info,  Node: Structure editing,  Next: Sparse trees,  Prev: Motion,  Up: Document Structure

2.5 Structure editing
=====================

‘M-<RET>’     (‘org-insert-heading’)
     Insert a new heading/item with the same level than the one at
     point.  If the cursor is in a plain list item, a new item is
     created (*note Plain lists::).  To prevent this behavior in lists,
     call the command with a prefix argument.  When this command is used
     in the middle of a line, the line is split and the rest of the line
     becomes the new item or headline(1).  If the command is used at the
     _beginning_ of a headline, the new headline is created before the
     current line.  If the command is used at the _end_ of a folded
     subtree (i.e., behind the ellipses at the end of a headline), then
     a headline will be inserted after the end of the subtree.  Calling
     this command with ‘C-u C-u’ will unconditionally respect the
     headline’s content and create a new item at the end of the parent
     subtree.
‘C-<RET>’     (‘org-insert-heading-respect-content’)
     Just like ‘M-<RET>’, except when adding a new heading below the
     current heading, the new heading is placed after the body instead
     of before it.  This command works from anywhere in the entry.
‘M-S-<RET>’     (‘org-insert-todo-heading’)
     Insert new TODO entry with same level as current heading.  See also
     the variable ‘org-treat-insert-todo-heading-as-state-change’.
‘C-S-<RET>’     (‘org-insert-todo-heading-respect-content’)
     Insert new TODO entry with same level as current heading.  Like
     ‘C-<RET>’, the new headline will be inserted after the current
     subtree.
‘<TAB>’     (‘org-cycle’)
     In a new entry with no text yet, the first <TAB> demotes the entry
     to become a child of the previous one.  The next <TAB> makes it a
     parent, and so on, all the way to top level.  Yet another <TAB>,
     and you are back to the initial level.
‘M-<left>’     (‘org-do-promote’)
     Promote current heading by one level.
‘M-<right>’     (‘org-do-demote’)
     Demote current heading by one level.
‘M-S-<left>’     (‘org-promote-subtree’)
     Promote the current subtree by one level.
‘M-S-<right>’     (‘org-demote-subtree’)
     Demote the current subtree by one level.
‘M-S-<up>’     (‘org-move-subtree-up’)
     Move subtree up (swap with previous subtree of same level).
‘M-S-<down>’     (‘org-move-subtree-down’)
     Move subtree down (swap with next subtree of same level).
‘M-h’     (‘org-mark-element’)
     Mark the element at point.  Hitting repeatedly will mark subsequent
     elements of the one just marked.  E.g., hitting <M-h> on a
     paragraph will mark it, hitting <M-h> immediately again will mark
     the next one.
‘C-c @’     (‘org-mark-subtree’)
     Mark the subtree at point.  Hitting repeatedly will mark subsequent
     subtrees of the same level than the marked subtree.
‘C-c C-x C-w’     (‘org-cut-subtree’)
     Kill subtree, i.e., remove it from buffer but save in kill ring.
     With a numeric prefix argument N, kill N sequential subtrees.
‘C-c C-x M-w’     (‘org-copy-subtree’)
     Copy subtree to kill ring.  With a numeric prefix argument N, copy
     the N sequential subtrees.
‘C-c C-x C-y’     (‘org-paste-subtree’)
     Yank subtree from kill ring.  This does modify the level of the
     subtree to make sure the tree fits in nicely at the yank position.
     The yank level can also be specified with a numeric prefix
     argument, or by yanking after a headline marker like ‘****’.
‘C-y’     (‘org-yank’)
     Depending on the options ‘org-yank-adjusted-subtrees’ and
     ‘org-yank-folded-subtrees’, Org’s internal ‘yank’ command will
     paste subtrees folded and in a clever way, using the same command
     as ‘C-c C-x C-y’.  With the default settings, no level adjustment
     will take place, but the yanked tree will be folded unless doing so
     would swallow text previously visible.  Any prefix argument to this
     command will force a normal ‘yank’ to be executed, with the prefix
     passed along.  A good way to force a normal yank is ‘C-u C-y’.  If
     you use ‘yank-pop’ after a yank, it will yank previous kill items
     plainly, without adjustment and folding.
‘C-c C-x c’     (‘org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift’)
     Clone a subtree by making a number of sibling copies of it.  You
     will be prompted for the number of copies to make, and you can also
     specify if any timestamps in the entry should be shifted.  This can
     be useful, for example, to create a number of tasks related to a
     series of lectures to prepare.  For more details, see the docstring
     of the command ‘org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift’.
‘C-c C-w’     (‘org-refile’)
     Refile entry or region to a different location.  *Note Refile and
     copy::.
‘C-c ^’     (‘org-sort’)
     Sort same-level entries.  When there is an active region, all
     entries in the region will be sorted.  Otherwise the children of
     the current headline are sorted.  The command prompts for the
     sorting method, which can be alphabetically, numerically, by time
     (first timestamp with active preferred, creation time, scheduled
     time, deadline time), by priority, by TODO keyword (in the sequence
     the keywords have been defined in the setup) or by the value of a
     property.  Reverse sorting is possible as well.  You can also
     supply your own function to extract the sorting key.  With a ‘C-u’
     prefix, sorting will be case-sensitive.
‘C-x n s’     (‘org-narrow-to-subtree’)
     Narrow buffer to current subtree.
‘C-x n b’     (‘org-narrow-to-block’)
     Narrow buffer to current block.
‘C-x n w’     (‘widen’)
     Widen buffer to remove narrowing.
‘C-c *’     (‘org-toggle-heading’)
     Turn a normal line or plain list item into a headline (so that it
     becomes a subheading at its location).  Also turn a headline into a
     normal line by removing the stars.  If there is an active region,
     turn all lines in the region into headlines.  If the first line in
     the region was an item, turn only the item lines into headlines.
     Finally, if the first line is a headline, remove the stars from all
     headlines in the region.

   When there is an active region (Transient Mark mode), promotion and
demotion work on all headlines in the region.  To select a region of
headlines, it is best to place both point and mark at the beginning of a
line, mark at the beginning of the first headline, and point at the line
just after the last headline to change.  Note that when the cursor is
inside a table (*note Tables::), the Meta-Cursor keys have different
functionality.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you do not want the line to be split, customize the variable
‘org-M-RET-may-split-line’.


File: org.info,  Node: Sparse trees,  Next: Plain lists,  Prev: Structure editing,  Up: Document Structure

2.6 Sparse trees
================

An important feature of Org mode is the ability to construct _sparse
trees_ for selected information in an outline tree, so that the entire
document is folded as much as possible, but the selected information is
made visible along with the headline structure above it(1).  Just try it
out and you will see immediately how it works.

   Org mode contains several commands creating such trees, all these
commands can be accessed through a dispatcher:

‘C-c /’     (‘org-sparse-tree’)
     This prompts for an extra key to select a sparse-tree creating
     command.
‘C-c / r’     (‘org-occur’)
     Prompts for a regexp and shows a sparse tree with all matches.  If
     the match is in a headline, the headline is made visible.  If the
     match is in the body of an entry, headline and body are made
     visible.  In order to provide minimal context, also the full
     hierarchy of headlines above the match is shown, as well as the
     headline following the match.  Each match is also highlighted; the
     highlights disappear when the buffer is changed by an editing
     command(2), or by pressing ‘C-c C-c’.  When called with a ‘C-u’
     prefix argument, previous highlights are kept, so several calls to
     this command can be stacked.
‘M-g n’  or  ‘M-g M-n’     (‘next-error’)
     Jump to the next sparse tree match in this buffer.
‘M-g p’  or  ‘M-g M-p’     (‘previous-error’)
     Jump to the previous sparse tree match in this buffer.

For frequently used sparse trees of specific search strings, you can use
the option ‘org-agenda-custom-commands’ to define fast keyboard access
to specific sparse trees.  These commands will then be accessible
through the agenda dispatcher (*note Agenda dispatcher::).  For example:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("f" occur-tree "FIXME")))

will define the key ‘C-c a f’ as a shortcut for creating a sparse tree
matching the string ‘FIXME’.

   The other sparse tree commands select headings based on TODO
keywords, tags, or properties and will be discussed later in this
manual.

   To print a sparse tree, you can use the Emacs command
‘ps-print-buffer-with-faces’ which does not print invisible parts of the
document (3).  Or you can use ‘C-c C-e C-v’ to export only the visible
part of the document and print the resulting file.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See also the variables ‘org-show-hierarchy-above’,
‘org-show-following-heading’, ‘org-show-siblings’, and
‘org-show-entry-below’ for detailed control on how much context is shown
around each match.

   (2) This depends on the option ‘org-remove-highlights-with-change’

   (3) This does not work under XEmacs, because XEmacs uses selective
display for outlining, not text properties.


File: org.info,  Node: Plain lists,  Next: Drawers,  Prev: Sparse trees,  Up: Document Structure

2.7 Plain lists
===============

Within an entry of the outline tree, hand-formatted lists can provide
additional structure.  They also provide a way to create lists of
checkboxes (*note Checkboxes::).  Org supports editing such lists, and
every exporter (*note Exporting::) can parse and format them.

   Org knows ordered lists, unordered lists, and description lists.
   • _Unordered_ list items start with ‘-’, ‘+’, or ‘*’(1) as bullets.
   • _Ordered_ list items start with a numeral followed by either a
     period or a right parenthesis(2), such as ‘1.’ or ‘1)’(3).  If you
     want a list to start with a different value (e.g., 20), start the
     text of the item with ‘[@20]’(4).  Those constructs can be used in
     any item of the list in order to enforce a particular numbering.
   • _Description_ list items are unordered list items, and contain the
     separator ‘ :: ’ to distinguish the description _term_ from the
     description.

   Items belonging to the same list must have the same indentation on
the first line.  In particular, if an ordered list reaches number ‘10.’,
then the 2–digit numbers must be written left-aligned with the other
numbers in the list.  An item ends before the next line that is less or
equally indented than its bullet/number.

   A list ends whenever every item has ended, which means before any
line less or equally indented than items at top level.  It also ends
before two blank lines(5).  In that case, all items are closed.  Here is
an example:

     ** Lord of the Rings
        My favorite scenes are (in this order)
        1. The attack of the Rohirrim
        2. Eowyn's fight with the witch king
           + this was already my favorite scene in the book
           + I really like Miranda Otto.
        3. Peter Jackson being shot by Legolas
           - on DVD only
           He makes a really funny face when it happens.
        But in the end, no individual scenes matter but the film as a whole.
        Important actors in this film are:
        - Elijah Wood :: He plays Frodo
        - Sean Austin :: He plays Sam, Frodo's friend.  I still remember
          him very well from his role as Mikey Walsh in The Goonies.

   Org supports these lists by tuning filling and wrapping commands to
deal with them correctly(6), and by exporting them properly (*note
Exporting::).  Since indentation is what governs the structure of these
lists, many structural constructs like ‘#+BEGIN_...’ blocks can be
indented to signal that they belong to a particular item.

   If you find that using a different bullet for a sub-list (than that
used for the current list-level) improves readability, customize the
variable ‘org-list-demote-modify-bullet’.  To get a greater difference
of indentation between items and theirs sub-items, customize
‘org-list-indent-offset’.

   The following commands act on items when the cursor is in the first
line of an item (the line with the bullet or number).  Some of them
imply the application of automatic rules to keep list structure intact.
If some of these actions get in your way, configure
‘org-list-automatic-rules’ to disable them individually.

‘<TAB>’     (‘org-cycle’)
     Items can be folded just like headline levels.  Normally this works
     only if the cursor is on a plain list item.  For more details, see
     the variable ‘org-cycle-include-plain-lists’.  If this variable is
     set to ‘integrate’, plain list items will be treated like low-level
     headlines.  The level of an item is then given by the indentation
     of the bullet/number.  Items are always subordinate to real
     headlines, however; the hierarchies remain completely separated.
     In a new item with no text yet, the first <TAB> demotes the item to
     become a child of the previous one.  Subsequent <TAB>s move the
     item to meaningful levels in the list and eventually get it back to
     its initial position.
‘M-<RET>’     (‘org-insert-heading’)
     Insert new item at current level.  With a prefix argument, force a
     new heading (*note Structure editing::).  If this command is used
     in the middle of an item, that item is _split_ in two, and the
     second part becomes the new item(7).  If this command is executed
     _before item’s body_, the new item is created _before_ the current
     one.

‘M-S-<RET>’
     Insert a new item with a checkbox (*note Checkboxes::).
‘S-up’
‘S-down’
     Jump to the previous/next item in the current list(8), but only if
     ‘org-support-shift-select’ is off.  If not, you can still use
     paragraph jumping commands like ‘C-<up>’ and ‘C-<down>’ to quite
     similar effect.
‘M-up’
‘M-down’
     Move the item including subitems up/down(9) (swap with
     previous/next item of same indentation).  If the list is ordered,
     renumbering is automatic.
‘M-left’
‘M-right’
     Decrease/increase the indentation of an item, leaving children
     alone.
‘M-S-<left>’
‘M-S-<right>’
     Decrease/increase the indentation of the item, including subitems.
     Initially, the item tree is selected based on current indentation.
     When these commands are executed several times in direct
     succession, the initially selected region is used, even if the new
     indentation would imply a different hierarchy.  To use the new
     hierarchy, break the command chain with a cursor motion or so.

     As a special case, using this command on the very first item of a
     list will move the whole list.  This behavior can be disabled by
     configuring ‘org-list-automatic-rules’.  The global indentation of
     a list has no influence on the text _after_ the list.
‘C-c C-c’
     If there is a checkbox (*note Checkboxes::) in the item line,
     toggle the state of the checkbox.  In any case, verify bullets and
     indentation consistency in the whole list.
‘C-c -’
     Cycle the entire list level through the different itemize/enumerate
     bullets (‘-’, ‘+’, ‘*’, ‘1.’, ‘1)’) or a subset of them, depending
     on ‘org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator’, the type of list, and
     its indentation.  With a numeric prefix argument N, select the Nth
     bullet from this list.  If there is an active region when calling
     this, selected text will be changed into an item.  With a prefix
     argument, all lines will be converted to list items.  If the first
     line already was a list item, any item marker will be removed from
     the list.  Finally, even without an active region, a normal line
     will be converted into a list item.
‘C-c *’
     Turn a plain list item into a headline (so that it becomes a
     subheading at its location).  *Note Structure editing::, for a
     detailed explanation.
‘C-c C-*’
     Turn the whole plain list into a subtree of the current heading.
     Checkboxes (*note Checkboxes::) will become TODO (resp.  DONE)
     keywords when unchecked (resp.  checked).
‘S-left/right’
     This command also cycles bullet styles when the cursor in on the
     bullet or anywhere in an item line, details depending on
     ‘org-support-shift-select’.
‘C-c ^’
     Sort the plain list.  You will be prompted for the sorting method:
     numerically, alphabetically, by time, by checked status for check
     lists, or by a custom function.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) When using ‘*’ as a bullet, lines must be indented or they will
be seen as top-level headlines.  Also, when you are hiding leading stars
to get a clean outline view, plain list items starting with a star may
be hard to distinguish from true headlines.  In short: even though ‘*’
is supported, it may be better to not use it for plain list items.

   (2) You can filter out any of them by configuring
‘org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator’.

   (3) You can also get ‘a.’, ‘A.’, ‘a)’ and ‘A)’ by configuring
‘org-list-allow-alphabetical’.  To minimize confusion with normal text,
those are limited to one character only.  Beyond that limit, bullets
will automatically fallback to numbers.

   (4) If there’s a checkbox in the item, the cookie must be put
_before_ the checkbox.  If you have activated alphabetical lists, you
can also use counters like ‘[@b]’.

   (5) See also ‘org-list-empty-line-terminates-plain-lists’.

   (6) Org only changes the filling settings for Emacs.  For XEmacs, you
should use Kyle E. Jones’ ‘filladapt.el’.  To turn this on, put into
‘.emacs’: ‘(require 'filladapt)’

   (7) If you do not want the item to be split, customize the variable
‘org-M-RET-may-split-line’.

   (8) If you want to cycle around items that way, you may customize
‘org-list-use-circular-motion’.

   (9) See ‘org-list-use-circular-motion’ for a cyclic behavior.


File: org.info,  Node: Drawers,  Next: Blocks,  Prev: Plain lists,  Up: Document Structure

2.8 Drawers
===========

Sometimes you want to keep information associated with an entry, but you
normally don’t want to see it.  For this, Org mode has _drawers_.
Drawers need to be configured with the option ‘org-drawers’(1).  Drawers
look like this:

     ** This is a headline
        Still outside the drawer
        :DRAWERNAME:
        This is inside the drawer.
        :END:
        After the drawer.

   You can interactively insert drawers at point by calling
‘org-insert-drawer’, which is bound to <C-c C-x d>.  With an active
region, this command will put the region inside the drawer.  With a
prefix argument, this command calls ‘org-insert-property-drawer’ and add
a property drawer right below the current headline.  Completion over
drawer keywords is also possible using <M-TAB>.

   Visibility cycling (*note Visibility cycling::) on the headline will
hide and show the entry, but keep the drawer collapsed to a single line.
In order to look inside the drawer, you need to move the cursor to the
drawer line and press <TAB> there.  Org mode uses the ‘PROPERTIES’
drawer for storing properties (*note Properties and Columns::), and you
can also arrange for state change notes (*note Tracking TODO state
changes::) and clock times (*note Clocking work time::) to be stored in
a drawer ‘LOGBOOK’.  If you want to store a quick note in the LOGBOOK
drawer, in a similar way to state changes, use

‘C-c C-z’
     Add a time-stamped note to the LOGBOOK drawer.

   You can select the name of the drawers which should be exported with
‘org-export-with-drawers’.  In that case, drawer contents will appear in
export output.  Property drawers are not affected by this variable and
are never exported.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You can define additional drawers on a per-file basis with a line
like ‘#+DRAWERS: HIDDEN STATE’


File: org.info,  Node: Blocks,  Next: Footnotes,  Prev: Drawers,  Up: Document Structure

2.9 Blocks
==========

Org mode uses begin...end blocks for various purposes from including
source code examples (*note Literal examples::) to capturing time
logging information (*note Clocking work time::).  These blocks can be
folded and unfolded by pressing TAB in the begin line.  You can also get
all blocks folded at startup by configuring the option
‘org-hide-block-startup’ or on a per-file basis by using

     #+STARTUP: hideblocks
     #+STARTUP: nohideblocks


File: org.info,  Node: Footnotes,  Next: Orgstruct mode,  Prev: Blocks,  Up: Document Structure

2.10 Footnotes
==============

Org mode supports the creation of footnotes.  In contrast to the
‘footnote.el’ package, Org mode’s footnotes are designed for work on a
larger document, not only for one-off documents like emails.

   A footnote is started by a footnote marker in square brackets in
column 0, no indentation allowed.  It ends at the next footnote
definition, headline, or after two consecutive empty lines.  The
footnote reference is simply the marker in square brackets, inside text.
For example:

     The Org homepage[fn:1] now looks a lot better than it used to.
     ...
     [fn:1] The link is: http://orgmode.org

   Org mode extends the number-based syntax to _named_ footnotes and
optional inline definition.  Using plain numbers as markers (as
‘footnote.el’ does) is supported for backward compatibility, but not
encouraged because of possible conflicts with LaTeX snippets (*note
Embedded LaTeX::).  Here are the valid references:

‘[1]’
     A plain numeric footnote marker.  Compatible with ‘footnote.el’,
     but not recommended because something like ‘[1]’ could easily be
     part of a code snippet.
‘[fn:name]’
     A named footnote reference, where ‘name’ is a unique label word,
     or, for simplicity of automatic creation, a number.
‘[fn:: This is the inline definition of this footnote]’
     A LaTeX-like anonymous footnote where the definition is given
     directly at the reference point.
‘[fn:name: a definition]’
     An inline definition of a footnote, which also specifies a name for
     the note.  Since Org allows multiple references to the same note,
     you can then use ‘[fn:name]’ to create additional references.

   Footnote labels can be created automatically, or you can create names
yourself.  This is handled by the variable ‘org-footnote-auto-label’ and
its corresponding ‘#+STARTUP’ keywords.  See the docstring of that
variable for details.

The following command handles footnotes:

‘C-c C-x f’
     The footnote action command.

     When the cursor is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition.
     When it is at a definition, jump to the (first) reference.

     Otherwise, create a new footnote.  Depending on the option
     ‘org-footnote-define-inline’(1), the definition will be placed
     right into the text as part of the reference, or separately into
     the location determined by the option ‘org-footnote-section’.

     When this command is called with a prefix argument, a menu of
     additional options is offered:
          s   Sort the footnote definitions by reference sequence.  During editing,
              Org makes no effort to sort footnote definitions into a particular
              sequence.  If you want them sorted, use this command, which will
              also move entries according to ‘org-footnote-section’.  Automatic
              sorting after each insertion/deletion can be configured using the
              option ‘org-footnote-auto-adjust’.
          r   Renumber the simple ‘fn:N’ footnotes.  Automatic renumbering
              after each insertion/deletion can be configured using the option
              ‘org-footnote-auto-adjust’.
          S   Short for first ‘r’, then ‘s’ action.
          n   Normalize the footnotes by collecting all definitions (including
              inline definitions) into a special section, and then numbering them
              in sequence.  The references will then also be numbers.  This is
              meant to be the final step before finishing a document (e.g., sending
              off an email).
          d   Delete the footnote at point, and all definitions of and references
              to it.
     Depending on the variable ‘org-footnote-auto-adjust’(2),
     renumbering and sorting footnotes can be automatic after each
     insertion or deletion.

‘C-c C-c’
     If the cursor is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition.
     If it is a the definition, jump back to the reference.  When called
     at a footnote location with a prefix argument, offer the same menu
     as ‘C-c C-x f’.
‘C-c C-o or mouse-1/2’
     Footnote labels are also links to the corresponding
     definition/reference, and you can use the usual commands to follow
     these links.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: fninline’ or
‘#+STARTUP: nofninline’

   (2) the corresponding in-buffer options are ‘fnadjust’ and
‘nofnadjust’.


File: org.info,  Node: Orgstruct mode,  Next: Org syntax,  Prev: Footnotes,  Up: Document Structure

2.11 The Orgstruct minor mode
=============================

If you like the intuitive way the Org mode structure editing and list
formatting works, you might want to use these commands in other modes
like Text mode or Mail mode as well.  The minor mode ‘orgstruct-mode’
makes this possible.  Toggle the mode with ‘M-x orgstruct-mode RET’, or
turn it on by default, for example in Message mode, with one of:

     (add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgstruct)
     (add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgstruct++)

   When this mode is active and the cursor is on a line that looks to
Org like a headline or the first line of a list item, most structure
editing commands will work, even if the same keys normally have
different functionality in the major mode you are using.  If the cursor
is not in one of those special lines, Orgstruct mode lurks silently in
the shadows.

   When you use ‘orgstruct++-mode’, Org will also export indentation and
autofill settings into that mode, and detect item context after the
first line of an item.

   You can also use Org structure editing to fold and unfold headlines
in _any_ file, provided you defined ‘orgstruct-heading-prefix-regexp’:
the regular expression must match the local prefix to use before Org’s
headlines.  For example, if you set this variable to ‘";; "’ in Emacs
Lisp files, you will be able to fold and unfold headlines in Emacs Lisp
commented lines.  Some commands like ‘org-demote’ are disabled when the
prefix is set, but folding/unfolding will work correctly.


File: org.info,  Node: Org syntax,  Prev: Orgstruct mode,  Up: Document Structure

2.12 Org syntax
===============

A reference document providing a formal description of Org’s syntax is
available as a draft on Worg
(http://orgmode.org/worg/dev/org-syntax.html), written and maintained by
Nicolas Goaziou.  It defines Org’s core internal concepts such as
‘headlines’, ‘sections’, ‘affiliated keywords’, ‘(greater) elements’ and
‘objects’.  Each part of an Org file falls into one of the categories
above.

   To explore the abstract structure of an Org buffer, run this in a
buffer:

     M-: (org-element-parse-buffer) RET

   It will output a list containing the buffer’s content represented as
an abstract structure.  The export engine relies on the information
stored in this list.  Most interactive commands (e.g., for structure
editing) also rely on the syntactic meaning of the surrounding context.


File: org.info,  Node: Tables,  Next: Hyperlinks,  Prev: Document Structure,  Up: Top

3 Tables
********

Org comes with a fast and intuitive table editor.  Spreadsheet-like
calculations are supported using the Emacs ‘calc’ package (*note Calc:
(calc)Top.).

* Menu:

* Built-in table editor::       Simple tables
* Column width and alignment::  Overrule the automatic settings
* Column groups::               Grouping to trigger vertical lines
* Orgtbl mode::                 The table editor as minor mode
* The spreadsheet::             The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities
* Org-Plot::                    Plotting from org tables


File: org.info,  Node: Built-in table editor,  Next: Column width and alignment,  Prev: Tables,  Up: Tables

3.1 The built-in table editor
=============================

Org makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII.  Any line with ‘|’ as
the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a table.  ‘|’
is also the column separator(1).  A table might look like this:

     | Name  | Phone | Age |
     |-------+-------+-----|
     | Peter |  1234 |  17 |
     | Anna  |  4321 |  25 |

   A table is re-aligned automatically each time you press <TAB> or
<RET> or ‘C-c C-c’ inside the table.  <TAB> also moves to the next field
(<RET> to the next row) and creates new table rows at the end of the
table or before horizontal lines.  The indentation of the table is set
by the first line.  Any line starting with ‘|-’ is considered as a
horizontal separator line and will be expanded on the next re-align to
span the whole table width.  So, to create the above table, you would
only type

     |Name|Phone|Age|
     |-

and then press <TAB> to align the table and start filling in fields.
Even faster would be to type ‘|Name|Phone|Age’ followed by ‘C-c <RET>’.

   When typing text into a field, Org treats <DEL>, <Backspace>, and all
character keys in a special way, so that inserting and deleting avoids
shifting other fields.  Also, when typing _immediately after the cursor
was moved into a new field with ‘<TAB>’, ‘S-<TAB>’ or ‘<RET>’_, the
field is automatically made blank.  If this behavior is too
unpredictable for you, configure the options ‘org-enable-table-editor’
and ‘org-table-auto-blank-field’.

     Creation and conversion
     .......................

‘C-c |     (org-table-create-or-convert-from-region)’
     Convert the active region to table.  If every line contains at
     least one TAB character, the function assumes that the material is
     tab separated.  If every line contains a comma, comma-separated
     values (CSV) are assumed.  If not, lines are split at whitespace
     into fields.  You can use a prefix argument to force a specific
     separator: ‘C-u’ forces CSV, ‘C-u C-u’ forces TAB, and a numeric
     argument N indicates that at least N consecutive spaces, or
     alternatively a TAB will be the separator.
     If there is no active region, this command creates an empty Org
     table.  But it is easier just to start typing, like
     ‘|Name|Phone|Age <RET> |- <TAB>’.

     Re-aligning and field motion
     ............................

‘C-c C-c     (org-table-align)’
     Re-align the table and don’t move to another field.
‘<TAB>     (org-table-next-field)’
     Re-align the table, move to the next field.  Creates a new row if
     necessary.
‘S-<TAB>     (org-table-previous-field)’
     Re-align, move to previous field.
‘<RET>     (org-table-next-row)’
     Re-align the table and move down to next row.  Creates a new row if
     necessary.  At the beginning or end of a line, <RET> still does
     NEWLINE, so it can be used to split a table.
‘M-a     (org-table-beginning-of-field)’
     Move to beginning of the current table field, or on to the previous
     field.
‘M-e     (org-table-end-of-field)’
     Move to end of the current table field, or on to the next field.

     Column and row editing
     ......................

‘M-<left>     (org-table-move-column-left)’
‘M-<right>     (org-table-move-column-right)’
     Move the current column left/right.
‘M-S-<left>     (org-table-delete-column)’
     Kill the current column.
‘M-S-<right>     (org-table-insert-column)’
     Insert a new column to the left of the cursor position.
‘M-<up>     (org-table-move-row-up)’
‘M-<down>     (org-table-move-row-down)’
     Move the current row up/down.
‘M-S-<up>     (org-table-kill-row)’
     Kill the current row or horizontal line.
‘M-S-<down>     (org-table-insert-row)’
     Insert a new row above the current row.  With a prefix argument,
     the line is created below the current one.
‘C-c -     (org-table-insert-hline)’
     Insert a horizontal line below current row.  With a prefix
     argument, the line is created above the current line.
‘C-c <RET>     (org-table-hline-and-move)’
     Insert a horizontal line below current row, and move the cursor
     into the row below that line.
‘C-c ^     (org-table-sort-lines)’
     Sort the table lines in the region.  The position of point
     indicates the column to be used for sorting, and the range of lines
     is the range between the nearest horizontal separator lines, or the
     entire table.  If point is before the first column, you will be
     prompted for the sorting column.  If there is an active region, the
     mark specifies the first line and the sorting column, while point
     should be in the last line to be included into the sorting.  The
     command prompts for the sorting type (alphabetically, numerically,
     or by time).  When called with a prefix argument, alphabetic
     sorting will be case-sensitive.

     Regions
     .......

‘C-c C-x M-w     (org-table-copy-region)’
     Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard.
     Point and mark determine edge fields of the rectangle.  If there is
     no active region, copy just the current field.  The process ignores
     horizontal separator lines.
‘C-c C-x C-w     (org-table-cut-region)’
     Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard, and
     blank all fields in the rectangle.  So this is the “cut” operation.
‘C-c C-x C-y     (org-table-paste-rectangle)’
     Paste a rectangular region into a table.  The upper left corner
     ends up in the current field.  All involved fields will be
     overwritten.  If the rectangle does not fit into the present table,
     the table is enlarged as needed.  The process ignores horizontal
     separator lines.
‘M-<RET>     (org-table-wrap-region)’
     Split the current field at the cursor position and move the rest to
     the line below.  If there is an active region, and both point and
     mark are in the same column, the text in the column is wrapped to
     minimum width for the given number of lines.  A numeric prefix
     argument may be used to change the number of desired lines.  If
     there is no region, but you specify a prefix argument, the current
     field is made blank, and the content is appended to the field
     above.

     Calculations
     ............

‘C-c +     (org-table-sum)’
     Sum the numbers in the current column, or in the rectangle defined
     by the active region.  The result is shown in the echo area and can
     be inserted with ‘C-y’.
‘S-<RET>     (org-table-copy-down)’
     When current field is empty, copy from first non-empty field above.
     When not empty, copy current field down to next row and move cursor
     along with it.  Depending on the option ‘org-table-copy-increment’,
     integer field values will be incremented during copy.  Integers
     that are too large will not be incremented.  Also, a ‘0’ prefix
     argument temporarily disables the increment.  This key is also used
     by shift-selection and related modes (*note Conflicts::).

     Miscellaneous
     .............

‘C-c `     (org-table-edit-field)’
     Edit the current field in a separate window.  This is useful for
     fields that are not fully visible (*note Column width and
     alignment::).  When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix, just make the full
     field visible, so that it can be edited in place.  When called with
     two ‘C-u’ prefixes, make the editor window follow the cursor
     through the table and always show the current field.  The follow
     mode exits automatically when the cursor leaves the table, or when
     you repeat this command with ‘C-u C-u C-c `’.
‘M-x org-table-import RET’
     Import a file as a table.  The table should be TAB or whitespace
     separated.  Use, for example, to import a spreadsheet table or data
     from a database, because these programs generally can write
     TAB-separated text files.  This command works by inserting the file
     into the buffer and then converting the region to a table.  Any
     prefix argument is passed on to the converter, which uses it to
     determine the separator.
‘C-c |     (org-table-create-or-convert-from-region)’
     Tables can also be imported by pasting tabular text into the Org
     buffer, selecting the pasted text with ‘C-x C-x’ and then using the
     ‘C-c |’ command (see above under Creation and conversion).
‘M-x org-table-export RET’
     Export the table, by default as a TAB-separated file.  Use for data
     exchange with, for example, spreadsheet or database programs.  The
     format used to export the file can be configured in the option
     ‘org-table-export-default-format’.  You may also use properties
     ‘TABLE_EXPORT_FILE’ and ‘TABLE_EXPORT_FORMAT’ to specify the file
     name and the format for table export in a subtree.  Org supports
     quite general formats for exported tables.  The exporter format is
     the same as the format used by Orgtbl radio tables, see *note
     Translator functions::, for a detailed description.

   If you don’t like the automatic table editor because it gets in your
way on lines which you would like to start with ‘|’, you can turn it off
with

     (setq org-enable-table-editor nil)

Then the only table command that still works is ‘C-c C-c’ to do a manual
re-align.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) To insert a vertical bar into a table field, use ‘\vert’ or,
inside a word ‘abc\vert{}def’.


File: org.info,  Node: Column width and alignment,  Next: Column groups,  Prev: Built-in table editor,  Up: Tables

3.2 Column width and alignment
==============================

The width of columns is automatically determined by the table editor.
And also the alignment of a column is determined automatically from the
fraction of number-like versus non-number fields in the column.

   Sometimes a single field or a few fields need to carry more text,
leading to inconveniently wide columns.  Or maybe you want to make a
table with several columns having a fixed width, regardless of content.
To set(1) the width of a column, one field anywhere in the column may
contain just the string ‘<N>’ where ‘N’ is an integer specifying the
width of the column in characters.  The next re-align will then set the
width of this column to this value.

     |---+------------------------------|               |---+--------|
     |   |                              |               |   | <6>    |
     | 1 | one                          |               | 1 | one    |
     | 2 | two                          |     ----\     | 2 | two    |
     | 3 | This is a long chunk of text |     ----/     | 3 | This=> |
     | 4 | four                         |               | 4 | four   |
     |---+------------------------------|               |---+--------|

Fields that are wider become clipped and end in the string ‘=>’.  Note
that the full text is still in the buffer but is hidden.  To see the
full text, hold the mouse over the field—a tool-tip window will show the
full content.  To edit such a field, use the command ‘C-c `’ (that is
‘C-c’ followed by the grave accent).  This will open a new window with
the full field.  Edit it and finish with ‘C-c C-c’.

   When visiting a file containing a table with narrowed columns, the
necessary character hiding has not yet happened, and the table needs to
be aligned before it looks nice.  Setting the option
‘org-startup-align-all-tables’ will realign all tables in a file upon
visiting, but also slow down startup.  You can also set this option on a
per-file basis with:

     #+STARTUP: align
     #+STARTUP: noalign

   If you would like to overrule the automatic alignment of number-rich
columns to the right and of string-rich column to the left, you can use
‘<r>’, ‘<c>’(2) or ‘<l>’ in a similar fashion.  You may also combine
alignment and field width like this: ‘<r10>’.

   Lines which only contain these formatting cookies will be removed
automatically when exporting the document.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This feature does not work on XEmacs.

   (2) Centering does not work inside Emacs, but it does have an effect
when exporting to HTML.


File: org.info,  Node: Column groups,  Next: Orgtbl mode,  Prev: Column width and alignment,  Up: Tables

3.3 Column groups
=================

When Org exports tables, it does so by default without vertical lines
because that is visually more satisfying in general.  Occasionally
however, vertical lines can be useful to structure a table into groups
of columns, much like horizontal lines can do for groups of rows.  In
order to specify column groups, you can use a special row where the
first field contains only ‘/’.  The further fields can either contain
‘<’ to indicate that this column should start a group, ‘>’ to indicate
the end of a column, or ‘<>’ (no space between ‘<’ and ‘>’) to make a
column a group of its own.  Boundaries between column groups will upon
export be marked with vertical lines.  Here is an example:

     | N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) |
     |---+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
     | / |   < |     |   > |       < |          > |
     | 1 |   1 |   1 |   1 |       1 |          1 |
     | 2 |   4 |   8 |  16 |  1.4142 |     1.1892 |
     | 3 |   9 |  27 |  81 |  1.7321 |     1.3161 |
     |---+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1^2::$3=$1^3::$4=$1^4::$5=sqrt($1)::$6=sqrt(sqrt(($1)))

   It is also sufficient to just insert the column group starters after
every vertical line you would like to have:

     |  N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) |
     |----+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
     | /  | <   |     |     | <       |            |


File: org.info,  Node: Orgtbl mode,  Next: The spreadsheet,  Prev: Column groups,  Up: Tables

3.4 The Orgtbl minor mode
=========================

If you like the intuitive way the Org table editor works, you might also
want to use it in other modes like Text mode or Mail mode.  The minor
mode Orgtbl mode makes this possible.  You can always toggle the mode
with ‘M-x orgtbl-mode RET’.  To turn it on by default, for example in
Message mode, use

     (add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgtbl)

   Furthermore, with some special setup, it is possible to maintain
tables in arbitrary syntax with Orgtbl mode.  For example, it is
possible to construct LaTeX tables with the underlying ease and power of
Orgtbl mode, including spreadsheet capabilities.  For details, see *note
Tables in arbitrary syntax::.


File: org.info,  Node: The spreadsheet,  Next: Org-Plot,  Prev: Orgtbl mode,  Up: Tables

3.5 The spreadsheet
===================

The table editor makes use of the Emacs ‘calc’ package to implement
spreadsheet-like capabilities.  It can also evaluate Emacs Lisp forms to
derive fields from other fields.  While fully featured, Org’s
implementation is not identical to other spreadsheets.  For example, Org
knows the concept of a _column formula_ that will be applied to all
non-header fields in a column without having to copy the formula to each
relevant field.  There is also a formula debugger, and a formula editor
with features for highlighting fields in the table corresponding to the
references at the point in the formula, moving these references by arrow
keys

* Menu:

* References::                  How to refer to another field or range
* Formula syntax for Calc::     Using Calc to compute stuff
* Formula syntax for Lisp::     Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp
* Durations and time values::   How to compute durations and time values
* Field and range formulas::    Formula for specific (ranges of) fields
* Column formulas::             Formulas valid for an entire column
* Lookup functions::            Lookup functions for searching tables
* Editing and debugging formulas::  Fixing formulas
* Updating the table::          Recomputing all dependent fields
* Advanced features::           Field and column names, parameters and automatic recalc


File: org.info,  Node: References,  Next: Formula syntax for Calc,  Prev: The spreadsheet,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.1 References
----------------

To compute fields in the table from other fields, formulas must
reference other fields or ranges.  In Org, fields can be referenced by
name, by absolute coordinates, and by relative coordinates.  To find out
what the coordinates of a field are, press ‘C-c ?’ in that field, or
press ‘C-c }’ to toggle the display of a grid.

Field references
................

Formulas can reference the value of another field in two ways.  Like in
any other spreadsheet, you may reference fields with a letter/number
combination like ‘B3’, meaning the 2nd field in the 3rd row.  However,
Org prefers(1) to use another, more general representation that looks
like this:
     @ROW$COLUMN

   Column specifications can be absolute like ‘$1’, ‘$2’,...‘$N’, or
relative to the current column (i.e., the column of the field which is
being computed) like ‘$+1’ or ‘$-2’.  ‘$<’ and ‘$>’ are immutable
references to the first and last column, respectively, and you can use
‘$>>>’ to indicate the third column from the right.

   The row specification only counts data lines and ignores horizontal
separator lines (hlines).  Like with columns, you can use absolute row
numbers ‘@1’, ‘@2’,...‘@N’, and row numbers relative to the current row
like ‘@+3’ or ‘@-1’.  ‘@<’ and ‘@>’ are immutable references the first
and last(2) row in the table, respectively.  You may also specify the
row relative to one of the hlines: ‘@I’ refers to the first hline, ‘@II’
to the second, etc.  ‘@-I’ refers to the first such line above the
current line, ‘@+I’ to the first such line below the current line.  You
can also write ‘@III+2’ which is the second data line after the third
hline in the table.

   ‘@0’ and ‘$0’ refer to the current row and column, respectively,
i.e., to the row/column for the field being computed.  Also, if you omit
either the column or the row part of the reference, the current
row/column is implied.

   Org’s references with _unsigned_ numbers are fixed references in the
sense that if you use the same reference in the formula for two
different fields, the same field will be referenced each time.  Org’s
references with _signed_ numbers are floating references because the
same reference operator can reference different fields depending on the
field being calculated by the formula.

   Here are a few examples:

     @2$3      2nd row, 3rd column (same as ‘C2’)
     $5        column 5 in the current row (same as ‘E&’)
     @2        current column, row 2
     @-1$-3    the field one row up, three columns to the left
     @-I$2     field just under hline above current row, column 2
     @>$5      field in the last row, in column 5

Range references
................

You may reference a rectangular range of fields by specifying two field
references connected by two dots ‘..’.  If both fields are in the
current row, you may simply use ‘$2..$7’, but if at least one field is
in a different row, you need to use the general ‘@row$column’ format at
least for the first field (i.e the reference must start with ‘@’ in
order to be interpreted correctly).  Examples:

     $1..$3        first three fields in the current row
     $P..$Q        range, using column names (see under Advanced)
     $<<<..$>>     start in third column, continue to the one but last
     @2$1..@4$3    6 fields between these two fields (same as ‘A2..C4’)
     @-1$-2..@-1   3 fields in the row above, starting from 2 columns on the left
     @I..II        between first and second hline, short for ‘@I..@II’

Range references return a vector of values that can be fed into Calc
vector functions.  Empty fields in ranges are normally suppressed, so
that the vector contains only the non-empty fields.  For other options
with the mode switches ‘E’, ‘N’ and examples *note Formula syntax for
Calc::.

Field coordinates in formulas
.............................

For Calc formulas and Lisp formulas ‘@#’ and ‘$#’ can be used to get the
row or column number of the field where the formula result goes.  The
traditional Lisp formula equivalents are ‘org-table-current-dline’ and
‘org-table-current-column’.  Examples:

     if(@# % 2, $#, string(""))   column number on odd lines only
     $3 = remote(FOO, @@#$2)      copy column 2 from table FOO into
                                  column 3 of the current table

For the second example, table FOO must have at least as many rows as the
current table.  Note that this is inefficient(3) for large number of
rows.

Named references
................

‘$name’ is interpreted as the name of a column, parameter or constant.
Constants are defined globally through the option
‘org-table-formula-constants’, and locally (for the file) through a line
like

     #+CONSTANTS: c=299792458. pi=3.14 eps=2.4e-6

Also properties (*note Properties and Columns::) can be used as
constants in table formulas: for a property ‘:Xyz:’ use the name
‘$PROP_Xyz’, and the property will be searched in the current outline
entry and in the hierarchy above it.  If you have the ‘constants.el’
package, it will also be used to resolve constants, including natural
constants like ‘$h’ for Planck’s constant, and units like ‘$km’ for
kilometers(4).  Column names and parameters can be specified in special
table lines.  These are described below, see *note Advanced features::.
All names must start with a letter, and further consist of letters and
numbers.

Remote references
.................

You may also reference constants, fields and ranges from a different
table, either in the current file or even in a different file.  The
syntax is

     remote(NAME-OR-ID,REF)

where NAME can be the name of a table in the current file as set by a
‘#+NAME: Name’ line before the table.  It can also be the ID of an
entry, even in a different file, and the reference then refers to the
first table in that entry.  REF is an absolute field or range reference
as described above for example ‘@3$3’ or ‘$somename’, valid in the
referenced table.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Org will understand references typed by the user as ‘B4’, but it
will not use this syntax when offering a formula for editing.  You can
customize this behavior using the option
‘org-table-use-standard-references’.

   (2) For backward compatibility you can also use special names like
‘$LR5’ and ‘$LR12’ to refer in a stable way to the 5th and 12th field in
the last row of the table.  However, this syntax is deprecated, it
should not be used for new documents.  Use ‘@>$’ instead.

   (3) The computation time scales as O(N^2) because table FOO is parsed
for each field to be copied.

   (4) ‘constants.el’ can supply the values of constants in two
different unit systems, ‘SI’ and ‘cgs’.  Which one is used depends on
the value of the variable ‘constants-unit-system’.  You can use the
‘#+STARTUP’ options ‘constSI’ and ‘constcgs’ to set this value for the
current buffer.


File: org.info,  Node: Formula syntax for Calc,  Next: Formula syntax for Lisp,  Prev: References,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.2 Formula syntax for Calc
-----------------------------

A formula can be any algebraic expression understood by the Emacs ‘Calc’
package.  Note that ‘calc’ has the non-standard convention that ‘/’ has
lower precedence than ‘*’, so that ‘a/b*c’ is interpreted as ‘a/(b*c)’.
Before evaluation by ‘calc-eval’ (*note calc-eval: (calc)Calling Calc
from Your Programs.), variable substitution takes place according to the
rules described above.  The range vectors can be directly fed into the
Calc vector functions like ‘vmean’ and ‘vsum’.

   A formula can contain an optional mode string after a semicolon.
This string consists of flags to influence Calc and other modes during
execution.  By default, Org uses the standard Calc modes (precision 12,
angular units degrees, fraction and symbolic modes off).  The display
format, however, has been changed to ‘(float 8)’ to keep tables compact.
The default settings can be configured using the option
‘org-calc-default-modes’.

List of modes:

‘p20’
     Set the internal Calc calculation precision to 20 digits.
‘n3’, ‘s3’, ‘e2’, ‘f4’
     Normal, scientific, engineering or fixed format of the result of
     Calc passed back to Org.  Calc formatting is unlimited in precision
     as long as the Calc calculation precision is greater.
‘D’, ‘R’
     Degree and radian angle modes of Calc.
‘F’, ‘S’
     Fraction and symbolic modes of Calc.
‘T’, ‘t’
     Duration computations in Calc or Lisp, *note Durations and time
     values::.
‘E’
     If and how to consider empty fields.  Without ‘E’ empty fields in
     range references are suppressed so that the Calc vector or Lisp
     list contains only the non-empty fields.  With ‘E’ the empty fields
     are kept.  For empty fields in ranges or empty field references the
     value ‘nan’ (not a number) is used in Calc formulas and the empty
     string is used for Lisp formulas.  Add ‘N’ to use 0 instead for
     both formula types.  For the value of a field the mode ‘N’ has
     higher precedence than ‘E’.
‘N’
     Interpret all fields as numbers, use 0 for non-numbers.  See the
     next section to see how this is essential for computations with
     Lisp formulas.  In Calc formulas it is used only occasionally
     because there number strings are already interpreted as numbers
     without ‘N’.
‘L’
     Literal, for Lisp formulas only.  See the next section.

Unless you use large integer numbers or high-precision-calculation and
-display for floating point numbers you may alternatively provide a
‘printf’ format specifier to reformat the Calc result after it has been
passed back to Org instead of letting Calc already do the formatting(1).
A few examples:

     $1+$2                Sum of first and second field
     $1+$2;%.2f           Same, format result to two decimals
     exp($2)+exp($1)      Math functions can be used
     $0;%.1f              Reformat current cell to 1 decimal
     ($3-32)*5/9          Degrees F -> C conversion
     $c/$1/$cm            Hz -> cm conversion, using ‘constants.el’
     tan($1);Dp3s1        Compute in degrees, precision 3, display SCI 1
     sin($1);Dp3%.1e      Same, but use printf specifier for display
     taylor($3,x=7,2)     Taylor series of $3, at x=7, second degree

   Calc also contains a complete set of logical operations, (*note
Logical Operations: (calc)Logical Operations.).  For example

‘if($1 < 20, teen, string(""))’
     "teen" if age $1 is less than 20, else the Org table result field
     is set to empty with the empty string.
‘if("$1" == "nan" || "$2" == "nan", string(""), $1 + $2); E f-1’
     Sum of the first two columns.  When at least one of the input
     fields is empty the Org table result field is set to empty.  ‘E’ is
     required to not convert empty fields to 0.  ‘f-1’ is an optional
     Calc format string similar to ‘%.1f’ but leaves empty results
     empty.
‘if(typeof(vmean($1..$7)) == 12, string(""), vmean($1..$7); E’
     Mean value of a range unless there is any empty field.  Every field
     in the range that is empty is replaced by ‘nan’ which lets ‘vmean’
     result in ‘nan’.  Then ‘typeof == 12’ detects the ‘nan’ from
     ‘vmean’ and the Org table result field is set to empty.  Use this
     when the sample set is expected to never have missing values.
‘if("$1..$7" == "[]", string(""), vmean($1..$7))’
     Mean value of a range with empty fields skipped.  Every field in
     the range that is empty is skipped.  When all fields in the range
     are empty the mean value is not defined and the Org table result
     field is set to empty.  Use this when the sample set can have a
     variable size.
‘vmean($1..$7); EN’
     To complete the example before: Mean value of a range with empty
     fields counting as samples with value 0.  Use this only when
     incomplete sample sets should be padded with 0 to the full size.

   You can add your own Calc functions defined in Emacs Lisp with
‘defmath’ and use them in formula syntax for Calc.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The ‘printf’ reformatting is limited in precision because the
value passed to it is converted into an ‘integer’ or ‘double’.  The
‘integer’ is limited in size by truncating the signed value to 32 bits.
The ‘double’ is limited in precision to 64 bits overall which leaves
approximately 16 significant decimal digits.


File: org.info,  Node: Formula syntax for Lisp,  Next: Durations and time values,  Prev: Formula syntax for Calc,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.3 Emacs Lisp forms as formulas
----------------------------------

It is also possible to write a formula in Emacs Lisp.  This can be
useful for string manipulation and control structures, if Calc’s
functionality is not enough.

   If a formula starts with an apostrophe followed by an opening
parenthesis, then it is evaluated as a Lisp form.  The evaluation should
return either a string or a number.  Just as with ‘calc’ formulas, you
can specify modes and a printf format after a semicolon.

   With Emacs Lisp forms, you need to be conscious about the way field
references are interpolated into the form.  By default, a reference will
be interpolated as a Lisp string (in double-quotes) containing the
field.  If you provide the ‘N’ mode switch, all referenced elements will
be numbers (non-number fields will be zero) and interpolated as Lisp
numbers, without quotes.  If you provide the ‘L’ flag, all fields will
be interpolated literally, without quotes.  I.e., if you want a
reference to be interpreted as a string by the Lisp form, enclose the
reference operator itself in double-quotes, like ‘"$3"’.  Ranges are
inserted as space-separated fields, so you can embed them in list or
vector syntax.

   Here are a few examples—note how the ‘N’ mode is used when we do
computations in Lisp:

‘'(concat (substring $1 1 2) (substring $1 0 1) (substring $1 2))’
     Swap the first two characters of the content of column 1.
‘'(+ $1 $2);N’
     Add columns 1 and 2, equivalent to Calc’s ‘$1+$2’.
‘'(apply '+ '($1..$4));N’
     Compute the sum of columns 1 to 4, like Calc’s ‘vsum($1..$4)’.


File: org.info,  Node: Durations and time values,  Next: Field and range formulas,  Prev: Formula syntax for Lisp,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.4 Durations and time values
-------------------------------

If you want to compute time values use the ‘T’ flag, either in Calc
formulas or Elisp formulas:

       |  Task 1 |   Task 2 |    Total |
       |---------+----------+----------|
       |    2:12 |     1:47 | 03:59:00 |
       | 3:02:20 | -2:07:00 |     0.92 |
       #+TBLFM: @2$3=$1+$2;T::@3$3=$1+$2;t

   Input duration values must be of the form ‘[HH:MM[:SS]’, where
seconds are optional.  With the ‘T’ flag, computed durations will be
displayed as ‘HH:MM:SS’ (see the first formula above).  With the ‘t’
flag, computed durations will be displayed according to the value of the
option ‘org-table-duration-custom-format’, which defaults to ‘'hours’
and will display the result as a fraction of hours (see the second
formula in the example above).

   Negative duration values can be manipulated as well, and integers
will be considered as seconds in addition and subtraction.


File: org.info,  Node: Field and range formulas,  Next: Column formulas,  Prev: Durations and time values,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.5 Field and range formulas
------------------------------

To assign a formula to a particular field, type it directly into the
field, preceded by ‘:=’, for example ‘:=vsum(@II..III)’.  When you press
<TAB> or <RET> or ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor still in the field, the
formula will be stored as the formula for this field, evaluated, and the
current field will be replaced with the result.

   Formulas are stored in a special line starting with ‘#+TBLFM:’
directly below the table.  If you type the equation in the 4th field of
the 3rd data line in the table, the formula will look like ‘@3$4=$1+$2’.
When inserting/deleting/swapping column and rows with the appropriate
commands, absolute references (but not relative ones) in stored formulas
are modified in order to still reference the same field.  To avoid this
from happening, in particular in range references, anchor ranges at the
table borders (using ‘@<’, ‘@>’, ‘$<’, ‘$>’), or at hlines using the
‘@I’ notation.  Automatic adaptation of field references does of course
not happen if you edit the table structure with normal editing
commands—then you must fix the equations yourself.

   Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the
following command

‘C-u C-c =     (org-table-eval-formula)’
     Install a new formula for the current field.  The command prompts
     for a formula with default taken from the ‘#+TBLFM:’ line, applies
     it to the current field, and stores it.

   The left-hand side of a formula can also be a special expression in
order to assign the formula to a number of different fields.  There is
no keyboard shortcut to enter such range formulas.  To add them, use the
formula editor (*note Editing and debugging formulas::) or edit the
‘#+TBLFM:’ line directly.

‘$2=’
     Column formula, valid for the entire column.  This is so common
     that Org treats these formulas in a special way, see *note Column
     formulas::.
‘@3=’
     Row formula, applies to all fields in the specified row.  ‘@>=’
     means the last row.
‘@1$2..@4$3=’
     Range formula, applies to all fields in the given rectangular
     range.  This can also be used to assign a formula to some but not
     all fields in a row.
‘$name=’
     Named field, see *note Advanced features::.


File: org.info,  Node: Column formulas,  Next: Lookup functions,  Prev: Field and range formulas,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.6 Column formulas
---------------------

When you assign a formula to a simple column reference like ‘$3=’, the
same formula will be used in all fields of that column, with the
following very convenient exceptions: (i) If the table contains
horizontal separator hlines with rows above and below, everything before
the first such hline is considered part of the table _header_ and will
not be modified by column formulas.  Therefore a header is mandatory
when you use column formulas and want to add hlines to group rows, like
for example to separate a total row at the bottom from the summand rows
above.  (ii) Fields that already get a value from a field/range formula
will be left alone by column formulas.  These conditions make column
formulas very easy to use.

   To assign a formula to a column, type it directly into any field in
the column, preceded by an equal sign, like ‘=$1+$2’.  When you press
<TAB> or <RET> or ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor still in the field, the
formula will be stored as the formula for the current column, evaluated
and the current field replaced with the result.  If the field contains
only ‘=’, the previously stored formula for this column is used.  For
each column, Org will only remember the most recently used formula.  In
the ‘#+TBLFM:’ line, column formulas will look like ‘$4=$1+$2’.  The
left-hand side of a column formula can not be the name of column, it
must be the numeric column reference or ‘$>’.

   Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the
following command:

‘C-c =     (org-table-eval-formula)’
     Install a new formula for the current column and replace current
     field with the result of the formula.  The command prompts for a
     formula, with default taken from the ‘#+TBLFM’ line, applies it to
     the current field and stores it.  With a numeric prefix
     argument(e.g., ‘C-5 C-c =’) the command will apply it to that many
     consecutive fields in the current column.


File: org.info,  Node: Lookup functions,  Next: Editing and debugging formulas,  Prev: Column formulas,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.7 Lookup functions
----------------------

Org has three predefined Emacs Lisp functions for lookups in tables.
‘(org-lookup-first VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)’
     Searches for the first element ‘S’ in list ‘S-LIST’ for which
          (PREDICATE VAL S)
     is ‘t’; returns the value from the corresponding position in list
     ‘R-LIST’.  The default ‘PREDICATE’ is ‘equal’.  Note that the
     parameters ‘VAL’ and ‘S’ are passed to ‘PREDICATE’ in the same
     order as the corresponding parameters are in the call to
     ‘org-lookup-first’, where ‘VAL’ precedes ‘S-LIST’.  If ‘R-LIST’ is
     ‘nil’, the matching element ‘S’ of ‘S-LIST’ is returned.
‘(org-lookup-last VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)’
     Similar to ‘org-lookup-first’ above, but searches for the last
     element for which ‘PREDICATE’ is ‘t’.
‘(org-lookup-all VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)’
     Similar to ‘org-lookup-first’, but searches for all elements for
     which ‘PREDICATE’ is ‘t’, and returns all corresponding values.
     This function can not be used by itself in a formula, because it
     returns a list of values.  However, powerful lookups can be built
     when this function is combined with other Emacs Lisp functions.

   If the ranges used in these functions contain empty fields, the ‘E’
mode for the formula should usually be specified: otherwise empty fields
will not be included in ‘S-LIST’ and/or ‘R-LIST’ which can, for example,
result in an incorrect mapping from an element of ‘S-LIST’ to the
corresponding element of ‘R-LIST’.

   These three functions can be used to implement associative arrays,
count matching cells, rank results, group data etc.  For practical
examples see this tutorial on Worg
(http://orgmode.org/worg/org-tutorials/org-lookups.html).


File: org.info,  Node: Editing and debugging formulas,  Next: Updating the table,  Prev: Lookup functions,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.8 Editing and debugging formulas
------------------------------------

You can edit individual formulas in the minibuffer or directly in the
field.  Org can also prepare a special buffer with all active formulas
of a table.  When offering a formula for editing, Org converts
references to the standard format (like ‘B3’ or ‘D&’) if possible.  If
you prefer to only work with the internal format (like ‘@3$2’ or ‘$4’),
configure the option ‘org-table-use-standard-references’.

‘C-c =  or  C-u C-c =     (org-table-eval-formula)’
     Edit the formula associated with the current column/field in the
     minibuffer.  See *note Column formulas::, and *note Field and range
     formulas::.
‘C-u C-u C-c =     (org-table-eval-formula)’
     Re-insert the active formula (either a field formula, or a column
     formula) into the current field, so that you can edit it directly
     in the field.  The advantage over editing in the minibuffer is that
     you can use the command ‘C-c ?’.
‘C-c ?     (org-table-field-info)’
     While editing a formula in a table field, highlight the field(s)
     referenced by the reference at the cursor position in the formula.
‘C-c }’
     Toggle the display of row and column numbers for a table, using
     overlays (‘org-table-toggle-coordinate-overlays’).  These are
     updated each time the table is aligned; you can force it with ‘C-c
     C-c’.
‘C-c {’
     Toggle the formula debugger on and off
     (‘org-table-toggle-formula-debugger’).  See below.
‘C-c '     (org-table-edit-formulas)’
     Edit all formulas for the current table in a special buffer, where
     the formulas will be displayed one per line.  If the current field
     has an active formula, the cursor in the formula editor will mark
     it.  While inside the special buffer, Org will automatically
     highlight any field or range reference at the cursor position.  You
     may edit, remove and add formulas, and use the following commands:

     ‘C-c C-c  or  C-x C-s     (org-table-fedit-finish)’
          Exit the formula editor and store the modified formulas.  With
          ‘C-u’ prefix, also apply the new formulas to the entire table.
     ‘C-c C-q     (org-table-fedit-abort)’
          Exit the formula editor without installing changes.
     ‘C-c C-r     (org-table-fedit-toggle-ref-type)’
          Toggle all references in the formula editor between standard
          (like ‘B3’) and internal (like ‘@3$2’).
     ‘<TAB>     (org-table-fedit-lisp-indent)’
          Pretty-print or indent Lisp formula at point.  When in a line
          containing a Lisp formula, format the formula according to
          Emacs Lisp rules.  Another <TAB> collapses the formula back
          again.  In the open formula, <TAB> re-indents just like in
          Emacs Lisp mode.
     ‘M-<TAB>     (lisp-complete-symbol)’
          Complete Lisp symbols, just like in Emacs Lisp mode.
     ‘S-<up>/<down>/<left>/<right>’
          Shift the reference at point.  For example, if the reference
          is ‘B3’ and you press ‘S-<right>’, it will become ‘C3’.  This
          also works for relative references and for hline references.
     ‘M-S-<up>     (org-table-fedit-line-up)’
     ‘M-S-<down>     (org-table-fedit-line-down)’
          Move the test line for column formulas in the Org buffer up
          and down.
     ‘M-<up>     (org-table-fedit-scroll-down)’
     ‘M-<down>     (org-table-fedit-scroll-up)’
          Scroll the window displaying the table.
     ‘C-c }’
          Turn the coordinate grid in the table on and off.

   Making a table field blank does not remove the formula associated
with the field, because that is stored in a different line (the
‘#+TBLFM’ line)—during the next recalculation the field will be filled
again.  To remove a formula from a field, you have to give an empty
reply when prompted for the formula, or to edit the ‘#+TBLFM’ line.

   You may edit the ‘#+TBLFM’ directly and re-apply the changed
equations with ‘C-c C-c’ in that line or with the normal recalculation
commands in the table.

Using multiple #+TBLFM lines
............................

You may apply the formula temporarily.  This is useful when you switch
the formula.  Place multiple ‘#+TBLFM’ lines right after the table, and
then press ‘C-c C-c’ on the formula to apply.  Here is an example:

     | x | y |
     |---+---|
     | 1 |   |
     | 2 |   |
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2

Pressing ‘C-c C-c’ in the line of ‘#+TBLFM: $2=$1*2’ yields:

     | x | y |
     |---+---|
     | 1 | 2 |
     | 2 | 4 |
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2

Note: If you recalculate this table (with ‘C-u C-c *’, for example), you
will get the following result of applying only the first ‘#+TBLFM’ line.

     | x | y |
     |---+---|
     | 1 | 1 |
     | 2 | 2 |
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1
     #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2

Debugging formulas
..................

When the evaluation of a formula leads to an error, the field content
becomes the string ‘#ERROR’.  If you would like see what is going on
during variable substitution and calculation in order to find a bug,
turn on formula debugging in the ‘Tbl’ menu and repeat the calculation,
for example by pressing ‘C-u C-u C-c = <RET>’ in a field.  Detailed
information will be displayed.


File: org.info,  Node: Updating the table,  Next: Advanced features,  Prev: Editing and debugging formulas,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.9 Updating the table
------------------------

Recalculation of a table is normally not automatic, but needs to be
triggered by a command.  See *note Advanced features::, for a way to
make recalculation at least semi-automatic.

   In order to recalculate a line of a table or the entire table, use
the following commands:

‘C-c *     (org-table-recalculate)’
     Recalculate the current row by first applying the stored column
     formulas from left to right, and all field/range formulas in the
     current row.
‘C-u C-c *’
‘C-u C-c C-c’
     Recompute the entire table, line by line.  Any lines before the
     first hline are left alone, assuming that these are part of the
     table header.
‘C-u C-u C-c *  or  C-u C-u C-c C-c     (org-table-iterate)’
     Iterate the table by recomputing it until no further changes occur.
     This may be necessary if some computed fields use the value of
     other fields that are computed later in the calculation sequence.
‘M-x org-table-recalculate-buffer-tables RET’
     Recompute all tables in the current buffer.
‘M-x org-table-iterate-buffer-tables RET’
     Iterate all tables in the current buffer, in order to converge
     table-to-table dependencies.


File: org.info,  Node: Advanced features,  Prev: Updating the table,  Up: The spreadsheet

3.5.10 Advanced features
------------------------

If you want the recalculation of fields to happen automatically, or if
you want to be able to assign names(1) to fields and columns, you need
to reserve the first column of the table for special marking characters.

‘C-#     (org-table-rotate-recalc-marks)’
     Rotate the calculation mark in first column through the states ‘ ’,
     ‘#’, ‘*’, ‘!’, ‘$’.  When there is an active region, change all
     marks in the region.

   Here is an example of a table that collects exam results of students
and makes use of these features:

     |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
     |   | Student | Prob 1 | Prob 2 | Prob 3 | Total | Note |
     |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
     | ! |         |     P1 |     P2 |     P3 |   Tot |      |
     | # | Maximum |     10 |     15 |     25 |    50 | 10.0 |
     | ^ |         |     m1 |     m2 |     m3 |    mt |      |
     |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
     | # | Peter   |     10 |      8 |     23 |    41 |  8.2 |
     | # | Sam     |      2 |      4 |      3 |     9 |  1.8 |
     |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
     |   | Average |        |        |        |  25.0 |      |
     | ^ |         |        |        |        |    at |      |
     | $ | max=50  |        |        |        |       |      |
     |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
     #+TBLFM: $6=vsum($P1..$P3)::$7=10*$Tot/$max;%.1f::$at=vmean(@-II..@-I);%.1f

Important: please note that for these special tables, recalculating the
table with ‘C-u C-c *’ will only affect rows that are marked ‘#’ or ‘*’,
and fields that have a formula assigned to the field itself.  The column
formulas are not applied in rows with empty first field.

   The marking characters have the following meaning:

‘!’
     The fields in this line define names for the columns, so that you
     may refer to a column as ‘$Tot’ instead of ‘$6’.
‘^’
     This row defines names for the fields _above_ the row.  With such a
     definition, any formula in the table may use ‘$m1’ to refer to the
     value ‘10’.  Also, if you assign a formula to a names field, it
     will be stored as ‘$name=...’.
‘_’
     Similar to ‘^’, but defines names for the fields in the row
     _below_.
‘$’
     Fields in this row can define _parameters_ for formulas.  For
     example, if a field in a ‘$’ row contains ‘max=50’, then formulas
     in this table can refer to the value 50 using ‘$max’.  Parameters
     work exactly like constants, only that they can be defined on a
     per-table basis.
‘#’
     Fields in this row are automatically recalculated when pressing
     <TAB> or <RET> or ‘S-<TAB>’ in this row.  Also, this row is
     selected for a global recalculation with ‘C-u C-c *’.  Unmarked
     lines will be left alone by this command.
‘*’
     Selects this line for global recalculation with ‘C-u C-c *’, but
     not for automatic recalculation.  Use this when automatic
     recalculation slows down editing too much.
‘ ’
     Unmarked lines are exempt from recalculation with ‘C-u C-c *’.  All
     lines that should be recalculated should be marked with ‘#’ or ‘*’.
‘/’
     Do not export this line.  Useful for lines that contain the
     narrowing ‘<N>’ markers or column group markers.

   Finally, just to whet your appetite for what can be done with the
fantastic ‘calc.el’ package, here is a table that computes the Taylor
series of degree ‘n’ at location ‘x’ for a couple of functions.

     |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
     |   | Func        | n | x   | Result                               |
     |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
     | # | exp(x)      | 1 | x   | 1 + x                                |
     | # | exp(x)      | 2 | x   | 1 + x + x^2 / 2                      |
     | # | exp(x)      | 3 | x   | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6            |
     | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=0 | x*(0.5 / 0) + x^2 (2 - 0.25 / 0) / 2 |
     | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=1 | 2 + 2.5 x - 2.5 + 0.875 (x - 1)^2    |
     | * | tan(x)      | 3 | x   | 0.0175 x + 1.77e-6 x^3               |
     |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
     #+TBLFM: $5=taylor($2,$4,$3);n3

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Such names must start by an alphabetic character and use only
alphanumeric/underscore characters.


File: org.info,  Node: Org-Plot,  Prev: The spreadsheet,  Up: Tables

3.6 Org-Plot
============

Org-Plot can produce 2D and 3D graphs of information stored in org
tables using ‘Gnuplot’ <http://www.gnuplot.info/> and ‘gnuplot-mode’
<http://xafs.org/BruceRavel/GnuplotMode>.  To see this in action, ensure
that you have both Gnuplot and Gnuplot mode installed on your system,
then call ‘org-plot/gnuplot’ on the following table.

     #+PLOT: title:"Citas" ind:1 deps:(3) type:2d with:histograms set:"yrange [0:]"
     | Sede      | Max cites | H-index |
     |-----------+-----------+---------|
     | Chile     |    257.72 |   21.39 |
     | Leeds     |    165.77 |   19.68 |
     | Sao Paolo |     71.00 |   11.50 |
     | Stockholm |    134.19 |   14.33 |
     | Morelia   |    257.56 |   17.67 |

   Notice that Org Plot is smart enough to apply the table’s headers as
labels.  Further control over the labels, type, content, and appearance
of plots can be exercised through the ‘#+PLOT:’ lines preceding a table.
See below for a complete list of Org-plot options.  For more information
and examples see the Org-plot tutorial at
<http://orgmode.org/worg/org-tutorials/org-plot.html>.

Plot Options
............

‘set’
     Specify any ‘gnuplot’ option to be set when graphing.

‘title’
     Specify the title of the plot.

‘ind’
     Specify which column of the table to use as the ‘x’ axis.

‘deps’
     Specify the columns to graph as a Lisp style list, surrounded by
     parentheses and separated by spaces for example ‘dep:(3 4)’ to
     graph the third and fourth columns (defaults to graphing all other
     columns aside from the ‘ind’ column).

‘type’
     Specify whether the plot will be ‘2d’, ‘3d’, or ‘grid’.

‘with’
     Specify a ‘with’ option to be inserted for every col being plotted
     (e.g., ‘lines’, ‘points’, ‘boxes’, ‘impulses’, etc...).  Defaults
     to ‘lines’.

‘file’
     If you want to plot to a file, specify
     ‘"PATH/TO/DESIRED/OUTPUT-FILE"’.

‘labels’
     List of labels to be used for the ‘deps’ (defaults to the column
     headers if they exist).

‘line’
     Specify an entire line to be inserted in the Gnuplot script.

‘map’
     When plotting ‘3d’ or ‘grid’ types, set this to ‘t’ to graph a flat
     mapping rather than a ‘3d’ slope.

‘timefmt’
     Specify format of Org mode timestamps as they will be parsed by
     Gnuplot.  Defaults to ‘%Y-%m-%d-%H:%M:%S’.

‘script’
     If you want total control, you can specify a script file (place the
     file name between double-quotes) which will be used to plot.
     Before plotting, every instance of ‘$datafile’ in the specified
     script will be replaced with the path to the generated data file.
     Note: even if you set this option, you may still want to specify
     the plot type, as that can impact the content of the data file.


File: org.info,  Node: Hyperlinks,  Next: TODO Items,  Prev: Tables,  Up: Top

4 Hyperlinks
************

Like HTML, Org provides links inside a file, external links to other
files, Usenet articles, emails, and much more.

* Menu:

* Link format::                 How links in Org are formatted
* Internal links::              Links to other places in the current file
* External links::              URL-like links to the world
* Handling links::              Creating, inserting and following
* Using links outside Org::     Linking from my C source code?
* Link abbreviations::          Shortcuts for writing complex links
* Search options::              Linking to a specific location
* Custom searches::             When the default search is not enough


File: org.info,  Node: Link format,  Next: Internal links,  Prev: Hyperlinks,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.1 Link format
===============

Org will recognize plain URL-like links and activate them as clickable
links.  The general link format, however, looks like this:

     [[link][description]]       or alternatively           [[link]]

Once a link in the buffer is complete (all brackets present), Org will
change the display so that ‘description’ is displayed instead of
‘[[link][description]]’ and ‘link’ is displayed instead of ‘[[link]]’.
Links will be highlighted in the face ‘org-link’, which by default is an
underlined face.  You can directly edit the visible part of a link.
Note that this can be either the ‘link’ part (if there is no
description) or the ‘description’ part.  To edit also the invisible
‘link’ part, use ‘C-c C-l’ with the cursor on the link.

   If you place the cursor at the beginning or just behind the end of
the displayed text and press <BACKSPACE>, you will remove the
(invisible) bracket at that location.  This makes the link incomplete
and the internals are again displayed as plain text.  Inserting the
missing bracket hides the link internals again.  To show the internal
structure of all links, use the menu entry ‘Org->Hyperlinks->Literal
links’.


File: org.info,  Node: Internal links,  Next: External links,  Prev: Link format,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.2 Internal links
==================

If the link does not look like a URL, it is considered to be internal in
the current file.  The most important case is a link like
‘[[#my-custom-id]]’ which will link to the entry with the ‘CUSTOM_ID’
property ‘my-custom-id’.  You are responsible yourself to make sure
these custom IDs are unique in a file.

   Links such as ‘[[My Target]]’ or ‘[[My Target][Find my target]]’ lead
to a text search in the current file.

   The link can be followed with ‘C-c C-o’ when the cursor is on the
link, or with a mouse click (*note Handling links::).  Links to custom
IDs will point to the corresponding headline.  The preferred match for a
text link is a dedicated target: the same string in double angular
brackets, like ‘<<My Target>>’.

   If no dedicated target exists, the link will then try to match the
exact name of an element within the buffer.  Naming is done with the
‘#+NAME’ keyword, which has to be put the line before the element it
refers to, as in the following example

     #+NAME: My Target
     | a  | table      |
     |----+------------|
     | of | four cells |

   If none of the above succeeds, Org will search for a headline that is
exactly the link text but may also include a TODO keyword and tags(1).

   During export, internal links will be used to mark objects and assign
them a number.  Marked objects will then be referenced by links pointing
to them.  In particular, links without a description will appear as the
number assigned to the marked object(2).  In the following excerpt from
an Org buffer

     - one item
     - <<target>>another item
     Here we refer to item [[target]].

The last sentence will appear as ‘Here we refer to item 2’ when
exported.

   In non-Org files, the search will look for the words in the link
text.  In the above example the search would be for ‘my target’.

   Following a link pushes a mark onto Org’s own mark ring.  You can
return to the previous position with ‘C-c &’.  Using this command
several times in direct succession goes back to positions recorded
earlier.

* Menu:

* Radio targets::               Make targets trigger links in plain text

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) To insert a link targeting a headline, in-buffer completion can
be used.  Just type a star followed by a few optional letters into the
buffer and press ‘M-<TAB>’.  All headlines in the current buffer will be
offered as completions.

   (2) When targeting a ‘#+NAME’ keyword, ‘#+CAPTION’ keyword is
mandatory in order to get proper numbering (*note Images and tables::).


File: org.info,  Node: Radio targets,  Prev: Internal links,  Up: Internal links

4.2.1 Radio targets
-------------------

Org can automatically turn any occurrences of certain target names in
normal text into a link.  So without explicitly creating a link, the
text connects to the target radioing its position.  Radio targets are
enclosed by triple angular brackets.  For example, a target ‘<<<My
Target>>>’ causes each occurrence of ‘my target’ in normal text to
become activated as a link.  The Org file is scanned automatically for
radio targets only when the file is first loaded into Emacs.  To update
the target list during editing, press ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor on or at
a target.


File: org.info,  Node: External links,  Next: Handling links,  Prev: Internal links,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.3 External links
==================

Org supports links to files, websites, Usenet and email messages, BBDB
database entries and links to both IRC conversations and their logs.
External links are URL-like locators.  They start with a short
identifying string followed by a colon.  There can be no space after the
colon.  The following list shows examples for each link type.

     http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik          on the web
     doi:10.1000/182                           DOI for an electronic resource
     file:/home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg     file, absolute path
     /home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg          same as above
     file:papers/last.pdf                      file, relative path
     ./papers/last.pdf                         same as above
     file:/myself@some.where:papers/last.pdf   file, path on remote machine
     /myself@some.where:papers/last.pdf        same as above
     file:sometextfile::NNN                    file, jump to line number
     file:projects.org                         another Org file
     file:projects.org::some words             text search in Org file(1)
     file:projects.org::*task title            heading search in Org file
     file+sys:/path/to/file                    open via OS, like double-click
     file+emacs:/path/to/file                  force opening by Emacs
     docview:papers/last.pdf::NNN              open in doc-view mode at page
     id:B7423F4D-2E8A-471B-8810-C40F074717E9   Link to heading by ID
     news:comp.emacs                           Usenet link
     mailto:adent@galaxy.net                   Mail link
     mhe:folder                                MH-E folder link
     mhe:folder#id                             MH-E message link
     rmail:folder                              RMAIL folder link
     rmail:folder#id                           RMAIL message link
     gnus:group                                Gnus group link
     gnus:group#id                             Gnus article link
     bbdb:R.*Stallman                          BBDB link (with regexp)
     irc:/irc.com/#emacs/bob                   IRC link
     info:org#External links                   Info node link
     shell:ls *.org                            A shell command
     elisp:org-agenda                          Interactive Elisp command
     elisp:(find-file-other-frame "Elisp.org") Elisp form to evaluate

   On top of these built-in link types, some are available through the
‘contrib/’ directory (*note Installation::).  For example, these links
to VM or Wanderlust messages are available when you load the
corresponding libraries from the ‘contrib/’ directory:

     vm:folder                                 VM folder link
     vm:folder#id                              VM message link
     vm://myself@some.where.org/folder#id      VM on remote machine
     vm-imap:account:folder                    VM IMAP folder link
     vm-imap:account:folder#id                 VM IMAP message link
     wl:folder                                 WANDERLUST folder link
     wl:folder#id                              WANDERLUST message link

   For customizing Org to add new link types *note Adding hyperlink
types::.

   A link should be enclosed in double brackets and may contain a
descriptive text to be displayed instead of the URL (*note Link
format::), for example:

     [[http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/][GNU Emacs]]

If the description is a file name or URL that points to an image, HTML
export (*note HTML export::) will inline the image as a clickable
button.  If there is no description at all and the link points to an
image, that image will be inlined into the exported HTML file.

   Org also finds external links in the normal text and activates them
as links.  If spaces must be part of the link (for example in
‘bbdb:Richard Stallman’), or if you need to remove ambiguities about the
end of the link, enclose them in square brackets.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The actual behavior of the search will depend on the value of the
option ‘org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline’.  If its value is
‘nil’, then a fuzzy text search will be done.  If it is t, then only the
exact headline will be matched.  If the value is ‘'query-to-create’,
then an exact headline will be searched; if it is not found, then the
user will be queried to create it.


File: org.info,  Node: Handling links,  Next: Using links outside Org,  Prev: External links,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.4 Handling links
==================

Org provides methods to create a link in the correct syntax, to insert
it into an Org file, and to follow the link.

‘C-c l     (org-store-link)’
     Store a link to the current location.  This is a _global_ command
     (you must create the key binding yourself) which can be used in any
     buffer to create a link.  The link will be stored for later
     insertion into an Org buffer (see below).  What kind of link will
     be created depends on the current buffer:

     Org mode buffers
     For Org files, if there is a ‘<<target>>’ at the cursor, the link
     points to the target.  Otherwise it points to the current headline,
     which will also be the description(1).

     If the headline has a ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property, a link to this custom
     ID will be stored.  In addition or alternatively (depending on the
     value of ‘org-id-link-to-org-use-id’), a globally unique ‘ID’
     property will be created and/or used to construct a link(2).  So
     using this command in Org buffers will potentially create two
     links: a human-readable from the custom ID, and one that is
     globally unique and works even if the entry is moved from file to
     file.  Later, when inserting the link, you need to decide which one
     to use.

     Email/News clients: VM, Rmail, Wanderlust, MH-E, Gnus
     Pretty much all Emacs mail clients are supported.  The link will
     point to the current article, or, in some GNUS buffers, to the
     group.  The description is constructed from the author and the
     subject.

     Web browsers: W3 and W3M
     Here the link will be the current URL, with the page title as
     description.

     Contacts: BBDB
     Links created in a BBDB buffer will point to the current entry.

     Chat: IRC
     For IRC links, if you set the option ‘org-irc-link-to-logs’ to ‘t’,
     a ‘file:/’ style link to the relevant point in the logs for the
     current conversation is created.  Otherwise an ‘irc:/’ style link
     to the user/channel/server under the point will be stored.

     Other files
     For any other files, the link will point to the file, with a search
     string (*note Search options::) pointing to the contents of the
     current line.  If there is an active region, the selected words
     will form the basis of the search string.  If the automatically
     created link is not working correctly or accurately enough, you can
     write custom functions to select the search string and to do the
     search for particular file types—see *note Custom searches::.  The
     key binding ‘C-c l’ is only a suggestion—see *note Installation::.

     Agenda view
     When the cursor is in an agenda view, the created link points to
     the entry referenced by the current line.

‘C-c C-l     (org-insert-link)’
     Insert a link(3).  This prompts for a link to be inserted into the
     buffer.  You can just type a link, using text for an internal link,
     or one of the link type prefixes mentioned in the examples above.
     The link will be inserted into the buffer(4), along with a
     descriptive text.  If some text was selected when this command is
     called, the selected text becomes the default description.

     Inserting stored links
     All links stored during the current session are part of the history
     for this prompt, so you can access them with <up> and <down> (or
     ‘M-p/n’).

     Completion support
     Completion with <TAB> will help you to insert valid link prefixes
     like ‘http:’ or ‘ftp:’, including the prefixes defined through link
     abbreviations (*note Link abbreviations::).  If you press <RET>
     after inserting only the PREFIX, Org will offer specific completion
     support for some link types(5) For example, if you type ‘file
     <RET>’, file name completion (alternative access: ‘C-u C-c C-l’,
     see below) will be offered, and after ‘bbdb <RET>’ you can complete
     contact names.
‘C-u C-c C-l’
     When ‘C-c C-l’ is called with a ‘C-u’ prefix argument, a link to a
     file will be inserted and you may use file name completion to
     select the name of the file.  The path to the file is inserted
     relative to the directory of the current Org file, if the linked
     file is in the current directory or in a sub-directory of it, or if
     the path is written relative to the current directory using ‘../’.
     Otherwise an absolute path is used, if possible with ‘~/’ for your
     home directory.  You can force an absolute path with two ‘C-u’
     prefixes.
‘C-c C-l  (with cursor on existing link)’
     When the cursor is on an existing link, ‘C-c C-l’ allows you to
     edit the link and description parts of the link.
‘C-c C-o     (org-open-at-point)’
     Open link at point.  This will launch a web browser for URLs (using
     ‘browse-url-at-point’), run VM/MH-E/Wanderlust/Rmail/Gnus/BBDB for
     the corresponding links, and execute the command in a shell link.
     When the cursor is on an internal link, this command runs the
     corresponding search.  When the cursor is on a TAG list in a
     headline, it creates the corresponding TAGS view.  If the cursor is
     on a timestamp, it compiles the agenda for that date.  Furthermore,
     it will visit text and remote files in ‘file:’ links with Emacs and
     select a suitable application for local non-text files.
     Classification of files is based on file extension only.  See
     option ‘org-file-apps’.  If you want to override the default
     application and visit the file with Emacs, use a ‘C-u’ prefix.  If
     you want to avoid opening in Emacs, use a ‘C-u C-u’ prefix.
     If the cursor is on a headline, but not on a link, offer all links
     in the headline and entry text.  If you want to setup the frame
     configuration for following links, customize
     ‘org-link-frame-setup’.

‘<RET>’
     When ‘org-return-follows-link’ is set, ‘<RET>’ will also follow the
     link at point.
‘mouse-2’
‘mouse-1’
     On links, ‘mouse-2’ will open the link just as ‘C-c C-o’ would.
     Under Emacs 22 and later, ‘mouse-1’ will also follow a link.
‘mouse-3’
     Like ‘mouse-2’, but force file links to be opened with Emacs, and
     internal links to be displayed in another window(6).
‘C-c C-x C-v     (org-toggle-inline-images)’
     Toggle the inline display of linked images.  Normally this will
     only inline images that have no description part in the link, i.e.,
     images that will also be inlined during export.  When called with a
     prefix argument, also display images that do have a link
     description.  You can ask for inline images to be displayed at
     startup by configuring the variable
     ‘org-startup-with-inline-images’(7).
‘C-c %     (org-mark-ring-push)’
     Push the current position onto the mark ring, to be able to return
     easily.  Commands following an internal link do this automatically.
‘C-c &     (org-mark-ring-goto)’
     Jump back to a recorded position.  A position is recorded by the
     commands following internal links, and by ‘C-c %’.  Using this
     command several times in direct succession moves through a ring of
     previously recorded positions.
‘C-c C-x C-n     (org-next-link)’
‘C-c C-x C-p     (org-previous-link)’
     Move forward/backward to the next link in the buffer.  At the limit
     of the buffer, the search fails once, and then wraps around.  The
     key bindings for this are really too long; you might want to bind
     this also to ‘C-n’ and ‘C-p’
          (add-hook 'org-load-hook
            (lambda ()
              (define-key org-mode-map "\C-n" 'org-next-link)
              (define-key org-mode-map "\C-p" 'org-previous-link)))

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If the headline contains a timestamp, it will be removed from the
link and result in a wrong link—you should avoid putting timestamp in
the headline.

   (2) The library ‘org-id.el’ must first be loaded, either through
‘org-customize’ by enabling ‘org-id’ in ‘org-modules’, or by adding
‘(require 'org-id)’ in your ‘.emacs’.

   (3) Note that you don’t have to use this command to insert a link.
Links in Org are plain text, and you can type or paste them straight
into the buffer.  By using this command, the links are automatically
enclosed in double brackets, and you will be asked for the optional
descriptive text.

   (4) After insertion of a stored link, the link will be removed from
the list of stored links.  To keep it in the list later use, use a
triple ‘C-u’ prefix argument to ‘C-c C-l’, or configure the option
‘org-keep-stored-link-after-insertion’.

   (5) This works by calling a special function
‘org-PREFIX-complete-link’.

   (6) See the option ‘org-display-internal-link-with-indirect-buffer’

   (7) with corresponding ‘#+STARTUP’ keywords ‘inlineimages’ and
‘noinlineimages’


File: org.info,  Node: Using links outside Org,  Next: Link abbreviations,  Prev: Handling links,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.5 Using links outside Org
===========================

You can insert and follow links that have Org syntax not only in Org,
but in any Emacs buffer.  For this, you should create two global
commands, like this (please select suitable global keys yourself):

     (global-set-key "\C-c L" 'org-insert-link-global)
     (global-set-key "\C-c o" 'org-open-at-point-global)


File: org.info,  Node: Link abbreviations,  Next: Search options,  Prev: Using links outside Org,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.6 Link abbreviations
======================

Long URLs can be cumbersome to type, and often many similar links are
needed in a document.  For this you can use link abbreviations.  An
abbreviated link looks like this

     [[linkword:tag][description]]

where the tag is optional.  The linkword must be a word, starting with a
letter, followed by letters, numbers, ‘-’, and ‘_’.  Abbreviations are
resolved according to the information in the variable
‘org-link-abbrev-alist’ that relates the linkwords to replacement text.
Here is an example:

     (setq org-link-abbrev-alist
       '(("bugzilla"  . "http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=")
         ("url-to-ja" . "http://translate.google.fr/translate?sl=en&tl=ja&u=%h")
         ("google"    . "http://www.google.com/search?q=")
         ("gmap"      . "http://maps.google.com/maps?q=%s")
         ("omap"      . "http://nominatim.openstreetmap.org/search?q=%s&polygon=1")
         ("ads"       . "http://adsabs.harvard.edu/cgi-bin/nph-abs_connect?author=%s&db_key=AST")))

   If the replacement text contains the string ‘%s’, it will be replaced
with the tag.  Using ‘%h’ instead of ‘%s’ will url-encode the tag (see
the example above, where we need to encode the URL parameter.)  Using
‘%(my-function)’ will pass the tag to a custom function, and replace it
by the resulting string.

   If the replacement text don’t contain any specifier, it will simply
be appended to the string in order to create the link.

   Instead of a string, you may also specify a function that will be
called with the tag as the only argument to create the link.

   With the above setting, you could link to a specific bug with
‘[[bugzilla:129]]’, search the web for ‘OrgMode’ with
‘[[google:OrgMode]]’, show the map location of the Free Software
Foundation ‘[[gmap:51 Franklin Street, Boston]]’ or of Carsten office
‘[[omap:Science Park 904, Amsterdam, The Netherlands]]’ and find out
what the Org author is doing besides Emacs hacking with
‘[[ads:Dominik,C]]’.

   If you need special abbreviations just for a single Org buffer, you
can define them in the file with

     #+LINK: bugzilla  http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=
     #+LINK: google    http://www.google.com/search?q=%s

In-buffer completion (*note Completion::) can be used after ‘[’ to
complete link abbreviations.  You may also define a function
‘org-PREFIX-complete-link’ that implements special (e.g., completion)
support for inserting such a link with ‘C-c C-l’.  Such a function
should not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix.


File: org.info,  Node: Search options,  Next: Custom searches,  Prev: Link abbreviations,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.7 Search options in file links
================================

File links can contain additional information to make Emacs jump to a
particular location in the file when following a link.  This can be a
line number or a search option after a double(1) colon.  For example,
when the command ‘C-c l’ creates a link (*note Handling links::) to a
file, it encodes the words in the current line as a search string that
can be used to find this line back later when following the link with
‘C-c C-o’.

   Here is the syntax of the different ways to attach a search to a file
link, together with an explanation:

     [[file:~/code/main.c::255]]
     [[file:~/xx.org::My Target]]
     [[file:~/xx.org::*My Target]]
     [[file:~/xx.org::#my-custom-id]]
     [[file:~/xx.org::/regexp/]]

‘255’
     Jump to line 255.
‘My Target’
     Search for a link target ‘<<My Target>>’, or do a text search for
     ‘my target’, similar to the search in internal links, see *note
     Internal links::.  In HTML export (*note HTML export::), such a
     file link will become an HTML reference to the corresponding named
     anchor in the linked file.
‘*My Target’
     In an Org file, restrict search to headlines.
‘#my-custom-id’
     Link to a heading with a ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property
‘/regexp/’
     Do a regular expression search for ‘regexp’.  This uses the Emacs
     command ‘occur’ to list all matches in a separate window.  If the
     target file is in Org mode, ‘org-occur’ is used to create a sparse
     tree with the matches.

   As a degenerate case, a file link with an empty file name can be used
to search the current file.  For example, ‘[[file:::find me]]’ does a
search for ‘find me’ in the current file, just as ‘[[find me]]’ would.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For backward compatibility, line numbers can also follow a single
colon.


File: org.info,  Node: Custom searches,  Prev: Search options,  Up: Hyperlinks

4.8 Custom Searches
===================

The default mechanism for creating search strings and for doing the
actual search related to a file link may not work correctly in all
cases.  For example, BibTeX database files have many entries like
‘year="1993"’ which would not result in good search strings, because the
only unique identification for a BibTeX entry is the citation key.

   If you come across such a problem, you can write custom functions to
set the right search string for a particular file type, and to do the
search for the string in the file.  Using ‘add-hook’, these functions
need to be added to the hook variables
‘org-create-file-search-functions’ and
‘org-execute-file-search-functions’.  See the docstring for these
variables for more information.  Org actually uses this mechanism for
BibTeX database files, and you can use the corresponding code as an
implementation example.  See the file ‘org-bibtex.el’.


File: org.info,  Node: TODO Items,  Next: Tags,  Prev: Hyperlinks,  Up: Top

5 TODO items
************

Org mode does not maintain TODO lists as separate documents(1).
Instead, TODO items are an integral part of the notes file, because TODO
items usually come up while taking notes!  With Org mode, simply mark
any entry in a tree as being a TODO item.  In this way, information is
not duplicated, and the entire context from which the TODO item emerged
is always present.

   Of course, this technique for managing TODO items scatters them
throughout your notes file.  Org mode compensates for this by providing
methods to give you an overview of all the things that you have to do.

* Menu:

* TODO basics::                 Marking and displaying TODO entries
* TODO extensions::             Workflow and assignments
* Progress logging::            Dates and notes for progress
* Priorities::                  Some things are more important than others
* Breaking down tasks::         Splitting a task into manageable pieces
* Checkboxes::                  Tick-off lists

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Of course, you can make a document that contains only long lists
of TODO items, but this is not required.


File: org.info,  Node: TODO basics,  Next: TODO extensions,  Prev: TODO Items,  Up: TODO Items

5.1 Basic TODO functionality
============================

Any headline becomes a TODO item when it starts with the word ‘TODO’,
for example:

     *** TODO Write letter to Sam Fortune

The most important commands to work with TODO entries are:

‘C-c C-t     (org-todo)’

     Rotate the TODO state of the current item among

          ,-> (unmarked) -> TODO -> DONE --.
          '--------------------------------'

     If TODO keywords have fast access keys (see *note Fast access to
     TODO states::), you will be prompted for a TODO keyword through the
     fast selection interface; this is the default behavior when
     ‘org-use-fast-todo-selection’ is non-‘nil’.

     The same rotation can also be done “remotely” from the timeline and
     agenda buffers with the ‘t’ command key (*note Agenda commands::).

‘C-u C-c C-t’
     When TODO keywords have no selection keys, select a specific
     keyword using completion; otherwise force cycling through TODO
     states with no prompt.  When ‘org-use-fast-todo-selection’ is set
     to ‘prefix’, use the fast selection interface.

‘S-<right>  /  S-<left>’
     Select the following/preceding TODO state, similar to cycling.
     Useful mostly if more than two TODO states are possible (*note TODO
     extensions::).  See also *note Conflicts::, for a discussion of the
     interaction with ‘shift-selection-mode’.  See also the variable
     ‘org-treat-S-cursor-todo-selection-as-state-change’.
‘C-c / t     (org-show-todo-tree)’
     View TODO items in a _sparse tree_ (*note Sparse trees::).  Folds
     the entire buffer, but shows all TODO items (with not-DONE state)
     and the headings hierarchy above them.  With a prefix argument (or
     by using ‘C-c / T’), search for a specific TODO.  You will be
     prompted for the keyword, and you can also give a list of keywords
     like ‘KWD1|KWD2|...’ to list entries that match any one of these
     keywords.  With a numeric prefix argument N, show the tree for the
     Nth keyword in the option ‘org-todo-keywords’.  With two prefix
     arguments, find all TODO states, both un-done and done.
‘C-c a t     (org-todo-list)’
     Show the global TODO list.  Collects the TODO items (with not-DONE
     states) from all agenda files (*note Agenda Views::) into a single
     buffer.  The new buffer will be in ‘agenda-mode’, which provides
     commands to examine and manipulate the TODO entries from the new
     buffer (*note Agenda commands::).  *Note Global TODO list::, for
     more information.
‘S-M-<RET>     (org-insert-todo-heading)’
     Insert a new TODO entry below the current one.

Changing a TODO state can also trigger tag changes.  See the docstring
of the option ‘org-todo-state-tags-triggers’ for details.


File: org.info,  Node: TODO extensions,  Next: Progress logging,  Prev: TODO basics,  Up: TODO Items

5.2 Extended use of TODO keywords
=================================

By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and
DONE.  Org mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways
with _TODO keywords_ (stored in ‘org-todo-keywords’).  With special
setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different files.

   Note that tags are another way to classify headlines in general and
TODO items in particular (*note Tags::).

* Menu:

* Workflow states::             From TODO to DONE in steps
* TODO types::                  I do this, Fred does the rest
* Multiple sets in one file::   Mixing it all, and still finding your way
* Fast access to TODO states::  Single letter selection of a state
* Per-file keywords::           Different files, different requirements
* Faces for TODO keywords::     Highlighting states
* TODO dependencies::           When one task needs to wait for others


File: org.info,  Node: Workflow states,  Next: TODO types,  Prev: TODO extensions,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.1 TODO keywords as workflow states
--------------------------------------

You can use TODO keywords to indicate different _sequential_ states in
the process of working on an item, for example(1):

     (setq org-todo-keywords
       '((sequence "TODO" "FEEDBACK" "VERIFY" "|" "DONE" "DELEGATED")))

   The vertical bar separates the TODO keywords (states that _need
action_) from the DONE states (which need _no further action_).  If you
don’t provide the separator bar, the last state is used as the DONE
state.  With this setup, the command ‘C-c C-t’ will cycle an entry from
TODO to FEEDBACK, then to VERIFY, and finally to DONE and DELEGATED.
You may also use a numeric prefix argument to quickly select a specific
state.  For example ‘C-3 C-c C-t’ will change the state immediately to
VERIFY.  Or you can use ‘S-<left>’ to go backward through the sequence.
If you define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion (*note
Completion::) or even a special one-key selection scheme (*note Fast
access to TODO states::) to insert these words into the buffer.
Changing a TODO state can be logged with a timestamp, see *note Tracking
TODO state changes::, for more information.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Changing this variable only becomes effective after restarting
Org mode in a buffer.


File: org.info,  Node: TODO types,  Next: Multiple sets in one file,  Prev: Workflow states,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.2 TODO keywords as types
----------------------------

The second possibility is to use TODO keywords to indicate different
_types_ of action items.  For example, you might want to indicate that
items are for “work” or “home”.  Or, when you work with several people
on a single project, you might want to assign action items directly to
persons, by using their names as TODO keywords.  This would be set up
like this:

     (setq org-todo-keywords '((type "Fred" "Sara" "Lucy" "|" "DONE")))

   In this case, different keywords do not indicate a sequence, but
rather different types.  So the normal work flow would be to assign a
task to a person, and later to mark it DONE.  Org mode supports this
style by adapting the workings of the command ‘C-c C-t’(1).  When used
several times in succession, it will still cycle through all names, in
order to first select the right type for a task.  But when you return to
the item after some time and execute ‘C-c C-t’ again, it will switch
from any name directly to DONE.  Use prefix arguments or completion to
quickly select a specific name.  You can also review the items of a
specific TODO type in a sparse tree by using a numeric prefix to ‘C-c /
t’.  For example, to see all things Lucy has to do, you would use ‘C-3
C-c / t’.  To collect Lucy’s items from all agenda files into a single
buffer, you would use the numeric prefix argument as well when creating
the global TODO list: ‘C-3 C-c a t’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This is also true for the ‘t’ command in the timeline and agenda
buffers.


File: org.info,  Node: Multiple sets in one file,  Next: Fast access to TODO states,  Prev: TODO types,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.3 Multiple keyword sets in one file
---------------------------------------

Sometimes you may want to use different sets of TODO keywords in
parallel.  For example, you may want to have the basic ‘TODO’/‘DONE’,
but also a workflow for bug fixing, and a separate state indicating that
an item has been canceled (so it is not DONE, but also does not require
action).  Your setup would then look like this:

     (setq org-todo-keywords
           '((sequence "TODO" "|" "DONE")
             (sequence "REPORT" "BUG" "KNOWNCAUSE" "|" "FIXED")
             (sequence "|" "CANCELED")))

   The keywords should all be different, this helps Org mode to keep
track of which subsequence should be used for a given entry.  In this
setup, ‘C-c C-t’ only operates within a subsequence, so it switches from
‘DONE’ to (nothing) to ‘TODO’, and from ‘FIXED’ to (nothing) to
‘REPORT’.  Therefore you need a mechanism to initially select the
correct sequence.  Besides the obvious ways like typing a keyword or
using completion, you may also apply the following commands:

‘C-u C-u C-c C-t’
‘C-S-<right>’
‘C-S-<left>’
     These keys jump from one TODO subset to the next.  In the above
     example, ‘C-u C-u C-c C-t’ or ‘C-S-<right>’ would jump from ‘TODO’
     or ‘DONE’ to ‘REPORT’, and any of the words in the second row to
     ‘CANCELED’.  Note that the ‘C-S-’ key binding conflict with
     ‘shift-selection-mode’ (*note Conflicts::).
‘S-<right>’
‘S-<left>’
     ‘S-<<left>>’ and ‘S-<<right>>’ and walk through _all_ keywords from
     all sets, so for example ‘S-<<right>>’ would switch from ‘DONE’ to
     ‘REPORT’ in the example above.  See also *note Conflicts::, for a
     discussion of the interaction with ‘shift-selection-mode’.


File: org.info,  Node: Fast access to TODO states,  Next: Per-file keywords,  Prev: Multiple sets in one file,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.4 Fast access to TODO states
--------------------------------

If you would like to quickly change an entry to an arbitrary TODO state
instead of cycling through the states, you can set up keys for
single-letter access to the states.  This is done by adding the
selection character after each keyword, in parentheses(1).  For example:

     (setq org-todo-keywords
           '((sequence "TODO(t)" "|" "DONE(d)")
             (sequence "REPORT(r)" "BUG(b)" "KNOWNCAUSE(k)" "|" "FIXED(f)")
             (sequence "|" "CANCELED(c)")))

   If you then press ‘C-c C-t’ followed by the selection key, the entry
will be switched to this state.  ‘SPC’ can be used to remove any TODO
keyword from an entry.(2)

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) All characters are allowed except ‘@^!’, which have a special
meaning here.

   (2) Check also the option ‘org-fast-tag-selection-include-todo’, it
allows you to change the TODO state through the tags interface (*note
Setting tags::), in case you like to mingle the two concepts.  Note that
this means you need to come up with unique keys across both sets of
keywords.


File: org.info,  Node: Per-file keywords,  Next: Faces for TODO keywords,  Prev: Fast access to TODO states,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.5 Setting up keywords for individual files
----------------------------------------------

It can be very useful to use different aspects of the TODO mechanism in
different files.  For file-local settings, you need to add special lines
to the file which set the keywords and interpretation for that file
only.  For example, to set one of the two examples discussed above, you
need one of the following lines, starting in column zero anywhere in the
file:

     #+TODO: TODO FEEDBACK VERIFY | DONE CANCELED
(you may also write ‘#+SEQ_TODO’ to be explicit about the
interpretation, but it means the same as ‘#+TODO’), or
     #+TYP_TODO: Fred Sara Lucy Mike | DONE

   A setup for using several sets in parallel would be:

     #+TODO: TODO | DONE
     #+TODO: REPORT BUG KNOWNCAUSE | FIXED
     #+TODO: | CANCELED

To make sure you are using the correct keyword, type ‘#+’ into the
buffer and then use ‘M-<TAB>’ completion.

   Remember that the keywords after the vertical bar (or the last
keyword if no bar is there) must always mean that the item is DONE
(although you may use a different word).  After changing one of these
lines, use ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor still in the line to make the
changes known to Org mode(1).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Org mode parses these lines only when Org mode is activated after
visiting a file.  ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor in a line starting with ‘#+’
is simply restarting Org mode for the current buffer.


File: org.info,  Node: Faces for TODO keywords,  Next: TODO dependencies,  Prev: Per-file keywords,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.6 Faces for TODO keywords
-----------------------------

Org mode highlights TODO keywords with special faces: ‘org-todo’ for
keywords indicating that an item still has to be acted upon, and
‘org-done’ for keywords indicating that an item is finished.  If you are
using more than 2 different states, you might want to use special faces
for some of them.  This can be done using the option
‘org-todo-keyword-faces’.  For example:

     (setq org-todo-keyword-faces
           '(("TODO" . org-warning) ("STARTED" . "yellow")
             ("CANCELED" . (:foreground "blue" :weight bold))))

   While using a list with face properties as shown for CANCELED
_should_ work, this does not always seem to be the case.  If necessary,
define a special face and use that.  A string is interpreted as a color.
The option ‘org-faces-easy-properties’ determines if that color is
interpreted as a foreground or a background color.


File: org.info,  Node: TODO dependencies,  Prev: Faces for TODO keywords,  Up: TODO extensions

5.2.7 TODO dependencies
-----------------------

The structure of Org files (hierarchy and lists) makes it easy to define
TODO dependencies.  Usually, a parent TODO task should not be marked
DONE until all subtasks (defined as children tasks) are marked as DONE.
And sometimes there is a logical sequence to a number of (sub)tasks, so
that one task cannot be acted upon before all siblings above it are
done.  If you customize the option ‘org-enforce-todo-dependencies’, Org
will block entries from changing state to DONE while they have children
that are not DONE.  Furthermore, if an entry has a property ‘ORDERED’,
each of its children will be blocked until all earlier siblings are
marked DONE.  Here is an example:

     * TODO Blocked until (two) is done
     ** DONE one
     ** TODO two

     * Parent
       :PROPERTIES:
       :ORDERED: t
       :END:
     ** TODO a
     ** TODO b, needs to wait for (a)
     ** TODO c, needs to wait for (a) and (b)

‘C-c C-x o     (org-toggle-ordered-property)’
     Toggle the ‘ORDERED’ property of the current entry.  A property is
     used for this behavior because this should be local to the current
     entry, not inherited like a tag.  However, if you would like to
     track the value of this property with a tag for better visibility,
     customize the option ‘org-track-ordered-property-with-tag’.
‘C-u C-u C-u C-c C-t’
     Change TODO state, circumventing any state blocking.

   If you set the option ‘org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks’, TODO entries
that cannot be closed because of such dependencies will be shown in a
dimmed font or even made invisible in agenda views (*note Agenda
Views::).

   You can also block changes of TODO states by looking at checkboxes
(*note Checkboxes::).  If you set the option
‘org-enforce-todo-checkbox-dependencies’, an entry that has unchecked
checkboxes will be blocked from switching to DONE.

   If you need more complex dependency structures, for example
dependencies between entries in different trees or files, check out the
contributed module ‘org-depend.el’.


File: org.info,  Node: Progress logging,  Next: Priorities,  Prev: TODO extensions,  Up: TODO Items

5.3 Progress logging
====================

Org mode can automatically record a timestamp and possibly a note when
you mark a TODO item as DONE, or even each time you change the state of
a TODO item.  This system is highly configurable; settings can be on a
per-keyword basis and can be localized to a file or even a subtree.  For
information on how to clock working time for a task, see *note Clocking
work time::.

* Menu:

* Closing items::               When was this entry marked DONE?
* Tracking TODO state changes::  When did the status change?
* Tracking your habits::        How consistent have you been?


File: org.info,  Node: Closing items,  Next: Tracking TODO state changes,  Prev: Progress logging,  Up: Progress logging

5.3.1 Closing items
-------------------

The most basic logging is to keep track of _when_ a certain TODO item
was finished.  This is achieved with(1)

     (setq org-log-done 'time)

Then each time you turn an entry from a TODO (not-done) state into any
of the DONE states, a line ‘CLOSED: [timestamp]’ will be inserted just
after the headline.  If you turn the entry back into a TODO item through
further state cycling, that line will be removed again.  If you turn the
entry back to a non-TODO state (by pressing <C-c C-t SPC> for example),
that line will also be removed, unless you set
‘org-closed-keep-when-no-todo’ to non-‘nil’.  If you want to record a
note along with the timestamp, use(2)

     (setq org-log-done 'note)

You will then be prompted for a note, and that note will be stored below
the entry with a ‘Closing Note’ heading.

   In the timeline (*note Timeline::) and in the agenda (*note
Weekly/daily agenda::), you can then use the ‘l’ key to display the TODO
items with a ‘CLOSED’ timestamp on each day, giving you an overview of
what has been done.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: logdone’

   (2) The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: lognotedone’.


File: org.info,  Node: Tracking TODO state changes,  Next: Tracking your habits,  Prev: Closing items,  Up: Progress logging

5.3.2 Tracking TODO state changes
---------------------------------

When TODO keywords are used as workflow states (*note Workflow
states::), you might want to keep track of when a state change occurred
and maybe take a note about this change.  You can either record just a
timestamp, or a time-stamped note for a change.  These records will be
inserted after the headline as an itemized list, newest first(1).  When
taking a lot of notes, you might want to get the notes out of the way
into a drawer (*note Drawers::).  Customize ‘org-log-into-drawer’ to get
this behavior—the recommended drawer for this is called ‘LOGBOOK’(2).
You can also overrule the setting of this variable for a subtree by
setting a ‘LOG_INTO_DRAWER’ property.

   Since it is normally too much to record a note for every state, Org
mode expects configuration on a per-keyword basis for this.  This is
achieved by adding special markers ‘!’ (for a timestamp) or ‘@’ (for a
note with timestamp) in parentheses after each keyword.  For example,
with the setting

     (setq org-todo-keywords
       '((sequence "TODO(t)" "WAIT(w@/!)" "|" "DONE(d!)" "CANCELED(c@)")))

   To record a timestamp without a note for TODO keywords configured
with ‘@’, just type ‘C-c C-c’ to enter a blank note when prompted.

You not only define global TODO keywords and fast access keys, but also
request that a time is recorded when the entry is set to DONE(3), and
that a note is recorded when switching to WAIT or CANCELED.  The setting
for WAIT is even more special: the ‘!’ after the slash means that in
addition to the note taken when entering the state, a timestamp should
be recorded when leaving the WAIT state, if and only if the target state
does not configure logging for entering it.  So it has no effect when
switching from WAIT to DONE, because DONE is configured to record a
timestamp only.  But when switching from WAIT back to TODO, the ‘/!’ in
the WAIT setting now triggers a timestamp even though TODO has no
logging configured.

   You can use the exact same syntax for setting logging preferences
local to a buffer:
     #+TODO: TODO(t) WAIT(w@/!) | DONE(d!) CANCELED(c@)

   In order to define logging settings that are local to a subtree or a
single item, define a LOGGING property in this entry.  Any non-empty
LOGGING property resets all logging settings to ‘nil’.  You may then
turn on logging for this specific tree using STARTUP keywords like
‘lognotedone’ or ‘logrepeat’, as well as adding state specific settings
like ‘TODO(!)’.  For example

     * TODO Log each state with only a time
       :PROPERTIES:
       :LOGGING: TODO(!) WAIT(!) DONE(!) CANCELED(!)
       :END:
     * TODO Only log when switching to WAIT, and when repeating
       :PROPERTIES:
       :LOGGING: WAIT(@) logrepeat
       :END:
     * TODO No logging at all
       :PROPERTIES:
       :LOGGING: nil
       :END:

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See the option ‘org-log-states-order-reversed’

   (2) Note that the ‘LOGBOOK’ drawer is unfolded when pressing <SPC> in
the agenda to show an entry—use <C-u SPC> to keep it folded here

   (3) It is possible that Org mode will record two timestamps when you
are using both ‘org-log-done’ and state change logging.  However, it
will never prompt for two notes—if you have configured both, the state
change recording note will take precedence and cancel the ‘Closing
Note’.


File: org.info,  Node: Tracking your habits,  Prev: Tracking TODO state changes,  Up: Progress logging

5.3.3 Tracking your habits
--------------------------

Org has the ability to track the consistency of a special category of
TODOs, called “habits”.  A habit has the following properties:

  1. You have enabled the ‘habits’ module by customizing ‘org-modules’.
  2. The habit is a TODO item, with a TODO keyword representing an open
     state.
  3. The property ‘STYLE’ is set to the value ‘habit’.
  4. The TODO has a scheduled date, usually with a ‘.+’ style repeat
     interval.  A ‘++’ style may be appropriate for habits with time
     constraints, e.g., must be done on weekends, or a ‘+’ style for an
     unusual habit that can have a backlog, e.g., weekly reports.
  5. The TODO may also have minimum and maximum ranges specified by
     using the syntax ‘.+2d/3d’, which says that you want to do the task
     at least every three days, but at most every two days.
  6. You must also have state logging for the ‘DONE’ state enabled
     (*note Tracking TODO state changes::), in order for historical data
     to be represented in the consistency graph.  If it is not enabled
     it is not an error, but the consistency graphs will be largely
     meaningless.

   To give you an idea of what the above rules look like in action,
here’s an actual habit with some history:

     ** TODO Shave
        SCHEDULED: <2009-10-17 Sat .+2d/4d>
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-10-15 Thu]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-10-12 Mon]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-10-10 Sat]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-10-04 Sun]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-10-02 Fri]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-09-29 Tue]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-09-25 Fri]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-09-19 Sat]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-09-16 Wed]
        - State "DONE"       from "TODO"       [2009-09-12 Sat]
        :PROPERTIES:
        :STYLE:    habit
        :LAST_REPEAT: [2009-10-19 Mon 00:36]
        :END:

   What this habit says is: I want to shave at most every 2 days (given
by the ‘SCHEDULED’ date and repeat interval) and at least every 4 days.
If today is the 15th, then the habit first appears in the agenda on Oct
17, after the minimum of 2 days has elapsed, and will appear overdue on
Oct 19, after four days have elapsed.

   What’s really useful about habits is that they are displayed along
with a consistency graph, to show how consistent you’ve been at getting
that task done in the past.  This graph shows every day that the task
was done over the past three weeks, with colors for each day.  The
colors used are:

‘Blue’
     If the task wasn’t to be done yet on that day.
‘Green’
     If the task could have been done on that day.
‘Yellow’
     If the task was going to be overdue the next day.
‘Red’
     If the task was overdue on that day.

   In addition to coloring each day, the day is also marked with an
asterisk if the task was actually done that day, and an exclamation mark
to show where the current day falls in the graph.

   There are several configuration variables that can be used to change
the way habits are displayed in the agenda.

‘org-habit-graph-column’
     The buffer column at which the consistency graph should be drawn.
     This will overwrite any text in that column, so it is a good idea
     to keep your habits’ titles brief and to the point.
‘org-habit-preceding-days’
     The amount of history, in days before today, to appear in
     consistency graphs.
‘org-habit-following-days’
     The number of days after today that will appear in consistency
     graphs.
‘org-habit-show-habits-only-for-today’
     If non-‘nil’, only show habits in today’s agenda view.  This is set
     to true by default.

   Lastly, pressing ‘K’ in the agenda buffer will cause habits to
temporarily be disabled and they won’t appear at all.  Press ‘K’ again
to bring them back.  They are also subject to tag filtering, if you have
habits which should only be done in certain contexts, for example.


File: org.info,  Node: Priorities,  Next: Breaking down tasks,  Prev: Progress logging,  Up: TODO Items

5.4 Priorities
==============

If you use Org mode extensively, you may end up with enough TODO items
that it starts to make sense to prioritize them.  Prioritizing can be
done by placing a _priority cookie_ into the headline of a TODO item,
like this

     *** TODO [#A] Write letter to Sam Fortune

By default, Org mode supports three priorities: ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’.  ‘A’
is the highest priority.  An entry without a cookie is treated just like
priority ‘B’.  Priorities make a difference only for sorting in the
agenda (*note Weekly/daily agenda::); outside the agenda, they have no
inherent meaning to Org mode.  The cookies can be highlighted with
special faces by customizing ‘org-priority-faces’.

   Priorities can be attached to any outline node; they do not need to
be TODO items.

‘C-c ,’
     Set the priority of the current headline (‘org-priority’).  The
     command prompts for a priority character ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘C’.  When you
     press <SPC> instead, the priority cookie is removed from the
     headline.  The priorities can also be changed “remotely” from the
     timeline and agenda buffer with the ‘,’ command (*note Agenda
     commands::).
‘S-<up>     (org-priority-up)’
‘S-<down>     (org-priority-down)’
     Increase/decrease priority of current headline(1).  Note that these
     keys are also used to modify timestamps (*note Creating
     timestamps::).  See also *note Conflicts::, for a discussion of the
     interaction with ‘shift-selection-mode’.

   You can change the range of allowed priorities by setting the options
‘org-highest-priority’, ‘org-lowest-priority’, and
‘org-default-priority’.  For an individual buffer, you may set these
values (highest, lowest, default) like this (please make sure that the
highest priority is earlier in the alphabet than the lowest priority):

     #+PRIORITIES: A C B

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See also the option ‘org-priority-start-cycle-with-default’.


File: org.info,  Node: Breaking down tasks,  Next: Checkboxes,  Prev: Priorities,  Up: TODO Items

5.5 Breaking tasks down into subtasks
=====================================

It is often advisable to break down large tasks into smaller, manageable
subtasks.  You can do this by creating an outline tree below a TODO
item, with detailed subtasks on the tree(1).  To keep the overview over
the fraction of subtasks that are already completed, insert either ‘[/]’
or ‘[%]’ anywhere in the headline.  These cookies will be updated each
time the TODO status of a child changes, or when pressing ‘C-c C-c’ on
the cookie.  For example:

     * Organize Party [33%]
     ** TODO Call people [1/2]
     *** TODO Peter
     *** DONE Sarah
     ** TODO Buy food
     ** DONE Talk to neighbor

   If a heading has both checkboxes and TODO children below it, the
meaning of the statistics cookie become ambiguous.  Set the property
‘COOKIE_DATA’ to either ‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve this issue.

   If you would like to have the statistics cookie count any TODO
entries in the subtree (not just direct children), configure
‘org-hierarchical-todo-statistics’.  To do this for a single subtree,
include the word ‘recursive’ into the value of the ‘COOKIE_DATA’
property.

     * Parent capturing statistics [2/20]
       :PROPERTIES:
       :COOKIE_DATA: todo recursive
       :END:

   If you would like a TODO entry to automatically change to DONE when
all children are done, you can use the following setup:

     (defun org-summary-todo (n-done n-not-done)
       "Switch entry to DONE when all subentries are done, to TODO otherwise."
       (let (org-log-done org-log-states)   ; turn off logging
         (org-todo (if (= n-not-done 0) "DONE" "TODO"))))

     (add-hook 'org-after-todo-statistics-hook 'org-summary-todo)

   Another possibility is the use of checkboxes to identify (a hierarchy
of) a large number of subtasks (*note Checkboxes::).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) To keep subtasks out of the global TODO list, see the
‘org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels’.


File: org.info,  Node: Checkboxes,  Prev: Breaking down tasks,  Up: TODO Items

5.6 Checkboxes
==============

Every item in a plain list(1) (*note Plain lists::) can be made into a
checkbox by starting it with the string ‘[ ]’.  This feature is similar
to TODO items (*note TODO Items::), but is more lightweight.  Checkboxes
are not included in the global TODO list, so they are often great to
split a task into a number of simple steps.  Or you can use them in a
shopping list.  To toggle a checkbox, use ‘C-c C-c’, or use the mouse
(thanks to Piotr Zielinski’s ‘org-mouse.el’).

   Here is an example of a checkbox list.

     * TODO Organize party [2/4]
       - [-] call people [1/3]
         - [ ] Peter
         - [X] Sarah
         - [ ] Sam
       - [X] order food
       - [ ] think about what music to play
       - [X] talk to the neighbors

   Checkboxes work hierarchically, so if a checkbox item has children
that are checkboxes, toggling one of the children checkboxes will make
the parent checkbox reflect if none, some, or all of the children are
checked.

   The ‘[2/4]’ and ‘[1/3]’ in the first and second line are cookies
indicating how many checkboxes present in this entry have been checked
off, and the total number of checkboxes present.  This can give you an
idea on how many checkboxes remain, even without opening a folded entry.
The cookies can be placed into a headline or into (the first line of) a
plain list item.  Each cookie covers checkboxes of direct children
structurally below the headline/item on which the cookie appears(2).
You have to insert the cookie yourself by typing either ‘[/]’ or ‘[%]’.
With ‘[/]’ you get an ‘n out of m’ result, as in the examples above.
With ‘[%]’ you get information about the percentage of checkboxes
checked (in the above example, this would be ‘[50%]’ and ‘[33%]’,
respectively).  In a headline, a cookie can count either checkboxes
below the heading or TODO states of children, and it will display
whatever was changed last.  Set the property ‘COOKIE_DATA’ to either
‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve this issue.

   If the current outline node has an ‘ORDERED’ property, checkboxes
must be checked off in sequence, and an error will be thrown if you try
to check off a box while there are unchecked boxes above it.

The following commands work with checkboxes:

‘C-c C-c     (org-toggle-checkbox)’
     Toggle checkbox status or (with prefix arg) checkbox presence at
     point.  With a single prefix argument, add an empty checkbox or
     remove the current one(3).  With a double prefix argument, set it
     to ‘[-]’, which is considered to be an intermediate state.
‘C-c C-x C-b     (org-toggle-checkbox)’
     Toggle checkbox status or (with prefix arg) checkbox presence at
     point.  With double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’, which is
     considered to be an intermediate state.
        − If there is an active region, toggle the first checkbox in the
          region and set all remaining boxes to the same status as the
          first.  With a prefix arg, add or remove the checkbox for all
          items in the region.
        − If the cursor is in a headline, toggle checkboxes in the
          region between this headline and the next (so _not_ the entire
          subtree).
        − If there is no active region, just toggle the checkbox at
          point.
‘M-S-<RET>     (org-insert-todo-heading)’
     Insert a new item with a checkbox.  This works only if the cursor
     is already in a plain list item (*note Plain lists::).
‘C-c C-x o     (org-toggle-ordered-property)’
     Toggle the ‘ORDERED’ property of the entry, to toggle if checkboxes
     must be checked off in sequence.  A property is used for this
     behavior because this should be local to the current entry, not
     inherited like a tag.  However, if you would like to track the
     value of this property with a tag for better visibility, customize
     ‘org-track-ordered-property-with-tag’.
‘C-c #     (org-update-statistics-cookies)’
     Update the statistics cookie in the current outline entry.  When
     called with a ‘C-u’ prefix, update the entire file.  Checkbox
     statistic cookies are updated automatically if you toggle
     checkboxes with ‘C-c C-c’ and make new ones with ‘M-S-<RET>’.  TODO
     statistics cookies update when changing TODO states.  If you delete
     boxes/entries or add/change them by hand, use this command to get
     things back into sync.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) With the exception of description lists.  But you can allow it by
modifying ‘org-list-automatic-rules’ accordingly.

   (2) Set the option ‘org-checkbox-hierarchical-statistics’ if you want
such cookies to count all checkboxes below the cookie, not just those
belonging to direct children.

   (3) ‘C-u C-c C-c’ on the _first_ item of a list with no checkbox will
add checkboxes to the rest of the list.


File: org.info,  Node: Tags,  Next: Properties and Columns,  Prev: TODO Items,  Up: Top

6 Tags
******

An excellent way to implement labels and contexts for cross-correlating
information is to assign tags to headlines.  Org mode has extensive
support for tags.

   Every headline can contain a list of tags; they occur at the end of
the headline.  Tags are normal words containing letters, numbers, ‘_’,
and ‘@’.  Tags must be preceded and followed by a single colon, e.g.,
‘:work:’.  Several tags can be specified, as in ‘:work:urgent:’.  Tags
will by default be in bold face with the same color as the headline.
You may specify special faces for specific tags using the option
‘org-tag-faces’, in much the same way as you can for TODO keywords
(*note Faces for TODO keywords::).

* Menu:

* Tag inheritance::             Tags use the tree structure of the outline
* Setting tags::                How to assign tags to a headline
* Tag groups::                  Use one tag to search for several tags
* Tag searches::                Searching for combinations of tags


File: org.info,  Node: Tag inheritance,  Next: Setting tags,  Prev: Tags,  Up: Tags

6.1 Tag inheritance
===================

Tags make use of the hierarchical structure of outline trees.  If a
heading has a certain tag, all subheadings will inherit the tag as well.
For example, in the list

     * Meeting with the French group      :work:
     ** Summary by Frank                  :boss:notes:
     *** TODO Prepare slides for him      :action:

the final heading will have the tags ‘:work:’, ‘:boss:’, ‘:notes:’, and
‘:action:’ even though the final heading is not explicitly marked with
those tags.  You can also set tags that all entries in a file should
inherit just as if these tags were defined in a hypothetical level zero
that surrounds the entire file.  Use a line like this(1):

     #+FILETAGS: :Peter:Boss:Secret:

To limit tag inheritance to specific tags, use
‘org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance’.  To turn it off entirely, use
‘org-use-tag-inheritance’.

   When a headline matches during a tags search while tag inheritance is
turned on, all the sublevels in the same tree will (for a simple match
form) match as well(2).  The list of matches may then become very long.
If you only want to see the first tags match in a subtree, configure
‘org-tags-match-list-sublevels’ (not recommended).

   Tag inheritance is relevant when the agenda search tries to match a
tag, either in the ‘tags’ or ‘tags-todo’ agenda types.  In other agenda
types, ‘org-use-tag-inheritance’ has no effect.  Still, you may want to
have your tags correctly set in the agenda, so that tag filtering works
fine, with inherited tags.  Set ‘org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance’ to
control this: the default value includes all agenda types, but setting
this to ‘nil’ can really speed up agenda generation.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) As with all these in-buffer settings, pressing ‘C-c C-c’
activates any changes in the line.

   (2) This is only true if the search does not involve more complex
tests including properties (*note Property searches::).


File: org.info,  Node: Setting tags,  Next: Tag groups,  Prev: Tag inheritance,  Up: Tags

6.2 Setting tags
================

Tags can simply be typed into the buffer at the end of a headline.
After a colon, ‘M-<TAB>’ offers completion on tags.  There is also a
special command for inserting tags:

‘C-c C-q     (org-set-tags-command)’
     Enter new tags for the current headline.  Org mode will either
     offer completion or a special single-key interface for setting
     tags, see below.  After pressing <RET>, the tags will be inserted
     and aligned to ‘org-tags-column’.  When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix,
     all tags in the current buffer will be aligned to that column, just
     to make things look nice.  TAGS are automatically realigned after
     promotion, demotion, and TODO state changes (*note TODO basics::).

‘C-c C-c     (org-set-tags-command)’
     When the cursor is in a headline, this does the same as ‘C-c C-q’.

   Org supports tag insertion based on a _list of tags_.  By default
this list is constructed dynamically, containing all tags currently used
in the buffer.  You may also globally specify a hard list of tags with
the variable ‘org-tag-alist’.  Finally you can set the default tags for
a given file with lines like

     #+TAGS: @work @home @tennisclub
     #+TAGS: laptop car pc sailboat

   If you have globally defined your preferred set of tags using the
variable ‘org-tag-alist’, but would like to use a dynamic tag list in a
specific file, add an empty TAGS option line to that file:

     #+TAGS:

   If you have a preferred set of tags that you would like to use in
every file, in addition to those defined on a per-file basis by TAGS
option lines, then you may specify a list of tags with the variable
‘org-tag-persistent-alist’.  You may turn this off on a per-file basis
by adding a STARTUP option line to that file:

     #+STARTUP: noptag

   By default Org mode uses the standard minibuffer completion
facilities for entering tags.  However, it also implements another,
quicker, tag selection method called _fast tag selection_.  This allows
you to select and deselect tags with just a single key press.  For this
to work well you should assign unique letters to most of your commonly
used tags.  You can do this globally by configuring the variable
‘org-tag-alist’ in your ‘.emacs’ file.  For example, you may find the
need to tag many items in different files with ‘:@home:’.  In this case
you can set something like:

     (setq org-tag-alist '(("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h) ("laptop" . ?l)))

If the tag is only relevant to the file you are working on, then you can
instead set the TAGS option line as:

     #+TAGS: @work(w)  @home(h)  @tennisclub(t)  laptop(l)  pc(p)

The tags interface will show the available tags in a splash window.  If
you want to start a new line after a specific tag, insert ‘\n’ into the
tag list

     #+TAGS: @work(w)  @home(h)  @tennisclub(t) \n laptop(l)  pc(p)

or write them in two lines:

     #+TAGS: @work(w)  @home(h)  @tennisclub(t)
     #+TAGS: laptop(l)  pc(p)

You can also group together tags that are mutually exclusive by using
braces, as in:

     #+TAGS: { @work(w)  @home(h)  @tennisclub(t) }  laptop(l)  pc(p)

you indicate that at most one of ‘@work’, ‘@home’, and ‘@tennisclub’
should be selected.  Multiple such groups are allowed.

Don’t forget to press ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor in one of these lines to
activate any changes.

To set these mutually exclusive groups in the variable ‘org-tag-alist’,
you must use the dummy tags ‘:startgroup’ and ‘:endgroup’ instead of the
braces.  Similarly, you can use ‘:newline’ to indicate a line break.
The previous example would be set globally by the following
configuration:

     (setq org-tag-alist '((:startgroup . nil)
                           ("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h)
                           ("@tennisclub" . ?t)
                           (:endgroup . nil)
                           ("laptop" . ?l) ("pc" . ?p)))

   If at least one tag has a selection key then pressing ‘C-c C-c’ will
automatically present you with a special interface, listing inherited
tags, the tags of the current headline, and a list of all valid tags
with corresponding keys(1).  In this interface, you can use the
following keys:

‘a-z...’
     Pressing keys assigned to tags will add or remove them from the
     list of tags in the current line.  Selecting a tag in a group of
     mutually exclusive tags will turn off any other tags from that
     group.
‘<TAB>’
     Enter a tag in the minibuffer, even if the tag is not in the
     predefined list.  You will be able to complete on all tags present
     in the buffer.  You can also add several tags: just separate them
     with a comma.

‘<SPC>’
     Clear all tags for this line.
‘<RET>’
     Accept the modified set.
‘C-g’
     Abort without installing changes.
‘q’
     If ‘q’ is not assigned to a tag, it aborts like ‘C-g’.
‘!’
     Turn off groups of mutually exclusive tags.  Use this to (as an
     exception) assign several tags from such a group.
‘C-c’
     Toggle auto-exit after the next change (see below).  If you are
     using expert mode, the first ‘C-c’ will display the selection
     window.

This method lets you assign tags to a headline with very few keys.  With
the above setup, you could clear the current tags and set ‘@home’,
‘laptop’ and ‘pc’ tags with just the following keys: ‘C-c C-c <SPC> h l
p <RET>’.  Switching from ‘@home’ to ‘@work’ would be done with ‘C-c C-c
w <RET>’ or alternatively with ‘C-c C-c C-c w’.  Adding the
non-predefined tag ‘Sarah’ could be done with ‘C-c C-c <TAB> S a r a h
<RET> <RET>’.

   If you find that most of the time you need only a single key press to
modify your list of tags, set ‘org-fast-tag-selection-single-key’.  Then
you no longer have to press <RET> to exit fast tag selection—it will
immediately exit after the first change.  If you then occasionally need
more keys, press ‘C-c’ to turn off auto-exit for the current tag
selection process (in effect: start selection with ‘C-c C-c C-c’ instead
of ‘C-c C-c’).  If you set the variable to the value ‘expert’, the
special window is not even shown for single-key tag selection, it comes
up only when you press an extra ‘C-c’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Keys will automatically be assigned to tags which have no
configured keys.


File: org.info,  Node: Tag groups,  Next: Tag searches,  Prev: Setting tags,  Up: Tags

6.3 Tag groups
==============

In a set of mutually exclusive tags, the first tag can be defined as a
_group tag_.  When you search for a group tag, it will return matches
for all members in the group.  In an agenda view, filtering by a group
tag will display headlines tagged with at least one of the members of
the group.  This makes tag searches and filters even more flexible.

   You can set group tags by inserting a colon between the group tag and
other tags—beware that all whitespaces are mandatory so that Org can
parse this line correctly:

     #+TAGS: { @read : @read_book @read_ebook }

   In this example, ‘@read’ is a _group tag_ for a set of three tags:
‘@read’, ‘@read_book’ and ‘@read_ebook’.

   You can also use the ‘:grouptags’ keyword directly when setting
‘org-tag-alist’:

     (setq org-tag-alist '((:startgroup . nil)
                           ("@read" . nil)
                           (:grouptags . nil)
                           ("@read_book" . nil)
                           ("@read_ebook" . nil)
                           (:endgroup . nil)))

   You cannot nest group tags or use a group tag as a tag in another
group.

   If you want to ignore group tags temporarily, toggle group tags
support with ‘org-toggle-tags-groups’, bound to ‘C-c C-x q’.  If you
want to disable tag groups completely, set ‘org-group-tags’ to ‘nil’.


File: org.info,  Node: Tag searches,  Prev: Tag groups,  Up: Tags

6.4 Tag searches
================

Once a system of tags has been set up, it can be used to collect related
information into special lists.

‘C-c / m  or  C-c \     (org-match-sparse-tree)’
     Create a sparse tree with all headlines matching a
     tags/property/TODO search.  With a ‘C-u’ prefix argument, ignore
     headlines that are not a TODO line.  *Note Matching tags and
     properties::.
‘C-c a m     (org-tags-view)’
     Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files.  *Note
     Matching tags and properties::.
‘C-c a M     (org-tags-view)’
     Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but
     check only TODO items and force checking subitems (see the option
     ‘org-tags-match-list-sublevels’).

   These commands all prompt for a match string which allows basic
Boolean logic like ‘+boss+urgent-project1’, to find entries with tags
‘boss’ and ‘urgent’, but not ‘project1’, or ‘Kathy|Sally’ to find
entries which are tagged, like ‘Kathy’ or ‘Sally’.  The full syntax of
the search string is rich and allows also matching against TODO
keywords, entry levels and properties.  For a complete description with
many examples, see *note Matching tags and properties::.


File: org.info,  Node: Properties and Columns,  Next: Dates and Times,  Prev: Tags,  Up: Top

7 Properties and columns
************************

A property is a key-value pair associated with an entry.  Properties can
be set so they are associated with a single entry, with every entry in a
tree, or with every entry in an Org mode file.

   There are two main applications for properties in Org mode.  First,
properties are like tags, but with a value.  Imagine maintaining a file
where you document bugs and plan releases for a piece of software.
Instead of using tags like ‘:release_1:’, ‘:release_2:’, you can use a
property, say ‘:Release:’, that in different subtrees has different
values, such as ‘1.0’ or ‘2.0’.  Second, you can use properties to
implement (very basic) database capabilities in an Org buffer.  Imagine
keeping track of your music CDs, where properties could be things such
as the album, artist, date of release, number of tracks, and so on.

   Properties can be conveniently edited and viewed in column view
(*note Column view::).

* Menu:

* Property syntax::             How properties are spelled out
* Special properties::          Access to other Org mode features
* Property searches::           Matching property values
* Property inheritance::        Passing values down the tree
* Column view::                 Tabular viewing and editing
* Property API::                Properties for Lisp programmers


File: org.info,  Node: Property syntax,  Next: Special properties,  Prev: Properties and Columns,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.1 Property syntax
===================

Properties are key-value pairs.  When they are associated with a single
entry or with a tree they need to be inserted into a special drawer
(*note Drawers::) with the name ‘PROPERTIES’.  Each property is
specified on a single line, with the key (surrounded by colons) first,
and the value after it.  Here is an example:

     * CD collection
     ** Classic
     *** Goldberg Variations
         :PROPERTIES:
         :Title:     Goldberg Variations
         :Composer:  J.S. Bach
         :Artist:    Glen Gould
         :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon
         :NDisks:    1
         :END:

   Depending on the value of ‘org-use-property-inheritance’, a property
set this way will either be associated with a single entry, or the
sub-tree defined by the entry, see *note Property inheritance::.

   You may define the allowed values for a particular property ‘:Xyz:’
by setting a property ‘:Xyz_ALL:’.  This special property is
_inherited_, so if you set it in a level 1 entry, it will apply to the
entire tree.  When allowed values are defined, setting the corresponding
property becomes easier and is less prone to typing errors.  For the
example with the CD collection, we can predefine publishers and the
number of disks in a box like this:

     * CD collection
       :PROPERTIES:
       :NDisks_ALL:  1 2 3 4
       :Publisher_ALL: "Deutsche Grammophon" Philips EMI
       :END:

   If you want to set properties that can be inherited by any entry in a
file, use a line like
     #+PROPERTY: NDisks_ALL 1 2 3 4

   Contrary to properties set from a special drawer, you have to refresh
the buffer with ‘C-c C-c’ to activate this changes.

   If you want to add to the value of an existing property, append a ‘+’
to the property name.  The following results in the property ‘var’
having the value “foo=1 bar=2”.
     #+PROPERTY: var  foo=1
     #+PROPERTY: var+ bar=2

   It is also possible to add to the values of inherited properties.
The following results in the ‘genres’ property having the value “Classic
Baroque” under the ‘Goldberg Variations’ subtree.
     * CD collection
     ** Classic
         :PROPERTIES:
         :GENRES: Classic
         :END:
     *** Goldberg Variations
         :PROPERTIES:
         :Title:     Goldberg Variations
         :Composer:  J.S. Bach
         :Artist:    Glen Gould
         :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon
         :NDisks:    1
         :GENRES+:   Baroque
         :END:
   Note that a property can only have one entry per Drawer.

   Property values set with the global variable ‘org-global-properties’
can be inherited by all entries in all Org files.

The following commands help to work with properties:

‘M-<TAB>     (pcomplete)’
     After an initial colon in a line, complete property keys.  All keys
     used in the current file will be offered as possible completions.
‘C-c C-x p     (org-set-property)’
     Set a property.  This prompts for a property name and a value.  If
     necessary, the property drawer is created as well.
‘C-u M-x org-insert-drawer RET’
     Insert a property drawer into the current entry.  The drawer will
     be inserted early in the entry, but after the lines with planning
     information like deadlines.
‘C-c C-c     (org-property-action)’
     With the cursor in a property drawer, this executes property
     commands.
‘C-c C-c s     (org-set-property)’
     Set a property in the current entry.  Both the property and the
     value can be inserted using completion.
‘S-<right>     (org-property-next-allowed-value)’
‘S-<left>     (org-property-previous-allowed-value)’
     Switch property at point to the next/previous allowed value.
‘C-c C-c d     (org-delete-property)’
     Remove a property from the current entry.
‘C-c C-c D     (org-delete-property-globally)’
     Globally remove a property, from all entries in the current file.
‘C-c C-c c     (org-compute-property-at-point)’
     Compute the property at point, using the operator and scope from
     the nearest column format definition.


File: org.info,  Node: Special properties,  Next: Property searches,  Prev: Property syntax,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.2 Special properties
======================

Special properties provide an alternative access method to Org mode
features, like the TODO state or the priority of an entry, discussed in
the previous chapters.  This interface exists so that you can include
these states in a column view (*note Column view::), or to use them in
queries.  The following property names are special and (except for
‘:CATEGORY:’) should not be used as keys in the properties drawer:

     ID           A globally unique ID used for synchronization during
                  iCalendar or MobileOrg export.
     TODO         The TODO keyword of the entry.
     TAGS         The tags defined directly in the headline.
     ALLTAGS      All tags, including inherited ones.
     CATEGORY     The category of an entry.
     PRIORITY     The priority of the entry, a string with a single letter.
     DEADLINE     The deadline time string, without the angular brackets.
     SCHEDULED    The scheduling timestamp, without the angular brackets.
     CLOSED       When was this entry closed?
     TIMESTAMP    The first keyword-less timestamp in the entry.
     TIMESTAMP_IA The first inactive timestamp in the entry.
     CLOCKSUM     The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree.  ‘org-clock-sum’
                  must be run first to compute the values in the current buffer.
     CLOCKSUM_T   The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree for today.
                  ‘org-clock-sum-today’ must be run first to compute the
                  values in the current buffer.
     BLOCKED      "t" if task is currently blocked by children or siblings
     ITEM         The headline of the entry.
     FILE         The filename the entry is located in.


File: org.info,  Node: Property searches,  Next: Property inheritance,  Prev: Special properties,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.3 Property searches
=====================

To create sparse trees and special lists with selection based on
properties, the same commands are used as for tag searches (*note Tag
searches::).

‘C-c / m  or  C-c \     (org-match-sparse-tree)’
     Create a sparse tree with all matching entries.  With a ‘C-u’
     prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line.
‘C-c a m     (org-tags-view)’
     Create a global list of tag/property matches from all agenda files.
     *Note Matching tags and properties::.
‘C-c a M     (org-tags-view)’
     Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but
     check only TODO items and force checking of subitems (see the
     option ‘org-tags-match-list-sublevels’).

   The syntax for the search string is described in *note Matching tags
and properties::.

   There is also a special command for creating sparse trees based on a
single property:

‘C-c / p’
     Create a sparse tree based on the value of a property.  This first
     prompts for the name of a property, and then for a value.  A sparse
     tree is created with all entries that define this property with the
     given value.  If you enclose the value in curly braces, it is
     interpreted as a regular expression and matched against the
     property values.


File: org.info,  Node: Property inheritance,  Next: Column view,  Prev: Property searches,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.4 Property Inheritance
========================

The outline structure of Org mode documents lends itself to an
inheritance model of properties: if the parent in a tree has a certain
property, the children can inherit this property.  Org mode does not
turn this on by default, because it can slow down property searches
significantly and is often not needed.  However, if you find inheritance
useful, you can turn it on by setting the variable
‘org-use-property-inheritance’.  It may be set to ‘t’ to make all
properties inherited from the parent, to a list of properties that
should be inherited, or to a regular expression that matches inherited
properties.  If a property has the value ‘nil’, this is interpreted as
an explicit undefine of the property, so that inheritance search will
stop at this value and return ‘nil’.

   Org mode has a few properties for which inheritance is hard-coded, at
least for the special applications for which they are used:

‘COLUMNS’
     The ‘:COLUMNS:’ property defines the format of column view (*note
     Column view::).  It is inherited in the sense that the level where
     a ‘:COLUMNS:’ property is defined is used as the starting point for
     a column view table, independently of the location in the subtree
     from where columns view is turned on.
‘CATEGORY’
     For agenda view, a category set through a ‘:CATEGORY:’ property
     applies to the entire subtree.
‘ARCHIVE’
     For archiving, the ‘:ARCHIVE:’ property may define the archive
     location for the entire subtree (*note Moving subtrees::).
‘LOGGING’
     The LOGGING property may define logging settings for an entry or a
     subtree (*note Tracking TODO state changes::).


File: org.info,  Node: Column view,  Next: Property API,  Prev: Property inheritance,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.5 Column view
===============

A great way to view and edit properties in an outline tree is _column
view_.  In column view, each outline node is turned into a table row.
Columns in this table provide access to properties of the entries.  Org
mode implements columns by overlaying a tabular structure over the
headline of each item.  While the headlines have been turned into a
table row, you can still change the visibility of the outline tree.  For
example, you get a compact table by switching to CONTENTS view (‘S-<TAB>
S-<TAB>’, or simply ‘c’ while column view is active), but you can still
open, read, and edit the entry below each headline.  Or, you can switch
to column view after executing a sparse tree command and in this way get
a table only for the selected items.  Column view also works in agenda
buffers (*note Agenda Views::) where queries have collected selected
items, possibly from a number of files.

* Menu:

* Defining columns::            The COLUMNS format property
* Using column view::           How to create and use column view
* Capturing column view::       A dynamic block for column view


File: org.info,  Node: Defining columns,  Next: Using column view,  Prev: Column view,  Up: Column view

7.5.1 Defining columns
----------------------

Setting up a column view first requires defining the columns.  This is
done by defining a column format line.

* Menu:

* Scope of column definitions::  Where defined, where valid?
* Column attributes::           Appearance and content of a column


File: org.info,  Node: Scope of column definitions,  Next: Column attributes,  Prev: Defining columns,  Up: Defining columns

7.5.1.1 Scope of column definitions
...................................

To define a column format for an entire file, use a line like

     #+COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO

   To specify a format that only applies to a specific tree, add a
‘:COLUMNS:’ property to the top node of that tree, for example:

     ** Top node for columns view
        :PROPERTIES:
        :COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO
        :END:

   If a ‘:COLUMNS:’ property is present in an entry, it defines columns
for the entry itself, and for the entire subtree below it.  Since the
column definition is part of the hierarchical structure of the document,
you can define columns on level 1 that are general enough for all
sublevels, and more specific columns further down, when you edit a
deeper part of the tree.


File: org.info,  Node: Column attributes,  Prev: Scope of column definitions,  Up: Defining columns

7.5.1.2 Column attributes
.........................

A column definition sets the attributes of a column.  The general
definition looks like this:

      %[WIDTH]PROPERTY[(TITLE)][{SUMMARY-TYPE}]

Except for the percent sign and the property name, all items are
optional.  The individual parts have the following meaning:

     WIDTH           An integer specifying the width of the column in characters.
                     If omitted, the width will be determined automatically.
     PROPERTY        The property that should be edited in this column.
                     Special properties representing meta data are allowed here
                     as well (*note Special properties::)
     TITLE           The header text for the column.  If omitted, the property
                     name is used.
     {SUMMARY-TYPE}  The summary type.  If specified, the column values for
                     parent nodes are computed from the children.
                     Supported summary types are:
                     {+}       Sum numbers in this column.
                     {+;%.1f}  Like ‘+’, but format result with ‘%.1f’.
                     {$}       Currency, short for ‘+;%.2f’.
                     {:}       Sum times, HH:MM, plain numbers are hours.
                     {X}       Checkbox status, ‘[X]’ if all children are ‘[X]’.
                     {X/}      Checkbox status, ‘[n/m]’.
                     {X%}      Checkbox status, ‘[n%]’.
                     {min}     Smallest number in column.
                     {max}     Largest number.
                     {mean}    Arithmetic mean of numbers.
                     {:min}    Smallest time value in column.
                     {:max}    Largest time value.
                     {:mean}   Arithmetic mean of time values.
                     {@min}    Minimum age (in days/hours/mins/seconds).
                     {@max}    Maximum age (in days/hours/mins/seconds).
                     {@mean}   Arithmetic mean of ages (in days/hours/mins/seconds).
                     {est+}    Add low-high estimates.

Be aware that you can only have one summary type for any property you
include.  Subsequent columns referencing the same property will all
display the same summary information.

   The ‘est+’ summary type requires further explanation.  It is used for
combining estimates, expressed as low-high ranges.  For example, instead
of estimating a particular task will take 5 days, you might estimate it
as 5–6 days if you’re fairly confident you know how much work is
required, or 1–10 days if you don’t really know what needs to be done.
Both ranges average at 5.5 days, but the first represents a more
predictable delivery.

   When combining a set of such estimates, simply adding the lows and
highs produces an unrealistically wide result.  Instead, ‘est+’ adds the
statistical mean and variance of the sub-tasks, generating a final
estimate from the sum.  For example, suppose you had ten tasks, each of
which was estimated at 0.5 to 2 days of work.  Straight addition
produces an estimate of 5 to 20 days, representing what to expect if
everything goes either extremely well or extremely poorly.  In contrast,
‘est+’ estimates the full job more realistically, at 10–15 days.

   Numbers are right-aligned when a format specifier with an explicit
width like ‘%5d’ or ‘%5.1f’ is used.

   Here is an example for a complete columns definition, along with
allowed values.

     :COLUMNS:  %25ITEM %9Approved(Approved?){X} %Owner %11Status \(1)
                        %10Time_Estimate{:} %CLOCKSUM %CLOCKSUM_T
     :Owner_ALL:    Tammy Mark Karl Lisa Don
     :Status_ALL:   "In progress" "Not started yet" "Finished" ""
     :Approved_ALL: "[ ]" "[X]"

The first column, ‘%25ITEM’, means the first 25 characters of the item
itself, i.e., of the headline.  You probably always should start the
column definition with the ‘ITEM’ specifier.  The other specifiers
create columns ‘Owner’ with a list of names as allowed values, for
‘Status’ with four different possible values, and for a checkbox field
‘Approved’.  When no width is given after the ‘%’ character, the column
will be exactly as wide as it needs to be in order to fully display all
values.  The ‘Approved’ column does have a modified title (‘Approved?’,
with a question mark).  Summaries will be created for the
‘Time_Estimate’ column by adding time duration expressions like HH:MM,
and for the ‘Approved’ column, by providing an ‘[X]’ status if all
children have been checked.  The ‘CLOCKSUM’ and ‘CLOCKSUM_T’ columns are
special, they lists the sums of CLOCK intervals in the subtree, either
for all clocks or just for today.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Please note that the COLUMNS definition must be on a single
line—it is wrapped here only because of formatting constraints.


File: org.info,  Node: Using column view,  Next: Capturing column view,  Prev: Defining columns,  Up: Column view

7.5.2 Using column view
-----------------------

     Turning column view on and off
     ..............................

‘C-c C-x C-c     (org-columns)’
     Turn on column view.  If the cursor is before the first headline in
     the file, column view is turned on for the entire file, using the
     ‘#+COLUMNS’ definition.  If the cursor is somewhere inside the
     outline, this command searches the hierarchy, up from point, for a
     ‘:COLUMNS:’ property that defines a format.  When one is found, the
     column view table is established for the tree starting at the entry
     that contains the ‘:COLUMNS:’ property.  If no such property is
     found, the format is taken from the ‘#+COLUMNS’ line or from the
     variable ‘org-columns-default-format’, and column view is
     established for the current entry and its subtree.
‘r     (org-columns-redo)’
     Recreate the column view, to include recent changes made in the
     buffer.
‘g     (org-columns-redo)’
     Same as ‘r’.
‘q     (org-columns-quit)’
     Exit column view.

     Editing values
     ..............

‘<left> <right> <up> <down>’
     Move through the column view from field to field.
‘S-<left>/<right>’
     Switch to the next/previous allowed value of the field.  For this,
     you have to have specified allowed values for a property.
‘1..9,0’
     Directly select the Nth allowed value, ‘0’ selects the 10th value.
‘n     (org-columns-next-allowed-value)’
‘p     (org-columns-previous-allowed-value)’
     Same as ‘S-<left>/<right>’
‘e     (org-columns-edit-value)’
     Edit the property at point.  For the special properties, this will
     invoke the same interface that you normally use to change that
     property.  For example, when editing a TAGS property, the tag
     completion or fast selection interface will pop up.
‘C-c C-c     (org-columns-set-tags-or-toggle)’
     When there is a checkbox at point, toggle it.
‘v     (org-columns-show-value)’
     View the full value of this property.  This is useful if the width
     of the column is smaller than that of the value.
‘a     (org-columns-edit-allowed)’
     Edit the list of allowed values for this property.  If the list is
     found in the hierarchy, the modified values is stored there.  If no
     list is found, the new value is stored in the first entry that is
     part of the current column view.

     Modifying the table structure
     .............................

‘<     (org-columns-narrow)’
‘>     (org-columns-widen)’
     Make the column narrower/wider by one character.
‘S-M-<right>     (org-columns-new)’
     Insert a new column, to the left of the current column.
‘S-M-<left>     (org-columns-delete)’
     Delete the current column.


File: org.info,  Node: Capturing column view,  Prev: Using column view,  Up: Column view

7.5.3 Capturing column view
---------------------------

Since column view is just an overlay over a buffer, it cannot be
exported or printed directly.  If you want to capture a column view, use
a ‘columnview’ dynamic block (*note Dynamic blocks::).  The frame of
this block looks like this:

     * The column view
     #+BEGIN: columnview :hlines 1 :id "label"

     #+END:

This dynamic block has the following parameters:

‘:id’
     This is the most important parameter.  Column view is a feature
     that is often localized to a certain (sub)tree, and the capture
     block might be at a different location in the file.  To identify
     the tree whose view to capture, you can use 4 values:
          local     use the tree in which the capture block is located
          global    make a global view, including all headings in the file
          "file:PATH-TO-FILE"
                    run column view at the top of this file
          "ID"      call column view in the tree that has an ‘:ID:’
                    property with the value label.  You can use
                    ‘M-x org-id-copy RET’ to create a globally unique ID for
                    the current entry and copy it to the kill-ring.
‘:hlines’
     When ‘t’, insert an hline after every line.  When a number N,
     insert an hline before each headline with level ‘<= N’.
‘:vlines’
     When set to ‘t’, force column groups to get vertical lines.
‘:maxlevel’
     When set to a number, don’t capture entries below this level.
‘:skip-empty-rows’
     When set to ‘t’, skip rows where the only non-empty specifier of
     the column view is ‘ITEM’.

The following commands insert or update the dynamic block:

‘C-c C-x i     (org-insert-columns-dblock)’
     Insert a dynamic block capturing a column view.  You will be
     prompted for the scope or ID of the view.
‘C-c C-c  or  C-c C-x C-u     (org-dblock-update)’
     Update dynamic block at point.  The cursor needs to be in the
     ‘#+BEGIN’ line of the dynamic block.
‘C-u C-c C-x C-u     (org-update-all-dblocks)’
     Update all dynamic blocks (*note Dynamic blocks::).  This is useful
     if you have several clock table blocks, column-capturing blocks or
     other dynamic blocks in a buffer.

   You can add formulas to the column view table and you may add
plotting instructions in front of the table—these will survive an update
of the block.  If there is a ‘#+TBLFM:’ after the table, the table will
actually be recalculated automatically after an update.

   An alternative way to capture and process property values into a
table is provided by Eric Schulte’s ‘org-collector.el’ which is a
contributed package(1).  It provides a general API to collect properties
from entries in a certain scope, and arbitrary Lisp expressions to
process these values before inserting them into a table or a dynamic
block.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Contributed packages are not part of Emacs, but are distributed
with the main distribution of Org (visit <http://orgmode.org>).


File: org.info,  Node: Property API,  Prev: Column view,  Up: Properties and Columns

7.6 The Property API
====================

There is a full API for accessing and changing properties.  This API can
be used by Emacs Lisp programs to work with properties and to implement
features based on them.  For more information see *note Using the
property API::.


File: org.info,  Node: Dates and Times,  Next: Capture - Refile - Archive,  Prev: Properties and Columns,  Up: Top

8 Dates and times
*****************

To assist project planning, TODO items can be labeled with a date and/or
a time.  The specially formatted string carrying the date and time
information is called a _timestamp_ in Org mode.  This may be a little
confusing because timestamp is often used as indicating when something
was created or last changed.  However, in Org mode this term is used in
a much wider sense.

* Menu:

* Timestamps::                  Assigning a time to a tree entry
* Creating timestamps::         Commands which insert timestamps
* Deadlines and scheduling::    Planning your work
* Clocking work time::          Tracking how long you spend on a task
* Effort estimates::            Planning work effort in advance
* Relative timer::              Notes with a running timer
* Countdown timer::             Starting a countdown timer for a task


File: org.info,  Node: Timestamps,  Next: Creating timestamps,  Prev: Dates and Times,  Up: Dates and Times

8.1 Timestamps, deadlines, and scheduling
=========================================

A timestamp is a specification of a date (possibly with a time or a
range of times) in a special format, either ‘<2003-09-16 Tue>’(1) or
‘<2003-09-16 Tue 09:39>’ or ‘<2003-09-16 Tue 12:00-12:30>’(2).  A
timestamp can appear anywhere in the headline or body of an Org tree
entry.  Its presence causes entries to be shown on specific dates in the
agenda (*note Weekly/daily agenda::).  We distinguish:

PLAIN TIMESTAMP; EVENT; APPOINTMENT
     A simple timestamp just assigns a date/time to an item.  This is
     just like writing down an appointment or event in a paper agenda.
     In the timeline and agenda displays, the headline of an entry
     associated with a plain timestamp will be shown exactly on that
     date.

          * Meet Peter at the movies
            <2006-11-01 Wed 19:15>
          * Discussion on climate change
            <2006-11-02 Thu 20:00-22:00>

TIMESTAMP WITH REPEATER INTERVAL
     A timestamp may contain a _repeater interval_, indicating that it
     applies not only on the given date, but again and again after a
     certain interval of N days (d), weeks (w), months (m), or years
     (y).  The following will show up in the agenda every Wednesday:

          * Pick up Sam at school
            <2007-05-16 Wed 12:30 +1w>

DIARY-STYLE SEXP ENTRIES
     For more complex date specifications, Org mode supports using the
     special sexp diary entries implemented in the Emacs calendar/diary
     package(3).  For example with optional time

          * 22:00-23:00 The nerd meeting on every 2nd Thursday of the month
            <%%(diary-float t 4 2)>

TIME/DATE RANGE
     Two timestamps connected by ‘--’ denote a range.  The headline will
     be shown on the first and last day of the range, and on any dates
     that are displayed and fall in the range.  Here is an example:

          ** Meeting in Amsterdam
             <2004-08-23 Mon>--<2004-08-26 Thu>

INACTIVE TIMESTAMP
     Just like a plain timestamp, but with square brackets instead of
     angular ones.  These timestamps are inactive in the sense that they
     do _not_ trigger an entry to show up in the agenda.

          * Gillian comes late for the fifth time
            [2006-11-01 Wed]

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) In this simplest form, the day name is optional when you type the
date yourself.  However, any dates inserted or modified by Org will add
that day name, for reading convenience.

   (2) This is inspired by the standard ISO 8601 date/time format.  To
use an alternative format, see *note Custom time format::.

   (3) When working with the standard diary sexp functions, you need to
be very careful with the order of the arguments.  That order depend
evilly on the variable ‘calendar-date-style’ (or, for older Emacs
versions, ‘european-calendar-style’).  For example, to specify a date
December 12, 2005, the call might look like ‘(diary-date 12 1 2005)’ or
‘(diary-date 1 12 2005)’ or ‘(diary-date 2005 12 1)’, depending on the
settings.  This has been the source of much confusion.  Org mode users
can resort to special versions of these functions like ‘org-date’ or
‘org-anniversary’.  These work just like the corresponding ‘diary-’
functions, but with stable ISO order of arguments (year, month, day)
wherever applicable, independent of the value of ‘calendar-date-style’.


File: org.info,  Node: Creating timestamps,  Next: Deadlines and scheduling,  Prev: Timestamps,  Up: Dates and Times

8.2 Creating timestamps
=======================

For Org mode to recognize timestamps, they need to be in the specific
format.  All commands listed below produce timestamps in the correct
format.

‘C-c .     (org-time-stamp)’
     Prompt for a date and insert a corresponding timestamp.  When the
     cursor is at an existing timestamp in the buffer, the command is
     used to modify this timestamp instead of inserting a new one.  When
     this command is used twice in succession, a time range is inserted.
‘C-c !     (org-time-stamp-inactive)’
     Like ‘C-c .’, but insert an inactive timestamp that will not cause
     an agenda entry.
‘C-u C-c .’
‘C-u C-c !’
     Like ‘C-c .’ and ‘C-c !’, but use the alternative format which
     contains date and time.  The default time can be rounded to
     multiples of 5 minutes, see the option
     ‘org-time-stamp-rounding-minutes’.
‘C-c C-c’
     Normalize timestamp, insert/fix day name if missing or wrong.
‘C-c <     (org-date-from-calendar)’
     Insert a timestamp corresponding to the cursor date in the
     Calendar.
‘C-c >     (org-goto-calendar)’
     Access the Emacs calendar for the current date.  If there is a
     timestamp in the current line, go to the corresponding date
     instead.
‘C-c C-o     (org-open-at-point)’
     Access the agenda for the date given by the timestamp or -range at
     point (*note Weekly/daily agenda::).
‘S-<left>     (org-timestamp-down-day)’
‘S-<right>     (org-timestamp-up-day)’
     Change date at cursor by one day.  These key bindings conflict with
     shift-selection and related modes (*note Conflicts::).
‘S-<up>     (org-timestamp-up)’
‘S-<down>     (org-timestamp-down-down)’
     Change the item under the cursor in a timestamp.  The cursor can be
     on a year, month, day, hour or minute.  When the timestamp contains
     a time range like ‘15:30-16:30’, modifying the first time will also
     shift the second, shifting the time block with constant length.  To
     change the length, modify the second time.  Note that if the cursor
     is in a headline and not at a timestamp, these same keys modify the
     priority of an item.  (*note Priorities::).  The key bindings also
     conflict with shift-selection and related modes (*note
     Conflicts::).
‘C-c C-y     (org-evaluate-time-range)’
     Evaluate a time range by computing the difference between start and
     end.  With a prefix argument, insert result after the time range
     (in a table: into the following column).

* Menu:

* The date/time prompt::        How Org mode helps you entering date and time
* Custom time format::          Making dates look different


File: org.info,  Node: The date/time prompt,  Next: Custom time format,  Prev: Creating timestamps,  Up: Creating timestamps

8.2.1 The date/time prompt
--------------------------

When Org mode prompts for a date/time, the default is shown in default
date/time format, and the prompt therefore seems to ask for a specific
format.  But it will in fact accept date/time information in a variety
of formats.  Generally, the information should start at the beginning of
the string.  Org mode will find whatever information is in there and
derive anything you have not specified from the _default date and time_.
The default is usually the current date and time, but when modifying an
existing timestamp, or when entering the second stamp of a range, it is
taken from the stamp in the buffer.  When filling in information, Org
mode assumes that most of the time you will want to enter a date in the
future: if you omit the month/year and the given day/month is before
today, it will assume that you mean a future date(1).  If the date has
been automatically shifted into the future, the time prompt will show
this with ‘(=>F).’

   For example, let’s assume that today is June 13, 2006.  Here is how
various inputs will be interpreted, the items filled in by Org mode are
in bold.

     3-2-5         ⇒ 2003-02-05
     2/5/3         ⇒ 2003-02-05
     14            ⇒ 2006-06-14
     12            ⇒ 2006-07-12
     2/5           ⇒ 2007-02-05
     Fri           ⇒ nearest Friday after the default date
     sep 15        ⇒ 2006-09-15
     feb 15        ⇒ 2007-02-15
     sep 12 9      ⇒ 2009-09-12
     12:45         ⇒ 2006-06-13 12:45
     22 sept 0:34  ⇒ 2006-09-22 00:34
     w4            ⇒ ISO week for of the current year 2006
     2012 w4 fri   ⇒ Friday of ISO week 4 in 2012
     2012-w04-5    ⇒ Same as above

   Furthermore you can specify a relative date by giving, as the _first_
thing in the input: a plus/minus sign, a number and a letter ([hdwmy])
to indicate change in hours, days, weeks, months, or years.  With a
single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today.  With a
double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date.  If instead of
a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date will be
the Nth such day, e.g.:

     +0            ⇒ today
     .             ⇒ today
     +4d           ⇒ four days from today
     +4            ⇒ same as above
     +2w           ⇒ two weeks from today
     ++5           ⇒ five days from default date
     +2tue         ⇒ second Tuesday from now
     -wed          ⇒ last Wednesday

   The function understands English month and weekday abbreviations.  If
you want to use unabbreviated names and/or other languages, configure
the variables ‘parse-time-months’ and ‘parse-time-weekdays’.

   Not all dates can be represented in a given Emacs implementation.  By
default Org mode forces dates into the compatibility range 1970–2037
which works on all Emacs implementations.  If you want to use dates
outside of this range, read the docstring of the variable
‘org-read-date-force-compatible-dates’.

   You can specify a time range by giving start and end times or by
giving a start time and a duration (in HH:MM format).  Use one or two
dash(es) as the separator in the former case and use ’+’ as the
separator in the latter case, e.g.:

     11am-1:15pm    ⇒ 11:00-13:15
     11am--1:15pm   ⇒ same as above
     11am+2:15      ⇒ same as above

   Parallel to the minibuffer prompt, a calendar is popped up(2).  When
you exit the date prompt, either by clicking on a date in the calendar,
or by pressing <RET>, the date selected in the calendar will be combined
with the information entered at the prompt.  You can control the
calendar fully from the minibuffer:

     <RET>           Choose date at cursor in calendar.
     mouse-1        Select date by clicking on it.
     S-<right>/<left>     One day forward/backward.
     S-<down>/<up>     One week forward/backward.
     M-S-<right>/<left>   One month forward/backward.
     > / <          Scroll calendar forward/backward by one month.
     M-v / C-v      Scroll calendar forward/backward by 3 months.

   The actions of the date/time prompt may seem complex, but I assure
you they will grow on you, and you will start getting annoyed by pretty
much any other way of entering a date/time out there.  To help you
understand what is going on, the current interpretation of your input
will be displayed live in the minibuffer(3).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See the variable ‘org-read-date-prefer-future’.  You may set that
variable to the symbol ‘time’ to even make a time before now shift the
date to tomorrow.

   (2) If you don’t need/want the calendar, configure the variable
‘org-popup-calendar-for-date-prompt’.

   (3) If you find this distracting, turn the display off with
‘org-read-date-display-live’.


File: org.info,  Node: Custom time format,  Prev: The date/time prompt,  Up: Creating timestamps

8.2.2 Custom time format
------------------------

Org mode uses the standard ISO notation for dates and times as it is
defined in ISO 8601.  If you cannot get used to this and require another
representation of date and time to keep you happy, you can get it by
customizing the options ‘org-display-custom-times’ and
‘org-time-stamp-custom-formats’.

‘C-c C-x C-t     (org-toggle-time-stamp-overlays)’
     Toggle the display of custom formats for dates and times.

Org mode needs the default format for scanning, so the custom date/time
format does not _replace_ the default format—instead it is put _over_
the default format using text properties.  This has the following
consequences:
   • You cannot place the cursor onto a timestamp anymore, only before
     or after.
   • The ‘S-<up>/<down>’ keys can no longer be used to adjust each
     component of a timestamp.  If the cursor is at the beginning of the
     stamp, ‘S-<up>/<down>’ will change the stamp by one day, just like
     ‘S-<left>/<right>’.  At the end of the stamp, the time will be
     changed by one minute.
   • If the timestamp contains a range of clock times or a repeater,
     these will not be overlaid, but remain in the buffer as they were.
   • When you delete a timestamp character-by-character, it will only
     disappear from the buffer after _all_ (invisible) characters
     belonging to the ISO timestamp have been removed.
   • If the custom timestamp format is longer than the default and you
     are using dates in tables, table alignment will be messed up.  If
     the custom format is shorter, things do work as expected.


File: org.info,  Node: Deadlines and scheduling,  Next: Clocking work time,  Prev: Creating timestamps,  Up: Dates and Times

8.3 Deadlines and scheduling
============================

A timestamp may be preceded by special keywords to facilitate planning:

DEADLINE

     Meaning: the task (most likely a TODO item, though not necessarily)
     is supposed to be finished on that date.

     On the deadline date, the task will be listed in the agenda.  In
     addition, the agenda for _today_ will carry a warning about the
     approaching or missed deadline, starting
     ‘org-deadline-warning-days’ before the due date, and continuing
     until the entry is marked DONE.  An example:

          *** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide
              DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun>
              The editor in charge is [[bbdb:Ford Prefect]]

     You can specify a different lead time for warnings for a specific
     deadlines using the following syntax.  Here is an example with a
     warning period of 5 days ‘DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun -5d>’.  This
     warning is deactivated if the task get scheduled and you set
     ‘org-agenda-skip-deadline-prewarning-if-scheduled’ to ‘t’.

SCHEDULED

     Meaning: you are planning to start working on that task on the
     given date.

     The headline will be listed under the given date(1).  In addition,
     a reminder that the scheduled date has passed will be present in
     the compilation for _today_, until the entry is marked DONE, i.e.,
     the task will automatically be forwarded until completed.

          *** TODO Call Trillian for a date on New Years Eve.
              SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat>

     If you want to _delay_ the display of this task in the agenda, use
     ‘SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat -2d>’: the task is still scheduled on
     the 25th but will appear two days later.  In case the task contains
     a repeater, the delay is considered to affect all occurrences; if
     you want the delay to only affect the first scheduled occurrence of
     the task, use ‘--2d’ instead.  See ‘org-scheduled-delay-days’ and
     ‘org-agenda-skip-scheduled-delay-if-deadline’ for details on how to
     control this globally or per agenda.

     Important: Scheduling an item in Org mode should not be understood
     in the same way that we understand scheduling a meeting.  Setting a
     date for a meeting is just a simple appointment, you should mark
     this entry with a simple plain timestamp, to get this item shown on
     the date where it applies.  This is a frequent misunderstanding by
     Org users.  In Org mode, scheduling means setting a date when you
     want to start working on an action item.

   You may use timestamps with repeaters in scheduling and deadline
entries.  Org mode will issue early and late warnings based on the
assumption that the timestamp represents the nearest instance of the
repeater.  However, the use of diary sexp entries like ‘<%%(diary-float
t 42)>’ in scheduling and deadline timestamps is limited.  Org mode does
not know enough about the internals of each sexp function to issue early
and late warnings.  However, it will show the item on each day where the
sexp entry matches.

* Menu:

* Inserting deadline/schedule::  Planning items
* Repeated tasks::              Items that show up again and again

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) It will still be listed on that date after it has been marked
DONE.  If you don’t like this, set the variable
‘org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done’.


File: org.info,  Node: Inserting deadline/schedule,  Next: Repeated tasks,  Prev: Deadlines and scheduling,  Up: Deadlines and scheduling

8.3.1 Inserting deadlines or schedules
--------------------------------------

The following commands allow you to quickly insert(1) a deadline or to
schedule an item:

‘C-c C-d     (org-deadline)’
     Insert ‘DEADLINE’ keyword along with a stamp.  The insertion will
     happen in the line directly following the headline.  Any CLOSED
     timestamp will be removed.  When called with a prefix arg, an
     existing deadline will be removed from the entry.  Depending on the
     variable ‘org-log-redeadline’(2), a note will be taken when
     changing an existing deadline.

‘C-c C-s     (org-schedule)’
     Insert ‘SCHEDULED’ keyword along with a stamp.  The insertion will
     happen in the line directly following the headline.  Any CLOSED
     timestamp will be removed.  When called with a prefix argument,
     remove the scheduling date from the entry.  Depending on the
     variable ‘org-log-reschedule’(3), a note will be taken when
     changing an existing scheduling time.
‘C-c C-x C-k     (org-mark-entry-for-agenda-action)’
     Mark the current entry for agenda action.  After you have marked
     the entry like this, you can open the agenda or the calendar to
     find an appropriate date.  With the cursor on the selected date,
     press ‘k s’ or ‘k d’ to schedule the marked item.
‘C-c / d     (org-check-deadlines)’
     Create a sparse tree with all deadlines that are either past-due,
     or which will become due within ‘org-deadline-warning-days’.  With
     ‘C-u’ prefix, show all deadlines in the file.  With a numeric
     prefix, check that many days.  For example, ‘C-1 C-c / d’ shows all
     deadlines due tomorrow.
‘C-c / b     (org-check-before-date)’
     Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items before a given date.
‘C-c / a     (org-check-after-date)’
     Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items after a given date.

   Note that ‘org-schedule’ and ‘org-deadline’ supports setting the date
by indicating a relative time: e.g., +1d will set the date to the next
day after today, and –1w will set the date to the previous week before
any current timestamp.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The ‘SCHEDULED’ and ‘DEADLINE’ dates are inserted on the line
right below the headline.  Don’t put any text between this line and the
headline.

   (2) with corresponding ‘#+STARTUP’ keywords ‘logredeadline’,
‘lognoteredeadline’, and ‘nologredeadline’

   (3) with corresponding ‘#+STARTUP’ keywords ‘logreschedule’,
‘lognotereschedule’, and ‘nologreschedule’


File: org.info,  Node: Repeated tasks,  Prev: Inserting deadline/schedule,  Up: Deadlines and scheduling

8.3.2 Repeated tasks
--------------------

Some tasks need to be repeated again and again.  Org mode helps to
organize such tasks using a so-called repeater in a DEADLINE, SCHEDULED,
or plain timestamp.  In the following example
     ** TODO Pay the rent
        DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m>
the ‘+1m’ is a repeater; the intended interpretation is that the task
has a deadline on <2005-10-01> and repeats itself every (one) month
starting from that time.  You can use yearly, monthly, weekly, daily and
hourly repeat cookies by using the ‘y/w/m/d/h’ letters.  If you need
both a repeater and a special warning period in a deadline entry, the
repeater should come first and the warning period last: ‘DEADLINE:
<2005-10-01 Sat +1m -3d>’.

   Deadlines and scheduled items produce entries in the agenda when they
are over-due, so it is important to be able to mark such an entry as
completed once you have done so.  When you mark a DEADLINE or a SCHEDULE
with the TODO keyword DONE, it will no longer produce entries in the
agenda.  The problem with this is, however, that then also the _next_
instance of the repeated entry will not be active.  Org mode deals with
this in the following way: When you try to mark such an entry DONE
(using ‘C-c C-t’), it will shift the base date of the repeating
timestamp by the repeater interval, and immediately set the entry state
back to TODO(1). In the example above, setting the state to DONE would
actually switch the date like this:

     ** TODO Pay the rent
        DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue +1m>

   A timestamp(2) will be added under the deadline, to keep a record
that you actually acted on the previous instance of this deadline.

   As a consequence of shifting the base date, this entry will no longer
be visible in the agenda when checking past dates, but all future
instances will be visible.

   With the ‘+1m’ cookie, the date shift will always be exactly one
month.  So if you have not paid the rent for three months, marking this
entry DONE will still keep it as an overdue deadline.  Depending on the
task, this may not be the best way to handle it.  For example, if you
forgot to call your father for 3 weeks, it does not make sense to call
him 3 times in a single day to make up for it.  Finally, there are tasks
like changing batteries which should always repeat a certain time after
the last time you did it.  For these tasks, Org mode has special
repeaters ‘++’ and ‘.+’.  For example:

     ** TODO Call Father
        DEADLINE: <2008-02-10 Sun ++1w>
        Marking this DONE will shift the date by at least one week,
        but also by as many weeks as it takes to get this date into
        the future.  However, it stays on a Sunday, even if you called
        and marked it done on Saturday.
     ** TODO Check the batteries in the smoke detectors
        DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue .+1m>
        Marking this DONE will shift the date to one month after
        today.

   You may have both scheduling and deadline information for a specific
task.  If the repeater is set for the scheduling information only, you
probably want the repeater to be ignored after the deadline.  If so, set
the variable ‘org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-deadline-is-shown’ to
‘repeated-after-deadline’.  If you want both scheduling and deadline
information to repeat after the same interval, set the same repeater for
both timestamps.

   An alternative to using a repeater is to create a number of copies of
a task subtree, with dates shifted in each copy.  The command ‘C-c C-x
c’ was created for this purpose, it is described in *note Structure
editing::.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) In fact, the target state is taken from, in this sequence, the
‘REPEAT_TO_STATE’ property or the variable ‘org-todo-repeat-to-state’.
If neither of these is specified, the target state defaults to the first
state of the TODO state sequence.

   (2) You can change this using the option ‘org-log-repeat’, or the
‘#+STARTUP’ options ‘logrepeat’, ‘lognoterepeat’, and ‘nologrepeat’.
With ‘lognoterepeat’, you will also be prompted for a note.


File: org.info,  Node: Clocking work time,  Next: Effort estimates,  Prev: Deadlines and scheduling,  Up: Dates and Times

8.4 Clocking work time
======================

Org mode allows you to clock the time you spend on specific tasks in a
project.  When you start working on an item, you can start the clock.
When you stop working on that task, or when you mark the task done, the
clock is stopped and the corresponding time interval is recorded.  It
also computes the total time spent on each subtree(1) of a project.  And
it remembers a history or tasks recently clocked, to that you can jump
quickly between a number of tasks absorbing your time.

   To save the clock history across Emacs sessions, use
     (setq org-clock-persist 'history)
     (org-clock-persistence-insinuate)
   When you clock into a new task after resuming Emacs, the incomplete
clock(2) will be found (*note Resolving idle time::) and you will be
prompted about what to do with it.

* Menu:

* Clocking commands::           Starting and stopping a clock
* The clock table::             Detailed reports
* Resolving idle time::         Resolving time when you’ve been idle

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Clocking only works if all headings are indented with less than
30 stars.  This is a hardcoded limitation of ‘lmax’ in ‘org-clock-sum’.

   (2) To resume the clock under the assumption that you have worked on
this task while outside Emacs, use ‘(setq org-clock-persist t)’.


File: org.info,  Node: Clocking commands,  Next: The clock table,  Prev: Clocking work time,  Up: Clocking work time

8.4.1 Clocking commands
-----------------------

‘C-c C-x C-i     (org-clock-in)’
     Start the clock on the current item (clock-in).  This inserts the
     CLOCK keyword together with a timestamp.  If this is not the first
     clocking of this item, the multiple CLOCK lines will be wrapped
     into a ‘:LOGBOOK:’ drawer (see also the variable
     ‘org-clock-into-drawer’).  You can also overrule the setting of
     this variable for a subtree by setting a ‘CLOCK_INTO_DRAWER’ or
     ‘LOG_INTO_DRAWER’ property.  When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix
     argument, select the task from a list of recently clocked tasks.
     With two ‘C-u C-u’ prefixes, clock into the task at point and mark
     it as the default task; the default task will then always be
     available with letter ‘d’ when selecting a clocking task.  With
     three ‘C-u C-u C-u’ prefixes, force continuous clocking by starting
     the clock when the last clock stopped.
     While the clock is running, the current clocking time is shown in
     the mode line, along with the title of the task.  The clock time
     shown will be all time ever clocked for this task and its children.
     If the task has an effort estimate (*note Effort estimates::), the
     mode line displays the current clocking time against it(1) If the
     task is a repeating one (*note Repeated tasks::), only the time
     since the last reset of the task (2) will be shown.  More control
     over what time is shown can be exercised with the
     ‘CLOCK_MODELINE_TOTAL’ property.  It may have the values ‘current’
     to show only the current clocking instance, ‘today’ to show all
     time clocked on this tasks today (see also the variable
     ‘org-extend-today-until’), ‘all’ to include all time, or ‘auto’
     which is the default(3).
     Clicking with ‘mouse-1’ onto the mode line entry will pop up a menu
     with clocking options.
‘C-c C-x C-o     (org-clock-out)’
     Stop the clock (clock-out).  This inserts another timestamp at the
     same location where the clock was last started.  It also directly
     computes the resulting time in inserts it after the time range as
     ‘=> HH:MM’.  See the variable ‘org-log-note-clock-out’ for the
     possibility to record an additional note together with the
     clock-out timestamp(4).
‘C-c C-x C-x     (org-clock-in-last)’
     Reclock the last clocked task.  With one ‘C-u’ prefix argument,
     select the task from the clock history.  With two ‘C-u’ prefixes,
     force continuous clocking by starting the clock when the last clock
     stopped.
‘C-c C-x C-e     (org-clock-modify-effort-estimate)’
     Update the effort estimate for the current clock task.
‘C-c C-c  or  C-c C-y     (org-evaluate-time-range)’
     Recompute the time interval after changing one of the timestamps.
     This is only necessary if you edit the timestamps directly.  If you
     change them with ‘S-<cursor>’ keys, the update is automatic.
‘C-S-<up/down>     (org-clock-timestamps-up/down)’
     On ‘CLOCK’ log lines, increase/decrease both timestamps so that the
     clock duration keeps the same.
‘S-M-<up/down>     (org-timestamp-up/down)’
     On ‘CLOCK’ log lines, increase/decrease the timestamp at point and
     the one of the previous (or the next clock) timestamp by the same
     duration.  For example, if you hit ‘S-M-<up>’ to increase a
     clocked-out timestamp by five minutes, then the clocked-in
     timestamp of the next clock will be increased by five minutes.
‘C-c C-t     (org-todo)’
     Changing the TODO state of an item to DONE automatically stops the
     clock if it is running in this same item.
‘C-c C-x C-q     (org-clock-cancel)’
     Cancel the current clock.  This is useful if a clock was started by
     mistake, or if you ended up working on something else.
‘C-c C-x C-j     (org-clock-goto)’
     Jump to the headline of the currently clocked in task.  With a
     ‘C-u’ prefix arg, select the target task from a list of recently
     clocked tasks.
‘C-c C-x C-d     (org-clock-display)’
     Display time summaries for each subtree in the current buffer.
     This puts overlays at the end of each headline, showing the total
     time recorded under that heading, including the time of any
     subheadings.  You can use visibility cycling to study the tree, but
     the overlays disappear when you change the buffer (see variable
     ‘org-remove-highlights-with-change’) or press ‘C-c C-c’.

   The ‘l’ key may be used in the timeline (*note Timeline::) and in the
agenda (*note Weekly/daily agenda::) to show which tasks have been
worked on or closed during a day.

   *Important:* note that both ‘org-clock-out’ and ‘org-clock-in-last’
can have a global keybinding and will not modify the window disposition.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) To add an effort estimate “on the fly”, hook a function doing
this to ‘org-clock-in-prepare-hook’.

   (2) as recorded by the ‘LAST_REPEAT’ property

   (3) See also the variable ‘org-clock-modeline-total’.

   (4) The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP:
lognoteclock-out’


File: org.info,  Node: The clock table,  Next: Resolving idle time,  Prev: Clocking commands,  Up: Clocking work time

8.4.2 The clock table
---------------------

Org mode can produce quite complex reports based on the time clocking
information.  Such a report is called a _clock table_, because it is
formatted as one or several Org tables.

‘C-c C-x C-r     (org-clock-report)’
     Insert a dynamic block (*note Dynamic blocks::) containing a clock
     report as an Org mode table into the current file.  When the cursor
     is at an existing clock table, just update it.  When called with a
     prefix argument, jump to the first clock report in the current
     document and update it.  The clock table always includes also trees
     with ‘:ARCHIVE:’ tag.
‘C-c C-c  or  C-c C-x C-u     (org-dblock-update)’
     Update dynamic block at point.  The cursor needs to be in the
     ‘#+BEGIN’ line of the dynamic block.
‘C-u C-c C-x C-u’
     Update all dynamic blocks (*note Dynamic blocks::).  This is useful
     if you have several clock table blocks in a buffer.
‘S-<left>’
‘S-<right>     (org-clocktable-try-shift)’
     Shift the current ‘:block’ interval and update the table.  The
     cursor needs to be in the ‘#+BEGIN: clocktable’ line for this
     command.  If ‘:block’ is ‘today’, it will be shifted to ‘today-1’
     etc.

   Here is an example of the frame for a clock table as it is inserted
into the buffer with the ‘C-c C-x C-r’ command:

     #+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :emphasize nil :scope file
     #+END: clocktable
The ‘BEGIN’ line and specify a number of options to define the scope,
structure, and formatting of the report.  Defaults for all these options
can be configured in the variable ‘org-clocktable-defaults’.

First there are options that determine which clock entries are to be
selected:
     :maxlevel    Maximum level depth to which times are listed in the table.
                  Clocks at deeper levels will be summed into the upper level.
     :scope       The scope to consider.  This can be any of the following:
                  nil        the current buffer or narrowed region
                  file       the full current buffer
                  subtree    the subtree where the clocktable is located
                  treeN      the surrounding level N tree, for example ‘tree3’
                  tree       the surrounding level 1 tree
                  agenda     all agenda files
                  ("file"..) scan these files
                  file-with-archives    current file and its archives
                  agenda-with-archives  all agenda files, including archives
     :block       The time block to consider.  This block is specified either
                  absolute, or relative to the current time and may be any of
                  these formats:
                  2007-12-31    New year eve 2007
                  2007-12       December 2007
                  2007-W50      ISO-week 50 in 2007
                  2007-Q2       2nd quarter in 2007
                  2007          the year 2007
                  today, yesterday, today-N          a relative day
                  thisweek, lastweek, thisweek-N     a relative week
                  thismonth, lastmonth, thismonth-N  a relative month
                  thisyear, lastyear, thisyear-N     a relative year
                  Use ‘S-<left>/<right>’ keys to shift the time interval.
     :tstart      A time string specifying when to start considering times.
                  Relative times like ‘"<-2w>"’ can also be used.  See
                  *note Matching tags and properties:: for relative time syntax.
     :tend        A time string specifying when to stop considering times.
                  Relative times like ‘"<now>"’ can also be used.  See
                  *note Matching tags and properties:: for relative time syntax.
     :wstart      The starting day of the week.  The default is 1 for monday.
     :mstart      The starting day of the month.  The default 1 is for the first
                  day of the month.
     :step        ‘week’ or ‘day’, to split the table into chunks.
                  To use this, ‘:block’ or ‘:tstart’, ‘:tend’ are needed.
     :stepskip0   Do not show steps that have zero time.
     :fileskip0   Do not show table sections from files which did not contribute.
     :tags        A tags match to select entries that should contribute.  See
                  *note Matching tags and properties:: for the match syntax.

   Then there are options which determine the formatting of the table.
There options are interpreted by the function
‘org-clocktable-write-default’, but you can specify your own function
using the ‘:formatter’ parameter.
     :emphasize   When ‘t’, emphasize level one and level two items.
     :lang        Language(1) to use for descriptive cells like "Task".
     :link        Link the item headlines in the table to their origins.
     :narrow      An integer to limit the width of the headline column in
                  the org table.  If you write it like ‘50!’, then the
                  headline will also be shortened in export.
     :indent      Indent each headline field according to its level.
     :tcolumns    Number of columns to be used for times.  If this is smaller
                  than ‘:maxlevel’, lower levels will be lumped into one column.
     :level       Should a level number column be included?
     :compact     Abbreviation for ‘:level nil :indent t :narrow 40! :tcolumns 1’
                  All are overwritten except if there is an explicit ‘:narrow’
     :timestamp   A timestamp for the entry, when available.  Look for SCHEDULED,
                  DEADLINE, TIMESTAMP and TIMESTAMP_IA, in this order.
     :properties  List of properties that should be shown in the table.  Each
                  property will get its own column.
     :inherit-props When this flag is ‘t’, the values for ‘:properties’ will be inherited.
     :formula     Content of a ‘#+TBLFM’ line to be added and evaluated.
                  As a special case, ‘:formula %’ adds a column with % time.
                  If you do not specify a formula here, any existing formula
                  below the clock table will survive updates and be evaluated.
     :formatter   A function to format clock data and insert it into the buffer.
   To get a clock summary of the current level 1 tree, for the current
day, you could write
     #+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :block today :scope tree1 :link t
     #+END: clocktable
and to use a specific time range you could write(2)
     #+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<2006-08-10 Thu 10:00>"
                         :tend "<2006-08-10 Thu 12:00>"
     #+END: clocktable
   A range starting a week ago and ending right now could be written as
     #+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<-1w>" :tend "<now>"
     #+END: clocktable
   A summary of the current subtree with % times would be
     #+BEGIN: clocktable :scope subtree :link t :formula %
     #+END: clocktable
   A horizontally compact representation of everything clocked during
last week would be
     #+BEGIN: clocktable :scope agenda :block lastweek :compact t
     #+END: clocktable

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Language terms can be set through the variable
‘org-clock-clocktable-language-setup’.

   (2) Note that all parameters must be specified in a single line—the
line is broken here only to fit it into the manual.


File: org.info,  Node: Resolving idle time,  Prev: The clock table,  Up: Clocking work time

8.4.3 Resolving idle time and continuous clocking
-------------------------------------------------

Resolving idle time
...................

If you clock in on a work item, and then walk away from your
computer—perhaps to take a phone call—you often need to “resolve” the
time you were away by either subtracting it from the current clock, or
applying it to another one.

   By customizing the variable ‘org-clock-idle-time’ to some integer,
such as 10 or 15, Emacs can alert you when you get back to your computer
after being idle for that many minutes(1), and ask what you want to do
with the idle time.  There will be a question waiting for you when you
get back, indicating how much idle time has passed (constantly updated
with the current amount), as well as a set of choices to correct the
discrepancy:

‘k’
     To keep some or all of the minutes and stay clocked in, press ‘k’.
     Org will ask how many of the minutes to keep.  Press <RET> to keep
     them all, effectively changing nothing, or enter a number to keep
     that many minutes.
‘K’
     If you use the shift key and press ‘K’, it will keep however many
     minutes you request and then immediately clock out of that task.
     If you keep all of the minutes, this is the same as just clocking
     out of the current task.
‘s’
     To keep none of the minutes, use ‘s’ to subtract all the away time
     from the clock, and then check back in from the moment you
     returned.
‘S’
     To keep none of the minutes and just clock out at the start of the
     away time, use the shift key and press ‘S’.  Remember that using
     shift will always leave you clocked out, no matter which option you
     choose.
‘C’
     To cancel the clock altogether, use ‘C’.  Note that if instead of
     canceling you subtract the away time, and the resulting clock
     amount is less than a minute, the clock will still be canceled
     rather than clutter up the log with an empty entry.

   What if you subtracted those away minutes from the current clock, and
now want to apply them to a new clock?  Simply clock in to any task
immediately after the subtraction.  Org will notice that you have
subtracted time “on the books”, so to speak, and will ask if you want to
apply those minutes to the next task you clock in on.

   There is one other instance when this clock resolution magic occurs.
Say you were clocked in and hacking away, and suddenly your cat chased a
mouse who scared a hamster that crashed into your UPS’s power button!
You suddenly lose all your buffers, but thanks to auto-save you still
have your recent Org mode changes, including your last clock in.

   If you restart Emacs and clock into any task, Org will notice that
you have a dangling clock which was never clocked out from your last
session.  Using that clock’s starting time as the beginning of the
unaccounted-for period, Org will ask how you want to resolve that time.
The logic and behavior is identical to dealing with away time due to
idleness; it is just happening due to a recovery event rather than a set
amount of idle time.

   You can also check all the files visited by your Org agenda for
dangling clocks at any time using ‘M-x org-resolve-clocks RET’ (or ‘C-c
C-x C-z’).

Continuous clocking
...................

You may want to start clocking from the time when you clocked out the
previous task.  To enable this systematically, set
‘org-clock-continuously’ to ‘t’.  Each time you clock in, Org retrieves
the clock-out time of the last clocked entry for this session, and start
the new clock from there.

   If you only want this from time to time, use three universal prefix
arguments with ‘org-clock-in’ and two ‘C-u C-u’ with
‘org-clock-in-last’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On computers using Mac OS X, idleness is based on actual user
idleness, not just Emacs’ idle time.  For X11, you can install a utility
program ‘x11idle.c’, available in the ‘contrib/scripts’ directory of the
Org git distribution, or install the ‘xprintidle’ package and set it to
the variable ‘org-clock-x11idle-program-name’ if you are running Debian,
to get the same general treatment of idleness.  On other systems, idle
time refers to Emacs idle time only.


File: org.info,  Node: Effort estimates,  Next: Relative timer,  Prev: Clocking work time,  Up: Dates and Times

8.5 Effort estimates
====================

If you want to plan your work in a very detailed way, or if you need to
produce offers with quotations of the estimated work effort, you may
want to assign effort estimates to entries.  If you are also clocking
your work, you may later want to compare the planned effort with the
actual working time, a great way to improve planning estimates.  Effort
estimates are stored in a special property ‘Effort’(1).  You can set the
effort for an entry with the following commands:

‘C-c C-x e     (org-set-effort)’
     Set the effort estimate for the current entry.  With a numeric
     prefix argument, set it to the Nth allowed value (see below).  This
     command is also accessible from the agenda with the ‘e’ key.
‘C-c C-x C-e     (org-clock-modify-effort-estimate)’
     Modify the effort estimate of the item currently being clocked.

   Clearly the best way to work with effort estimates is through column
view (*note Column view::).  You should start by setting up discrete
values for effort estimates, and a ‘COLUMNS’ format that displays these
values together with clock sums (if you want to clock your time).  For a
specific buffer you can use

     #+PROPERTY: Effort_ALL 0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00
     #+COLUMNS: %40ITEM(Task) %17Effort(Estimated Effort){:} %CLOCKSUM

or, even better, you can set up these values globally by customizing the
variables ‘org-global-properties’ and ‘org-columns-default-format’.  In
particular if you want to use this setup also in the agenda, a global
setup may be advised.

   The way to assign estimates to individual items is then to switch to
column mode, and to use ‘S-<right>’ and ‘S-<left>’ to change the value.
The values you enter will immediately be summed up in the hierarchy.  In
the column next to it, any clocked time will be displayed.

   If you switch to column view in the daily/weekly agenda, the effort
column will summarize the estimated work effort for each day(2), and you
can use this to find space in your schedule.  To get an overview of the
entire part of the day that is committed, you can set the option
‘org-agenda-columns-add-appointments-to-effort-sum’.  The appointments
on a day that take place over a specified time interval will then also
be added to the load estimate of the day.

   Effort estimates can be used in secondary agenda filtering that is
triggered with the ‘/’ key in the agenda (*note Agenda commands::).  If
you have these estimates defined consistently, two or three key presses
will narrow down the list to stuff that fits into an available time
slot.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You may change the property being used with the variable
‘org-effort-property’.

   (2) Please note the pitfalls of summing hierarchical data in a flat
list (*note Agenda column view::).


File: org.info,  Node: Relative timer,  Next: Countdown timer,  Prev: Effort estimates,  Up: Dates and Times

8.6 Taking notes with a relative timer
======================================

When taking notes during, for example, a meeting or a video viewing, it
can be useful to have access to times relative to a starting time.  Org
provides such a relative timer and make it easy to create timed notes.

‘C-c C-x .     (org-timer)’
     Insert a relative time into the buffer.  The first time you use
     this, the timer will be started.  When called with a prefix
     argument, the timer is restarted.
‘C-c C-x -     (org-timer-item)’
     Insert a description list item with the current relative time.
     With a prefix argument, first reset the timer to 0.
‘M-<RET>     (org-insert-heading)’
     Once the timer list is started, you can also use ‘M-<RET>’ to
     insert new timer items.
‘C-c C-x ,’
     Pause the timer, or continue it if it is already paused
     (‘org-timer-pause-or-continue’).
‘C-u C-c C-x ,’
     Stop the timer.  After this, you can only start a new timer, not
     continue the old one.  This command also removes the timer from the
     mode line.
‘C-c C-x 0     (org-timer-start)’
     Reset the timer without inserting anything into the buffer.  By
     default, the timer is reset to 0.  When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix,
     reset the timer to specific starting offset.  The user is prompted
     for the offset, with a default taken from a timer string at point,
     if any, So this can be used to restart taking notes after a break
     in the process.  When called with a double prefix argument ‘C-u
     C-u’, change all timer strings in the active region by a certain
     amount.  This can be used to fix timer strings if the timer was not
     started at exactly the right moment.


File: org.info,  Node: Countdown timer,  Prev: Relative timer,  Up: Dates and Times

8.7 Countdown timer
===================

Calling ‘org-timer-set-timer’ from an Org mode buffer runs a countdown
timer.  Use ‘;’ from agenda buffers, <C-c C-x ;> everywhere else.

   ‘org-timer-set-timer’ prompts the user for a duration and displays a
countdown timer in the modeline.  ‘org-timer-default-timer’ sets the
default countdown value.  Giving a prefix numeric argument overrides
this default value.


File: org.info,  Node: Capture - Refile - Archive,  Next: Agenda Views,  Prev: Dates and Times,  Up: Top

9 Capture - Refile - Archive
****************************

An important part of any organization system is the ability to quickly
capture new ideas and tasks, and to associate reference material with
them.  Org does this using a process called capture.  It also can store
files related to a task (attachments) in a special directory.  Once in
the system, tasks and projects need to be moved around.  Moving
completed project trees to an archive file keeps the system compact and
fast.

* Menu:

* Capture::                     Capturing new stuff
* Attachments::                 Add files to tasks
* RSS Feeds::                   Getting input from RSS feeds
* Protocols::                   External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org
* Refile and copy::             Moving/copying a tree from one place to another
* Archiving::                   What to do with finished projects


File: org.info,  Node: Capture,  Next: Attachments,  Prev: Capture - Refile - Archive,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.1 Capture
===========

Capture lets you quickly store notes with little interruption of your
work flow.  Org’s method for capturing new items is heavily inspired by
John Wiegley excellent ‘remember.el’ package.  Up to version 6.36, Org
used a special setup for ‘remember.el’, then replaced it with
‘org-remember.el’.  As of version 8.0, ‘org-remember.el’ has been
completely replaced by ‘org-capture.el’.

   If your configuration depends on ‘org-remember.el’, you need to
update it and use the setup described below.  To convert your
‘org-remember-templates’, run the command
     M-x org-capture-import-remember-templates RET
and then customize the new variable with ‘M-x customize-variable
org-capture-templates’, check the result, and save the customization.

* Menu:

* Setting up capture::          Where notes will be stored
* Using capture::               Commands to invoke and terminate capture
* Capture templates::           Define the outline of different note types


File: org.info,  Node: Setting up capture,  Next: Using capture,  Prev: Capture,  Up: Capture

9.1.1 Setting up capture
------------------------

The following customization sets a default target file for notes, and
defines a global key(1) for capturing new material.

     (setq org-default-notes-file (concat org-directory "/notes.org"))
     (define-key global-map "\C-cc" 'org-capture)

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Please select your own key, ‘C-c c’ is only a suggestion.


File: org.info,  Node: Using capture,  Next: Capture templates,  Prev: Setting up capture,  Up: Capture

9.1.2 Using capture
-------------------

‘C-c c     (org-capture)’
     Call the command ‘org-capture’.  Note that this keybinding is
     global and not active by default: you need to install it.  If you
     have templates defined *note Capture templates::, it will offer
     these templates for selection or use a new Org outline node as the
     default template.  It will insert the template into the target file
     and switch to an indirect buffer narrowed to this new node.  You
     may then insert the information you want.

‘C-c C-c     (org-capture-finalize)’
     Once you have finished entering information into the capture
     buffer, ‘C-c C-c’ will return you to the window configuration
     before the capture process, so that you can resume your work
     without further distraction.  When called with a prefix arg,
     finalize and then jump to the captured item.

‘C-c C-w     (org-capture-refile)’
     Finalize the capture process by refiling (*note Refile and copy::)
     the note to a different place.  Please realize that this is a
     normal refiling command that will be executed—so the cursor
     position at the moment you run this command is important.  If you
     have inserted a tree with a parent and children, first move the
     cursor back to the parent.  Any prefix argument given to this
     command will be passed on to the ‘org-refile’ command.

‘C-c C-k     (org-capture-kill)’
     Abort the capture process and return to the previous state.

   You can also call ‘org-capture’ in a special way from the agenda,
using the ‘k c’ key combination.  With this access, any timestamps
inserted by the selected capture template will default to the cursor
date in the agenda, rather than to the current date.

   To find the locations of the last stored capture, use ‘org-capture’
with prefix commands:

‘C-u C-c c’
     Visit the target location of a capture template.  You get to select
     the template in the usual way.
‘C-u C-u C-c c’
     Visit the last stored capture item in its buffer.

   You can also jump to the bookmark ‘org-capture-last-stored’, which
will automatically be created unless you set ‘org-capture-bookmark’ to
‘nil’.

   To insert the capture at point in an Org buffer, call ‘org-capture’
with a ‘C-0’ prefix argument.


File: org.info,  Node: Capture templates,  Prev: Using capture,  Up: Capture

9.1.3 Capture templates
-----------------------

You can use templates for different types of capture items, and for
different target locations.  The easiest way to create such templates is
through the customize interface.

‘C-c c C’
     Customize the variable ‘org-capture-templates’.

   Before we give the formal description of template definitions, let’s
look at an example.  Say you would like to use one template to create
general TODO entries, and you want to put these entries under the
heading ‘Tasks’ in your file ‘~/org/gtd.org’.  Also, a date tree in the
file ‘journal.org’ should capture journal entries.  A possible
configuration would look like:

     (setq org-capture-templates
      '(("t" "Todo" entry (file+headline "~/org/gtd.org" "Tasks")
             "* TODO %?\n  %i\n  %a")
        ("j" "Journal" entry (file+datetree "~/org/journal.org")
             "* %?\nEntered on %U\n  %i\n  %a")))

If you then press ‘C-c c t’, Org will prepare the template for you like
this:
     * TODO
       [[file:LINK TO WHERE YOU INITIATED CAPTURE]]

During expansion of the template, ‘%a’ has been replaced by a link to
the location from where you called the capture command.  This can be
extremely useful for deriving tasks from emails, for example.  You fill
in the task definition, press ‘C-c C-c’ and Org returns you to the same
place where you started the capture process.

   To define special keys to capture to a particular template without
going through the interactive template selection, you can create your
key binding like this:

     (define-key global-map "\C-cx"
        (lambda () (interactive) (org-capture nil "x")))

* Menu:

* Template elements::           What is needed for a complete template entry
* Template expansion::          Filling in information about time and context
* Templates in contexts::       Only show a template in a specific context


File: org.info,  Node: Template elements,  Next: Template expansion,  Prev: Capture templates,  Up: Capture templates

9.1.3.1 Template elements
.........................

Now lets look at the elements of a template definition.  Each entry in
‘org-capture-templates’ is a list with the following items:

KEYS
     The keys that will select the template, as a string, characters
     only, for example ‘"a"’ for a template to be selected with a single
     key, or ‘"bt"’ for selection with two keys.  When using several
     keys, keys using the same prefix key must be sequential in the list
     and preceded by a 2-element entry explaining the prefix key, for
     example
                   ("b" "Templates for marking stuff to buy")
     If you do not define a template for the ‘C’ key, this key will be
     used to open the customize buffer for this complex variable.

DESCRIPTION
     A short string describing the template, which will be shown during
     selection.

TYPE
     The type of entry, a symbol.  Valid values are:

     ‘entry’
          An Org mode node, with a headline.  Will be filed as the child
          of the target entry or as a top-level entry.  The target file
          should be an Org mode file.
     ‘item’
          A plain list item, placed in the first plain list at the
          target location.  Again the target file should be an Org file.
     ‘checkitem’
          A checkbox item.  This only differs from the plain list item
          by the default template.
     ‘table-line’
          a new line in the first table at the target location.  Where
          exactly the line will be inserted depends on the properties
          ‘:prepend’ and ‘:table-line-pos’ (see below).
     ‘plain’
          Text to be inserted as it is.

TARGET
     Specification of where the captured item should be placed.  In Org
     mode files, targets usually define a node.  Entries will become
     children of this node.  Other types will be added to the table or
     list in the body of this node.  Most target specifications contain
     a file name.  If that file name is the empty string, it defaults to
     ‘org-default-notes-file’.  A file can also be given as a variable,
     function, or Emacs Lisp form.

     Valid values are:

     ‘(file "path/to/file")’
          Text will be placed at the beginning or end of that file.

     ‘(id "id of existing org entry")’
          Filing as child of this entry, or in the body of the entry.

     ‘(file+headline "path/to/file" "node headline")’
          Fast configuration if the target heading is unique in the
          file.

     ‘(file+olp "path/to/file" "Level 1 heading" "Level 2" ...)’
          For non-unique headings, the full path is safer.

     ‘(file+regexp "path/to/file" "regexp to find location")’
          Use a regular expression to position the cursor.

     ‘(file+datetree "path/to/file")’
          Will create a heading in a date tree for today’s date(1).

     ‘(file+datetree+prompt "path/to/file")’
          Will create a heading in a date tree, but will prompt for the
          date.

     ‘(file+function "path/to/file" function-finding-location)’
          A function to find the right location in the file.

     ‘(clock)’
          File to the entry that is currently being clocked.

     ‘(function function-finding-location)’
          Most general way, write your own function to find both file
          and location.

TEMPLATE
     The template for creating the capture item.  If you leave this
     empty, an appropriate default template will be used.  Otherwise
     this is a string with escape codes, which will be replaced
     depending on time and context of the capture call.  The string with
     escapes may be loaded from a template file, using the special
     syntax ‘(file "path/to/template")’.  See below for more details.

PROPERTIES
     The rest of the entry is a property list of additional options.
     Recognized properties are:

     ‘:prepend’
          Normally new captured information will be appended at the
          target location (last child, last table line, last list
          item...).  Setting this property will change that.

     ‘:immediate-finish’
          When set, do not offer to edit the information, just file it
          away immediately.  This makes sense if the template only needs
          information that can be added automatically.

     ‘:empty-lines’
          Set this to the number of lines to insert before and after the
          new item.  Default 0, only common other value is 1.

     ‘:clock-in’
          Start the clock in this item.

     ‘:clock-keep’
          Keep the clock running when filing the captured entry.

     ‘:clock-resume’
          If starting the capture interrupted a clock, restart that
          clock when finished with the capture.  Note that ‘:clock-keep’
          has precedence over ‘:clock-resume’.  When setting both to
          ‘t’, the current clock will run and the previous one will not
          be resumed.

     ‘:unnarrowed’
          Do not narrow the target buffer, simply show the full buffer.
          Default is to narrow it so that you only see the new material.

     ‘:table-line-pos’
          Specification of the location in the table where the new line
          should be inserted.  It should be a string like ‘"II-3"’
          meaning that the new line should become the third line before
          the second horizontal separator line.

     ‘:kill-buffer’
          If the target file was not yet visited when capture was
          invoked, kill the buffer again after capture is completed.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Datetree headlines for years accept tags, so if you use both ‘*
2013 :noexport:’ and ‘* 2013’ in your file, the capture will refile the
note to the first one matched.


File: org.info,  Node: Template expansion,  Next: Templates in contexts,  Prev: Template elements,  Up: Capture templates

9.1.3.2 Template expansion
..........................

In the template itself, special ‘%’-escapes(1) allow dynamic insertion
of content.  The templates are expanded in the order given here:

     %[FILE]     Insert the contents of the file given by FILE.
     %(SEXP)     Evaluate Elisp SEXP and replace with the result.
                       For convenience, %:keyword (see below) placeholders
                       within the expression will be expanded prior to this.
                       The sexp must return a string.
     %<...>      The result of format-time-string on the ... format specification.
     %t          Timestamp, date only.
     %T          Timestamp, with date and time.
     %u, %U      Like the above, but inactive timestamps.
     %i          Initial content, the region when capture is called while the
                 region is active.
                 The entire text will be indented like ‘%i’ itself.
     %a          Annotation, normally the link created with ‘org-store-link’.
     %A          Like ‘%a’, but prompt for the description part.
     %l          Like %a, but only insert the literal link.
     %c          Current kill ring head.
     %x          Content of the X clipboard.
     %k          Title of the currently clocked task.
     %K          Link to the currently clocked task.
     %n          User name (taken from ‘user-full-name’).
     %f          File visited by current buffer when org-capture was called.
     %F          Full path of the file or directory visited by current buffer.
     %:keyword   Specific information for certain link types, see below.
     %^g         Prompt for tags, with completion on tags in target file.
     %^G         Prompt for tags, with completion all tags in all agenda files.
     %^t         Like ‘%t’, but prompt for date.  Similarly ‘%^T’, ‘%^u’, ‘%^U’.
                 You may define a prompt like ‘%^{Birthday}t’.
     %^C         Interactive selection of which kill or clip to use.
     %^L         Like ‘%^C’, but insert as link.
     %^{PROP}p   Prompt the user for a value for property PROP.
     %^{PROMPT}  prompt the user for a string and replace this sequence with it.
                 You may specify a default value and a completion table with
                 %^{prompt|default|completion2|completion3...}.
                 The arrow keys access a prompt-specific history.
     %\n         Insert the text entered at the nth %^{PROMPT}, where ‘n’ is
                 a number, starting from 1.
     %?          After completing the template, position cursor here.

For specific link types, the following keywords will be defined(2):

     Link type                        |  Available keywords
     ---------------------------------+----------------------------------------------
     bbdb                             |  %:name %:company
     irc                              |  %:server %:port %:nick
     vm, vm-imap, wl, mh, mew, rmail  |  %:type %:subject %:message-id
                                      |  %:from %:fromname %:fromaddress
                                      |  %:to   %:toname   %:toaddress
                                      |  %:date (message date header field)
                                      |  %:date-timestamp (date as active timestamp)
                                      |  %:date-timestamp-inactive (date as inactive timestamp)
                                      |  %:fromto (either "to NAME" or "from NAME")(3)
     gnus                             |  %:group, for messages also all email fields
     w3, w3m                          |  %:url
     info                             |  %:file %:node
     calendar                         |  %:date

To place the cursor after template expansion use:

     %?          After completing the template, position cursor here.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you need one of these sequences literally, escape the ‘%’ with
a backslash.

   (2) If you define your own link types (*note Adding hyperlink
types::), any property you store with ‘org-store-link-props’ can be
accessed in capture templates in a similar way.

   (3) This will always be the other, not the user.  See the variable
‘org-from-is-user-regexp’.


File: org.info,  Node: Templates in contexts,  Prev: Template expansion,  Up: Capture templates

9.1.3.3 Templates in contexts
.............................

To control whether a capture template should be accessible from a
specific context, you can customize ‘org-capture-templates-contexts’.
Let’s say for example that you have a capture template ‘"p"’ for storing
Gnus emails containing patches.  Then you would configure this option
like this:

     (setq org-capture-templates-contexts
           '(("p" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))

   You can also tell that the command key ‘"p"’ should refer to another
template.  In that case, add this command key like this:

     (setq org-capture-templates-contexts
           '(("p" "q" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))

   See the docstring of the variable for more information.


File: org.info,  Node: Attachments,  Next: RSS Feeds,  Prev: Capture,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.2 Attachments
===============

It is often useful to associate reference material with an outline
node/task.  Small chunks of plain text can simply be stored in the
subtree of a project.  Hyperlinks (*note Hyperlinks::) can establish
associations with files that live elsewhere on your computer or in the
cloud, like emails or source code files belonging to a project.  Another
method is attachments, which are files located in a directory belonging
to an outline node.  Org uses directories named by the unique ID of each
entry.  These directories are located in the ‘data’ directory which
lives in the same directory where your Org file lives(1).  If you
initialize this directory with ‘git init’, Org will automatically commit
changes when it sees them.  The attachment system has been contributed
to Org by John Wiegley.

   In cases where it seems better to do so, you can also attach a
directory of your choice to an entry.  You can also make children
inherit the attachment directory from a parent, so that an entire
subtree uses the same attached directory.

The following commands deal with attachments:

‘C-c C-a     (org-attach)’
     The dispatcher for commands related to the attachment system.
     After these keys, a list of commands is displayed and you must
     press an additional key to select a command:

     ‘a     (org-attach-attach)’
          Select a file and move it into the task’s attachment
          directory.  The file will be copied, moved, or linked,
          depending on ‘org-attach-method’.  Note that hard links are
          not supported on all systems.

     ‘c/m/l’
          Attach a file using the copy/move/link method.  Note that hard
          links are not supported on all systems.

     ‘n     (org-attach-new)’
          Create a new attachment as an Emacs buffer.

     ‘z     (org-attach-sync)’
          Synchronize the current task with its attachment directory, in
          case you added attachments yourself.

     ‘o     (org-attach-open)’
          Open current task’s attachment.  If there is more than one,
          prompt for a file name first.  Opening will follow the rules
          set by ‘org-file-apps’.  For more details, see the information
          on following hyperlinks (*note Handling links::).

     ‘O     (org-attach-open-in-emacs)’
          Also open the attachment, but force opening the file in Emacs.

     ‘f     (org-attach-reveal)’
          Open the current task’s attachment directory.

     ‘F     (org-attach-reveal-in-emacs)’
          Also open the directory, but force using ‘dired’ in Emacs.

     ‘d     (org-attach-delete-one)’
          Select and delete a single attachment.

     ‘D     (org-attach-delete-all)’
          Delete all of a task’s attachments.  A safer way is to open
          the directory in ‘dired’ and delete from there.

     ‘s     (org-attach-set-directory)’
          Set a specific directory as the entry’s attachment directory.
          This works by putting the directory path into the ‘ATTACH_DIR’
          property.

     ‘i     (org-attach-set-inherit)’
          Set the ‘ATTACH_DIR_INHERIT’ property, so that children will
          use the same directory for attachments as the parent does.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you move entries or Org files from one directory to another,
you may want to configure ‘org-attach-directory’ to contain an absolute
path.


File: org.info,  Node: RSS Feeds,  Next: Protocols,  Prev: Attachments,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.3 RSS feeds
=============

Org can add and change entries based on information found in RSS feeds
and Atom feeds.  You could use this to make a task out of each new
podcast in a podcast feed.  Or you could use a phone-based note-creating
service on the web to import tasks into Org.  To access feeds, configure
the variable ‘org-feed-alist’.  The docstring of this variable has
detailed information.  Here is just an example:

     (setq org-feed-alist
          '(("Slashdot"
              "http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot"
              "~/txt/org/feeds.org" "Slashdot Entries")))

will configure that new items from the feed provided by
‘rss.slashdot.org’ will result in new entries in the file
‘~/org/feeds.org’ under the heading ‘Slashdot Entries’, whenever the
following command is used:

‘C-c C-x g     (org-feed-update-all)’
‘C-c C-x g’
     Collect items from the feeds configured in ‘org-feed-alist’ and act
     upon them.
‘C-c C-x G     (org-feed-goto-inbox)’
     Prompt for a feed name and go to the inbox configured for this
     feed.

   Under the same headline, Org will create a drawer ‘FEEDSTATUS’ in
which it will store information about the status of items in the feed,
to avoid adding the same item several times.  You should add
‘FEEDSTATUS’ to the list of drawers in that file:

     #+DRAWERS: LOGBOOK PROPERTIES FEEDSTATUS

   For more information, including how to read atom feeds, see
‘org-feed.el’ and the docstring of ‘org-feed-alist’.


File: org.info,  Node: Protocols,  Next: Refile and copy,  Prev: RSS Feeds,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.4 Protocols for external access
=================================

You can set up Org for handling protocol calls from outside applications
that are passed to Emacs through the ‘emacsserver’.  For example, you
can configure bookmarks in your web browser to send a link to the
current page to Org and create a note from it using capture (*note
Capture::).  Or you could create a bookmark that will tell Emacs to open
the local source file of a remote website you are looking at with the
browser.  See <http://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/org-protocol.php> for
detailed documentation and setup instructions.


File: org.info,  Node: Refile and copy,  Next: Archiving,  Prev: Protocols,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.5 Refile and copy
===================

When reviewing the captured data, you may want to refile or to copy some
of the entries into a different list, for example into a project.
Cutting, finding the right location, and then pasting the note is
cumbersome.  To simplify this process, you can use the following special
command:

‘C-c M-w     (org-copy)’
     Copying works like refiling, except that the original note is not
     deleted.
‘C-c C-w     (org-refile)’
     Refile the entry or region at point.  This command offers possible
     locations for refiling the entry and lets you select one with
     completion.  The item (or all items in the region) is filed below
     the target heading as a subitem.  Depending on
     ‘org-reverse-note-order’, it will be either the first or last
     subitem.
     By default, all level 1 headlines in the current buffer are
     considered to be targets, but you can have more complex definitions
     across a number of files.  See the variable ‘org-refile-targets’
     for details.  If you would like to select a location via a
     file-path-like completion along the outline path, see the variables
     ‘org-refile-use-outline-path’ and
     ‘org-outline-path-complete-in-steps’.  If you would like to be able
     to create new nodes as new parents for refiling on the fly, check
     the variable ‘org-refile-allow-creating-parent-nodes’.  When the
     variable ‘org-log-refile’(1) is set, a timestamp or a note will be
     recorded when an entry has been refiled.
‘C-u C-c C-w’
     Use the refile interface to jump to a heading.
‘C-u C-u C-c C-w     (org-refile-goto-last-stored)’
     Jump to the location where ‘org-refile’ last moved a tree to.
‘C-2 C-c C-w’
     Refile as the child of the item currently being clocked.
‘C-3 C-c C-w’
     Refile and keep the entry in place.  Also see ‘org-refile-keep’ to
     make this the default behavior, and beware that this may result in
     duplicated ‘ID’ properties.
‘C-0 C-c C-w  or  C-u C-u C-u C-c C-w     (org-refile-cache-clear)’
     Clear the target cache.  Caching of refile targets can be turned on
     by setting ‘org-refile-use-cache’.  To make the command see new
     possible targets, you have to clear the cache with this command.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) with corresponding ‘#+STARTUP’ keywords ‘logrefile’,
‘lognoterefile’, and ‘nologrefile’


File: org.info,  Node: Archiving,  Prev: Refile and copy,  Up: Capture - Refile - Archive

9.6 Archiving
=============

When a project represented by a (sub)tree is finished, you may want to
move the tree out of the way and to stop it from contributing to the
agenda.  Archiving is important to keep your working files compact and
global searches like the construction of agenda views fast.

‘C-c C-x C-a     (org-archive-subtree-default)’
     Archive the current entry using the command specified in the
     variable ‘org-archive-default-command’.

* Menu:

* Moving subtrees::             Moving a tree to an archive file
* Internal archiving::          Switch off a tree but keep it in the file


File: org.info,  Node: Moving subtrees,  Next: Internal archiving,  Prev: Archiving,  Up: Archiving

9.6.1 Moving a tree to the archive file
---------------------------------------

The most common archiving action is to move a project tree to another
file, the archive file.

‘C-c C-x C-s  or short  C-c $     (org-archive-subtree)’
     Archive the subtree starting at the cursor position to the location
     given by ‘org-archive-location’.
‘C-u C-c C-x C-s’
     Check if any direct children of the current headline could be moved
     to the archive.  To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO
     entries.  If none are found, the command offers to move it to the
     archive location.  If the cursor is _not_ on a headline when this
     command is invoked, the level 1 trees will be checked.

   The default archive location is a file in the same directory as the
current file, with the name derived by appending ‘_archive’ to the
current file name.  You can also choose what heading to file archived
items under, with the possibility to add them to a datetree in a file.
For information and examples on how to specify the file and the heading,
see the documentation string of the variable ‘org-archive-location’.

   There is also an in-buffer option for setting this variable, for
example(1):

     #+ARCHIVE: %s_done::

If you would like to have a special ARCHIVE location for a single entry
or a (sub)tree, give the entry an ‘:ARCHIVE:’ property with the location
as the value (*note Properties and Columns::).

   When a subtree is moved, it receives a number of special properties
that record context information like the file from where the entry came,
its outline path the archiving time etc.  Configure the variable
‘org-archive-save-context-info’ to adjust the amount of information
added.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For backward compatibility, the following also works: If there
are several such lines in a file, each specifies the archive location
for the text below it.  The first such line also applies to any text
before its definition.  However, using this method is _strongly_
deprecated as it is incompatible with the outline structure of the
document.  The correct method for setting multiple archive locations in
a buffer is using properties.


File: org.info,  Node: Internal archiving,  Prev: Moving subtrees,  Up: Archiving

9.6.2 Internal archiving
------------------------

If you want to just switch off (for agenda views) certain subtrees
without moving them to a different file, you can use the ‘ARCHIVE tag’.

   A headline that is marked with the ARCHIVE tag (*note Tags::) stays
at its location in the outline tree, but behaves in the following way:
   − It does not open when you attempt to do so with a visibility
     cycling command (*note Visibility cycling::).  You can force
     cycling archived subtrees with ‘C-<TAB>’, or by setting the option
     ‘org-cycle-open-archived-trees’.  Also normal outline commands like
     ‘show-all’ will open archived subtrees.
   − During sparse tree construction (*note Sparse trees::), matches in
     archived subtrees are not exposed, unless you configure the option
     ‘org-sparse-tree-open-archived-trees’.
   − During agenda view construction (*note Agenda Views::), the content
     of archived trees is ignored unless you configure the option
     ‘org-agenda-skip-archived-trees’, in which case these trees will
     always be included.  In the agenda you can press ‘v a’ to get
     archives temporarily included.
   − Archived trees are not exported (*note Exporting::), only the
     headline is.  Configure the details using the variable
     ‘org-export-with-archived-trees’.
   − Archived trees are excluded from column view unless the variable
     ‘org-columns-skip-archived-trees’ is configured to ‘nil’.

   The following commands help manage the ARCHIVE tag:

‘C-c C-x a     (org-toggle-archive-tag)’
     Toggle the ARCHIVE tag for the current headline.  When the tag is
     set, the headline changes to a shadowed face, and the subtree below
     it is hidden.
‘C-u C-c C-x a’
     Check if any direct children of the current headline should be
     archived.  To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO
     entries.  If none are found, the command offers to set the ARCHIVE
     tag for the child.  If the cursor is _not_ on a headline when this
     command is invoked, the level 1 trees will be checked.
‘C-TAB     (org-force-cycle-archived)’
     Cycle a tree even if it is tagged with ARCHIVE.
‘C-c C-x A     (org-archive-to-archive-sibling)’
     Move the current entry to the _Archive Sibling_.  This is a sibling
     of the entry with the heading ‘Archive’ and the tag ‘ARCHIVE’.  The
     entry becomes a child of that sibling and in this way retains a lot
     of its original context, including inherited tags and approximate
     position in the outline.


File: org.info,  Node: Agenda Views,  Next: Markup,  Prev: Capture - Refile - Archive,  Up: Top

10 Agenda views
***************

Due to the way Org works, TODO items, time-stamped items, and tagged
headlines can be scattered throughout a file or even a number of files.
To get an overview of open action items, or of events that are important
for a particular date, this information must be collected, sorted and
displayed in an organized way.

   Org can select items based on various criteria and display them in a
separate buffer.  Seven different view types are provided:

   • an _agenda_ that is like a calendar and shows information for
     specific dates,
   • a _TODO list_ that covers all unfinished action items,
   • a _match view_, showings headlines based on the tags, properties,
     and TODO state associated with them,
   • a _timeline view_ that shows all events in a single Org file, in
     time-sorted view,
   • a _text search view_ that shows all entries from multiple files
     that contain specified keywords,
   • a _stuck projects view_ showing projects that currently don’t move
     along, and
   • _custom views_ that are special searches and combinations of
     different views.

The extracted information is displayed in a special _agenda buffer_.
This buffer is read-only, but provides commands to visit the
corresponding locations in the original Org files, and even to edit
these files remotely.

   Two variables control how the agenda buffer is displayed and whether
the window configuration is restored when the agenda exits:
‘org-agenda-window-setup’ and ‘org-agenda-restore-windows-after-quit’.

* Menu:

* Agenda files::                Files being searched for agenda information
* Agenda dispatcher::           Keyboard access to agenda views
* Built-in agenda views::       What is available out of the box?
* Presentation and sorting::    How agenda items are prepared for display
* Agenda commands::             Remote editing of Org trees
* Custom agenda views::         Defining special searches and views
* Exporting Agenda Views::      Writing a view to a file
* Agenda column view::          Using column view for collected entries


File: org.info,  Node: Agenda files,  Next: Agenda dispatcher,  Prev: Agenda Views,  Up: Agenda Views

10.1 Agenda files
=================

The information to be shown is normally collected from all _agenda
files_, the files listed in the variable ‘org-agenda-files’(1).  If a
directory is part of this list, all files with the extension ‘.org’ in
this directory will be part of the list.

   Thus, even if you only work with a single Org file, that file should
be put into the list(2).  You can customize ‘org-agenda-files’, but the
easiest way to maintain it is through the following commands

‘C-c [     (org-agenda-file-to-front)’
     Add current file to the list of agenda files.  The file is added to
     the front of the list.  If it was already in the list, it is moved
     to the front.  With a prefix argument, file is added/moved to the
     end.
‘C-c ]     (org-remove-file)’
     Remove current file from the list of agenda files.
‘C-'     (org-cycle-agenda-files)’
‘C-,’
     Cycle through agenda file list, visiting one file after the other.
‘M-x org-iswitchb RET’
     Command to use an ‘iswitchb’-like interface to switch to and
     between Org buffers.

The Org menu contains the current list of files and can be used to visit
any of them.

   If you would like to focus the agenda temporarily on a file not in
this list, or on just one file in the list, or even on only a subtree in
a file, then this can be done in different ways.  For a single agenda
command, you may press ‘<’ once or several times in the dispatcher
(*note Agenda dispatcher::).  To restrict the agenda scope for an
extended period, use the following commands:

‘C-c C-x <     (org-agenda-set-restriction-lock)’
     Permanently restrict the agenda to the current subtree.  When with
     a prefix argument, or with the cursor before the first headline in
     a file, the agenda scope is set to the entire file.  This
     restriction remains in effect until removed with ‘C-c C-x >’, or by
     typing either ‘<’ or ‘>’ in the agenda dispatcher.  If there is a
     window displaying an agenda view, the new restriction takes effect
     immediately.
‘C-c C-x >     (org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock)’
     Remove the permanent restriction created by ‘C-c C-x <’.

When working with ‘speedbar.el’, you can use the following commands in
the Speedbar frame:

‘< in the speedbar frame     (org-speedbar-set-agenda-restriction)’
     Permanently restrict the agenda to the item—either an Org file or a
     subtree in such a file—at the cursor in the Speedbar frame.  If
     there is a window displaying an agenda view, the new restriction
     takes effect immediately.
‘> in the speedbar frame     (org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock)’
     Lift the restriction.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If the value of that variable is not a list, but a single file
name, then the list of agenda files will be maintained in that external
file.

   (2) When using the dispatcher, pressing ‘<’ before selecting a
command will actually limit the command to the current file, and ignore
‘org-agenda-files’ until the next dispatcher command.


File: org.info,  Node: Agenda dispatcher,  Next: Built-in agenda views,  Prev: Agenda files,  Up: Agenda Views

10.2 The agenda dispatcher
==========================

The views are created through a dispatcher, which should be bound to a
global key—for example ‘C-c a’ (*note Activation::).  In the following
we will assume that ‘C-c a’ is indeed how the dispatcher is accessed and
list keyboard access to commands accordingly.  After pressing ‘C-c a’,
an additional letter is required to execute a command.  The dispatcher
offers the following default commands:

‘a’
     Create the calendar-like agenda (*note Weekly/daily agenda::).
‘t / T’
     Create a list of all TODO items (*note Global TODO list::).
‘m / M’
     Create a list of headlines matching a TAGS expression (*note
     Matching tags and properties::).
‘L’
     Create the timeline view for the current buffer (*note Timeline::).
‘s’
     Create a list of entries selected by a boolean expression of
     keywords and/or regular expressions that must or must not occur in
     the entry.
‘/’
     Search for a regular expression in all agenda files and
     additionally in the files listed in
     ‘org-agenda-text-search-extra-files’.  This uses the Emacs command
     ‘multi-occur’.  A prefix argument can be used to specify the number
     of context lines for each match, default is 1.
‘# / !’
     Create a list of stuck projects (*note Stuck projects::).
‘<’
     Restrict an agenda command to the current buffer(1).  After
     pressing ‘<’, you still need to press the character selecting the
     command.
‘< <’
     If there is an active region, restrict the following agenda command
     to the region.  Otherwise, restrict it to the current subtree(2).
     After pressing ‘< <’, you still need to press the character
     selecting the command.

‘*’
     Toggle sticky agenda views.  By default, Org maintains only a
     single agenda buffer and rebuilds it each time you change the view,
     to make sure everything is always up to date.  If you switch
     between views often and the build time bothers you, you can turn on
     sticky agenda buffers (make this the default by customizing the
     variable ‘org-agenda-sticky’).  With sticky agendas, the dispatcher
     only switches to the selected view, you need to update it by hand
     with ‘r’ or ‘g’.  You can toggle sticky agenda view any time with
     ‘org-toggle-sticky-agenda’.

   You can also define custom commands that will be accessible through
the dispatcher, just like the default commands.  This includes the
possibility to create extended agenda buffers that contain several
blocks together, for example the weekly agenda, the global TODO list and
a number of special tags matches.  *Note Custom agenda views::.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For backward compatibility, you can also press ‘1’ to restrict to
the current buffer.

   (2) For backward compatibility, you can also press ‘0’ to restrict to
the current region/subtree.


File: org.info,  Node: Built-in agenda views,  Next: Presentation and sorting,  Prev: Agenda dispatcher,  Up: Agenda Views

10.3 The built-in agenda views
==============================

In this section we describe the built-in views.

* Menu:

* Weekly/daily agenda::         The calendar page with current tasks
* Global TODO list::            All unfinished action items
* Matching tags and properties::  Structured information with fine-tuned search
* Timeline::                    Time-sorted view for single file
* Search view::                 Find entries by searching for text
* Stuck projects::              Find projects you need to review


File: org.info,  Node: Weekly/daily agenda,  Next: Global TODO list,  Prev: Built-in agenda views,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.1 The weekly/daily agenda
------------------------------

The purpose of the weekly/daily _agenda_ is to act like a page of a
paper agenda, showing all the tasks for the current week or day.

‘C-c a a     (org-agenda-list)’
     Compile an agenda for the current week from a list of Org files.
     The agenda shows the entries for each day.  With a numeric
     prefix(1) (like ‘C-u 2 1 C-c a a’) you may set the number of days
     to be displayed.

   The default number of days displayed in the agenda is set by the
variable ‘org-agenda-span’ (or the obsolete ‘org-agenda-ndays’).  This
variable can be set to any number of days you want to see by default in
the agenda, or to a span name, such as ‘day’, ‘week’, ‘month’ or ‘year’.
For weekly agendas, the default is to start on the previous monday (see
‘org-agenda-start-on-weekday’).  You can also set the start date using a
date shift: ‘(setq org-agenda-start-day "+10d")’ will start the agenda
ten days from today in the future.

   Remote editing from the agenda buffer means, for example, that you
can change the dates of deadlines and appointments from the agenda
buffer.  The commands available in the Agenda buffer are listed in *note
Agenda commands::.

Calendar/Diary integration
..........................

Emacs contains the calendar and diary by Edward M. Reingold.  The
calendar displays a three-month calendar with holidays from different
countries and cultures.  The diary allows you to keep track of
anniversaries, lunar phases, sunrise/set, recurrent appointments
(weekly, monthly) and more.  In this way, it is quite complementary to
Org.  It can be very useful to combine output from Org with the diary.

   In order to include entries from the Emacs diary into Org mode’s
agenda, you only need to customize the variable

     (setq org-agenda-include-diary t)

After that, everything will happen automatically.  All diary entries
including holidays, anniversaries, etc., will be included in the agenda
buffer created by Org mode.  <SPC>, <TAB>, and <RET> can be used from
the agenda buffer to jump to the diary file in order to edit existing
diary entries.  The ‘i’ command to insert new entries for the current
date works in the agenda buffer, as well as the commands ‘S’, ‘M’, and
‘C’ to display Sunrise/Sunset times, show lunar phases and to convert to
other calendars, respectively.  ‘c’ can be used to switch back and forth
between calendar and agenda.

   If you are using the diary only for sexp entries and holidays, it is
faster to not use the above setting, but instead to copy or even move
the entries into an Org file.  Org mode evaluates diary-style sexp
entries, and does it faster because there is no overhead for first
creating the diary display.  Note that the sexp entries must start at
the left margin, no whitespace is allowed before them.  For example, the
following segment of an Org file will be processed and entries will be
made in the agenda:

     * Birthdays and similar stuff
     #+CATEGORY: Holiday
     %%(org-calendar-holiday)   ; special function for holiday names
     #+CATEGORY: Ann
     %%(org-anniversary 1956  5 14)(2) Arthur Dent is %d years old
     %%(org-anniversary 1869 10  2) Mahatma Gandhi would be %d years old

Anniversaries from BBDB
.......................

If you are using the Big Brothers Database to store your contacts, you
will very likely prefer to store anniversaries in BBDB rather than in a
separate Org or diary file.  Org supports this and will show BBDB
anniversaries as part of the agenda.  All you need to do is to add the
following to one of your agenda files:

     * Anniversaries
       :PROPERTIES:
       :CATEGORY: Anniv
       :END:
     %%(org-bbdb-anniversaries)

   You can then go ahead and define anniversaries for a BBDB record.
Basically, you need to press ‘C-o anniversary <RET>’ with the cursor in
a BBDB record and then add the date in the format ‘YYYY-MM-DD’ or
‘MM-DD’, followed by a space and the class of the anniversary
(‘birthday’ or ‘wedding’, or a format string).  If you omit the class,
it will default to ‘birthday’.  Here are a few examples, the header for
the file ‘org-bbdb.el’ contains more detailed information.

     1973-06-22
     06-22
     1955-08-02 wedding
     2008-04-14 %s released version 6.01 of org mode, %d years ago

   After a change to BBDB, or for the first agenda display during an
Emacs session, the agenda display will suffer a short delay as Org
updates its hash with anniversaries.  However, from then on things will
be very fast—much faster in fact than a long list of
‘%%(diary-anniversary)’ entries in an Org or Diary file.

Appointment reminders
.....................

Org can interact with Emacs appointments notification facility.  To add
the appointments of your agenda files, use the command
‘org-agenda-to-appt’.  This command lets you filter through the list of
your appointments and add only those belonging to a specific category or
matching a regular expression.  It also reads a ‘APPT_WARNTIME’ property
which will then override the value of ‘appt-message-warning-time’ for
this appointment.  See the docstring for details.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For backward compatibility, the universal prefix ‘C-u’ causes all
TODO entries to be listed before the agenda.  This feature is
deprecated, use the dedicated TODO list, or a block agenda instead
(*note Block agenda::).

   (2) ‘org-anniversary’ is just like ‘diary-anniversary’, but the
argument order is always according to ISO and therefore independent of
the value of ‘calendar-date-style’.


File: org.info,  Node: Global TODO list,  Next: Matching tags and properties,  Prev: Weekly/daily agenda,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.2 The global TODO list
---------------------------

The global TODO list contains all unfinished TODO items formatted and
collected into a single place.

‘C-c a t     (org-todo-list)’
     Show the global TODO list.  This collects the TODO items from all
     agenda files (*note Agenda Views::) into a single buffer.  By
     default, this lists items with a state the is not a DONE state.
     The buffer is in ‘agenda-mode’, so there are commands to examine
     and manipulate the TODO entries directly from that buffer (*note
     Agenda commands::).
‘C-c a T     (org-todo-list)’
     Like the above, but allows selection of a specific TODO keyword.
     You can also do this by specifying a prefix argument to ‘C-c a t’.
     You are prompted for a keyword, and you may also specify several
     keywords by separating them with ‘|’ as the boolean OR operator.
     With a numeric prefix, the Nth keyword in ‘org-todo-keywords’ is
     selected.  The ‘r’ key in the agenda buffer regenerates it, and you
     can give a prefix argument to this command to change the selected
     TODO keyword, for example ‘3 r’.  If you often need a search for a
     specific keyword, define a custom command for it (*note Agenda
     dispatcher::).
     Matching specific TODO keywords can also be done as part of a tags
     search (*note Tag searches::).

   Remote editing of TODO items means that you can change the state of a
TODO entry with a single key press.  The commands available in the TODO
list are described in *note Agenda commands::.

   Normally the global TODO list simply shows all headlines with TODO
keywords.  This list can become very long.  There are two ways to keep
it more compact:
   − Some people view a TODO item that has been _scheduled_ for
     execution or have a _deadline_ (*note Timestamps::) as no longer
     _open_.  Configure the variables
     ‘org-agenda-todo-ignore-scheduled’,
     ‘org-agenda-todo-ignore-deadlines’,
     ‘org-agenda-todo-ignore-timestamp’ and/or
     ‘org-agenda-todo-ignore-with-date’ to exclude such items from the
     global TODO list.
   − TODO items may have sublevels to break up the task into subtasks.
     In such cases it may be enough to list only the highest level TODO
     headline and omit the sublevels from the global list.  Configure
     the variable ‘org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels’ to get this behavior.


File: org.info,  Node: Matching tags and properties,  Next: Timeline,  Prev: Global TODO list,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.3 Matching tags and properties
-----------------------------------

If headlines in the agenda files are marked with _tags_ (*note Tags::),
or have properties (*note Properties and Columns::), you can select
headlines based on this metadata and collect them into an agenda buffer.
The match syntax described here also applies when creating sparse trees
with ‘C-c / m’.

‘C-c a m     (org-tags-view)’
     Produce a list of all headlines that match a given set of tags.
     The command prompts for a selection criterion, which is a boolean
     logic expression with tags, like ‘+work+urgent-withboss’ or
     ‘work|home’ (*note Tags::).  If you often need a specific search,
     define a custom command for it (*note Agenda dispatcher::).
‘C-c a M     (org-tags-view)’
     Like ‘C-c a m’, but only select headlines that are also TODO items
     in a not-DONE state and force checking subitems (see variable
     ‘org-tags-match-list-sublevels’).  To exclude scheduled/deadline
     items, see the variable
     ‘org-agenda-tags-todo-honor-ignore-options’.  Matching specific
     TODO keywords together with a tags match is also possible, see
     *note Tag searches::.

   The commands available in the tags list are described in *note Agenda
commands::.

Match syntax
............

A search string can use Boolean operators ‘&’ for ‘AND’ and ‘|’ for
‘OR’.  ‘&’ binds more strongly than ‘|’.  Parentheses are not
implemented.  Each element in the search is either a tag, a regular
expression matching tags, or an expression like ‘PROPERTY OPERATOR
VALUE’ with a comparison operator, accessing a property value.  Each
element may be preceded by ‘-’, to select against it, and ‘+’ is
syntactic sugar for positive selection.  The ‘AND’ operator ‘&’ is
optional when ‘+’ or ‘-’ is present.  Here are some examples, using only
tags.

‘work’
     Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’.
‘work&boss’
     Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’ and ‘:boss:’.
‘+work-boss’
     Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’, but discard those also tagged
     ‘:boss:’.
‘work|laptop’
     Selects lines tagged ‘:work:’ or ‘:laptop:’.
‘work|laptop+night’
     Like before, but require the ‘:laptop:’ lines to be tagged also
     ‘:night:’.

   Instead of a tag, you may also specify a regular expression enclosed
in curly braces.  For example, ‘work+{^boss.*}’ matches headlines that
contain the tag ‘:work:’ and any tag starting with ‘boss’.

   Group tags (*note Tag groups::) are expanded as regular expressions.
E.g., if ‘:work:’ is a group tag for the group ‘:work:lab:conf:’, then
searching for ‘work’ will search for ‘{\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)}’ and
searching for ‘-work’ will search for all headlines but those with one
of the tag in the group (i.e., ‘-{\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)}’).

   You may also test for properties (*note Properties and Columns::) at
the same time as matching tags.  The properties may be real properties,
or special properties that represent other metadata (*note Special
properties::).  For example, the “property” ‘TODO’ represents the TODO
keyword of the entry and the “property” ‘PRIORITY’ represents the
PRIORITY keyword of the entry.  The ITEM special property cannot
currently be used in tags/property searches(1).

   Except the *note Special properties::, one other “property” can also
be used.  ‘LEVEL’ represents the level of an entry.  So a search
‘+LEVEL=3+boss-TODO="DONE"’ lists all level three headlines that have
the tag ‘boss’ and are _not_ marked with the TODO keyword DONE.  In
buffers with ‘org-odd-levels-only’ set, ‘LEVEL’ does not count the
number of stars, but ‘LEVEL=2’ will correspond to 3 stars etc.

   Here are more examples:

‘work+TODO="WAITING"’
     Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines with the specific TODO keyword
     ‘WAITING’.
‘work+TODO="WAITING"|home+TODO="WAITING"’
     Waiting tasks both at work and at home.

   When matching properties, a number of different operators can be used
to test the value of a property.  Here is a complex example:

     +work-boss+PRIORITY="A"+Coffee="unlimited"+Effort<2         \
              +With={Sarah\|Denny}+SCHEDULED>="<2008-10-11>"

The type of comparison will depend on how the comparison value is
written:
   − If the comparison value is a plain number, a numerical comparison
     is done, and the allowed operators are ‘<’, ‘=’, ‘>’, ‘<=’, ‘>=’,
     and ‘<>’.
   − If the comparison value is enclosed in double-quotes, a string
     comparison is done, and the same operators are allowed.
   − If the comparison value is enclosed in double-quotes _and_ angular
     brackets (like ‘DEADLINE<="<2008-12-24 18:30>"’), both values are
     assumed to be date/time specifications in the standard Org way, and
     the comparison will be done accordingly.  Special values that will
     be recognized are ‘"<now>"’ for now (including time), and
     ‘"<today>"’, and ‘"<tomorrow>"’ for these days at 00:00 hours,
     i.e., without a time specification.  Also strings like ‘"<+5d>"’ or
     ‘"<-2m>"’ with units ‘d’, ‘w’, ‘m’, and ‘y’ for day, week, month,
     and year, respectively, can be used.
   − If the comparison value is enclosed in curly braces, a regexp match
     is performed, with ‘=’ meaning that the regexp matches the property
     value, and ‘<>’ meaning that it does not match.

   So the search string in the example finds entries tagged ‘:work:’ but
not ‘:boss:’, which also have a priority value ‘A’, a ‘:Coffee:’
property with the value ‘unlimited’, an ‘Effort’ property that is
numerically smaller than 2, a ‘:With:’ property that is matched by the
regular expression ‘Sarah\|Denny’, and that are scheduled on or after
October 11, 2008.

   Accessing TODO, LEVEL, and CATEGORY during a search is fast.
Accessing any other properties will slow down the search.  However, once
you have paid the price by accessing one property, testing additional
properties is cheap again.

   You can configure Org mode to use property inheritance during a
search, but beware that this can slow down searches considerably.  See
*note Property inheritance::, for details.

   For backward compatibility, and also for typing speed, there is also
a different way to test TODO states in a search.  For this, terminate
the tags/property part of the search string (which may include several
terms connected with ‘|’) with a ‘/’ and then specify a Boolean
expression just for TODO keywords.  The syntax is then similar to that
for tags, but should be applied with care: for example, a positive
selection on several TODO keywords cannot meaningfully be combined with
boolean AND.  However, _negative selection_ combined with AND can be
meaningful.  To make sure that only lines are checked that actually have
any TODO keyword (resulting in a speed-up), use ‘C-c a M’, or
equivalently start the TODO part after the slash with ‘!’.  Using ‘C-c a
M’ or ‘/!’ will not match TODO keywords in a DONE state.  Examples:

‘work/WAITING’
     Same as ‘work+TODO="WAITING"’
‘work/!-WAITING-NEXT’
     Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines that are neither ‘WAITING’ nor
     ‘NEXT’
‘work/!+WAITING|+NEXT’
     Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines that are either ‘WAITING’ or
     ‘NEXT’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) But *note skipping entries based on regexp:
x-agenda-skip-entry-regexp.


File: org.info,  Node: Timeline,  Next: Search view,  Prev: Matching tags and properties,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.4 Timeline for a single file
---------------------------------

The timeline summarizes all time-stamped items from a single Org mode
file in a _time-sorted view_.  The main purpose of this command is to
give an overview over events in a project.

‘C-c a L     (org-timeline)’
     Show a time-sorted view of the Org file, with all time-stamped
     items.  When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix, all unfinished TODO
     entries (scheduled or not) are also listed under the current date.

The commands available in the timeline buffer are listed in *note Agenda
commands::.


File: org.info,  Node: Search view,  Next: Stuck projects,  Prev: Timeline,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.5 Search view
------------------

This agenda view is a general text search facility for Org mode entries.
It is particularly useful to find notes.

‘C-c a s     (org-search-view)’
     This is a special search that lets you select entries by matching a
     substring or specific words using a boolean logic.
   For example, the search string ‘computer equipment’ will find entries
that contain ‘computer equipment’ as a substring.  If the two words are
separated by more space or a line break, the search will still match.
Search view can also search for specific keywords in the entry, using
Boolean logic.  The search string ‘+computer +wifi -ethernet
-{8\.11[bg]}’ will search for note entries that contain the keywords
‘computer’ and ‘wifi’, but not the keyword ‘ethernet’, and which are
also not matched by the regular expression ‘8\.11[bg]’, meaning to
exclude both 8.11b and 8.11g.  The first ‘+’ is necessary to turn on
word search, other ‘+’ characters are optional.  For more details, see
the docstring of the command ‘org-search-view’.

   Note that in addition to the agenda files, this command will also
search the files listed in ‘org-agenda-text-search-extra-files’.


File: org.info,  Node: Stuck projects,  Prev: Search view,  Up: Built-in agenda views

10.3.6 Stuck projects
---------------------

If you are following a system like David Allen’s GTD to organize your
work, one of the “duties” you have is a regular review to make sure that
all projects move along.  A _stuck_ project is a project that has no
defined next actions, so it will never show up in the TODO lists Org
mode produces.  During the review, you need to identify such projects
and define next actions for them.

‘C-c a #     (org-agenda-list-stuck-projects)’
     List projects that are stuck.
‘C-c a !’
     Customize the variable ‘org-stuck-projects’ to define what a stuck
     project is and how to find it.

   You almost certainly will have to configure this view before it will
work for you.  The built-in default assumes that all your projects are
level-2 headlines, and that a project is not stuck if it has at least
one entry marked with a TODO keyword TODO or NEXT or NEXTACTION.

   Let’s assume that you, in your own way of using Org mode, identify
projects with a tag PROJECT, and that you use a TODO keyword MAYBE to
indicate a project that should not be considered yet.  Let’s further
assume that the TODO keyword DONE marks finished projects, and that NEXT
and TODO indicate next actions.  The tag @SHOP indicates shopping and is
a next action even without the NEXT tag.  Finally, if the project
contains the special word IGNORE anywhere, it should not be listed
either.  In this case you would start by identifying eligible projects
with a tags/todo match(1) ‘+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE’, and then check for
TODO, NEXT, @SHOP, and IGNORE in the subtree to identify projects that
are not stuck.  The correct customization for this is

     (setq org-stuck-projects
           '("+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE" ("NEXT" "TODO") ("@SHOP")
                                    "\\<IGNORE\\>"))

   Note that if a project is identified as non-stuck, the subtree of
this entry will still be searched for stuck projects.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) *Note Tag searches::.


File: org.info,  Node: Presentation and sorting,  Next: Agenda commands,  Prev: Built-in agenda views,  Up: Agenda Views

10.4 Presentation and sorting
=============================

Before displaying items in an agenda view, Org mode visually prepares
the items and sorts them.  Each item occupies a single line.  The line
starts with a _prefix_ that contains the _category_ (*note Categories::)
of the item and other important information.  You can customize in which
column tags will be displayed through ‘org-agenda-tags-column’.  You can
also customize the prefix using the option ‘org-agenda-prefix-format’.
This prefix is followed by a cleaned-up version of the outline headline
associated with the item.

* Menu:

* Categories::                  Not all tasks are equal
* Time-of-day specifications::  How the agenda knows the time
* Sorting agenda items::        The order of things
* Filtering/limiting agenda items::  Dynamically narrow the agenda


File: org.info,  Node: Categories,  Next: Time-of-day specifications,  Prev: Presentation and sorting,  Up: Presentation and sorting

10.4.1 Categories
-----------------

The category is a broad label assigned to each agenda item.  By default,
the category is simply derived from the file name, but you can also
specify it with a special line in the buffer, like this(1):

     #+CATEGORY: Thesis

If you would like to have a special CATEGORY for a single entry or a
(sub)tree, give the entry a ‘:CATEGORY:’ property with the special
category you want to apply as the value.

The display in the agenda buffer looks best if the category is not
longer than 10 characters.

You can set up icons for category by customizing the
‘org-agenda-category-icon-alist’ variable.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For backward compatibility, the following also works: if there
are several such lines in a file, each specifies the category for the
text below it.  The first category also applies to any text before the
first CATEGORY line.  However, using this method is _strongly_
deprecated as it is incompatible with the outline structure of the
document.  The correct method for setting multiple categories in a
buffer is using a property.


File: org.info,  Node: Time-of-day specifications,  Next: Sorting agenda items,  Prev: Categories,  Up: Presentation and sorting

10.4.2 Time-of-day specifications
---------------------------------

Org mode checks each agenda item for a time-of-day specification.  The
time can be part of the timestamp that triggered inclusion into the
agenda, for example as in ‘<2005-05-10 Tue 19:00>’.  Time ranges can be
specified with two timestamps, like
‘<2005-05-10 Tue 20:30>--<2005-05-10 Tue 22:15>’.

   In the headline of the entry itself, a time(range) may also appear as
plain text (like ‘12:45’ or a ‘8:30-1pm’).  If the agenda integrates the
Emacs diary (*note Weekly/daily agenda::), time specifications in diary
entries are recognized as well.

   For agenda display, Org mode extracts the time and displays it in a
standard 24 hour format as part of the prefix.  The example times in the
previous paragraphs would end up in the agenda like this:

         8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer
        12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub
        19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem
        20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge

   If the agenda is in single-day mode, or for the display of today, the
timed entries are embedded in a time grid, like

         8:00...... ------------------
         8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer
        10:00...... ------------------
        12:00...... ------------------
        12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub
        14:00...... ------------------
        16:00...... ------------------
        18:00...... ------------------
        19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem
        20:00...... ------------------
        20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge

   The time grid can be turned on and off with the variable
‘org-agenda-use-time-grid’, and can be configured with
‘org-agenda-time-grid’.


File: org.info,  Node: Sorting agenda items,  Next: Filtering/limiting agenda items,  Prev: Time-of-day specifications,  Up: Presentation and sorting

10.4.3 Sorting agenda items
---------------------------

Before being inserted into a view, the items are sorted.  How this is
done depends on the type of view.
   • For the daily/weekly agenda, the items for each day are sorted.
     The default order is to first collect all items containing an
     explicit time-of-day specification.  These entries will be shown at
     the beginning of the list, as a _schedule_ for the day.  After
     that, items remain grouped in categories, in the sequence given by
     ‘org-agenda-files’.  Within each category, items are sorted by
     priority (*note Priorities::), which is composed of the base
     priority (2000 for priority ‘A’, 1000 for ‘B’, and 0 for ‘C’), plus
     additional increments for overdue scheduled or deadline items.
   • For the TODO list, items remain in the order of categories, but
     within each category, sorting takes place according to priority
     (*note Priorities::).  The priority used for sorting derives from
     the priority cookie, with additions depending on how close an item
     is to its due or scheduled date.
   • For tags matches, items are not sorted at all, but just appear in
     the sequence in which they are found in the agenda files.

   Sorting can be customized using the variable
‘org-agenda-sorting-strategy’, and may also include criteria based on
the estimated effort of an entry (*note Effort estimates::).


File: org.info,  Node: Filtering/limiting agenda items,  Prev: Sorting agenda items,  Up: Presentation and sorting

10.4.4 Filtering/limiting agenda items
--------------------------------------

Agenda built-in or customized commands are statically defined.  Agenda
filters and limits provide two ways of dynamically narrowing down the
list of agenda entries: _fitlers_ and _limits_.  Filters only act on the
display of the items, while limits take effect before the list of agenda
entries is built.  Filter are more often used interactively, while
limits are mostly useful when defined as local variables within custom
agenda commands.

Filtering in the agenda
.......................

‘/     (org-agenda-filter-by-tag)’
     Filter the agenda view with respect to a tag and/or effort
     estimates.  The difference between this and a custom agenda command
     is that filtering is very fast, so that you can switch quickly
     between different filters without having to recreate the agenda.(1)

     You will be prompted for a tag selection letter; <SPC> will mean
     any tag at all.  Pressing <TAB> at that prompt will offer use
     completion to select a tag (including any tags that do not have a
     selection character).  The command then hides all entries that do
     not contain or inherit this tag.  When called with prefix arg,
     remove the entries that _do_ have the tag.  A second ‘/’ at the
     prompt will turn off the filter and unhide any hidden entries.  If
     the first key you press is either ‘+’ or ‘-’, the previous filter
     will be narrowed by requiring or forbidding the selected additional
     tag.  Instead of pressing ‘+’ or ‘-’ after ‘/’, you can also
     immediately use the ‘\’ command.

     In order to filter for effort estimates, you should set up allowed
     efforts globally, for example
          (setq org-global-properties
              '(("Effort_ALL". "0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00")))
     You can then filter for an effort by first typing an operator, one
     of ‘<’, ‘>’, and ‘=’, and then the one-digit index of an effort
     estimate in your array of allowed values, where ‘0’ means the 10th
     value.  The filter will then restrict to entries with effort
     smaller-or-equal, equal, or larger-or-equal than the selected
     value.  If the digits 0–9 are not used as fast access keys to tags,
     you can also simply press the index digit directly without an
     operator.  In this case, ‘<’ will be assumed.  For application of
     the operator, entries without a defined effort will be treated
     according to the value of ‘org-sort-agenda-noeffort-is-high’.  To
     filter for tasks without effort definition, press ‘?’ as the
     operator.

     Org also supports automatic, context-aware tag filtering.  If the
     variable ‘org-agenda-auto-exclude-function’ is set to a
     user-defined function, that function can decide which tags should
     be excluded from the agenda automatically.  Once this is set, the
     ‘/’ command then accepts ‘RET’ as a sub-option key and runs the
     auto exclusion logic.  For example, let’s say you use a ‘Net’ tag
     to identify tasks which need network access, an ‘Errand’ tag for
     errands in town, and a ‘Call’ tag for making phone calls.  You
     could auto-exclude these tags based on the availability of the
     Internet, and outside of business hours, with something like this:

          (defun org-my-auto-exclude-function (tag)
            (and (cond
                  ((string= tag "Net")
                   (/= 0 (call-process "/sbin/ping" nil nil nil
                                       "-c1" "-q" "-t1" "mail.gnu.org")))
                  ((or (string= tag "Errand") (string= tag "Call"))
                   (let ((hour (nth 2 (decode-time))))
                     (or (< hour 8) (> hour 21)))))
                 (concat "-" tag)))

          (setq org-agenda-auto-exclude-function 'org-my-auto-exclude-function)

‘\     (org-agenda-filter-by-tag-refine)’
     Narrow the current agenda filter by an additional condition.  When
     called with prefix arg, remove the entries that _do_ have the tag,
     or that do match the effort criterion.  You can achieve the same
     effect by pressing ‘+’ or ‘-’ as the first key after the ‘/’
     command.

‘[ ] { }’
     in search view
          add new search words (‘[’ and ‘]’) or new regular expressions
          (‘{’ and ‘}’) to the query string.  The opening bracket/brace
          will add a positive search term prefixed by ‘+’, indicating
          that this search term must occur/match in the entry.  The
          closing bracket/brace will add a negative search term which
          must not occur/match in the entry for it to be selected.

‘<     (org-agenda-filter-by-category)’

     Filter the current agenda view with respect to the category of the
     item at point.  Pressing ‘<’ another time will remove this filter.
     You can add a filter preset through the option
     ‘org-agenda-category-filter-preset’ (see below.)

‘^     (org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline)’
     Filter the current agenda view and only display the siblings and
     the parent headline of the one at point.

‘=     (org-agenda-filter-by-regexp)’

     Filter the agenda view by a regular expression: only show agenda
     entries matching the regular expression the user entered.  When
     called with a prefix argument, it will filter _out_ entries
     matching the regexp.  With two universal prefix arguments, it will
     remove all the regexp filters, which can be accumulated.  You can
     add a filter preset through the option
     ‘org-agenda-category-filter-preset’ (see below.)

‘|     (org-agenda-filter-remove-all)’
     Remove all filters in the current agenda view.

Setting limits for the agenda
.............................

Here is a list of options that you can set, either globally, or locally
in your custom agenda views*note Custom agenda views::.

ORG-AGENDA-MAX-ENTRIES
     Limit the number of entries.
ORG-AGENDA-MAX-EFFORT
     Limit the duration of accumulated efforts (as minutes).
ORG-AGENDA-MAX-TODOS
     Limit the number of entries with TODO keywords.
ORG-AGENDA-MAX-TAGS
     Limit the number of tagged entries.

   When set to a positive integer, each option will exclude entries from
other categories: for example, ‘(setq org-agenda-max-effort 100)’ will
limit the agenda to 100 minutes of effort and exclude any entry that as
no effort property.  If you want to include entries with no effort
property, use a negative value for ‘org-agenda-max-effort’.

   One useful setup is to use ‘org-agenda-max-entries’ locally in a
custom command.  For example, this custom command will display the next
five entries with a ‘NEXT’ TODO keyword.

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("n" todo "NEXT"
              ((org-agenda-max-entries 5)))))

   Once you mark one of these five entry as ‘DONE’, rebuilding the
agenda will again the next five entries again, including the first entry
that was excluded so far.

   You can also dynamically set temporary limits(2):

‘~     (org-agenda-limit-interactively)’
     This prompts for the type of limit to apply and its value.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Custom commands can preset a filter by binding the variable
‘org-agenda-tag-filter-preset’ as an option.  This filter will then be
applied to the view and persist as a basic filter through refreshes and
more secondary filtering.  The filter is a global property of the entire
agenda view—in a block agenda, you should only set this in the global
options section, not in the section of an individual block.

   (2) Those temporary limits are lost when rebuilding the agenda.


File: org.info,  Node: Agenda commands,  Next: Custom agenda views,  Prev: Presentation and sorting,  Up: Agenda Views

10.5 Commands in the agenda buffer
==================================

Entries in the agenda buffer are linked back to the Org file or diary
file where they originate.  You are not allowed to edit the agenda
buffer itself, but commands are provided to show and jump to the
original entry location, and to edit the Org files “remotely” from the
agenda buffer.  In this way, all information is stored only once,
removing the risk that your agenda and note files may diverge.

   Some commands can be executed with mouse clicks on agenda lines.  For
the other commands, the cursor needs to be in the desired line.

     Motion
     ......

‘n     (org-agenda-next-line)’
     Next line (same as <down> and ‘C-n’).
‘p     (org-agenda-previous-line)’
     Previous line (same as <up> and ‘C-p’).

     View/Go to Org file
     ...................

‘<SPC>  or  mouse-3     (org-agenda-show-and-scroll-up)’
     Display the original location of the item in another window.  With
     prefix arg, make sure that the entire entry is made visible in the
     outline, not only the heading.
‘L     (org-agenda-recenter)’
     Display original location and recenter that window.
‘<TAB>  or  mouse-2     (org-agenda-goto)’
     Go to the original location of the item in another window.
‘<RET>     (org-agenda-switch-to)’
     Go to the original location of the item and delete other windows.
‘F     (org-agenda-follow-mode)’
     Toggle Follow mode.  In Follow mode, as you move the cursor through
     the agenda buffer, the other window always shows the corresponding
     location in the Org file.  The initial setting for this mode in new
     agenda buffers can be set with the variable
     ‘org-agenda-start-with-follow-mode’.
‘C-c C-x b     (org-agenda-tree-to-indirect-buffer)’
     Display the entire subtree of the current item in an indirect
     buffer.  With a numeric prefix argument N, go up to level N and
     then take that tree.  If N is negative, go up that many levels.
     With a ‘C-u’ prefix, do not remove the previously used indirect
     buffer.

‘C-c C-o     (org-agenda-open-link)’
     Follow a link in the entry.  This will offer a selection of any
     links in the text belonging to the referenced Org node.  If there
     is only one link, it will be followed without a selection prompt.

     Change display
     ..............

‘A’
     Interactively select another agenda view and append it to the
     current view.
‘o’
     Delete other windows.
‘v d  or short  d     (org-agenda-day-view)’
‘v w  or short  w     (org-agenda-week-view)’
‘v t     (org-agenda-fortnight-view)’
‘v m     (org-agenda-month-view)’
‘v y     (org-agenda-year-view)’
‘v SPC     (org-agenda-reset-view)’
     Switch to day/week/month/year view.  When switching to day or week
     view, this setting becomes the default for subsequent agenda
     refreshes.  Since month and year views are slow to create, they do
     not become the default.  A numeric prefix argument may be used to
     jump directly to a specific day of the year, ISO week, month, or
     year, respectively.  For example, ‘32 d’ jumps to February 1st, ‘9
     w’ to ISO week number 9.  When setting day, week, or month view, a
     year may be encoded in the prefix argument as well.  For example,
     ‘200712 w’ will jump to week 12 in 2007.  If such a year
     specification has only one or two digits, it will be mapped to the
     interval 1938–2037.  ‘v <SPC>’ will reset to what is set in
     ‘org-agenda-span’.
‘f     (org-agenda-later)’
     Go forward in time to display the following
     ‘org-agenda-current-span’ days.  For example, if the display covers
     a week, switch to the following week.  With prefix arg, go forward
     that many times ‘org-agenda-current-span’ days.
‘b     (org-agenda-earlier)’
     Go backward in time to display earlier dates.
‘.     (org-agenda-goto-today)’
     Go to today.
‘j     (org-agenda-goto-date)’
     Prompt for a date and go there.
‘J     (org-agenda-clock-goto)’
     Go to the currently clocked-in task in the agenda buffer.
‘D     (org-agenda-toggle-diary)’
     Toggle the inclusion of diary entries.  See *note Weekly/daily
     agenda::.
‘v l  or short  l     (org-agenda-log-mode)’
     Toggle Logbook mode.  In Logbook mode, entries that were marked
     DONE while logging was on (variable ‘org-log-done’) are shown in
     the agenda, as are entries that have been clocked on that day.  You
     can configure the entry types that should be included in log mode
     using the variable ‘org-agenda-log-mode-items’.  When called with a
     ‘C-u’ prefix, show all possible logbook entries, including state
     changes.  When called with two prefix arguments ‘C-u C-u’, show
     only logging information, nothing else.  ‘v L’ is equivalent to
     ‘C-u v l’.
‘v [  or short  [     (org-agenda-manipulate-query-add)’
     Include inactive timestamps into the current view.  Only for
     weekly/daily agenda and timeline views.
‘v a     (org-agenda-archives-mode)’
‘v A     (org-agenda-archives-mode 'files)’
     Toggle Archives mode.  In Archives mode, trees that are marked
     ‘ARCHIVED’ are also scanned when producing the agenda.  When you
     use the capital ‘A’, even all archive files are included.  To exit
     archives mode, press ‘v a’ again.
‘v R  or short  R     (org-agenda-clockreport-mode)’
     Toggle Clockreport mode.  In Clockreport mode, the daily/weekly
     agenda will always show a table with the clocked times for the time
     span and file scope covered by the current agenda view.  The
     initial setting for this mode in new agenda buffers can be set with
     the variable ‘org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode’.  By using a
     prefix argument when toggling this mode (i.e., ‘C-u R’), the clock
     table will not show contributions from entries that are hidden by
     agenda filtering(1).  See also the variable
     ‘org-clock-report-include-clocking-task’.
‘v c’
     Show overlapping clock entries, clocking gaps, and other clocking
     problems in the current agenda range.  You can then visit clocking
     lines and fix them manually.  See the variable
     ‘org-agenda-clock-consistency-checks’ for information on how to
     customize the definition of what constituted a clocking problem.
     To return to normal agenda display, press ‘l’ to exit Logbook mode.
‘v E  or short  E     (org-agenda-entry-text-mode)’
     Toggle entry text mode.  In entry text mode, a number of lines from
     the Org outline node referenced by an agenda line will be displayed
     below the line.  The maximum number of lines is given by the
     variable ‘org-agenda-entry-text-maxlines’.  Calling this command
     with a numeric prefix argument will temporarily modify that number
     to the prefix value.
‘G     (org-agenda-toggle-time-grid)’
     Toggle the time grid on and off.  See also the variables
     ‘org-agenda-use-time-grid’ and ‘org-agenda-time-grid’.
‘r     (org-agenda-redo)’
     Recreate the agenda buffer, for example to reflect the changes
     after modification of the timestamps of items with ‘S-<left>’ and
     ‘S-<right>’.  When the buffer is the global TODO list, a prefix
     argument is interpreted to create a selective list for a specific
     TODO keyword.
‘g     (org-agenda-redo)’
     Same as ‘r’.
‘C-x C-s  or short  s     (org-save-all-org-buffers)’
     Save all Org buffers in the current Emacs session, and also the
     locations of IDs.
‘C-c C-x C-c     (org-agenda-columns)’
     Invoke column view (*note Column view::) in the agenda buffer.  The
     column view format is taken from the entry at point, or (if there
     is no entry at point), from the first entry in the agenda view.  So
     whatever the format for that entry would be in the original buffer
     (taken from a property, from a ‘#+COLUMNS’ line, or from the
     default variable ‘org-columns-default-format’), will be used in the
     agenda.

‘C-c C-x >     (org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock)’
     Remove the restriction lock on the agenda, if it is currently
     restricted to a file or subtree (*note Agenda files::).

     Secondary filtering and query editing
     .....................................

     For a detailed description of these commands, see *note
     Filtering/limiting agenda items::.

‘/     (org-agenda-filter-by-tag)’
     Filter the agenda view with respect to a tag and/or effort
     estimates.

‘\     (org-agenda-filter-by-tag-refine)’
     Narrow the current agenda filter by an additional condition.

‘<     (org-agenda-filter-by-category)’

     Filter the current agenda view with respect to the category of the
     item at point.  Pressing ‘<’ another time will remove this filter.

‘^     (org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline)’
     Filter the current agenda view and only display the siblings and
     the parent headline of the one at point.

‘=     (org-agenda-filter-by-regexp)’

     Filter the agenda view by a regular expression: only show agenda
     entries matching the regular expression the user entered.  When
     called with a prefix argument, it will filter _out_ entries
     matching the regexp.  With two universal prefix arguments, it will
     remove all the regexp filters, which can be accumulated.  You can
     add a filter preset through the option
     ‘org-agenda-category-filter-preset’ (see below.)

‘|     (org-agenda-filter-remove-all)’
     Remove all filters in the current agenda view.

     Remote editing
     ..............

‘0--9’
     Digit argument.
‘C-_     (org-agenda-undo)’
     Undo a change due to a remote editing command.  The change is
     undone both in the agenda buffer and in the remote buffer.
‘t     (org-agenda-todo)’
     Change the TODO state of the item, both in the agenda and in the
     original org file.
‘C-S-<right>     (org-agenda-todo-nextset)’
‘C-S-<left>     (org-agenda-todo-previousset)’
     Switch to the next/previous set of TODO keywords.
‘C-k     (org-agenda-kill)’
     Delete the current agenda item along with the entire subtree
     belonging to it in the original Org file.  If the text to be
     deleted remotely is longer than one line, the kill needs to be
     confirmed by the user.  See variable ‘org-agenda-confirm-kill’.
‘C-c C-w     (org-agenda-refile)’
     Refile the entry at point.
‘C-c C-x C-a  or short  a     (org-agenda-archive-default-with-confirmation)’
     Archive the subtree corresponding to the entry at point using the
     default archiving command set in ‘org-archive-default-command’.
     When using the ‘a’ key, confirmation will be required.
‘C-c C-x a     (org-agenda-toggle-archive-tag)’
     Toggle the ARCHIVE tag for the current headline.
‘C-c C-x A     (org-agenda-archive-to-archive-sibling)’
     Move the subtree corresponding to the current entry to its _archive
     sibling_.
‘C-c C-x C-s  or short  $     (org-agenda-archive)’
     Archive the subtree corresponding to the current headline.  This
     means the entry will be moved to the configured archive location,
     most likely a different file.
‘T     (org-agenda-show-tags)’
     Show all tags associated with the current item.  This is useful if
     you have turned off ‘org-agenda-show-inherited-tags’, but still
     want to see all tags of a headline occasionally.
‘:     (org-agenda-set-tags)’
     Set tags for the current headline.  If there is an active region in
     the agenda, change a tag for all headings in the region.
‘,’
     Set the priority for the current item (‘org-agenda-priority’).  Org
     mode prompts for the priority character.  If you reply with <SPC>,
     the priority cookie is removed from the entry.
‘P     (org-agenda-show-priority)’
     Display weighted priority of current item.
‘+  or  S-<up>     (org-agenda-priority-up)’
     Increase the priority of the current item.  The priority is changed
     in the original buffer, but the agenda is not resorted.  Use the
     ‘r’ key for this.
‘-  or  S-<down>     (org-agenda-priority-down)’
     Decrease the priority of the current item.
‘z  or  C-c C-z     (org-agenda-add-note)’
     Add a note to the entry.  This note will be recorded, and then
     filed to the same location where state change notes are put.
     Depending on ‘org-log-into-drawer’, this may be inside a drawer.
‘C-c C-a     (org-attach)’
     Dispatcher for all command related to attachments.
‘C-c C-s     (org-agenda-schedule)’
     Schedule this item.  With prefix arg remove the scheduling
     timestamp
‘C-c C-d     (org-agenda-deadline)’
     Set a deadline for this item.  With prefix arg remove the deadline.
‘S-<right>     (org-agenda-do-date-later)’
     Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day
     into the future.  If the date is in the past, the first call to
     this command will move it to today.
     With a numeric prefix argument, change it by that many days.  For
     example, ‘3 6 5 S-<right>’ will change it by a year.  With a ‘C-u’
     prefix, change the time by one hour.  If you immediately repeat the
     command, it will continue to change hours even without the prefix
     arg.  With a double ‘C-u C-u’ prefix, do the same for changing
     minutes.
     The stamp is changed in the original Org file, but the change is
     not directly reflected in the agenda buffer.  Use ‘r’ or ‘g’ to
     update the buffer.
‘S-<left>     (org-agenda-do-date-earlier)’
     Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day
     into the past.
‘>     (org-agenda-date-prompt)’
     Change the timestamp associated with the current line.  The key ‘>’
     has been chosen, because it is the same as ‘S-.’ on my keyboard.
‘I     (org-agenda-clock-in)’
     Start the clock on the current item.  If a clock is running
     already, it is stopped first.
‘O     (org-agenda-clock-out)’
     Stop the previously started clock.
‘X     (org-agenda-clock-cancel)’
     Cancel the currently running clock.
‘J     (org-agenda-clock-goto)’
     Jump to the running clock in another window.
‘k     (org-agenda-capture)’
     Like ‘org-capture’, but use the date at point as the default date
     for the capture template.  See ‘org-capture-use-agenda-date’ to
     make this the default behavior of ‘org-capture’.

     Dragging agenda lines forward/backward
     ......................................

‘M-<up>     (org-agenda-drag-line-backward)’
     Drag the line at point backward one line(2).  With a numeric prefix
     argument, drag backward by that many lines.

‘M-<down>     (org-agenda-drag-line-forward)’
     Drag the line at point forward one line.  With a numeric prefix
     argument, drag forward by that many lines.

     Bulk remote editing selected entries
     ....................................

‘m     (org-agenda-bulk-mark)’
     Mark the entry at point for bulk action.  With numeric prefix
     argument, mark that many successive entries.
‘*     (org-agenda-bulk-mark-all)’
     Mark all visible agenda entries for bulk action.
‘u     (org-agenda-bulk-unmark)’
     Unmark entry at point for bulk action.
‘U     (org-agenda-bulk-remove-all-marks)’
     Unmark all marked entries for bulk action.
‘M-m     (org-agenda-bulk-toggle)’
     Toggle mark of the entry at point for bulk action.
‘M-*     (org-agenda-bulk-toggle-all)’
     Toggle marks of all visible entries for bulk action.
‘%     (org-agenda-bulk-mark-regexp)’
     Mark entries matching a regular expression for bulk action.
‘B     (org-agenda-bulk-action)’
     Bulk action: act on all marked entries in the agenda.  This will
     prompt for another key to select the action to be applied.  The
     prefix arg to ‘B’ will be passed through to the ‘s’ and ‘d’
     commands, to bulk-remove these special timestamps.  By default,
     marks are removed after the bulk.  If you want them to persist, set
     ‘org-agenda-bulk-persistent-marks’ to ‘t’ or hit ‘p’ at the prompt.

     ‘*’
          Toggle persistent marks.
     ‘$’
          Archive all selected entries.
     ‘A’
          Archive entries by moving them to their respective archive
          siblings.
     ‘t’
          Change TODO state.  This prompts for a single TODO keyword and
          changes the state of all selected entries, bypassing blocking
          and suppressing logging notes (but not timestamps).
     ‘+’
          Add a tag to all selected entries.
     ‘-’
          Remove a tag from all selected entries.
     ‘s’
          Schedule all items to a new date.  To shift existing schedule
          dates by a fixed number of days, use something starting with
          double plus at the prompt, for example ‘++8d’ or ‘++2w’.
     ‘d’
          Set deadline to a specific date.
     ‘r’
          Prompt for a single refile target and move all entries.  The
          entries will no longer be in the agenda; refresh (‘g’) to
          bring them back.
     ‘S’
          Reschedule randomly into the coming N days.  N will be
          prompted for.  With prefix arg (‘C-u B S’), scatter only
          across weekdays.
     ‘f’
          Apply a function(3) to marked entries.  For example, the
          function below sets the CATEGORY property of the entries to
          web.

               (defun set-category ()
                 (interactive "P")
                 (let* ((marker (or (org-get-at-bol 'org-hd-marker)
                                    (org-agenda-error)))
                        (buffer (marker-buffer marker)))
                   (with-current-buffer buffer
                     (save-excursion
                       (save-restriction
                         (widen)
                         (goto-char marker)
                         (org-back-to-heading t)
                         (org-set-property "CATEGORY" "web"))))))

     Calendar commands
     .................

‘c     (org-agenda-goto-calendar)’
     Open the Emacs calendar and move to the date at the agenda cursor.
‘c     (org-calendar-goto-agenda)’
     When in the calendar, compute and show the Org mode agenda for the
     date at the cursor.
‘i     (org-agenda-diary-entry)’
     Insert a new entry into the diary, using the date at the cursor and
     (for block entries) the date at the mark.  This will add to the
     Emacs diary file(4), in a way similar to the ‘i’ command in the
     calendar.  The diary file will pop up in another window, where you
     can add the entry.

     If you configure ‘org-agenda-diary-file’ to point to an Org mode
     file, Org will create entries (in Org mode syntax) in that file
     instead.  Most entries will be stored in a date-based outline tree
     that will later make it easy to archive appointments from previous
     months/years.  The tree will be built under an entry with a
     ‘DATE_TREE’ property, or else with years as top-level entries.
     Emacs will prompt you for the entry text—if you specify it, the
     entry will be created in ‘org-agenda-diary-file’ without further
     interaction.  If you directly press <RET> at the prompt without
     typing text, the target file will be shown in another window for
     you to finish the entry there.  See also the ‘k r’ command.
‘M     (org-agenda-phases-of-moon)’
     Show the phases of the moon for the three months around current
     date.
‘S     (org-agenda-sunrise-sunset)’
     Show sunrise and sunset times.  The geographical location must be
     set with calendar variables, see the documentation for the Emacs
     calendar.
‘C     (org-agenda-convert-date)’
     Convert the date at cursor into many other cultural and historic
     calendars.
‘H     (org-agenda-holidays)’
     Show holidays for three months around the cursor date.

‘M-x org-icalendar-combine-agenda-files RET’
     Export a single iCalendar file containing entries from all agenda
     files.  This is a globally available command, and also available in
     the agenda menu.

     Exporting to a file
     ...................

‘C-x C-w     (org-agenda-write)’
     Write the agenda view to a file.  Depending on the extension of the
     selected file name, the view will be exported as HTML (‘.html’ or
     ‘.htm’), Postscript (‘.ps’), PDF (‘.pdf’), Org (‘.org’) and plain
     text (any other extension).  When exporting to Org, only the body
     of original headlines are exported, not subtrees or inherited tags.
     When called with a ‘C-u’ prefix argument, immediately open the
     newly created file.  Use the variable
     ‘org-agenda-exporter-settings’ to set options for ‘ps-print’ and
     for ‘htmlize’ to be used during export.

     Quit and Exit
     .............

‘q     (org-agenda-quit)’
     Quit agenda, remove the agenda buffer.
‘x     (org-agenda-exit)’
     Exit agenda, remove the agenda buffer and all buffers loaded by
     Emacs for the compilation of the agenda.  Buffers created by the
     user to visit Org files will not be removed.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Only tags filtering will be respected here, effort filtering is
ignored.

   (2) Moving agenda lines does not persist after an agenda refresh and
does not modify the contributing ‘.org’ files

   (3) You can also create persistent custom functions through
‘org-agenda-bulk-custom-functions’.

   (4) This file is parsed for the agenda when
‘org-agenda-include-diary’ is set.


File: org.info,  Node: Custom agenda views,  Next: Exporting Agenda Views,  Prev: Agenda commands,  Up: Agenda Views

10.6 Custom agenda views
========================

Custom agenda commands serve two purposes: to store and quickly access
frequently used TODO and tags searches, and to create special composite
agenda buffers.  Custom agenda commands will be accessible through the
dispatcher (*note Agenda dispatcher::), just like the default commands.

* Menu:

* Storing searches::            Type once, use often
* Block agenda::                All the stuff you need in a single buffer
* Setting Options::             Changing the rules


File: org.info,  Node: Storing searches,  Next: Block agenda,  Prev: Custom agenda views,  Up: Custom agenda views

10.6.1 Storing searches
-----------------------

The first application of custom searches is the definition of keyboard
shortcuts for frequently used searches, either creating an agenda
buffer, or a sparse tree (the latter covering of course only the current
buffer).

   Custom commands are configured in the variable
‘org-agenda-custom-commands’.  You can customize this variable, for
example by pressing ‘C-c a C’.  You can also directly set it with Emacs
Lisp in ‘.emacs’.  The following example contains all valid agenda
views:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("x" agenda)
             ("y" agenda*)
             ("w" todo "WAITING")
             ("W" todo-tree "WAITING")
             ("u" tags "+boss-urgent")
             ("v" tags-todo "+boss-urgent")
             ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent")
             ("f" occur-tree "\\<FIXME\\>")
             ("h" . "HOME+Name tags searches") ; description for "h" prefix
             ("hl" tags "+home+Lisa")
             ("hp" tags "+home+Peter")
             ("hk" tags "+home+Kim")))

The initial string in each entry defines the keys you have to press
after the dispatcher command ‘C-c a’ in order to access the command.
Usually this will be just a single character, but if you have many
similar commands, you can also define two-letter combinations where the
first character is the same in several combinations and serves as a
prefix key(1).  The second parameter is the search type, followed by the
string or regular expression to be used for the matching.  The example
above will therefore define:

‘C-c a x’
     as a global search for agenda entries planned(2) this week/day.
‘C-c a y’
     as a global search for agenda entries planned this week/day, but
     only those with an hour specification like ‘[h]h:mm’—think of them
     as appointments.
‘C-c a w’
     as a global search for TODO entries with ‘WAITING’ as the TODO
     keyword
‘C-c a W’
     as the same search, but only in the current buffer and displaying
     the results as a sparse tree
‘C-c a u’
     as a global tags search for headlines marked ‘:boss:’ but not
     ‘:urgent:’
‘C-c a v’
     as the same search as ‘C-c a u’, but limiting the search to
     headlines that are also TODO items
‘C-c a U’
     as the same search as ‘C-c a u’, but only in the current buffer and
     displaying the result as a sparse tree
‘C-c a f’
     to create a sparse tree (again: current buffer only) with all
     entries containing the word ‘FIXME’
‘C-c a h’
     as a prefix command for a HOME tags search where you have to press
     an additional key (‘l’, ‘p’ or ‘k’) to select a name (Lisa, Peter,
     or Kim) as additional tag to match.

   Note that the ‘*-tree’ agenda views need to be called from an Org
buffer as they operate on the current buffer only.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You can provide a description for a prefix key by inserting a
cons cell with the prefix and the description.

   (2) _Planned_ means here that these entries have some planning
information attached to them, like a time-stamp, a scheduled or a
deadline string.  See ‘org-agenda-entry-types’ on how to set what
planning information will be taken into account.


File: org.info,  Node: Block agenda,  Next: Setting Options,  Prev: Storing searches,  Up: Custom agenda views

10.6.2 Block agenda
-------------------

Another possibility is the construction of agenda views that comprise
the results of _several_ commands, each of which creates a block in the
agenda buffer.  The available commands include ‘agenda’ for the daily or
weekly agenda (as created with ‘C-c a a’), ‘alltodo’ for the global TODO
list (as constructed with ‘C-c a t’), and the matching commands
discussed above: ‘todo’, ‘tags’, and ‘tags-todo’.  Here are two
examples:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
              ((agenda "")
               (tags-todo "home")
               (tags "garden")))
             ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
              ((agenda "")
               (tags-todo "work")
               (tags "office")))))

This will define ‘C-c a h’ to create a multi-block view for stuff you
need to attend to at home.  The resulting agenda buffer will contain
your agenda for the current week, all TODO items that carry the tag
‘home’, and also all lines tagged with ‘garden’.  Finally the command
‘C-c a o’ provides a similar view for office tasks.


File: org.info,  Node: Setting Options,  Prev: Block agenda,  Up: Custom agenda views

10.6.3 Setting options for custom commands
------------------------------------------

Org mode contains a number of variables regulating agenda construction
and display.  The global variables define the behavior for all agenda
commands, including the custom commands.  However, if you want to change
some settings just for a single custom view, you can do so.  Setting
options requires inserting a list of variable names and values at the
right spot in ‘org-agenda-custom-commands’.  For example:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("w" todo "WAITING"
              ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down))
               (org-agenda-prefix-format "  Mixed: ")))
             ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent"
              ((org-show-following-heading nil)
               (org-show-hierarchy-above nil)))
             ("N" search ""
              ((org-agenda-files '("~org/notes.org"))
               (org-agenda-text-search-extra-files nil)))))

Now the ‘C-c a w’ command will sort the collected entries only by
priority, and the prefix format is modified to just say ‘ Mixed: ’
instead of giving the category of the entry.  The sparse tags tree of
‘C-c a U’ will now turn out ultra-compact, because neither the headline
hierarchy above the match, nor the headline following the match will be
shown.  The command ‘C-c a N’ will do a text search limited to only a
single file.

   For command sets creating a block agenda,
‘org-agenda-custom-commands’ has two separate spots for setting options.
You can add options that should be valid for just a single command in
the set, and options that should be valid for all commands in the set.
The former are just added to the command entry; the latter must come
after the list of command entries.  Going back to the block agenda
example (*note Block agenda::), let’s change the sorting strategy for
the ‘C-c a h’ commands to ‘priority-down’, but let’s sort the results
for GARDEN tags query in the opposite order, ‘priority-up’.  This would
look like this:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
              ((agenda)
               (tags-todo "home")
               (tags "garden"
                     ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-up)))))
              ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down))))
             ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
              ((agenda)
               (tags-todo "work")
               (tags "office")))))

   As you see, the values and parentheses setting is a little complex.
When in doubt, use the customize interface to set this variable—it fully
supports its structure.  Just one caveat: when setting options in this
interface, the _values_ are just Lisp expressions.  So if the value is a
string, you need to add the double-quotes around the value yourself.

   To control whether an agenda command should be accessible from a
specific context, you can customize
‘org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts’.  Let’s say for example that you
have an agenda commands ‘"o"’ displaying a view that you only need when
reading emails.  Then you would configure this option like this:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts
           '(("o" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))

   You can also tell that the command key ‘"o"’ should refer to another
command key ‘"r"’.  In that case, add this command key like this:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts
           '(("o" "r" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))

   See the docstring of the variable for more information.


File: org.info,  Node: Exporting Agenda Views,  Next: Agenda column view,  Prev: Custom agenda views,  Up: Agenda Views

10.7 Exporting Agenda Views
===========================

If you are away from your computer, it can be very useful to have a
printed version of some agenda views to carry around.  Org mode can
export custom agenda views as plain text, HTML(1), Postscript, PDF(2),
and iCalendar files.  If you want to do this only occasionally, use the
command

‘C-x C-w     (org-agenda-write)’
     Write the agenda view to a file.  Depending on the extension of the
     selected file name, the view will be exported as HTML (extension
     ‘.html’ or ‘.htm’), Postscript (extension ‘.ps’), iCalendar
     (extension ‘.ics’), or plain text (any other extension).  Use the
     variable ‘org-agenda-exporter-settings’ to set options for
     ‘ps-print’ and for ‘htmlize’ to be used during export, for example

          (setq org-agenda-exporter-settings
                '((ps-number-of-columns 2)
                  (ps-landscape-mode t)
                  (org-agenda-add-entry-text-maxlines 5)
                  (htmlize-output-type 'css)))

   If you need to export certain agenda views frequently, you can
associate any custom agenda command with a list of output file names
(3).  Here is an example that first defines custom commands for the
agenda and the global TODO list, together with a number of files to
which to export them.  Then we define two block agenda commands and
specify file names for them as well.  File names can be relative to the
current working directory, or absolute.

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("X" agenda "" nil ("agenda.html" "agenda.ps"))
             ("Y" alltodo "" nil ("todo.html" "todo.txt" "todo.ps"))
             ("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
              ((agenda "")
               (tags-todo "home")
               (tags "garden"))
              nil
              ("~/views/home.html"))
             ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
              ((agenda)
               (tags-todo "work")
               (tags "office"))
              nil
              ("~/views/office.ps" "~/calendars/office.ics"))))

   The extension of the file name determines the type of export.  If it
is ‘.html’, Org mode will use the ‘htmlize.el’ package to convert the
buffer to HTML and save it to this file name.  If the extension is
‘.ps’, ‘ps-print-buffer-with-faces’ is used to produce Postscript
output.  If the extension is ‘.ics’, iCalendar export is run export over
all files that were used to construct the agenda, and limit the export
to entries listed in the agenda.  Any other extension produces a plain
ASCII file.

   The export files are _not_ created when you use one of those commands
interactively because this might use too much overhead.  Instead, there
is a special command to produce _all_ specified files in one step:

‘C-c a e     (org-store-agenda-views)’
     Export all agenda views that have export file names associated with
     them.

   You can use the options section of the custom agenda commands to also
set options for the export commands.  For example:

     (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
           '(("X" agenda ""
              ((ps-number-of-columns 2)
               (ps-landscape-mode t)
               (org-agenda-prefix-format " [ ] ")
               (org-agenda-with-colors nil)
               (org-agenda-remove-tags t))
              ("theagenda.ps"))))

This command sets two options for the Postscript exporter, to make it
print in two columns in landscape format—the resulting page can be cut
in two and then used in a paper agenda.  The remaining settings modify
the agenda prefix to omit category and scheduling information, and
instead include a checkbox to check off items.  We also remove the tags
to make the lines compact, and we don’t want to use colors for the
black-and-white printer.  Settings specified in
‘org-agenda-exporter-settings’ will also apply, but the settings in
‘org-agenda-custom-commands’ take precedence.

From the command line you may also use
     emacs -eval (org-batch-store-agenda-views) -kill
or, if you need to modify some parameters(4)
     emacs -eval '(org-batch-store-agenda-views                      \
                   org-agenda-span (quote month)                     \
                   org-agenda-start-day "2007-11-01"                 \
                   org-agenda-include-diary nil                      \
                   org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))'  \
           -kill
which will create the agenda views restricted to the file
‘~/org/project.org’, without diary entries and with a 30-day extent.

   You can also extract agenda information in a way that allows further
processing by other programs.  See *note Extracting agenda
information::, for more information.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You need to install Hrvoje Niksic’s ‘htmlize.el’.

   (2) To create PDF output, the ghostscript ‘ps2pdf’ utility must be
installed on the system.  Selecting a PDF file will also create the
postscript file.

   (3) If you want to store standard views like the weekly agenda or the
global TODO list as well, you need to define custom commands for them in
order to be able to specify file names.

   (4) Quoting depends on the system you use, please check the FAQ for
examples.


File: org.info,  Node: Agenda column view,  Prev: Exporting Agenda Views,  Up: Agenda Views

10.8 Using column view in the agenda
====================================

Column view (*note Column view::) is normally used to view and edit
properties embedded in the hierarchical structure of an Org file.  It
can be quite useful to use column view also from the agenda, where
entries are collected by certain criteria.

‘C-c C-x C-c     (org-agenda-columns)’
     Turn on column view in the agenda.

   To understand how to use this properly, it is important to realize
that the entries in the agenda are no longer in their proper outline
environment.  This causes the following issues:

  1. Org needs to make a decision which ‘COLUMNS’ format to use.  Since
     the entries in the agenda are collected from different files, and
     different files may have different ‘COLUMNS’ formats, this is a
     non-trivial problem.  Org first checks if the variable
     ‘org-agenda-overriding-columns-format’ is currently set, and if so,
     takes the format from there.  Otherwise it takes the format
     associated with the first item in the agenda, or, if that item does
     not have a specific format (defined in a property, or in its file),
     it uses ‘org-columns-default-format’.
  2. If any of the columns has a summary type defined (*note Column
     attributes::), turning on column view in the agenda will visit all
     relevant agenda files and make sure that the computations of this
     property are up to date.  This is also true for the special
     ‘CLOCKSUM’ property.  Org will then sum the values displayed in the
     agenda.  In the daily/weekly agenda, the sums will cover a single
     day; in all other views they cover the entire block.  It is vital
     to realize that the agenda may show the same entry _twice_ (for
     example as scheduled and as a deadline), and it may show two
     entries from the same hierarchy (for example a _parent_ and its
     _child_).  In these cases, the summation in the agenda will lead to
     incorrect results because some values will count double.
  3. When the column view in the agenda shows the ‘CLOCKSUM’, that is
     always the entire clocked time for this item.  So even in the
     daily/weekly agenda, the clocksum listed in column view may
     originate from times outside the current view.  This has the
     advantage that you can compare these values with a column listing
     the planned total effort for a task—one of the major applications
     for column view in the agenda.  If you want information about
     clocked time in the displayed period use clock table mode (press
     ‘R’ in the agenda).

  4. When the column view in the agenda shows the ‘CLOCKSUM_T’, that is
     always today’s clocked time for this item.  So even in the weekly
     agenda, the clocksum listed in column view only originates from
     today.  This lets you compare the time you spent on a task for
     today, with the time already spent (via ‘CLOCKSUM’) and with the
     planned total effort for it.


File: org.info,  Node: Markup,  Next: Exporting,  Prev: Agenda Views,  Up: Top

11 Markup for rich export
*************************

When exporting Org mode documents, the exporter tries to reflect the
structure of the document as accurately as possible in the back-end.
Since export targets like HTML, LaTeX allow much richer formatting, Org
mode has rules on how to prepare text for rich export.  This section
summarizes the markup rules used in an Org mode buffer.

* Menu:

* Structural markup elements::  The basic structure as seen by the exporter
* Images and tables::           Images, tables and caption mechanism
* Literal examples::            Source code examples with special formatting
* Include files::               Include additional files into a document
* Index entries::               Making an index
* Macro replacement::           Use macros to create templates
* Embedded LaTeX::           LaTeX can be freely used inside Org documents
* Special blocks::              Containers targeted at export back-ends


File: org.info,  Node: Structural markup elements,  Next: Images and tables,  Prev: Markup,  Up: Markup

11.1 Structural markup elements
===============================

* Menu:

* Document title::              Where the title is taken from
* Headings and sections::       The document structure as seen by the exporter
* Table of contents::           The if and where of the table of contents
* Lists::                       Lists
* Paragraphs::                  Paragraphs
* Footnote markup::             Footnotes
* Emphasis and monospace::      Bold, italic, etc.
* Horizontal rules::            Make a line
* Comment lines::               What will *not* be exported


File: org.info,  Node: Document title,  Next: Headings and sections,  Prev: Structural markup elements,  Up: Structural markup elements

Document title
--------------

The title of the exported document is taken from the special line

     #+TITLE: This is the title of the document

If this line does not exist, the title will be the name of the file
associated to buffer, without extension, or the buffer name.

   If you are exporting only a subtree, its heading will become the
title of the document.  If the subtree has a property ‘EXPORT_TITLE’,
that will take precedence.


File: org.info,  Node: Headings and sections,  Next: Table of contents,  Prev: Document title,  Up: Structural markup elements

Headings and sections
---------------------

The outline structure of the document as described in *note Document
Structure::, forms the basis for defining sections of the exported
document.  However, since the outline structure is also used for (for
example) lists of tasks, only the first three outline levels will be
used as headings.  Deeper levels will become itemized lists.  You can
change the location of this switch globally by setting the variable
‘org-export-headline-levels’, or on a per-file basis with a line

     #+OPTIONS: H:4


File: org.info,  Node: Table of contents,  Next: Lists,  Prev: Headings and sections,  Up: Structural markup elements

Table of contents
-----------------

The table of contents is normally inserted directly before the first
headline of the file.  The depth of the table is by default the same as
the number of headline levels, but you can choose a smaller number, or
turn off the table of contents entirely, by configuring the variable
‘org-export-with-toc’, or on a per-file basis with a line like

     #+OPTIONS: toc:2          (only to two levels in TOC)
     #+OPTIONS: toc:nil        (no default TOC at all)

   If you would like to move the table of contents to a different
location, you should turn off the default table using
‘org-export-with-toc’ or ‘#+OPTIONS’ and insert ‘#+TOC: headlines N’ at
the desired location(s).

     #+OPTIONS: toc:nil        (no default TOC)
     ...
     #+TOC: headlines 2        (insert TOC here, with two headline levels)

   Multiple ‘#+TOC: headline’ lines are allowed.  The same ‘TOC’ keyword
can also generate a list of all tables (resp. all listings) with a
caption in the buffer.

     #+TOC: listings           (build a list of listings)
     #+TOC: tables             (build a list of tables)

   The headline’s title usually determines its corresponding entry in a
table of contents.  However, it is possible to specify an alternative
title by setting ‘ALT_TITLE’ property accordingly.  It will then be used
when building the table.


File: org.info,  Node: Lists,  Next: Paragraphs,  Prev: Table of contents,  Up: Structural markup elements

Lists
-----

Plain lists as described in *note Plain lists::, are translated to the
back-end’s syntax for such lists.  Most back-ends support unordered,
ordered, and description lists.


File: org.info,  Node: Paragraphs,  Next: Footnote markup,  Prev: Lists,  Up: Structural markup elements

Paragraphs, line breaks, and quoting
------------------------------------

Paragraphs are separated by at least one empty line.  If you need to
enforce a line break within a paragraph, use ‘\\’ at the end of a line.

   To keep the line breaks in a region, but otherwise use normal
formatting, you can use this construct, which can also be used to format
poetry.

     #+BEGIN_VERSE
      Great clouds overhead
      Tiny black birds rise and fall
      Snow covers Emacs

          -- AlexSchroeder
     #+END_VERSE

   When quoting a passage from another document, it is customary to
format this as a paragraph that is indented on both the left and the
right margin.  You can include quotations in Org mode documents like
this:

     #+BEGIN_QUOTE
     Everything should be made as simple as possible,
     but not any simpler -- Albert Einstein
     #+END_QUOTE

   If you would like to center some text, do it like this:
     #+BEGIN_CENTER
     Everything should be made as simple as possible, \\
     but not any simpler
     #+END_CENTER


File: org.info,  Node: Footnote markup,  Next: Emphasis and monospace,  Prev: Paragraphs,  Up: Structural markup elements

Footnote markup
---------------

Footnotes defined in the way described in *note Footnotes::, will be
exported by all back-ends.  Org allows multiple references to the same
note, and multiple footnotes side by side.


File: org.info,  Node: Emphasis and monospace,  Next: Horizontal rules,  Prev: Footnote markup,  Up: Structural markup elements

Emphasis and monospace
----------------------

You can make words *bold*, /italic/, _underlined_, ‘=verbatim=’ and
‘~code~’, and, if you must, ‘+strike-through+’.  Text in the code and
verbatim string is not processed for Org mode specific syntax, it is
exported verbatim.

   To turn off fontification for marked up text, you can set
‘org-fontify-emphasized-text’ to ‘nil’.  To narrow down the list of
available markup syntax, you can customize ‘org-emphasis-alist’.  To
fine tune what characters are allowed before and after the markup
characters, you can tweak ‘org-emphasis-regexp-components’.  Beware that
changing one of the above variables will no take effect until you reload
Org, for which you may need to restart Emacs.


File: org.info,  Node: Horizontal rules,  Next: Comment lines,  Prev: Emphasis and monospace,  Up: Structural markup elements

Horizontal rules
----------------

A line consisting of only dashes, and at least 5 of them, will be
exported as a horizontal line.


File: org.info,  Node: Comment lines,  Prev: Horizontal rules,  Up: Structural markup elements

Comment lines
-------------

Lines starting with zero or more whitespace characters followed by one
‘#’ and a whitespace are treated as comments and will never be exported.
Also entire subtrees starting with the word ‘COMMENT’ will never be
exported.  Finally, regions surrounded by ‘#+BEGIN_COMMENT’ ...
‘#+END_COMMENT’ will not be exported.

‘C-c ;’
     Toggle the COMMENT keyword at the beginning of an entry.


File: org.info,  Node: Images and tables,  Next: Literal examples,  Prev: Structural markup elements,  Up: Markup

11.2 Images and Tables
======================

Both the native Org mode tables (*note Tables::) and tables formatted
with the ‘table.el’ package will be exported properly.  For Org mode
tables, the lines before the first horizontal separator line will become
table header lines.  You can use the following lines somewhere before
the table to assign a caption and a label for cross references, and in
the text you can refer to the object with ‘[[tab:basic-data]]’ (*note
Internal links::):

     #+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next table (or link)
     #+NAME:   tab:basic-data
        | ... | ...|
        |-----|----|

   Optionally, the caption can take the form:
     #+CAPTION[Caption for list of tables]: Caption for table.

   Some back-ends allow you to directly include images into the exported
document.  Org does this, if a link to an image files does not have a
description part, for example ‘[[./img/a.jpg]]’.  If you wish to define
a caption for the image and maybe a label for internal cross references,
make sure that the link is on a line by itself and precede it with
‘#+CAPTION’ and ‘#+NAME’ as follows:

     #+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next figure link (or table)
     #+NAME:   fig:SED-HR4049
     [[./img/a.jpg]]

Such images can be displayed within the buffer.  *Note the discussion of
image links: Handling links.

   Even though images and tables are prominent examples of captioned
structures, the same caption mechanism can apply to many others (e.g.,
LaTeX equations, source code blocks).  Depending on the export back-end,
those may or may not be handled.


File: org.info,  Node: Literal examples,  Next: Include files,  Prev: Images and tables,  Up: Markup

11.3 Literal examples
=====================

You can include literal examples that should not be subjected to markup.
Such examples will be typeset in monospace, so this is well suited for
source code and similar examples.

     #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE
     Some example from a text file.
     #+END_EXAMPLE

   Note that such blocks may be indented in order to align nicely with
indented text and in particular with plain list structure (*note Plain
lists::).  For simplicity when using small examples, you can also start
the example lines with a colon followed by a space.  There may also be
additional whitespace before the colon:

     Here is an example
        : Some example from a text file.

   If the example is source code from a programming language, or any
other text that can be marked up by font-lock in Emacs, you can ask for
the example to look like the fontified Emacs buffer(1).  This is done
with the ‘src’ block, where you also need to specify the name of the
major mode that should be used to fontify the example(2), see *note Easy
Templates:: for shortcuts to easily insert code blocks.

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
       (defun org-xor (a b)
          "Exclusive or."
          (if a (not b) b))
     #+END_SRC

   Both in ‘example’ and in ‘src’ snippets, you can add a ‘-n’ switch to
the end of the ‘BEGIN’ line, to get the lines of the example numbered.
If you use a ‘+n’ switch, the numbering from the previous numbered
snippet will be continued in the current one.  In literal examples, Org
will interpret strings like ‘(ref:name)’ as labels, and use them as
targets for special hyperlinks like ‘[[(name)]]’ (i.e., the reference
name enclosed in single parenthesis).  In HTML, hovering the mouse over
such a link will remote-highlight the corresponding code line, which is
kind of cool.

   You can also add a ‘-r’ switch which removes the labels from the
source code(3).  With the ‘-n’ switch, links to these references will be
labeled by the line numbers from the code listing, otherwise links will
use the labels with no parentheses.  Here is an example:

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp -n -r
     (save-excursion                  (ref:sc)
        (goto-char (point-min)))      (ref:jump)
     #+END_SRC
     In line [[(sc)]] we remember the current position.  [[(jump)][Line (jump)]]
     jumps to point-min.

   If the syntax for the label format conflicts with the language
syntax, use a ‘-l’ switch to change the format, for example ‘#+BEGIN_SRC
pascal -n -r -l "((%s))"’.  See also the variable
‘org-coderef-label-format’.

   HTML export also allows examples to be published as text areas (*note
Text areas in HTML export::).

   Because the ‘#+BEGIN_...’ and ‘#+END_...’ patterns need to be added
so often, shortcuts are provided using the Easy Templates facility
(*note Easy Templates::).

‘C-c '’
     Edit the source code example at point in its native mode.  This
     works by switching to a temporary buffer with the source code.  You
     need to exit by pressing ‘C-c '’ again(4).  The edited version will
     then replace the old version in the Org buffer.  Fixed-width
     regions (where each line starts with a colon followed by a space)
     will be edited using ‘artist-mode’(5) to allow creating ASCII
     drawings easily.  Using this command in an empty line will create a
     new fixed-width region.
‘C-c l’
     Calling ‘org-store-link’ while editing a source code example in a
     temporary buffer created with ‘C-c '’ will prompt for a label.
     Make sure that it is unique in the current buffer, and insert it
     with the proper formatting like ‘(ref:label)’ at the end of the
     current line.  Then the label is stored as a link ‘(label)’, for
     retrieval with ‘C-c C-l’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This works automatically for the HTML back-end (it requires
version 1.34 of the ‘htmlize.el’ package, which is distributed with
Org).  Fontified code chunks in LaTeX can be achieved using either the
listings or the <http://code.google.com/p/minted> package.  Refer to
‘org-latex-listings’ documentation for details.

   (2) Code in ‘src’ blocks may also be evaluated either interactively
or on export.  See *note Working With Source Code:: for more information
on evaluating code blocks.

   (3) Adding ‘-k’ to ‘-n -r’ will keep the labels in the source code
while using line numbers for the links, which might be useful to explain
those in an Org mode example code.

   (4) Upon exit, lines starting with ‘*’, ‘,*’, ‘#+’ and ‘,#+’ will get
a comma prepended, to keep them from being interpreted by Org as outline
nodes or special syntax.  These commas will be stripped for editing with
‘C-c '’, and also for export.

   (5) You may select a different-mode with the variable
‘org-edit-fixed-width-region-mode’.


File: org.info,  Node: Include files,  Next: Index entries,  Prev: Literal examples,  Up: Markup

11.4 Include files
==================

During export, you can include the content of another file.  For
example, to include your ‘.emacs’ file, you could use:

     #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" src emacs-lisp

The optional second and third parameter are the markup (i.e., ‘example’
or ‘src’), and, if the markup is ‘src’, the language for formatting the
contents.  The markup is optional; if it is not given, the text will be
assumed to be in Org mode format and will be processed normally.

   Contents of the included file will belong to the same structure
(headline, item) containing the ‘INCLUDE’ keyword.  In particular,
headlines within the file will become children of the current section.
That behavior can be changed by providing an additional keyword
parameter, ‘:minlevel’.  In that case, all headlines in the included
file will be shifted so the one with the lowest level reaches that
specified level.  For example, to make a file become a sibling of the
current top-level headline, use

     #+INCLUDE: "~/my-book/chapter2.org" :minlevel 1

   You can also include a portion of a file by specifying a lines range
using the ‘:lines’ parameter.  The line at the upper end of the range
will not be included.  The start and/or the end of the range may be
omitted to use the obvious defaults.

     #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "5-10"   Include lines 5 to 10, 10 excluded
     #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "-10"    Include lines 1 to 10, 10 excluded
     #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "10-"    Include lines from 10 to EOF

‘C-c '’
     Visit the include file at point.


File: org.info,  Node: Index entries,  Next: Macro replacement,  Prev: Include files,  Up: Markup

11.5 Index entries
==================

You can specify entries that will be used for generating an index during
publishing.  This is done by lines starting with ‘#+INDEX’.  An entry
the contains an exclamation mark will create a sub item.  See *note
Generating an index:: for more information.

     * Curriculum Vitae
     #+INDEX: CV
     #+INDEX: Application!CV


File: org.info,  Node: Macro replacement,  Next: Embedded LaTeX,  Prev: Index entries,  Up: Markup

11.6 Macro replacement
======================

You can define text snippets with

     #+MACRO: name   replacement text $1, $2 are arguments

which can be referenced in paragraphs, verse blocks, table cells and
some keywords with ‘{{{name(arg1,arg2)}}}’(1).  In addition to defined
macros, ‘{{{title}}}’, ‘{{{author}}}’, etc., will reference information
set by the ‘#+TITLE:’, ‘#+AUTHOR:’, and similar lines.  Also,
‘{{{time(FORMAT)}}}’ and ‘{{{modification-time(FORMAT)}}}’ refer to
current date time and to the modification time of the file being
exported, respectively.  FORMAT should be a format string understood by
‘format-time-string’.

   Macro expansion takes place during export.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Since commas separate arguments, commas within arguments have to
be escaped with a backslash character.  Conversely, backslash characters
before a comma, and only them, need to be escaped with another backslash
character.


File: org.info,  Node: Embedded LaTeX,  Next: Special blocks,  Prev: Macro replacement,  Up: Markup

11.7 Embedded LaTeX
===================

Plain ASCII is normally sufficient for almost all note taking.
Exceptions include scientific notes, which often require mathematical
symbols and the occasional formula.  LaTeX(1) is widely used to typeset
scientific documents.  Org mode supports embedding LaTeX code into its
files, because many academics are used to writing and reading LaTeX
source code, and because it can be readily processed to produce pretty
output for a number of export back-ends.

* Menu:

* Special symbols::             Greek letters and other symbols
* Subscripts and superscripts::  Simple syntax for raising/lowering text
* LaTeX fragments::          Complex formulas made easy
* Previewing LaTeX fragments::  What will this snippet look like?
* CDLaTeX mode::                Speed up entering of formulas

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) LaTeX is a macro system based on Donald E. Knuth’s TeX system.
Many of the features described here as “LaTeX” are really from TeX, but
for simplicity I am blurring this distinction.


File: org.info,  Node: Special symbols,  Next: Subscripts and superscripts,  Prev: Embedded LaTeX,  Up: Embedded LaTeX

11.7.1 Special symbols
----------------------

You can use LaTeX-like syntax to insert special symbols like ‘\alpha’ to
indicate the Greek letter, or ‘\to’ to indicate an arrow.  Completion
for these symbols is available, just type ‘\’ and maybe a few letters,
and press ‘M-<TAB>’ to see possible completions.  Unlike LaTeX code, Org
mode allows these symbols to be present without surrounding math
delimiters, for example:

     Angles are written as Greek letters \alpha, \beta and \gamma.

   During export, these symbols will be transformed into the native
format of the exporter back-end.  Strings like ‘\alpha’ will be exported
as ‘&alpha;’ in the HTML output, and as ‘$\alpha$’ in the LaTeX output.
Similarly, ‘\nbsp’ will become ‘&nbsp;’ in HTML and ‘~’ in LaTeX.  If
you need such a symbol inside a word, terminate it like this:
‘\Aacute{}stor’.

   A large number of entities is provided, with names taken from both
HTML and LaTeX; see the variable ‘org-entities’ for the complete list.
‘\-’ is treated as a shy hyphen, and ‘--’, ‘---’, and ‘...’ are all
converted into special commands creating hyphens of different lengths or
a compact set of dots.

   If you would like to see entities displayed as UTF-8 characters, use
the following command(1):

‘C-c C-x \’
     Toggle display of entities as UTF-8 characters.  This does not
     change the buffer content which remains plain ASCII, but it
     overlays the UTF-8 character for display purposes only.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You can turn this on by default by setting the variable
‘org-pretty-entities’, or on a per-file base with the ‘#+STARTUP’ option
‘entitiespretty’.


File: org.info,  Node: Subscripts and superscripts,  Next: LaTeX fragments,  Prev: Special symbols,  Up: Embedded LaTeX

11.7.2 Subscripts and superscripts
----------------------------------

Just like in LaTeX, ‘^’ and ‘_’ are used to indicate super- and
subscripts.  Again, these can be used without embedding them in
math-mode delimiters.  To increase the readability of ASCII text, it is
not necessary (but OK) to surround multi-character sub- and superscripts
with curly braces.  For example

     The mass of the sun is M_sun = 1.989 x 10^30 kg.  The radius of
     the sun is R_{sun} = 6.96 x 10^8 m.

   If you write a text where the underscore is often used in a different
context, Org’s convention to always interpret these as subscripts can
get in your way.  Configure the variable ‘org-use-sub-superscripts’ to
change this convention.  For example, when setting this variable to
‘{}’, ‘a_b’ will not be interpreted as a subscript, but ‘a_{b}’ will.

‘C-c C-x \’
     In addition to showing entities as UTF-8 characters, this command
     will also format sub- and superscripts in a WYSIWYM way.


File: org.info,  Node: LaTeX fragments,  Next: Previewing LaTeX fragments,  Prev: Subscripts and superscripts,  Up: Embedded LaTeX

11.7.3 LaTeX fragments
----------------------

Going beyond symbols and sub- and superscripts, a full formula language
is needed.  Org mode can contain LaTeX math fragments, and it supports
ways to process these for several export back-ends.  When exporting to
LaTeX, the code is obviously left as it is.  When exporting to HTML, Org
invokes the MathJax library (http://www.mathjax.org) (*note Math
formatting in HTML export::) to process and display the math(1).
Finally, it can also process the mathematical expressions into images(2)
that can be displayed in a browser.

   LaTeX fragments don’t need any special marking at all.  The following
snippets will be identified as LaTeX source code:
   • Environments of any kind(3).  The only requirement is that the
     ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ statements appear on a new line, at the
     beginning of the line or after whitespaces only.
   • Text within the usual LaTeX math delimiters.  To avoid conflicts
     with currency specifications, single ‘$’ characters are only
     recognized as math delimiters if the enclosed text contains at most
     two line breaks, is directly attached to the ‘$’ characters with no
     whitespace in between, and if the closing ‘$’ is followed by
     whitespace, punctuation or a dash.  For the other delimiters, there
     is no such restriction, so when in doubt, use ‘\(...\)’ as inline
     math delimiters.

For example:

     \begin{equation}
     x=\sqrt{b}
     \end{equation}

     If $a^2=b$ and \( b=2 \), then the solution must be
     either $$ a=+\sqrt{2} $$ or \[ a=-\sqrt{2} \].

   LaTeX processing can be configured with the variable
‘org-export-with-latex’.  The default setting is ‘t’ which means
‘MathJax’ for HTML, and no processing for ASCII and LaTeX back-ends.
You can also set this variable on a per-file basis using one of these
lines:

     #+OPTIONS: tex:t          Do the right thing automatically (MathJax)
     #+OPTIONS: tex:nil        Do not process LaTeX fragments at all
     #+OPTIONS: tex:verbatim   Verbatim export, for jsMath or so

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you plan to use this regularly or on pages with significant
page views, you should install ‘MathJax’ on your own server in order to
limit the load of our server.

   (2) For this to work you need to be on a system with a working LaTeX
installation.  You also need the ‘dvipng’ program or the ‘convert’,
respectively available at <http://sourceforge.net/projects/dvipng/> and
from the ‘imagemagick’ suite.  The LaTeX header that will be used when
processing a fragment can be configured with the variable
‘org-format-latex-header’.

   (3) When ‘MathJax’ is used, only the environments recognized by
‘MathJax’ will be processed.  When ‘dvipng’ program or ‘imagemagick’
suite is used to create images, any LaTeX environment will be handled.


File: org.info,  Node: Previewing LaTeX fragments,  Next: CDLaTeX mode,  Prev: LaTeX fragments,  Up: Embedded LaTeX

11.7.4 Previewing LaTeX fragments
---------------------------------

If you have ‘dvipng’ or ‘imagemagick’ installed(1), LaTeX fragments can
be processed to produce preview images of the typeset expressions:

‘C-c C-x C-l’
     Produce a preview image of the LaTeX fragment at point and overlay
     it over the source code.  If there is no fragment at point, process
     all fragments in the current entry (between two headlines).  When
     called with a prefix argument, process the entire subtree.  When
     called with two prefix arguments, or when the cursor is before the
     first headline, process the entire buffer.
‘C-c C-c’
     Remove the overlay preview images.

   You can customize the variable ‘org-format-latex-options’ to
influence some aspects of the preview.  In particular, the ‘:scale’ (and
for HTML export, ‘:html-scale’) property can be used to adjust the size
of the preview images.

   You can turn on the previewing of all LaTeX fragments in a file with

     #+STARTUP: latexpreview

   To disable it, simply use

     #+STARTUP: nolatexpreview

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Choose the converter by setting the variable
‘org-latex-create-formula-image-program’ accordingly.


File: org.info,  Node: CDLaTeX mode,  Prev: Previewing LaTeX fragments,  Up: Embedded LaTeX

11.7.5 Using CDLaTeX to enter math
----------------------------------

CDLaTeX mode is a minor mode that is normally used in combination with a
major LaTeX mode like AUCTeX in order to speed-up insertion of
environments and math templates.  Inside Org mode, you can make use of
some of the features of CDLaTeX mode.  You need to install ‘cdlatex.el’
and ‘texmathp.el’ (the latter comes also with AUCTeX) from
<http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools/cdlatex>.  Don’t use CDLaTeX
mode itself under Org mode, but use the light version ‘org-cdlatex-mode’
that comes as part of Org mode.  Turn it on for the current buffer with
‘M-x org-cdlatex-mode RET’, or for all Org files with

     (add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-org-cdlatex)

   When this mode is enabled, the following features are present (for
more details see the documentation of CDLaTeX mode):
   • Environment templates can be inserted with ‘C-c {’.
   • The <TAB> key will do template expansion if the cursor is inside a
     LaTeX fragment(1).  For example, <TAB> will expand ‘fr’ to
     ‘\frac{}{}’ and position the cursor correctly inside the first
     brace.  Another <TAB> will get you into the second brace.  Even
     outside fragments, <TAB> will expand environment abbreviations at
     the beginning of a line.  For example, if you write ‘equ’ at the
     beginning of a line and press <TAB>, this abbreviation will be
     expanded to an ‘equation’ environment.  To get a list of all
     abbreviations, type ‘M-x cdlatex-command-help RET’.
   • Pressing ‘_’ and ‘^’ inside a LaTeX fragment will insert these
     characters together with a pair of braces.  If you use <TAB> to
     move out of the braces, and if the braces surround only a single
     character or macro, they are removed again (depending on the
     variable ‘cdlatex-simplify-sub-super-scripts’).
   • Pressing the grave accent ‘`’ followed by a character inserts math
     macros, also outside LaTeX fragments.  If you wait more than 1.5
     seconds after the grave accent, a help window will pop up.
   • Pressing the apostrophe ‘'’ followed by another character modifies
     the symbol before point with an accent or a font.  If you wait more
     than 1.5 seconds after the apostrophe, a help window will pop up.
     Character modification will work only inside LaTeX fragments;
     outside the quote is normal.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Org mode has a method to test if the cursor is inside such a
fragment, see the documentation of the function
‘org-inside-LaTeX-fragment-p’.


File: org.info,  Node: Special blocks,  Prev: Embedded LaTeX,  Up: Markup

11.8 Special blocks
===================

Org syntax includes pre-defined blocks (*note Paragraphs:: and *note
Literal examples::).  It is also possible to create blocks containing
raw code targeted at a specific back-ends (e.g., ‘#+BEGIN_LATEX’).

   Any other block is a _special block_.

   For example, ‘#+BEGIN_ABSTRACT’ and ‘#+BEGIN_VIDEO’ are special
blocks.  The first one is useful when exporting to LaTeX, the second one
when exporting to HTML5.

   Each export back-end decides if they should be exported, and how.
When the block is ignored, its contents are still exported, as if the
opening and closing block lines were not there.  For example, when
exporting a ‘#+BEGIN_TEST’ block, HTML back-end wraps its contents
within a ‘<div name="test">’ tag.

   Refer to back-end specific documentation for more information.


File: org.info,  Node: Exporting,  Next: Publishing,  Prev: Markup,  Up: Top

12 Exporting
************

The Org mode export facilities can be used to export Org documents or
parts of Org documents to a variety of other formats.  In addition,
these facilities can be used with ‘orgtbl-mode’ and/or ‘orgstruct-mode’
in foreign buffers so you can author tables and lists in Org syntax and
convert them in place to the target language.

   ASCII export produces a readable and simple version of an Org file
for printing and sharing notes.  HTML export allows you to easily
publish notes on the web, or to build full-fledged websites.  LaTeX
export lets you use Org mode and its structured editing functions to
create arbitrarily complex LaTeX files for any kind of document.
OpenDocument Text (ODT) export allows seamless collaboration across
organizational boundaries.  Markdown export lets you seamlessly
collaborate with other developers.  Finally, iCal export can extract
entries with deadlines or appointments to produce a file in the
iCalendar format.

* Menu:

* The Export Dispatcher::       The main exporter interface
* Export back-ends::            Built-in export formats
* Export settings::             Generic export settings
* ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export::  Exporting to flat files with encoding
* Beamer export::               Exporting as a Beamer presentation
* HTML export::                 Exporting to HTML
* LaTeX and PDF export::     Exporting to LaTeX, and processing to PDF
* Markdown export::             Exporting to Markdown
* OpenDocument Text export::    Exporting to OpenDocument Text
* Org export::                  Exporting to Org
* Texinfo export::              Exporting to Texinfo
* iCalendar export::            Exporting to iCalendar
* Other built-in back-ends::    Exporting to a man page
* Export in foreign buffers::   Author tables and lists in Org syntax
* Advanced configuration::      Fine-tuning the export output


File: org.info,  Node: The Export Dispatcher,  Next: Export back-ends,  Prev: Exporting,  Up: Exporting

12.1 The Export Dispatcher
==========================

The main entry point for export related tasks is the dispatcher, a
hierarchical menu from which it is possible to select an export format
and toggle export options(1) from which it is possible to select an
export format and to toggle export options.

‘C-c C-e’     (‘org-export-dispatch’)

     Dispatch for export and publishing commands.  When called with a
     ‘C-u’ prefix argument, repeat the last export command on the
     current buffer while preserving toggled options.  If the current
     buffer hasn’t changed and subtree export was activated, the command
     will affect that same subtree.

   Normally the entire buffer is exported, but if there is an active
region only that part of the buffer will be exported.

   Several export options (*note Export settings::) can be toggled from
the export dispatcher with the following key combinations:

‘C-a’
     Toggle asynchronous export.  Asynchronous export uses an external
     Emacs process that is configured with a specified initialization
     file.

     While exporting asynchronously, the output is not displayed, but
     stored in a place called “the export stack”.  This stack can be
     displayed by calling the dispatcher with a double ‘C-u’ prefix
     argument, or with ‘&’ key from the dispatcher menu.

     To make this behavior the default, customize the variable
     ‘org-export-in-background’.

‘C-b’
     Toggle body-only export.  Its effect depends on the back-end used.
     Typically, if the back-end has a header section (like
     ‘<head>...</head>’ in the HTML back-end), a body-only export will
     not include this header.

‘C-s’
     Toggle subtree export.  The top heading becomes the document title.

     You can change the default state of this option by setting
     ‘org-export-initial-scope’.

‘C-v’
     Toggle visible-only export.  Only export the text that is currently
     visible, i.e., not hidden by outline visibility in the buffer.

   With the exception of asynchronous export, a successful export
process writes its output to the kill-ring.  You can configure this
behavior by altering the option ‘org-export-copy-to-kill-ring’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) It is also possible to use a less intrusive interface by setting
‘org-export-dispatch-use-expert-ui’ to a non-‘nil’ value.  In that case,
only a prompt is visible from the minibuffer.  From there one can still
switch back to regular menu by pressing <?>.


File: org.info,  Node: Export back-ends,  Next: Export settings,  Prev: The Export Dispatcher,  Up: Exporting

12.2 Export back-ends
=====================

An export back-end is a library that translates Org syntax into a
foreign format.  An export format is not available until the proper
back-end has been loaded.

   By default, the following four back-ends are loaded: ‘ascii’, ‘html’,
‘icalendar’ and ‘latex’.  It is possible to add more (or remove some) by
customizing ‘org-export-backends’.

   Built-in back-ends include:

   • ascii (ASCII format)
   • beamer (LaTeX Beamer format)
   • html (HTML format)
   • icalendar (iCalendar format)
   • latex (LaTeX format)
   • man (Man page format)
   • md (Markdown format)
   • odt (OpenDocument Text format)
   • org (Org format)
   • texinfo (Texinfo format)

   Other back-ends might be found in the ‘contrib/’ directory (*note
Installation::).


File: org.info,  Node: Export settings,  Next: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export,  Prev: Export back-ends,  Up: Exporting

12.3 Export settings
====================

Export options can be set: globally with variables; for an individual
file by making variables buffer-local with in-buffer settings (*note
In-buffer settings::), by setting individual keywords, or by specifying
them in a compact form with the ‘#+OPTIONS’ keyword; or for a tree by
setting properties (*note Properties and Columns::).  Options set at a
specific level override options set at a more general level.

   In-buffer settings may appear anywhere in the file, either directly
or indirectly through a file included using ‘#+SETUPFILE: filename’
syntax.  Option keyword sets tailored to a particular back-end can be
inserted from the export dispatcher (*note The Export Dispatcher::)
using the ‘Insert template’ command by pressing <#>.  To insert keywords
individually, a good way to make sure the keyword is correct is to type
‘#+’ and then to use ‘M-<TAB>’ for completion.

   The export keywords available for every back-end, and their
equivalent global variables, include:

‘AUTHOR’
     The document author (‘user-full-name’).

‘CREATOR’
     Entity responsible for output generation
     (‘org-export-creator-string’).

‘DATE’
     A date or a time-stamp(1).

‘DESCRIPTION’
     The document description.  Back-ends handle it as they see fit
     (e.g., for the XHTML meta tag), if at all.  You can use several
     such keywords for long descriptions.

‘EMAIL’
     The email address (‘user-mail-address’).

‘KEYWORDS’
     The keywords defining the contents of the document.  Back-ends
     handle it as they see fit (e.g., for the XHTML meta tag), if at
     all.  You can use several such keywords if the list is long.

‘LANGUAGE’
     The language used for translating some strings
     (‘org-export-default-language’).  E.g., ‘#+LANGUAGE: fr’ will tell
     Org to translate _File_ (english) into _Fichier_ (french) in the
     clocktable.

‘SELECT_TAGS’
     The tags that select a tree for export (‘org-export-select-tags’).
     The default value is ‘:export:’.  Within a subtree tagged with
     ‘:export:’, you can still exclude entries with ‘:noexport:’ (see
     below).  When headlines are selectively exported with ‘:export:’
     anywhere in a file, text before the first headline is ignored.

‘EXCLUDE_TAGS’
     The tags that exclude a tree from export
     (‘org-export-exclude-tags’).  The default value is ‘:noexport:’.
     Entries with the ‘:noexport:’ tag will be unconditionally excluded
     from the export, even if they have an ‘:export:’ tag.

‘TITLE’
     The title to be shown (otherwise derived from buffer’s name).  You
     can use several such keywords for long titles.

   The ‘#+OPTIONS’ keyword is a compact(2) form that recognizes the
following arguments:

‘':’
     Toggle smart quotes (‘org-export-with-smart-quotes’).

‘*:’
     Toggle emphasized text (‘org-export-with-emphasize’).

‘-:’
     Toggle conversion of special strings
     (‘org-export-with-special-strings’).

‘::’
     Toggle fixed-width sections (‘org-export-with-fixed-width’).

‘<:’
     Toggle inclusion of any time/date active/inactive stamps
     (‘org-export-with-timestamps’).

‘:’
     Toggle line-break-preservation (‘org-export-preserve-breaks’).

‘^:’
     Toggle TeX-like syntax for sub- and superscripts.  If you write
     "^:{}", ‘a_{b}’ will be interpreted, but the simple ‘a_b’ will be
     left as it is (‘org-export-with-sub-superscripts’).

‘arch:’
     Configure export of archived trees.  Can be set to ‘headline’ to
     only process the headline, skipping its contents
     (‘org-export-with-archived-trees’).

‘author:’
     Toggle inclusion of author name into exported file
     (‘org-export-with-author’).

‘c:’
     Toggle inclusion of CLOCK keywords (‘org-export-with-clocks’).

‘creator:’
     Configure inclusion of creator info into exported file.  It may be
     set to ‘comment’ (‘org-export-with-creator’).

‘d:’
     Toggle inclusion of drawers, or list drawers to include
     (‘org-export-with-drawers’).

‘e:’
     Toggle inclusion of entities (‘org-export-with-entities’).

‘email:’
     Toggle inclusion of the author’s e-mail into exported file
     (‘org-export-with-email’).

‘f:’
     Toggle the inclusion of footnotes (‘org-export-with-footnotes’).

‘H:’
     Set the number of headline levels for export
     (‘org-export-headline-levels’).  Below that level, headlines are
     treated differently.  In most back-ends, they become list items.

‘inline:’
     Toggle inclusion of inlinetasks (‘org-export-with-inlinetasks’).

‘num:’
     Toggle section-numbers (‘org-export-with-section-numbers’).  It can
     also be set to a number ‘n’, so only headlines at that level or
     above will be numbered.

‘p:’
     Toggle export of planning information (‘org-export-with-planning’).
     “Planning information” is the line containing the ‘SCHEDULED:’, the
     ‘DEADLINE:’ or the ‘CLOSED:’ cookies or a combination of them.

‘pri:’
     Toggle inclusion of priority cookies (‘org-export-with-priority’).

‘stat:’
     Toggle inclusion of statistics cookies
     (‘org-export-with-statistics-cookies’).

‘tags:’
     Toggle inclusion of tags, may also be ‘not-in-toc’
     (‘org-export-with-tags’).

‘tasks:’
     Toggle inclusion of tasks (TODO items), can be ‘nil’ to remove all
     tasks, ‘todo’ to remove DONE tasks, or a list of keywords to keep
     (‘org-export-with-tasks’).

‘tex:’
     Configure export of LaTeX fragments and environments.  It may be
     set to ‘verbatim’ (‘org-export-with-latex’).

‘timestamp:’
     Toggle inclusion of the creation time into exported file
     (‘org-export-time-stamp-file’).

‘toc:’
     Toggle inclusion of the table of contents, or set the level limit
     (‘org-export-with-toc’).

‘todo:’
     Toggle inclusion of TODO keywords into exported text
     (‘org-export-with-todo-keywords’).

‘|:’
     Toggle inclusion of tables (‘org-export-with-tables’).

   When exporting only a subtree, each of the previous keywords(3) can
be overridden locally by special node properties.  These begin with
‘EXPORT_’, followed by the name of the keyword they supplant.  For
example, ‘DATE’ and ‘OPTIONS’ keywords become, respectively,
‘EXPORT_DATE’ and ‘EXPORT_OPTIONS’ properties.

   If ‘org-export-allow-bind-keywords’ is non-‘nil’, Emacs variables can
become buffer-local during export by using the BIND keyword.  Its syntax
is ‘#+BIND: variable value’.  This is particularly useful for in-buffer
settings that cannot be changed using specific keywords.

   The name of the output file to be generated is taken from the file
associated to the buffer, when possible, or asked to you otherwise.  For
subtree export, you can also set ‘EXPORT_FILE_NAME’ property.  In all
cases, only the base name of the file is retained, and a back-end
specific extension is added.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The variable ‘org-export-date-timestamp-format’ defines how this
time-stamp will be exported.

   (2) If you want to configure many options this way, you can use
several ‘#+OPTIONS’ lines.

   (3) With the exception of ‘SETUPFILE’.


File: org.info,  Node: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export,  Next: Beamer export,  Prev: Export settings,  Up: Exporting

12.4 ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export
===============================

ASCII export produces a simple and very readable version of an Org mode
file, containing only plain ASCII.  Latin-1 and UTF-8 export augment the
file with special characters and symbols available in these encodings.

   Links are exported in a footnote-like style, with the descriptive
part in the text and the link in a note before the next heading.  See
the variable ‘org-ascii-links-to-notes’ for details and other options.

ASCII export commands
---------------------

‘C-c C-e t a/l/u     (org-ascii-export-to-ascii)’
     Export as an ASCII file.  For an Org file, ‘myfile.org’, the ASCII
     file will be ‘myfile.txt’.  The file will be overwritten without
     warning.  When the original file is ‘myfile.txt’, the resulting
     file becomes ‘myfile.txt.txt’ in order to prevent data loss.
‘C-c C-e t A/L/U     (org-ascii-export-as-ascii)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.

Header and sectioning structure
-------------------------------

In the exported version, the first three outline levels become
headlines, defining a general document structure.  Additional levels are
exported as lists.  The transition can also occur at a different level
(*note Export settings::).

Quoting ASCII text
------------------

You can insert text that will only appear when using ‘ASCII’ back-end
with the following constructs:

     Text @@ascii:and additional text@@ within a paragraph.

     #+ASCII: Some text

     #+BEGIN_ASCII
     All lines in this block will appear only when using this back-end.
     #+END_ASCII

ASCII specific attributes
-------------------------

‘ASCII’ back-end only understands one attribute, ‘:width’, which
specifies the length, in characters, of a given horizontal rule.  It
must be specified using an ‘ATTR_ASCII’ line, directly preceding the
rule.

     #+ATTR_ASCII: :width 10
     -----


File: org.info,  Node: Beamer export,  Next: HTML export,  Prev: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export,  Up: Exporting

12.5 Beamer export
==================

The LaTeX class _Beamer_ allows production of high quality presentations
using LaTeX and pdf processing.  Org mode has special support for
turning an Org mode file or tree into a Beamer presentation.

Beamer export commands
----------------------

‘C-c C-e l b     (org-beamer-export-to-latex)’
     Export as a LaTeX file.  For an Org file ‘myfile.org’, the LaTeX
     file will be ‘myfile.tex’.  The file will be overwritten without
     warning.
‘C-c C-e l B     (org-beamer-export-as-latex)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.
‘C-c C-e l P     (org-beamer-export-to-pdf)’
     Export as LaTeX and then process to PDF.
‘C-c C-e l O’
     Export as LaTeX and then process to PDF, then open the resulting
     PDF file.

Sectioning, Frames and Blocks
-----------------------------

Any tree with not-too-deep level nesting should in principle be
exportable as a Beamer presentation.  Headlines fall into three
categories: sectioning elements, frames and blocks.

   − Headlines become frames when their level is equal to
     ‘org-beamer-frame-level’ or ‘H’ value in an ‘OPTIONS’ line (*note
     Export settings::).

     Though, if a headline in the current tree has a ‘BEAMER_ENV’
     property set to either to ‘frame’ or ‘fullframe’, its level
     overrides the variable.  A ‘fullframe’ is a frame with an empty
     (ignored) title.

   − All frame’s children become ‘block’ environments.  Special block
     types can be enforced by setting headline’s ‘BEAMER_ENV’
     property(1) to an appropriate value (see
     ‘org-beamer-environments-default’ for supported values and
     ‘org-beamer-environments-extra’ for adding more).

   − As a special case, if the ‘BEAMER_ENV’ property is set to either
     ‘appendix’, ‘note’, ‘noteNH’ or ‘againframe’, the headline will
     become, respectively, an appendix, a note (within frame or between
     frame, depending on its level), a note with its title ignored or an
     ‘\againframe’ command.  In the latter case, a ‘BEAMER_REF’ property
     is mandatory in order to refer to the frame being resumed, and
     contents are ignored.

     Also, a headline with an ‘ignoreheading’ environment will have its
     contents only inserted in the output.  This special value is useful
     to have data between frames, or to properly close a ‘column’
     environment.

   Headlines also support ‘BEAMER_ACT’ and ‘BEAMER_OPT’ properties.  The
former is translated as an overlay/action specification, or a default
overlay specification when enclosed within square brackets.  The latter
specifies options(2) for the current frame or block.  The export
back-end will automatically wrap properties within angular or square
brackets when appropriate.

   Moreover, headlines handle the ‘BEAMER_COL’ property.  Its value
should be a decimal number representing the width of the column as a
fraction of the total text width.  If the headline has no specific
environment, its title will be ignored and its contents will fill the
column created.  Otherwise, the block will fill the whole column and the
title will be preserved.  Two contiguous headlines with a non-‘nil’
‘BEAMER_COL’ value share the same ‘columns’ LaTeX environment.  It will
end before the next headline without such a property.  This environment
is generated automatically.  Although, it can also be explicitly
created, with a special ‘columns’ value for ‘BEAMER_ENV’ property (if it
needs to be set up with some specific options, for example).

Beamer specific syntax
----------------------

Beamer back-end is an extension of LaTeX back-end.  As such, all LaTeX
specific syntax (e.g., ‘#+LATEX:’ or ‘#+ATTR_LATEX:’) is recognized.
See *note LaTeX and PDF export:: for more information.

   Beamer export introduces a number of keywords to insert code in the
document’s header.  Four control appearance of the presentation:
‘#+BEAMER_THEME’, ‘#+BEAMER_COLOR_THEME’, ‘#+BEAMER_FONT_THEME’,
‘#+BEAMER_INNER_THEME’ and ‘#+BEAMER_OUTER_THEME’.  All of them accept
optional arguments within square brackets.  The last one,
‘#+BEAMER_HEADER’, is more generic and allows you to append any line of
code in the header.

     #+BEAMER_THEME: Rochester [height=20pt]
     #+BEAMER_COLOR_THEME: spruce

   Table of contents generated from ‘toc:t’ ‘OPTION’ keyword are wrapped
within a ‘frame’ environment.  Those generated from a ‘TOC’ keyword
(*note Table of contents::) are not.  In that case, it is also possible
to specify options, enclosed within square brackets.

     #+TOC: headlines [currentsection]

   Beamer specific code can be inserted with the following constructs:

     #+BEAMER: \pause

     #+BEGIN_BEAMER
     All lines in this block will appear only when using this back-end.
     #+END_BEAMER

     Text @@beamer:some code@@ within a paragraph.

   In particular, this last example can be used to add overlay
specifications to objects whose type is among ‘bold’, ‘item’, ‘link’,
‘radio-target’ and ‘target’, when the value is enclosed within angular
brackets and put at the beginning the object.

     A *@@beamer:<2->@@useful* feature

   Eventually, every plain list has support for ‘:environment’,
‘:overlay’ and ‘:options’ attributes through ‘ATTR_BEAMER’ affiliated
keyword.  The first one allows the use of a different environment, the
second sets overlay specifications and the last one inserts optional
arguments in current list environment.

     #+ATTR_BEAMER: :overlay +-
     - item 1
     - item 2

Editing support
---------------

You can turn on a special minor mode ‘org-beamer-mode’ for faster
editing with:

     #+STARTUP: beamer

‘C-c C-b     (org-beamer-select-environment)’
     In ‘org-beamer-mode’, this key offers fast selection of a Beamer
     environment or the ‘BEAMER_COL’ property.

   Also, a template for useful in-buffer settings or properties can be
inserted into the buffer with ‘M-x org-beamer-insert-options-template’.
Among other things, this will install a column view format which is very
handy for editing special properties used by Beamer.

An example
----------

Here is a simple example Org document that is intended for Beamer
export.

     #+TITLE: Example Presentation
     #+AUTHOR: Carsten Dominik
     #+OPTIONS: H:2
     #+LATEX_CLASS: beamer
     #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [presentation]
     #+BEAMER_THEME: Madrid
     #+COLUMNS: %45ITEM %10BEAMER_ENV(Env) %10BEAMER_ACT(Act) %4BEAMER_COL(Col) %8BEAMER_OPT(Opt)

     * This is the first structural section

     ** Frame 1
     *** Thanks to Eric Fraga                                           :B_block:BMCOL:
         :PROPERTIES:
         :BEAMER_COL: 0.48
         :BEAMER_ENV: block
         :END:
         for the first viable Beamer setup in Org
     *** Thanks to everyone else                                        :B_block:BMCOL:
         :PROPERTIES:
         :BEAMER_COL: 0.48
         :BEAMER_ACT: <2->
         :BEAMER_ENV: block
         :END:
         for contributing to the discussion
     **** This will be formatted as a beamer note                              :B_note:
          :PROPERTIES:
          :BEAMER_env: note
          :END:
     ** Frame 2 (where we will not use columns)
     *** Request
         Please test this stuff!

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If this property is set, the entry will also get a
‘:B_environment:’ tag to make this visible.  This tag has no semantic
meaning, it is only a visual aid.

   (2) The ‘fragile’ option is added automatically if it contains code
that requires a verbatim environment, though.


File: org.info,  Node: HTML export,  Next: LaTeX and PDF export,  Prev: Beamer export,  Up: Exporting

12.6 HTML export
================

Org mode contains an HTML (XHTML 1.0 strict) exporter with extensive
HTML formatting, in ways similar to John Gruber’s _markdown_ language,
but with additional support for tables.

* Menu:

* HTML Export commands::        How to invoke HTML export
* HTML doctypes::               Org can export to various (X)HTML flavors
* HTML preamble and postamble::  How to insert a preamble and a postamble
* Quoting HTML tags::           Using direct HTML in Org mode
* Links in HTML export::        How links will be interpreted and formatted
* Tables in HTML export::       How to modify the formatting of tables
* Images in HTML export::       How to insert figures into HTML output
* Math formatting in HTML export::  Beautiful math also on the web
* Text areas in HTML export::   An alternative way to show an example
* CSS support::                 Changing the appearance of the output
* JavaScript support::          Info and Folding in a web browser


File: org.info,  Node: HTML Export commands,  Next: HTML doctypes,  Prev: HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.1 HTML export commands
---------------------------

‘C-c C-e h h     (org-html-export-to-html)’
     Export as an HTML file.  For an Org file ‘myfile.org’, the HTML
     file will be ‘myfile.html’.  The file will be overwritten without
     warning.  ‘C-c C-e h o’ Export as an HTML file and immediately open
     it with a browser.
‘C-c C-e h H     (org-html-export-as-html)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.


File: org.info,  Node: HTML doctypes,  Next: HTML preamble and postamble,  Prev: HTML Export commands,  Up: HTML export

12.6.2 HTML doctypes
--------------------

Org can export to various (X)HTML flavors.

   Setting the variable ‘org-html-doctype’ allows you to export to
different (X)HTML variants.  The exported HTML will be adjusted
according to the syntax requirements of that variant.  You can either
set this variable to a doctype string directly, in which case the
exporter will try to adjust the syntax automatically, or you can use a
ready-made doctype.  The ready-made options are:

   • “html4-strict”
   • “html4-transitional”
   • “html4-frameset”
   • “xhtml-strict”
   • “xhtml-transitional”
   • “xhtml-frameset”
   • “xhtml-11”
   • “html5”
   • “xhtml5”

   See the variable ‘org-html-doctype-alist’ for details.  The default
is “xhtml-strict”.

Fancy HTML5 export
..................

HTML5 introduces several new element types.  By default, Org will not
make use of these element types, but you can set ‘org-html-html5-fancy’
to ‘t’ (or set ‘html5-fancy’ item in an ‘OPTIONS’ line), to enable a few
new block-level elements.  These are created using arbitrary #+BEGIN and
#+END blocks.  For instance:

     #+BEGIN_ASIDE
     Lorem ipsum
     #+END_ASIDE

   Will export to:

     <aside>
       <p>Lorem ipsum</p>
     </aside>

   While this:

     #+ATTR_HTML: :controls controls :width 350
     #+BEGIN_VIDEO
     #+HTML: <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4">
     #+HTML: <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg">
     Your browser does not support the video tag.
     #+END_VIDEO

   Becomes:

     <video controls="controls" width="350">
       <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4">
       <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg">
       <p>Your browser does not support the video tag.</p>
     </video>

   Special blocks that do not correspond to HTML5 elements (see
‘org-html-html5-elements’) will revert to the usual behavior, i.e.,
‘#+BEGIN_LEDERHOSEN’ will still export to ‘<div class="lederhosen">’.

   Headlines cannot appear within special blocks.  To wrap a headline
and its contents in e.g., ‘<section>’ or ‘<article>’ tags, set the
‘HTML_CONTAINER’ property on the headline itself.


File: org.info,  Node: HTML preamble and postamble,  Next: Quoting HTML tags,  Prev: HTML doctypes,  Up: HTML export

12.6.3 HTML preamble and postamble
----------------------------------

The HTML exporter lets you define a preamble and a postamble.

   The default value for ‘org-html-preamble’ is ‘t’, which means that
the preamble is inserted depending on the relevant format string in
‘org-html-preamble-format’.

   Setting ‘org-html-preamble’ to a string will override the default
format string.  If you set it to a function, it will insert the output
of the function, which must be a string.  Setting to ‘nil’ will not
insert any preamble.

   The default value for ‘org-html-postamble’ is ‘'auto’, which means
that the HTML exporter will look for information about the author, the
email, the creator and the date, and build the postamble from these
values.  Setting ‘org-html-postamble’ to ‘t’ will insert the postamble
from the relevant format string found in ‘org-html-postamble-format’.
Setting it to ‘nil’ will not insert any postamble.


File: org.info,  Node: Quoting HTML tags,  Next: Links in HTML export,  Prev: HTML preamble and postamble,  Up: HTML export

12.6.4 Quoting HTML tags
------------------------

Plain ‘<’ and ‘>’ are always transformed to ‘&lt;’ and ‘&gt;’ in HTML
export.  If you want to include raw HTML code, which should only appear
in HTML export, mark it with ‘@@html:’ as in ‘@@html:<b>@@bold
text@@html:</b>@@’.  For more extensive HTML that should be copied
verbatim to the exported file use either

     #+HTML: Literal HTML code for export

or

     #+BEGIN_HTML
     All lines between these markers are exported literally
     #+END_HTML


File: org.info,  Node: Links in HTML export,  Next: Tables in HTML export,  Prev: Quoting HTML tags,  Up: HTML export

12.6.5 Links in HTML export
---------------------------

Internal links (*note Internal links::) will continue to work in HTML.
This includes automatic links created by radio targets (*note Radio
targets::).  Links to external files will still work if the target file
is on the same relative path as the published Org file.  Links to other
‘.org’ files will be translated into HTML links under the assumption
that an HTML version also exists of the linked file, at the same
relative path.  ‘id:’ links can then be used to jump to specific entries
across files.  For information related to linking files while publishing
them to a publishing directory see *note Publishing links::.

   If you want to specify attributes for links, you can do so using a
special ‘#+ATTR_HTML’ line to define attributes that will be added to
the ‘<a>’ or ‘<img>’ tags.  Here is an example that sets ‘title’ and
‘style’ attributes for a link:

     #+ATTR_HTML: :title The Org mode homepage :style color:red;
     [[http://orgmode.org]]


File: org.info,  Node: Tables in HTML export,  Next: Images in HTML export,  Prev: Links in HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.6 Tables
-------------

Org mode tables are exported to HTML using the table attributes defined
in ‘org-html-table-default-attributes’.  The default setting makes
tables without cell borders and frame.  If you would like to change this
for individual tables, place something like the following before the
table:

     #+CAPTION: This is a table with lines around and between cells
     #+ATTR_HTML: :border 2 :rules all :frame border

   You can also modify the default tags used for each row by setting
‘org-html-table-row-tags’.  See the docstring for an example on how to
use this option.


File: org.info,  Node: Images in HTML export,  Next: Math formatting in HTML export,  Prev: Tables in HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.7 Images in HTML export
----------------------------

HTML export can inline images given as links in the Org file, and it can
make an image the clickable part of a link.  By default(1), images are
inlined if a link does not have a description.  So ‘[[file:myimg.jpg]]’
will be inlined, while ‘[[file:myimg.jpg][the image]]’ will just produce
a link ‘the image’ that points to the image.  If the description part
itself is a ‘file:’ link or a ‘http:’ URL pointing to an image, this
image will be inlined and activated so that clicking on the image will
activate the link.  For example, to include a thumbnail that will link
to a high resolution version of the image, you could use:

     [[file:highres.jpg][file:thumb.jpg]]

   If you need to add attributes to an inlined image, use a
‘#+ATTR_HTML’.  In the example below we specify the ‘alt’ and ‘title’
attributes to support text viewers and accessibility, and align it to
the right.

     #+CAPTION: A black cat stalking a spider
     #+ATTR_HTML: :alt cat/spider image :title Action! :align right
     [[./img/a.jpg]]

You could use ‘http’ addresses just as well.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) But see the variable ‘org-html-inline-images’.


File: org.info,  Node: Math formatting in HTML export,  Next: Text areas in HTML export,  Prev: Images in HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.8 Math formatting in HTML export
-------------------------------------

LaTeX math snippets (*note LaTeX fragments::) can be displayed in two
different ways on HTML pages.  The default is to use the MathJax system
(http://www.mathjax.org) which should work out of the box with Org mode
installation because <http://orgmode.org> serves ‘MathJax’ for Org mode
users for small applications and for testing purposes.  If you plan to
use this regularly or on pages with significant page views, you should
install(1) MathJax on your own server in order to limit the load of our
server.  To configure ‘MathJax’, use the variable
‘org-html-mathjax-options’ or insert something like the following into
the buffer:

     #+HTML_MATHJAX: align:"left" mathml:t path:"/MathJax/MathJax.js"

See the docstring of the variable ‘org-html-mathjax-options’ for the
meaning of the parameters in this line.

   If you prefer, you can also request that LaTeX fragments are
processed into small images that will be inserted into the browser page.
Before the availability of MathJax, this was the default method for Org
files.  This method requires that the ‘dvipng’ program or ‘imagemagick’
suite is available on your system.  You can still get this processing
with

     #+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng

   or:

     #+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Installation instructions can be found on the MathJax website,
see <http://www.mathjax.org/resources/docs/?installation.html>.


File: org.info,  Node: Text areas in HTML export,  Next: CSS support,  Prev: Math formatting in HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.9 Text areas in HTML export
--------------------------------

An alternative way to publish literal code examples in HTML is to use
text areas, where the example can even be edited before pasting it into
an application.  It is triggered by ‘:textarea’ attribute at an
‘example’ or ‘src’ block.

   You may also use ‘:height’ and ‘:width’ attributes to specify the
height and width of the text area, which default to the number of lines
in the example, and 80, respectively.  For example

     #+ATTR_HTML: :textarea t :width 40
     #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE
       (defun org-xor (a b)
          "Exclusive or."
          (if a (not b) b))
     #+END_EXAMPLE


File: org.info,  Node: CSS support,  Next: JavaScript support,  Prev: Text areas in HTML export,  Up: HTML export

12.6.10 CSS support
-------------------

You can modify the CSS style definitions for the exported file.  The
HTML exporter assigns the following special CSS classes(1) to
appropriate parts of the document—your style specifications may change
these, in addition to any of the standard classes like for headlines,
tables, etc.
     p.author            author information, including email
     p.date              publishing date
     p.creator           creator info, about org mode version
     .title              document title
     .todo               TODO keywords, all not-done states
     .done               the DONE keywords, all states that count as done
     .WAITING            each TODO keyword also uses a class named after itself
     .timestamp          timestamp
     .timestamp-kwd      keyword associated with a timestamp, like SCHEDULED
     .timestamp-wrapper  span around keyword plus timestamp
     .tag                tag in a headline
     ._HOME              each tag uses itself as a class, "@" replaced by "_"
     .target             target for links
     .linenr             the line number in a code example
     .code-highlighted   for highlighting referenced code lines
     div.outline-N       div for outline level N (headline plus text))
     div.outline-text-N  extra div for text at outline level N
     .section-number-N   section number in headlines, different for each level
     .figure-number      label like "Figure 1:"
     .table-number       label like "Table 1:"
     .listing-number     label like "Listing 1:"
     div.figure          how to format an inlined image
     pre.src             formatted source code
     pre.example         normal example
     p.verse             verse paragraph
     div.footnotes       footnote section headline
     p.footnote          footnote definition paragraph, containing a footnote
     .footref            a footnote reference number (always a <sup>)
     .footnum            footnote number in footnote definition (always <sup>)

   Each exported file contains a compact default style that defines
these classes in a basic way(2).  You may overwrite these settings, or
add to them by using the variables ‘org-html-head’ and
‘org-html-head-extra’.  You can override the global values of these
variables for each file by using these keywords:

     #+HTML_HEAD: <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style1.css" />
     #+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA: <link rel="alternate stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style2.css" />

For longer style definitions, you can use several such lines.  You could
also directly write a ‘<style>’ ‘</style>’ section in this way, without
referring to an external file.

   In order to add styles to a subtree, use the ‘:HTML_CONTAINER_CLASS:’
property to assign a class to the tree.  In order to specify CSS styles
for a particular headline, you can use the id specified in a
‘:CUSTOM_ID:’ property.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If the classes on TODO keywords and tags lead to conflicts, use
the variables ‘org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix’ and
‘org-html-tag-class-prefix’ to make them unique.

   (2) This style is defined in the constant ‘org-html-style-default’,
which you should not modify.  To turn inclusion of these defaults off,
customize ‘org-html-head-include-default-style’ or set ‘html-style’ to
‘nil’ in an ‘OPTIONS’ line.


File: org.info,  Node: JavaScript support,  Prev: CSS support,  Up: HTML export

12.6.11 JavaScript supported display of web pages
-------------------------------------------------

Sebastian Rose has written a JavaScript program especially designed to
enhance the web viewing experience of HTML files created with Org.  This
program allows you to view large files in two different ways.  The first
one is an _Info_-like mode where each section is displayed separately
and navigation can be done with the ‘n’ and ‘p’ keys (and some other
keys as well, press ‘?’ for an overview of the available keys).  The
second view type is a _folding_ view much like Org provides inside
Emacs.  The script is available at <http://orgmode.org/org-info.js> and
you can find the documentation for it at
<http://orgmode.org/worg/code/org-info-js/>.  We host the script at our
site, but if you use it a lot, you might not want to be dependent on
<http://orgmode.org> and prefer to install a local copy on your own web
server.

   All it then takes to use this program is adding a single line to the
Org file:

     #+INFOJS_OPT: view:info toc:nil

If this line is found, the HTML header will automatically contain the
code needed to invoke the script.  Using the line above, you can set the
following viewing options:

     path:    The path to the script.  The default is to grab the script from
              <http://orgmode.org/org-info.js>, but you might want to have
              a local copy and use a path like ‘../scripts/org-info.js’.
     view:    Initial view when the website is first shown.  Possible values are:
              info      Info-like interface with one section per page.
              overview  Folding interface, initially showing only top-level.
              content   Folding interface, starting with all headlines visible.
              showall   Folding interface, all headlines and text visible.
     sdepth:  Maximum headline level that will still become an independent
              section for info and folding modes.  The default is taken from
              ‘org-export-headline-levels’ (= the ‘H’ switch in ‘#+OPTIONS’).
              If this is smaller than in ‘org-export-headline-levels’, each
              info/folding section can still contain child headlines.
     toc:     Should the table of contents _initially_ be visible?
              Even when ‘nil’, you can always get to the "toc" with ‘i’.
     tdepth:  The depth of the table of contents.  The defaults are taken from
              the variables ‘org-export-headline-levels’ and ‘org-export-with-toc’.
     ftoc:    Does the CSS of the page specify a fixed position for the "toc"?
              If yes, the toc will never be displayed as a section.
     ltoc:    Should there be short contents (children) in each section?
              Make this ‘above’ if the section should be above initial text.
     mouse:   Headings are highlighted when the mouse is over them.  Should be
              ‘underline’ (default) or a background color like ‘#cccccc’.
     buttons: Should view-toggle buttons be everywhere?  When ‘nil’ (the
              default), only one such button will be present.
You can choose default values for these options by customizing the
variable ‘org-html-infojs-options’.  If you always want to apply the
script to your pages, configure the variable ‘org-html-use-infojs’.


File: org.info,  Node: LaTeX and PDF export,  Next: Markdown export,  Prev: HTML export,  Up: Exporting

12.7 LaTeX and PDF export
=========================

LaTeX export can produce an arbitrarily complex LaTeX document of any
standard or custom document class.  With further processing(1), which
the LaTeX exporter is able to control, this back-end is able to produce
PDF output.  Because the LaTeX exporter can be configured to use the
‘hyperref’ package, the default setup produces fully-linked PDF output.

   As in LaTeX, blank lines are meaningful for this back-end: a
paragraph will not be started if two contiguous syntactical elements are
not separated by an empty line.

   This back-end also offers enhanced support for footnotes.  Thus, it
handles nested footnotes, footnotes in tables and footnotes in a list
item’s description.

* Menu:

* LaTeX export commands::    How to export to LaTeX and PDF
* Header and sectioning::       Setting up the export file structure
* Quoting LaTeX code::       Incorporating literal LaTeX code
* LaTeX specific attributes::  Controlling LaTeX output

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The default LaTeX output is designed for processing with ‘pdftex’
or LaTeX.  It includes packages that are not compatible with ‘xetex’ and
possibly ‘luatex’.  The LaTeX exporter can be configured to support
alternative TeX engines, see the options
‘org-latex-default-packages-alist’ and ‘org-latex-packages-alist’.


File: org.info,  Node: LaTeX export commands,  Next: Header and sectioning,  Prev: LaTeX and PDF export,  Up: LaTeX and PDF export

12.7.1 LaTeX export commands
----------------------------

‘C-c C-e l l     (org-latex-export-to-latex)’
     Export as a LaTeX file.  For an Org file ‘myfile.org’, the LaTeX
     file will be ‘myfile.tex’.  The file will be overwritten without
     warning.
‘C-c C-e l L     (org-latex-export-as-latex)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.
‘C-c C-e l p     (org-latex-export-to-pdf)’
     Export as LaTeX and then process to PDF.
‘C-c C-e l o’
     Export as LaTeX and then process to PDF, then open the resulting
     PDF file.


File: org.info,  Node: Header and sectioning,  Next: Quoting LaTeX code,  Prev: LaTeX export commands,  Up: LaTeX and PDF export

12.7.2 Header and sectioning structure
--------------------------------------

By default, the first three outline levels become headlines, defining a
general document structure.  Additional levels are exported as ‘itemize’
or ‘enumerate’ lists.  The transition can also occur at a different
level (*note Export settings::).

   By default, the LaTeX output uses the class ‘article’.

   You can change this globally by setting a different value for
‘org-latex-default-class’ or locally by adding an option like
‘#+LATEX_CLASS: myclass’ in your file, or with a ‘EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS’
property that applies when exporting a region containing only this
(sub)tree.  The class must be listed in ‘org-latex-classes’.  This
variable defines a header template for each class(1), and allows you to
define the sectioning structure for each class.  You can also define
your own classes there.

   The ‘LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS’ keyword or ‘EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS’
property can specify the options for the ‘\documentclass’ macro.  These
options have to be provided, as expected by LaTeX, within square
brackets.

   You can also use the ‘LATEX_HEADER’ and ‘LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA’(2)
keywords in order to add lines to the header.  See the docstring of
‘org-latex-classes’ for more information.

   An example is shown below.

     #+LATEX_CLASS: article
     #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [a4paper]
     #+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage{xyz}

     * Headline 1
       some text

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Into which the values of ‘org-latex-default-packages-alist’ and
‘org-latex-packages-alist’ are spliced.

   (2) Unlike ‘LATEX_HEADER’, contents from ‘LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA’
keywords will not be loaded when previewing LaTeX snippets (*note
Previewing LaTeX fragments::).


File: org.info,  Node: Quoting LaTeX code,  Next: LaTeX specific attributes,  Prev: Header and sectioning,  Up: LaTeX and PDF export

12.7.3 Quoting LaTeX code
-------------------------

Embedded LaTeX as described in *note Embedded LaTeX::, will be correctly
inserted into the LaTeX file.  Furthermore, you can add special code
that should only be present in LaTeX export with the following
constructs:

     Code within @@latex:some code@@ a paragraph.

     #+LATEX: Literal LaTeX code for export

     #+BEGIN_LATEX
     All lines between these markers are exported literally
     #+END_LATEX


File: org.info,  Node: LaTeX specific attributes,  Prev: Quoting LaTeX code,  Up: LaTeX and PDF export

12.7.4 LaTeX specific attributes
--------------------------------

LaTeX understands attributes specified in an ‘ATTR_LATEX’ line.  They
affect tables, images, plain lists, special blocks and source blocks.

Tables in LaTeX export
......................

For LaTeX export of a table, you can specify a label and a caption
(*note Images and tables::).  You can also use attributes to control
table layout and contents.  Valid LaTeX attributes include:

‘:mode’
     Nature of table’s contents.  It can be set to ‘table’, ‘math’,
     ‘inline-math’ or ‘verbatim’.  In particular, when in ‘math’ or
     ‘inline-math’ mode, every cell is exported as-is, horizontal rules
     are ignored and the table will be wrapped in a math environment.
     Also, contiguous tables sharing the same math mode will be wrapped
     within the same environment.  Default mode is determined in
     ‘org-latex-default-table-mode’.
‘:environment’
     Environment used for the table.  It can be set to any LaTeX table
     environment, like ‘tabularx’(1), ‘longtable’, ‘array’, ‘tabu’(2),
     ‘bmatrix’...  It defaults to ‘org-latex-default-table-environment’
     value.
‘:caption’
     ‘#+CAPTION’ keyword is the simplest way to set a caption for a
     table (*note Images and tables::).  If you need more advanced
     commands for that task, you can use ‘:caption’ attribute instead.
     Its value should be raw LaTeX code.  It has precedence over
     ‘#+CAPTION’.
‘:float’
‘:placement’
     Float environment for the table.  Possible values are
     ‘sidewaystable’, ‘multicolumn’, ‘t’ and ‘nil’.  When unspecified, a
     table with a caption will have a ‘table’ environment.  Moreover,
     ‘:placement’ attribute can specify the positioning of the float.
‘:align’
‘:font’
‘:width’
     Set, respectively, the alignment string of the table, its font size
     and its width.  They only apply on regular tables.
‘:spread’
     Boolean specific to the ‘tabu’ and ‘longtabu’ environments, and
     only takes effect when used in conjunction with the ‘:width’
     attribute.  When ‘:spread’ is non-‘nil’, the table will be spread
     or shrunk by the value of ‘:width’.
‘:booktabs’
‘:center’
‘:rmlines’
     They toggle, respectively, ‘booktabs’ usage (assuming the package
     is properly loaded), table centering and removal of every
     horizontal rule but the first one (in a "table.el" table only).  In
     particular, ‘org-latex-tables-booktabs’ (respectively
     ‘org-latex-tables-centered’) activates the first (respectively
     second) attribute globally.
‘:math-prefix’
‘:math-suffix’
‘:math-arguments’
     A string that will be inserted, respectively, before the table
     within the math environment, after the table within the math
     environment, and between the macro name and the contents of the
     table.  The ‘:math-arguments’ attribute is used for matrix macros
     that require more than one argument (e.g., ‘qbordermatrix’).

   Thus, attributes can be used in a wide array of situations, like
writing a table that will span over multiple pages, or a matrix product:

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :environment longtable :align l|lp{3cm}r|l
     | ..... | ..... |
     | ..... | ..... |

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix :math-suffix \times
     | a | b |
     | c | d |
     #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix
     | 1 | 2 |
     | 3 | 4 |

   In the example below, LaTeX command ‘\bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB}’
will set the caption.

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB}
     | ..... | ..... |
     | ..... | ..... |

Images in LaTeX export
......................

Images that are linked to without a description part in the link, like
‘[[file:img.jpg]]’ or ‘[[./img.jpg]]’ will be inserted into the PDF
output file resulting from LaTeX processing.  Org will use an
‘\includegraphics’ macro to insert the image(3).

   You can specify specify image width or height with, respectively,
‘:width’ and ‘:height’ attributes.  It is also possible to add any other
option with the ‘:options’ attribute, as shown in the following example:

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :width 5cm :options angle=90
     [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]

   If you need a specific command for the caption, use ‘:caption’
attribute.  It will override standard ‘#+CAPTION’ value, if any.

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB}
     [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]

   If you have specified a caption as described in *note Images and
tables::, the picture will be wrapped into a ‘figure’ environment and
thus become a floating element.  You can also ask Org to export an image
as a float without specifying caption by setting the ‘:float’ attribute.
You may also set it to:
   − ‘t’: if you want to use the standard ‘figure’ environment.  It is
     used by default if you provide a caption to the image.
   − ‘multicolumn’: if you wish to include an image which spans multiple
     columns in a page.  This will export the image wrapped in a
     ‘figure*’ environment.
   − ‘wrap’: if you would like to let text flow around the image.  It
     will make the figure occupy the left half of the page.
   − ‘nil’: if you need to avoid any floating environment, even when a
     caption is provided.
To modify the placement option of any floating environment, set the
‘placement’ attribute.

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :float wrap :width 0.38\textwidth :placement {r}{0.4\textwidth}
     [[./img/hst.png]]

   If the ‘:comment-include’ attribute is set to a non-‘nil’ value, the
LaTeX ‘\includegraphics’ macro will be commented out.

Plain lists in LaTeX export
...........................

Plain lists accept two optional attributes: ‘:environment’ and
‘:options’.  The first one allows the use of a non-standard environment
(e.g., ‘inparaenum’).  The second one specifies additional arguments for
that environment.

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :environment compactitem :options [$\circ$]
     - you need ``paralist'' package to reproduce this example.

Source blocks in LaTeX export
.............................

In addition to syntax defined in *note Literal examples::, names and
captions (*note Images and tables::), source blocks also accept a
‘:float’ attribute.  You may set it to:
   − ‘t’: if you want to make the source block a float.  It is the
     default value when a caption is provided.
   − ‘multicolumn’: if you wish to include a source block which spans
     multiple columns in a page.
   − ‘nil’: if you need to avoid any floating environment, even when a
     caption is provided.  It is useful for source code that may not fit
     in a single page.

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :float nil
     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
     Code that may not fit in a single page.
     #+END_SRC

Special blocks in LaTeX export
..............................

In LaTeX back-end, special blocks become environments of the same name.
Value of ‘:options’ attribute will be appended as-is to that
environment’s opening string.  For example:

     #+BEGIN_ABSTRACT
     We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem.
     #+END_ABSTRACT

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :options [Proof of important theorem]
     #+BEGIN_PROOF
     ...
     Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes.
     #+END_PROOF

becomes

     \begin{abstract}
     We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem.
     \end{abstract}

     \begin{proof}[Proof of important theorem]
     ...
     Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes.
     \end{proof}

   If you need to insert a specific caption command, use ‘:caption’
attribute.  It will override standard ‘#+CAPTION’ value, if any.  For
example:

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \MyCaption{HeadingA}
     #+BEGIN_PROOF
     ...
     #+END_PROOF

Horizontal rules
................

Width and thickness of a given horizontal rule can be controlled with,
respectively, ‘:width’ and ‘:thickness’ attributes:

     #+ATTR_LATEX: :width .6\textwidth :thickness 0.8pt
     -----

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Requires adding the ‘tabularx’ package to
‘org-latex-packages-alist’.

   (2) Requires adding the ‘tabu’ package to ‘org-latex-packages-alist’.

   (3) In the case of TikZ (<http://sourceforge.net/projects/pgf/>)
images, it will become an ‘\input’ macro wrapped within a ‘tikzpicture’
environment.


File: org.info,  Node: Markdown export,  Next: OpenDocument Text export,  Prev: LaTeX and PDF export,  Up: Exporting

12.8 Markdown export
====================

‘md’ export back-end generates Markdown syntax(1) for an Org mode
buffer.

   It is built over HTML back-end: any construct not supported by
Markdown syntax (e.g., tables) will be controlled and translated by
‘html’ back-end (*note HTML export::).

Markdown export commands
------------------------

‘C-c C-e m m     (org-md-export-to-markdown)’
     Export as a text file written in Markdown syntax.  For an Org file,
     ‘myfile.org’, the resulting file will be ‘myfile.md’.  The file
     will be overwritten without warning.
‘C-c C-e m M     (org-md-export-as-markdown)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.
‘C-c C-e m o’
     Export as a text file with Markdown syntax, then open it.

Header and sectioning structure
-------------------------------

Markdown export can generate both ‘atx’ and ‘setext’ types for
headlines, according to ‘org-md-headline-style’.  The former introduces
a hard limit of two levels, whereas the latter pushes it to six.
Headlines below that limit are exported as lists.  You can also set a
soft limit before that one (*note Export settings::).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Vanilla flavor, as defined at
<http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/>.


File: org.info,  Node: OpenDocument Text export,  Next: Org export,  Prev: Markdown export,  Up: Exporting

12.9 OpenDocument Text export
=============================

Org mode(1) supports export to OpenDocument Text (ODT) format.
Documents created by this exporter use the ‘OpenDocument-v1.2
specification’(2) and are compatible with LibreOffice 3.4.

* Menu:

* Pre-requisites for ODT export::  What packages ODT exporter relies on
* ODT export commands::         How to invoke ODT export
* Extending ODT export::        How to produce ‘doc’, ‘pdf’ files
* Applying custom styles::      How to apply custom styles to the output
* Links in ODT export::         How links will be interpreted and formatted
* Tables in ODT export::        How Tables are exported
* Images in ODT export::        How to insert images
* Math formatting in ODT export::  How LaTeX fragments are formatted
* Labels and captions in ODT export::  How captions are rendered
* Literal examples in ODT export::  How source and example blocks are formatted
* Advanced topics in ODT export::  Read this if you are a power user

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Versions 7.8 or later

   (2) Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument)
Version 1.2
(http://docs.oasis-open.org/office/v1.2/OpenDocument-v1.2.html)


File: org.info,  Node: Pre-requisites for ODT export,  Next: ODT export commands,  Prev: OpenDocument Text export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.1 Pre-requisites for ODT export
------------------------------------

The ODT exporter relies on the ‘zip’ program to create the final output.
Check the availability of this program before proceeding further.


File: org.info,  Node: ODT export commands,  Next: Extending ODT export,  Prev: Pre-requisites for ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.2 ODT export commands
--------------------------

Exporting to ODT
................

‘C-c C-e o o     (org-odt-export-to-odt)’

     Export as OpenDocument Text file.

     If ‘org-odt-preferred-output-format’ is specified, automatically
     convert the exported file to that format.  *Note Automatically
     exporting to other formats: x-export-to-other-formats.

     For an Org file ‘myfile.org’, the ODT file will be ‘myfile.odt’.
     The file will be overwritten without warning.  If there is an
     active region,(1) only the region will be exported.  If the
     selected region is a single tree,(2) the tree head will become the
     document title.  If the tree head entry has, or inherits, an
     ‘EXPORT_FILE_NAME’ property, that name will be used for the export.

     ‘C-c C-e o O’ Export as an OpenDocument Text file and open the
     resulting file.

     If ‘org-odt-preferred-output-format’ is specified, open the
     converted file instead.  *Note Automatically exporting to other
     formats: x-export-to-other-formats.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This requires ‘transient-mark-mode’ to be turned on

   (2) To select the current subtree, use ‘C-c @’


File: org.info,  Node: Extending ODT export,  Next: Applying custom styles,  Prev: ODT export commands,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.3 Extending ODT export
---------------------------

The ODT exporter can interface with a variety of document converters and
supports popular converters out of the box.  As a result, you can use it
to export to formats like ‘doc’ or convert a document from one format
(say ‘csv’) to another format (say ‘ods’ or ‘xls’).

   If you have a working installation of LibreOffice, a document
converter is pre-configured for you and you can use it right away.  If
you would like to use ‘unoconv’ as your preferred converter, customize
the variable ‘org-odt-convert-process’ to point to ‘unoconv’.  You can
also use your own favorite converter or tweak the default settings of
the ‘LibreOffice’ and ‘unoconv’ converters.  *Note Configuring a
document converter::.

12.9.3.1 Automatically exporting to other formats
.................................................

Very often, you will find yourself exporting to ODT format, only to
immediately save the exported document to other formats like ‘doc’,
‘docx’, ‘rtf’, ‘pdf’ etc.  In such cases, you can specify your preferred
output format by customizing the variable
‘org-odt-preferred-output-format’.  This way, the export commands (*note
Exporting to ODT: x-export-to-odt.) can be extended to export to a
format that is of immediate interest to you.

12.9.3.2 Converting between document formats
............................................

There are many document converters in the wild which support conversion
to and from various file formats, including, but not limited to the ODT
format.  LibreOffice converter, mentioned above, is one such converter.
Once a converter is configured, you can interact with it using the
following command.

‘M-x org-odt-convert RET’
     Convert an existing document from one format to another.  With a
     prefix argument, also open the newly produced file.


File: org.info,  Node: Applying custom styles,  Next: Links in ODT export,  Prev: Extending ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.4 Applying custom styles
-----------------------------

The ODT exporter ships with a set of OpenDocument styles (*note Working
with OpenDocument style files::) that ensure a well-formatted output.
These factory styles, however, may not cater to your specific tastes.
To customize the output, you can either modify the above styles files
directly, or generate the required styles using an application like
LibreOffice.  The latter method is suitable for expert and non-expert
users alike, and is described here.

12.9.4.1 Applying custom styles: the easy way
.............................................

  1. Create a sample ‘example.org’ file with the below settings and
     export it to ODT format.

          #+OPTIONS: H:10 num:t

  2. Open the above ‘example.odt’ using LibreOffice.  Use the ‘Stylist’
     to locate the target styles—these typically have the ‘Org’
     prefix—and modify those to your taste.  Save the modified file
     either as an OpenDocument Text (‘.odt’) or OpenDocument Template
     (‘.ott’) file.

  3. Customize the variable ‘org-odt-styles-file’ and point it to the
     newly created file.  For additional configuration options *note
     Overriding factory styles: x-overriding-factory-styles.

     If you would like to choose a style on a per-file basis, you can
     use the ‘#+ODT_STYLES_FILE’ option.  A typical setting will look
     like

          #+ODT_STYLES_FILE: "/path/to/example.ott"

     or

          #+ODT_STYLES_FILE: ("/path/to/file.ott" ("styles.xml" "image/hdr.png"))

12.9.4.2 Using third-party styles and templates
...............................................

You can use third-party styles and templates for customizing your
output.  This will produce the desired output only if the template
provides all style names that the ‘ODT’ exporter relies on.  Unless this
condition is met, the output is going to be less than satisfactory.  So
it is highly recommended that you only work with templates that are
directly derived from the factory settings.


File: org.info,  Node: Links in ODT export,  Next: Tables in ODT export,  Prev: Applying custom styles,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.5 Links in ODT export
--------------------------

ODT exporter creates native cross-references for internal links.  It
creates Internet-style links for all other links.

   A link with no description and destined to a regular (un-itemized)
outline heading is replaced with a cross-reference and section number of
the heading.

   A ‘\ref{label}’-style reference to an image, table etc. is replaced
with a cross-reference and sequence number of the labeled entity.  *Note
Labels and captions in ODT export::.


File: org.info,  Node: Tables in ODT export,  Next: Images in ODT export,  Prev: Links in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.6 Tables in ODT export
---------------------------

Export of native Org mode tables (*note Tables::) and simple ‘table.el’
tables is supported.  However, export of complex ‘table.el’
tables—tables that have column or row spans—is not supported.  Such
tables are stripped from the exported document.

   By default, a table is exported with top and bottom frames and with
rules separating row and column groups (*note Column groups::).
Furthermore, all tables are typeset to occupy the same width.  If the
table specifies alignment and relative width for its columns (*note
Column width and alignment::) then these are honored on export.(1)

   You can control the width of the table by specifying ‘:rel-width’
property using an ‘#+ATTR_ODT’ line.

   For example, consider the following table which makes use of all the
rules mentioned above.

     #+ATTR_ODT: :rel-width 50
     | Area/Month    |   Jan |   Feb |   Mar |   Sum |
     |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------|
     | /             |     < |       |       |     < |
     | <l13>         |  <r5> |  <r5> |  <r5> |  <r6> |
     | North America |     1 |    21 |   926 |   948 |
     | Middle East   |     6 |    75 |   844 |   925 |
     | Asia Pacific  |     9 |    27 |   790 |   826 |
     |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------|
     | Sum           |    16 |   123 |  2560 |  2699 |

   On export, the table will occupy 50% of text area.  The columns will
be sized (roughly) in the ratio of 13:5:5:5:6.  The first column will be
left-aligned and rest of the columns will be right-aligned.  There will
be vertical rules after separating the header and last columns from
other columns.  There will be horizontal rules separating the header and
last rows from other rows.

   If you are not satisfied with the above formatting options, you can
create custom table styles and associate them with a table using the
‘#+ATTR_ODT’ line.  *Note Customizing tables in ODT export::.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The column widths are interpreted as weighted ratios with the
default weight being 1


File: org.info,  Node: Images in ODT export,  Next: Math formatting in ODT export,  Prev: Tables in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.7 Images in ODT export
---------------------------

Embedding images
................

You can embed images within the exported document by providing a link to
the desired image file with no link description.  For example, to embed
‘img.png’ do either of the following:

     [[file:img.png]]

     [[./img.png]]

Embedding clickable images
..........................

You can create clickable images by providing a link whose description is
a link to an image file.  For example, to embed a image
‘org-mode-unicorn.png’ which when clicked jumps to <http://Orgmode.org>
website, do the following

     [[http://orgmode.org][./org-mode-unicorn.png]]

Sizing and scaling of embedded images
.....................................

You can control the size and scale of the embedded images using the
‘#+ATTR_ODT’ attribute.

   The exporter specifies the desired size of the image in the final
document in units of centimeters.  In order to scale the embedded
images, the exporter queries for pixel dimensions of the images using
one of a) ImageMagick’s ‘identify’ program or b) Emacs ‘create-image’
and ‘image-size’ APIs(1).  The pixel dimensions are subsequently
converted in to units of centimeters using ‘org-odt-pixels-per-inch’.
The default value of this variable is set to ‘display-pixels-per-inch’.
You can tweak this variable to achieve the best results.

   The examples below illustrate the various possibilities.

Explicitly size the image
     To embed ‘img.png’ as a 10 cm x 10 cm image, do the following:

          #+ATTR_ODT: :width 10 :height 10
          [[./img.png]]

Scale the image
     To embed ‘img.png’ at half its size, do the following:

          #+ATTR_ODT: :scale 0.5
          [[./img.png]]

Scale the image to a specific width
     To embed ‘img.png’ with a width of 10 cm while retaining the
     original height:width ratio, do the following:

          #+ATTR_ODT: :width 10
          [[./img.png]]

Scale the image to a specific height
     To embed ‘img.png’ with a height of 10 cm while retaining the
     original height:width ratio, do the following

          #+ATTR_ODT: :height 10
          [[./img.png]]

Anchoring of images
...................

You can control the manner in which an image is anchored by setting the
‘:anchor’ property of it’s ‘#+ATTR_ODT’ line.  You can specify one of
the following three values for the ‘:anchor’ property: ‘"as-char"’,
‘"paragraph"’ and ‘"page"’.

   To create an image that is anchored to a page, do the following:
     #+ATTR_ODT: :anchor "page"
     [[./img.png]]

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Use of ‘ImageMagick’ is only desirable.  However, if you
routinely produce documents that have large images or you export your
Org files that has images using a Emacs batch script, then the use of
‘ImageMagick’ is mandatory.


File: org.info,  Node: Math formatting in ODT export,  Next: Labels and captions in ODT export,  Prev: Images in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.8 Math formatting in ODT export
------------------------------------

The ODT exporter has special support for handling math.

* Menu:

* Working with LaTeX math snippets::  How to embed LaTeX math fragments
* Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files::  How to embed equations in native format


File: org.info,  Node: Working with LaTeX math snippets,  Next: Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files,  Prev: Math formatting in ODT export,  Up: Math formatting in ODT export

12.9.8.1 Working with LaTeX math snippets
.........................................

LaTeX math snippets (*note LaTeX fragments::) can be embedded in the ODT
document in one of the following ways:

  1. MathML

     This option is activated on a per-file basis with

          #+OPTIONS: LaTeX:t

     With this option, LaTeX fragments are first converted into MathML
     fragments using an external LaTeX-to-MathML converter program.  The
     resulting MathML fragments are then embedded as an OpenDocument
     Formula in the exported document.

     You can specify the LaTeX-to-MathML converter by customizing the
     variables ‘org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command’ and
     ‘org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file’.

     If you prefer to use ‘MathToWeb’(1) as your converter, you can
     configure the above variables as shown below.

          (setq org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command
                "java -jar %j -unicode -force -df %o %I"
                org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file
                "/path/to/mathtoweb.jar")

     You can use the following commands to quickly verify the
     reliability of the LaTeX-to-MathML converter.

     ‘M-x org-odt-export-as-odf RET’
          Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula
          (‘.odf’) file.

     ‘M-x org-odt-export-as-odf-and-open RET’
          Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula
          (‘.odf’) file and open the formula file with the
          system-registered application.

  2. PNG images

     This option is activated on a per-file basis with

          #+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng

     or:

          #+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick

     With this option, LaTeX fragments are processed into PNG images and
     the resulting images are embedded in the exported document.  This
     method requires that the ‘dvipng’ program or ‘imagemagick’ suite be
     available on your system.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See MathToWeb
(http://www.mathtoweb.com/cgi-bin/mathtoweb_home.pl)


File: org.info,  Node: Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files,  Prev: Working with LaTeX math snippets,  Up: Math formatting in ODT export

12.9.8.2 Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files
..........................................................

For various reasons, you may find embedding LaTeX math snippets in an
ODT document less than reliable.  In that case, you can embed a math
equation by linking to its MathML (‘.mml’) source or its OpenDocument
formula (‘.odf’) file as shown below:

     [[./equation.mml]]

   or

     [[./equation.odf]]


File: org.info,  Node: Labels and captions in ODT export,  Next: Literal examples in ODT export,  Prev: Math formatting in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.9 Labels and captions in ODT export
----------------------------------------

You can label and caption various category of objects—an inline image, a
table, a LaTeX fragment or a Math formula—using ‘#+LABEL’ and
‘#+CAPTION’ lines.  *Note Images and tables::.  ODT exporter enumerates
each labeled or captioned object of a given category separately.  As a
result, each such object is assigned a sequence number based on order of
it’s appearance in the Org file.

   In the exported document, a user-provided caption is augmented with
the category and sequence number.  Consider the following inline image
in an Org file.

     #+CAPTION: Bell curve
     #+LABEL:   fig:SED-HR4049
     [[./img/a.png]]

   It could be rendered as shown below in the exported document.

     Figure 2: Bell curve

   You can modify the category component of the caption by customizing
the option ‘org-odt-category-map-alist’.  For example, to tag all
embedded images with the string ‘Illustration’ (instead of the default
‘Figure’) use the following setting:

     (setq org-odt-category-map-alist
           (("__Figure__" "Illustration" "value" "Figure" org-odt--enumerable-image-p)))

   With this, previous image will be captioned as below in the exported
document.

     Illustration 2: Bell curve


File: org.info,  Node: Literal examples in ODT export,  Next: Advanced topics in ODT export,  Prev: Labels and captions in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.10 Literal examples in ODT export
--------------------------------------

Export of literal examples (*note Literal examples::) with full
fontification is supported.  Internally, the exporter relies on
‘htmlfontify.el’ to generate all style definitions needed for a fancy
listing.(1)  The auto-generated styles have ‘OrgSrc’ as prefix and
inherit their color from the faces used by Emacs ‘font-lock’ library for
the source language.

   If you prefer to use your own custom styles for fontification, you
can do so by customizing the option
‘org-odt-create-custom-styles-for-srcblocks’.

   You can turn off fontification of literal examples by customizing the
option ‘org-odt-fontify-srcblocks’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Your ‘htmlfontify.el’ library must at least be at Emacs 24.1
levels for fontification to be turned on.


File: org.info,  Node: Advanced topics in ODT export,  Prev: Literal examples in ODT export,  Up: OpenDocument Text export

12.9.11 Advanced topics in ODT export
-------------------------------------

If you rely heavily on ODT export, you may want to exploit the full set
of features that the exporter offers.  This section describes features
that would be of interest to power users.

* Menu:

* Configuring a document converter::  How to register a document converter
* Working with OpenDocument style files::  Explore the internals
* Creating one-off styles::     How to produce custom highlighting etc
* Customizing tables in ODT export::  How to define and use Table templates
* Validating OpenDocument XML::  How to debug corrupt OpenDocument files


File: org.info,  Node: Configuring a document converter,  Next: Working with OpenDocument style files,  Prev: Advanced topics in ODT export,  Up: Advanced topics in ODT export

12.9.11.1 Configuring a document converter
..........................................

The ODT exporter can work with popular converters with little or no
extra configuration from your side.  *Note Extending ODT export::.  If
you are using a converter that is not supported by default or if you
would like to tweak the default converter settings, proceed as below.

  1. Register the converter

     Name your converter and add it to the list of known converters by
     customizing the option ‘org-odt-convert-processes’.  Also specify
     how the converter can be invoked via command-line to effect the
     conversion.

  2. Configure its capabilities

     Specify the set of formats the converter can handle by customizing
     the variable ‘org-odt-convert-capabilities’.  Use the default value
     for this variable as a guide for configuring your converter.  As
     suggested by the default setting, you can specify the full set of
     formats supported by the converter and not limit yourself to
     specifying formats that are related to just the OpenDocument Text
     format.

  3. Choose the converter

     Select the newly added converter as the preferred one by
     customizing the option ‘org-odt-convert-process’.


File: org.info,  Node: Working with OpenDocument style files,  Next: Creating one-off styles,  Prev: Configuring a document converter,  Up: Advanced topics in ODT export

12.9.11.2 Working with OpenDocument style files
...............................................

This section explores the internals of the ODT exporter and the means by
which it produces styled documents.  Read this section if you are
interested in exploring the automatic and custom OpenDocument styles
used by the exporter.

Factory styles
..............

The ODT exporter relies on two files for generating its output.  These
files are bundled with the distribution under the directory pointed to
by the variable ‘org-odt-styles-dir’.  The two files are:

   • ‘OrgOdtStyles.xml’

     This file contributes to the ‘styles.xml’ file of the final ‘ODT’
     document.  This file gets modified for the following purposes:

       1. To control outline numbering based on user settings.

       2. To add styles generated by ‘htmlfontify.el’ for fontification
          of code blocks.

   • ‘OrgOdtContentTemplate.xml’

     This file contributes to the ‘content.xml’ file of the final ‘ODT’
     document.  The contents of the Org outline are inserted between the
     ‘<office:text>’…‘</office:text>’ elements of this file.

     Apart from serving as a template file for the final ‘content.xml’,
     the file serves the following purposes:

       1. It contains automatic styles for formatting of tables which
          are referenced by the exporter.

       2. It contains ‘<text:sequence-decl>’…‘</text:sequence-decl>’
          elements that control how various entities—tables, images,
          equations, etc.—are numbered.

Overriding factory styles
.........................

The following two variables control the location from which the ODT
exporter picks up the custom styles and content template files.  You can
customize these variables to override the factory styles used by the
exporter.

   • ‘org-odt-styles-file’

     Use this variable to specify the ‘styles.xml’ that will be used in
     the final output.  You can specify one of the following values:

       1. A ‘styles.xml’ file

          Use this file instead of the default ‘styles.xml’

       2. A ‘.odt’ or ‘.ott’ file

          Use the ‘styles.xml’ contained in the specified OpenDocument
          Text or Template file

       3. A ‘.odt’ or ‘.ott’ file and a subset of files contained within
          them

          Use the ‘styles.xml’ contained in the specified OpenDocument
          Text or Template file.  Additionally extract the specified
          member files and embed those within the final ‘ODT’ document.

          Use this option if the ‘styles.xml’ file references additional
          files like header and footer images.

       4. ‘nil’

          Use the default ‘styles.xml’

   • ‘org-odt-content-template-file’

     Use this variable to specify the blank ‘content.xml’ that will be
     used in the final output.


File: org.info,  Node: Creating one-off styles,  Next: Customizing tables in ODT export,  Prev: Working with OpenDocument style files,  Up: Advanced topics in ODT export

12.9.11.3 Creating one-off styles
.................................

There are times when you would want one-off formatting in the exported
document.  You can achieve this by embedding raw OpenDocument XML in the
Org file.  The use of this feature is better illustrated with couple of
examples.

  1. Embedding ODT tags as part of regular text

     You can inline OpenDocument syntax by enclosing it within
     ‘@@odt:...@@’ markup.  For example, to highlight a region of text
     do the following:

          @@odt:<text:span text:style-name="Highlight">This is a highlighted
          text</text:span>@@.  But this is a regular text.

     *Hint:* To see the above example in action, edit your ‘styles.xml’
     (*note Factory styles: x-orgodtstyles-xml.) and add a custom
     ‘Highlight’ style as shown below.

          <style:style style:name="Highlight" style:family="text">
            <style:text-properties fo:background-color="#ff0000"/>
          </style:style>

  2. Embedding a one-line OpenDocument XML

     You can add a simple OpenDocument one-liner using the ‘#+ODT:’
     directive.  For example, to force a page break do the following:

          #+ODT: <text:p text:style-name="PageBreak"/>

     *Hint:* To see the above example in action, edit your ‘styles.xml’
     (*note Factory styles: x-orgodtstyles-xml.) and add a custom
     ‘PageBreak’ style as shown below.

          <style:style style:name="PageBreak" style:family="paragraph"
                       style:parent-style-name="Text_20_body">
            <style:paragraph-properties fo:break-before="page"/>
          </style:style>

  3. Embedding a block of OpenDocument XML

     You can add a large block of OpenDocument XML using the
     ‘#+BEGIN_ODT’…‘#+END_ODT’ construct.

     For example, to create a one-off paragraph that uses bold text, do
     the following:

          #+BEGIN_ODT
          <text:p text:style-name="Text_20_body_20_bold">
          This paragraph is specially formatted and uses bold text.
          </text:p>
          #+END_ODT


File: org.info,  Node: Customizing tables in ODT export,  Next: Validating OpenDocument XML,  Prev: Creating one-off styles,  Up: Advanced topics in ODT export

12.9.11.4 Customizing tables in ODT export
..........................................

You can override the default formatting of the table by specifying a
custom table style with the ‘#+ATTR_ODT’ line.  For a discussion on
default formatting of tables *note Tables in ODT export::.

   This feature closely mimics the way table templates are defined in
the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification.(1)

Custom table styles: an illustration
....................................

To have a quick preview of this feature, install the below setting and
export the table that follows:

     (setq org-odt-table-styles
           (append org-odt-table-styles
                 '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom"
                     ((use-first-row-styles . t)
                      (use-first-column-styles . t)))
                     ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom"
                      ((use-first-row-styles . t)
                      (use-last-row-styles . t))))))

     #+ATTR_ODT: :style "TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn"
     | Name  | Phone | Age |
     | Peter |  1234 |  17 |
     | Anna  |  4321 |  25 |

   In the above example, you used a template named ‘Custom’ and
installed two table styles with the names ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’
and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’.  (*Important:* The OpenDocument
styles needed for producing the above template have been pre-defined for
you.  These styles are available under the section marked ‘Custom Table
Template’ in ‘OrgOdtContentTemplate.xml’ (*note Factory styles:
x-orgodtcontenttemplate-xml.).  If you need additional templates you
have to define these styles yourselves.

Custom table styles: the nitty-gritty
.....................................

To use this feature proceed as follows:

  1. Create a table template(2)

     A table template is nothing but a set of ‘table-cell’ and
     ‘paragraph’ styles for each of the following table cell categories:

        − Body
        − First column
        − Last column
        − First row
        − Last row
        − Even row
        − Odd row
        − Even column
        − Odd Column

     The names for the above styles must be chosen based on the name of
     the table template using a well-defined convention.

     The naming convention is better illustrated with an example.  For a
     table template with the name ‘Custom’, the needed style names are
     listed in the following table.

     Table cell type   ‘table-cell’ style          ‘paragraph’ style
     -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Body              ‘CustomTableCell’           ‘CustomTableParagraph’
     First column      ‘CustomFirstColumnTableCell’‘CustomFirstColumnTableParagraph’
     Last column       ‘CustomLastColumnTableCell’ ‘CustomLastColumnTableParagraph’
     First row         ‘CustomFirstRowTableCell’   ‘CustomFirstRowTableParagraph’
     Last row          ‘CustomLastRowTableCell’    ‘CustomLastRowTableParagraph’
     Even row          ‘CustomEvenRowTableCell’    ‘CustomEvenRowTableParagraph’
     Odd row           ‘CustomOddRowTableCell’     ‘CustomOddRowTableParagraph’
     Even column       ‘CustomEvenColumnTableCell’ ‘CustomEvenColumnTableParagraph’
     Odd column        ‘CustomOddColumnTableCell’  ‘CustomOddColumnTableParagraph’

     To create a table template with the name ‘Custom’, define the above
     styles in the
     ‘<office:automatic-styles>’...‘</office:automatic-styles>’ element
     of the content template file (*note Factory styles:
     x-orgodtcontenttemplate-xml.).

  2. Define a table style(3)

     To define a table style, create an entry for the style in the
     variable ‘org-odt-table-styles’ and specify the following:

        − the name of the table template created in step (1)
        − the set of cell styles in that template that are to be
          activated

     For example, the entry below defines two different table styles
     ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’ and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’
     based on the same template ‘Custom’.  The styles achieve their
     intended effect by selectively activating the individual cell
     styles in that template.

          (setq org-odt-table-styles
                (append org-odt-table-styles
                        '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom"
                           ((use-first-row-styles . t)
                            (use-first-column-styles . t)))
                          ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom"
                           ((use-first-row-styles . t)
                            (use-last-row-styles . t))))))

  3. Associate a table with the table style

     To do this, specify the table style created in step (2) as part of
     the ‘ATTR_ODT’ line as shown below.

          #+ATTR_ODT: :style "TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn"
          | Name  | Phone | Age |
          | Peter |  1234 |  17 |
          | Anna  |  4321 |  25 |

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) OpenDocument-v1.2 Specification
(http://docs.oasis-open.org/office/v1.2/OpenDocument-v1.2.html)

   (2) See the ‘<table:table-template>’ element of the OpenDocument-v1.2
specification

   (3) See the attributes ‘table:template-name’,
‘table:use-first-row-styles’, ‘table:use-last-row-styles’,
‘table:use-first-column-styles’, ‘table:use-last-column-styles’,
‘table:use-banding-rows-styles’, and ‘table:use-banding-column-styles’
of the ‘<table:table>’ element in the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification


File: org.info,  Node: Validating OpenDocument XML,  Prev: Customizing tables in ODT export,  Up: Advanced topics in ODT export

12.9.11.5 Validating OpenDocument XML
.....................................

Occasionally, you will discover that the document created by the ODT
exporter cannot be opened by your favorite application.  One of the
common reasons for this is that the ‘.odt’ file is corrupt.  In such
cases, you may want to validate the document against the OpenDocument
RELAX NG Compact Syntax (RNC) schema.

   For de-compressing the ‘.odt’ file(1): *note (emacs)File Archives::.
For general help with validation (and schema-sensitive editing) of XML
files: *note (nxml-mode)Introduction::.

   If you have ready access to OpenDocument ‘.rnc’ files and the needed
schema-locating rules in a single folder, you can customize the variable
‘org-odt-schema-dir’ to point to that directory.  The ODT exporter will
take care of updating the ‘rng-schema-locating-files’ for you.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) ‘.odt’ files are nothing but ‘zip’ archives


File: org.info,  Node: Org export,  Next: Texinfo export,  Prev: OpenDocument Text export,  Up: Exporting

12.10 Org export
================

‘org’ export back-end creates a normalized version of the Org document
in current buffer.  In particular, it evaluates Babel code (*note
Evaluating code blocks::) and removes other back-ends specific contents.

Org export commands
-------------------

‘C-c C-e O o     (org-org-export-to-org)’
     Export as an Org document.  For an Org file, ‘myfile.org’, the
     resulting file will be ‘myfile.org.org’.  The file will be
     overwritten without warning.
‘C-c C-e O O     (org-org-export-as-org)’
     Export to a temporary buffer.  Do not create a file.
‘C-c C-e O v’
     Export to an Org file, then open it.


File: org.info,  Node: Texinfo export,  Next: iCalendar export,  Prev: Org export,  Up: Exporting

12.11 Texinfo export
====================

‘texinfo’ export back-end generates Texinfo code and can compile it into
an Info file.

* Menu:

* Texinfo export commands::     How to invoke Texinfo export
* Document preamble::           File header, title and copyright page
* Headings and sectioning structure:: Building document structure
* Indices::                     Creating indices
* Quoting Texinfo code::        Incorporating literal Texinfo code
* Texinfo specific attributes:: Controlling Texinfo output
* An example::


File: org.info,  Node: Texinfo export commands,  Next: Document preamble,  Prev: Texinfo export,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.1 Texinfo export commands
-------------------------------

‘C-c C-e i t     (org-texinfo-export-to-texinfo)’
     Export as a Texinfo file.  For an Org file, ‘myfile.org’, the
     resulting file will be ‘myfile.texi’.  The file will be overwritten
     without warning.
‘C-c C-e i i     (org-texinfo-export-to-info)’
     Export to Texinfo and then process to an Info file(1).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) By setting ‘org-texinfo-info-process’, it is possible to generate
other formats, including DocBook.


File: org.info,  Node: Document preamble,  Next: Headings and sectioning structure,  Prev: Texinfo export commands,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.2 Document preamble
-------------------------

When processing a document, ‘texinfo’ back-end generates a minimal file
header along with a title page, a copyright page, and a menu.  You
control the latter through the structure of the document (*note Headings
and sectioning structure::).  Various keywords allow you to tweak the
other parts.  It is also possible to give directions to install the
document in the ‘Top’ node.

File header
...........

Upon creating the header of a Texinfo file, the back-end guesses a name
for the Info file to be compiled.  This may not be a sensible choice,
e.g., if you want to produce the final document in a different
directory.  Specify an alternate path with ‘#+TEXINFO_FILENAME’ keyword
to override the default destination.

   Along with the output file name, the header contains information
about the language (*note Export settings::) and current encoding
used(1).  Insert a ‘#+TEXINFO_HEADER’ keyword for each additional
command needed, e.g., @code{@synindex}.

   If you happen to regularly install the same set of commands, it may
be easier to define your own class in ‘org-texinfo-classes’, which see.
Set ‘#+TEXINFO_CLASS’ keyword accordingly in your document to activate
it.

Title and copyright page
........................

The default template includes a title page for hard copy output.  The
title and author displayed on this page are extracted from,
respectively, ‘#+TITLE’ and ‘#+AUTHOR’ keywords (*note Export
settings::).  It is also possible to print a different, more specific,
title with ‘#+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE’ keyword, and add subtitles with
‘#+SUBTITLE’ keyword.  Both expect raw Texinfo code in their value.

   Likewise, information brought by ‘#+AUTHOR’ may not be enough.  You
can include other authors with several ‘#+SUBAUTHOR’ keywords.  Values
are also expected to be written in Texinfo code.

     #+AUTHOR: Jane Smith
     #+SUBAUTHOR: John Doe
     #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: This Long Title@inlinefmt{tex,@*} Is Broken in @TeX{}

   Copying material is defined in a dedicated headline with a non-nil
‘:COPYING:’ property.  The contents are inserted within a ‘@copying’
command at the beginning of the document whereas the heading itself does
not appear in the structure of the document.

   Copyright information is printed on the back of the title page.

     * Copying
       :PROPERTIES:
       :COPYING: t
       :END:

       This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file, version 1.0.

       Copyright \copy 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

The Top node
............

You may ultimately want to install your new Info file to your system.
You can write an appropriate entry in the top level directory specifying
its category and title with, respectively, ‘#+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY’ and
‘#+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE’.  Optionally, you can add a short description
using ‘#+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC’.  The following example would write an entry
similar to Org’s in the ‘Top’ node.

     #+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Emacs
     #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: Org Mode: (org)
     #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Outline-based notes management and organizer

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See ‘org-texinfo-coding-system’ for more information.


File: org.info,  Node: Headings and sectioning structure,  Next: Indices,  Prev: Document preamble,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.3 Headings and sectioning structure
-----------------------------------------

‘texinfo’ uses a pre-defined scheme, or class, to convert headlines into
Texinfo structuring commands.  For example, a top level headline appears
as ‘@chapter’ if it should be numbered or as ‘@unnumbered’ otherwise.
If you need to use a different set of commands, e.g., to start with
‘@part’ instead of ‘@chapter’, install a new class in
‘org-texinfo-classes’, then activate it with ‘#+TEXINFO_CLASS’ keyword.
Export process defaults to ‘org-texinfo-default-class’ when there is no
such keyword in the document.

   If a headline’s level has no associated structuring command, or is
below a certain threshold *note Export settings::, that headline becomes
a list in Texinfo output.

   As an exception, a headline with a non-nil ‘:APPENDIX:’ property
becomes an appendix, independently on its level and the class used.

   Each regular sectioning structure creates a menu entry, named after
the heading.  You can provide a different, e.g., shorter, title in
‘:ALT_TITLE:’ property (*note Table of contents::).  Optionally, you can
specify a description for the item in ‘:DESCRIPTION:’ property.  E.g.,

     * Controlling Screen Display
       :PROPERTIES:
       :ALT_TITLE: Display
       :DESCRIPTION: Controlling Screen Display
       :END:


File: org.info,  Node: Indices,  Next: Quoting Texinfo code,  Prev: Headings and sectioning structure,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.4 Indices
---------------

Index entries are created using dedicated keywords.  ‘texinfo’ back-end
provides one for each predefined type: ‘#+CINDEX’, ‘#+FINDEX’,
‘#+KINDEX’, ‘#+PINDEX’, ‘#+TINDEX’ and ‘#+VINDEX’.  For custom indices,
you can write raw Texinfo code (*note Quoting Texinfo code::).

     #+CINDEX: Defining indexing entries

   To generate an index, you need to set the ‘:INDEX:’ property of a
headline to an appropriate abbreviation (e.g., ‘cp’ or ‘vr’).  The
headline is then exported as an unnumbered chapter or section command
and the index is inserted after its contents.

     * Concept Index
       :PROPERTIES:
       :INDEX: cp
       :END:


File: org.info,  Node: Quoting Texinfo code,  Next: Texinfo specific attributes,  Prev: Indices,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.5 Quoting Texinfo code
----------------------------

It is possible to insert raw Texinfo code using any of the following
constructs

     Richard @@texinfo:@sc{@@Stallman@@texinfo:}@@ commence' GNU.

     #+TEXINFO: @need800
     This paragraph is preceded by...

     #+BEGIN_TEXINFO
     @auindex Johnson, Mark
     @auindex Lakoff, George
     #+END_TEXINFO


File: org.info,  Node: Texinfo specific attributes,  Next: An example,  Prev: Quoting Texinfo code,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.6 Texinfo specific attributes
-----------------------------------

‘texinfo’ back-end understands several attributes in plain lists and
tables.  They must be specified using an ‘#+ATTR_TEXINFO’ keyword,
written just above the list or table.

Plain lists
...........

In Texinfo output, description lists appear as two-column tables, using
the default command ‘@table’.  You can use ‘@ftable’ or ‘@vtable’(1)
instead with ‘:table-type’ attribute.

   In any case, these constructs require a highlighting command for
entries in the list.  You can provide one with ‘:indic’ attribute.  If
you do not, it defaults to the value stored in
‘org-texinfo-def-table-markup’, which see.

     #+ATTR_TEXINFO: :indic @asis
     - foo :: This is the text for /foo/, with no highlighting.

Tables
......

When exporting a table, column widths are deduced from the longest cell
in each column.  You can also define them explicitly as fractions of the
line length, using ‘:columns’ attribute.

     #+ATTR_TEXINFO: :columns .5 .5
     | a cell | another cell |

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) For more information, *note (texinfo)Two-column Tables::.


File: org.info,  Node: An example,  Prev: Texinfo specific attributes,  Up: Texinfo export

12.11.7 An example
------------------

Here is a thorough example, taken from *note (texinfo)GNU Sample
Texts::.

     #+MACRO: version 2.0
     #+MACRO: updated last updated 4 March 2014

     #+OPTIONS: ':t toc:t author:t email:t
     #+TITLE: GNU Sample {{{version}}}
     #+AUTHOR: A.U. Thor
     #+EMAIL: bug-sample@gnu.org
     #+LANGUAGE: en

     #+TEXINFO_FILENAME: sample.info
     #+TEXINFO_HEADER: @syncodeindex pg cp

     #+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Texinfo documentation system
     #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: sample: (sample)
     #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Invoking sample

     #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: GNU Sample
     #+SUBTITLE: for version 2.0, last updated 4 March 2014

     * Copying
       :PROPERTIES:
       :COPYING:  t
       :END:

       This manual is for GNU Sample (version {{{version}}},
       {{{updated}}}), which is an example in the Texinfo documentation.

       Copyright @@texinfo:@copyright{}@@ 2013 Free Software Foundation,
       Inc.

       #+BEGIN_QUOTE
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
       document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
       Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
       Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts,
       and with no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in
       the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
       #+END_QUOTE

     * Invoking sample

       #+PINDEX: sample
       #+CINDEX: invoking @command{sample}

       This is a sample manual.  There is no sample program to invoke, but
       if there were, you could see its basic usage and command line
       options here.

     * GNU Free Documentation License
       :PROPERTIES:
       :APPENDIX: t
       :END:

       #+TEXINFO: @include fdl.texi

     * Index
       :PROPERTIES:
       :INDEX:    cp
       :END:


File: org.info,  Node: iCalendar export,  Next: Other built-in back-ends,  Prev: Texinfo export,  Up: Exporting

12.12 iCalendar export
======================

Some people use Org mode for keeping track of projects, but still prefer
a standard calendar application for anniversaries and appointments.  In
this case it can be useful to show deadlines and other time-stamped
items in Org files in the calendar application.  Org mode can export
calendar information in the standard iCalendar format.  If you also want
to have TODO entries included in the export, configure the variable
‘org-icalendar-include-todo’.  Plain timestamps are exported as VEVENT,
and TODO items as VTODO.  It will also create events from deadlines that
are in non-TODO items.  Deadlines and scheduling dates in TODO items
will be used to set the start and due dates for the TODO entry(1).  As
categories, it will use the tags locally defined in the heading, and the
file/tree category(2).  See the variable ‘org-icalendar-alarm-time’ for
a way to assign alarms to entries with a time.

   The iCalendar standard requires each entry to have a globally unique
identifier (UID). Org creates these identifiers during export.  If you
set the variable ‘org-icalendar-store-UID’, the UID will be stored in
the ‘:ID:’ property of the entry and re-used next time you report this
entry.  Since a single entry can give rise to multiple iCalendar entries
(as a timestamp, a deadline, a scheduled item, and as a TODO item), Org
adds prefixes to the UID, depending on what triggered the inclusion of
the entry.  In this way the UID remains unique, but a synchronization
program can still figure out from which entry all the different
instances originate.

‘C-c C-e c f     (org-icalendar-export-to-ics)’
     Create iCalendar entries for the current buffer and store them in
     the same directory, using a file extension ‘.ics’.
‘C-c C-e c a     (org-icalendar-export-agenda-files)’
     Like ‘C-c C-e c f’, but do this for all files in
     ‘org-agenda-files’.  For each of these files, a separate iCalendar
     file will be written.
‘C-c C-e c c     (org-icalendar-combine-agenda-files)’
     Create a single large iCalendar file from all files in
     ‘org-agenda-files’ and write it to the file given by
     ‘org-icalendar-combined-agenda-file’.

   The export will honor SUMMARY, DESCRIPTION and LOCATION(3) properties
if the selected entries have them.  If not, the summary will be derived
from the headline, and the description from the body (limited to
‘org-icalendar-include-body’ characters).

   How this calendar is best read and updated, depends on the
application you are using.  The FAQ covers this issue.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) See the variables ‘org-icalendar-use-deadline’ and
‘org-icalendar-use-scheduled’.

   (2) To add inherited tags or the TODO state, configure the variable
‘org-icalendar-categories’.

   (3) The LOCATION property can be inherited from higher in the
hierarchy if you configure ‘org-use-property-inheritance’ accordingly.


File: org.info,  Node: Other built-in back-ends,  Next: Export in foreign buffers,  Prev: iCalendar export,  Up: Exporting

12.13 Other built-in back-ends
==============================

On top of the aforementioned back-ends, Org comes with other built-in
ones:

   • ‘ox-man.el’: export to a man page.

   To activate these export back-end, customize ‘org-export-backends’ or
load them directly with e.g., ‘(require 'ox-man)’.  This will add new
keys in the export dispatcher (*note The Export Dispatcher::).

   See the comment section of these files for more information on how to
use them.


File: org.info,  Node: Export in foreign buffers,  Next: Advanced configuration,  Prev: Other built-in back-ends,  Up: Exporting

12.14 Export in foreign buffers
===============================

Most built-in back-ends come with a command to convert the selected
region into a selected format and replace this region by the exported
output.  Here is a list of such conversion commands:

‘org-html-convert-region-to-html’
     Convert the selected region into HTML.
‘org-latex-convert-region-to-latex’
     Convert the selected region into LaTeX.
‘org-texinfo-convert-region-to-texinfo’
     Convert the selected region into ‘Texinfo’.
‘org-md-convert-region-to-md’
     Convert the selected region into ‘MarkDown’.

   This is particularly useful for converting tables and lists in
foreign buffers.  E.g., in an HTML buffer, you can turn on
‘orgstruct-mode’, then use Org commands for editing a list, and finally
select and convert the list with ‘M-x org-html-convert-region-to-html
RET’.


File: org.info,  Node: Advanced configuration,  Prev: Export in foreign buffers,  Up: Exporting

12.15 Advanced configuration
============================

Hooks
-----

Two hooks are run during the first steps of the export process.  The
first one, ‘org-export-before-processing-hook’ is called before
expanding macros, Babel code and include keywords in the buffer.  The
second one, ‘org-export-before-parsing-hook’, as its name suggests,
happens just before parsing the buffer.  Their main use is for heavy
duties, that is duties involving structural modifications of the
document.  For example, one may want to remove every headline in the
buffer during export.  The following code can achieve this:

     (defun my-headline-removal (backend)
       "Remove all headlines in the current buffer.
     BACKEND is the export back-end being used, as a symbol."
       (org-map-entries
        (lambda () (delete-region (point) (progn (forward-line) (point))))))

     (add-hook 'org-export-before-parsing-hook 'my-headline-removal)

   Note that functions used in these hooks require a mandatory argument,
a symbol representing the back-end used.

Filters
-------

Filters are lists of functions applied on a specific part of the output
from a given back-end.  More explicitly, each time a back-end transforms
an Org object or element into another language, all functions within a
given filter type are called in turn on the string produced.  The string
returned by the last function will be the one used in the final output.

   There are filters sets for each type of element or object, for plain
text, for the parse tree, for the export options and for the final
output.  They are all named after the same scheme:
‘org-export-filter-TYPE-functions’, where ‘TYPE’ is the type targeted by
the filter.  Valid types are:

bold                     babel-call               center-block
clock                    code                     comment
comment-block            diary-sexp               drawer
dynamic-block            entity                   example-block
export-block             export-snippet           final-output
fixed-width              footnote-definition      footnote-reference
headline                 horizontal-rule          inline-babel-call
inline-src-block         inlinetask               italic
item                     keyword                  latex-environment
latex-fragment           line-break               link
node-property            options                  paragraph
parse-tree               plain-list               plain-text
planning                 property-drawer          quote-block
quote-section            radio-target             section
special-block            src-block                statistics-cookie
strike-through           subscript                superscript
table                    table-cell               table-row
target                   timestamp                underline
verbatim                 verse-block

   For example, the following snippet allows me to use non-breaking
spaces in the Org buffer and get them translated into LaTeX without
using the ‘\nbsp’ macro (where ‘_’ stands for the non-breaking space):

     (defun my-latex-filter-nobreaks (text backend info)
       "Ensure \"_\" are properly handled in LaTeX export."
       (when (org-export-derived-backend-p backend 'latex)
             (replace-regexp-in-string "_" "~" text)))

     (add-to-list 'org-export-filter-plain-text-functions
                  'my-latex-filter-nobreaks)

   Three arguments must be provided to a filter: the code being changed,
the back-end used, and some information about the export process.  You
can safely ignore the third argument for most purposes.  Note the use of
‘org-export-derived-backend-p’, which ensures that the filter will only
be applied when using ‘latex’ back-end or any other back-end derived
from it (e.g., ‘beamer’).

Extending an existing back-end
------------------------------

This is obviously the most powerful customization, since the changes
happen at the parser level.  Indeed, some export back-ends are built as
extensions of other ones (e.g., Markdown back-end an extension of HTML
back-end).

   Extending a back-end means that if an element type is not transcoded
by the new back-end, it will be handled by the original one.  Hence you
can extend specific parts of a back-end without too much work.

   As an example, imagine we want the ‘ascii’ back-end to display the
language used in a source block, when it is available, but only when
some attribute is non-‘nil’, like the following:

     #+ATTR_ASCII: :language t

   Because that back-end is lacking in that area, we are going to create
a new back-end, ‘my-ascii’ that will do the job.

     (defun my-ascii-src-block (src-block contents info)
       "Transcode a SRC-BLOCK element from Org to ASCII.
     CONTENTS is nil.  INFO is a plist used as a communication
     channel."
       (if (not (org-export-read-attribute :attr_ascii src-block :language))
         (org-export-with-backend 'ascii src-block contents info)
       (concat
        (format ",--[ %s ]--\n%s`----"
                (org-element-property :language src-block)
                (replace-regexp-in-string
                 "^" "| "
                 (org-element-normalize-string
                  (org-export-format-code-default src-block info)))))))

     (org-export-define-derived-backend 'my-ascii 'ascii
       :translate-alist '((src-block . my-ascii-src-block)))

   The ‘my-ascii-src-block’ function looks at the attribute above the
element.  If it isn’t true, it gives hand to the ‘ascii’ back-end.
Otherwise, it creates a box around the code, leaving room for the
language.  A new back-end is then created.  It only changes its behavior
when translating ‘src-block’ type element.  Now, all it takes to use the
new back-end is calling the following from an Org buffer:

     (org-export-to-buffer 'my-ascii "*Org MY-ASCII Export*")

   It is obviously possible to write an interactive function for this,
install it in the export dispatcher menu, and so on.


File: org.info,  Node: Publishing,  Next: Working With Source Code,  Prev: Exporting,  Up: Top

13 Publishing
*************

Org includes a publishing management system that allows you to configure
automatic HTML conversion of _projects_ composed of interlinked org
files.  You can also configure Org to automatically upload your exported
HTML pages and related attachments, such as images and source code
files, to a web server.

   You can also use Org to convert files into PDF, or even combine HTML
and PDF conversion so that files are available in both formats on the
server.

   Publishing has been contributed to Org by David O’Toole.

* Menu:

* Configuration::               Defining projects
* Uploading files::             How to get files up on the server
* Sample configuration::        Example projects
* Triggering publication::      Publication commands


File: org.info,  Node: Configuration,  Next: Uploading files,  Prev: Publishing,  Up: Publishing

13.1 Configuration
==================

Publishing needs significant configuration to specify files, destination
and many other properties of a project.

* Menu:

* Project alist::               The central configuration variable
* Sources and destinations::    From here to there
* Selecting files::             What files are part of the project?
* Publishing action::           Setting the function doing the publishing
* Publishing options::          Tweaking HTML/LaTeX export
* Publishing links::            Which links keep working after publishing?
* Sitemap::                     Generating a list of all pages
* Generating an index::         An index that reaches across pages


File: org.info,  Node: Project alist,  Next: Sources and destinations,  Prev: Configuration,  Up: Configuration

13.1.1 The variable ‘org-publish-project-alist’
-----------------------------------------------

Publishing is configured almost entirely through setting the value of
one variable, called ‘org-publish-project-alist’.  Each element of the
list configures one project, and may be in one of the two following
forms:

        ("project-name" :property value :property value ...)
          i.e., a well-formed property list with alternating keys and values
     or
        ("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...))


   In both cases, projects are configured by specifying property values.
A project defines the set of files that will be published, as well as
the publishing configuration to use when publishing those files.  When a
project takes the second form listed above, the individual members of
the ‘:components’ property are taken to be sub-projects, which group
together files requiring different publishing options.  When you publish
such a “meta-project”, all the components will also be published, in the
sequence given.


File: org.info,  Node: Sources and destinations,  Next: Selecting files,  Prev: Project alist,  Up: Configuration

13.1.2 Sources and destinations for files
-----------------------------------------

Most properties are optional, but some should always be set.  In
particular, Org needs to know where to look for source files, and where
to put published files.

‘:base-directory’      Directory containing publishing source files
‘:publishing-directory’Directory where output files will be published.
                       You can directly publish to a web server using a
                       file name syntax appropriate for the Emacs
                       ‘tramp’ package.  Or you can publish to a local
                       directory and use external tools to upload your
                       website (*note Uploading files::).
‘:preparation-function’Function or list of functions to be called
                       before starting the publishing process, for
                       example, to run ‘make’ for updating files to be
                       published.  The project property list is scoped
                       into this call as the variable ‘project-plist’.
‘:completion-function’ Function or list of functions called after
                       finishing the publishing process, for example,
                       to change permissions of the resulting files.
                       The project property list is scoped into this
                       call as the variable ‘project-plist’.


File: org.info,  Node: Selecting files,  Next: Publishing action,  Prev: Sources and destinations,  Up: Configuration

13.1.3 Selecting files
----------------------

By default, all files with extension ‘.org’ in the base directory are
considered part of the project.  This can be modified by setting the
properties
‘:base-extension’  Extension (without the dot!)  of source files.  This
                   actually is a regular expression.  Set this to the
                   symbol ‘any’ if you want to get all files in
                   ‘:base-directory’, even without extension.
                   
‘:exclude’         Regular expression to match file names that should
                   not be published, even though they have been
                   selected on the basis of their extension.
                   
‘:include’         List of files to be included regardless of
                   ‘:base-extension’ and ‘:exclude’.
                   
‘:recursive’       non-‘nil’ means, check base-directory recursively
                   for files to publish.


File: org.info,  Node: Publishing action,  Next: Publishing options,  Prev: Selecting files,  Up: Configuration

13.1.4 Publishing action
------------------------

Publishing means that a file is copied to the destination directory and
possibly transformed in the process.  The default transformation is to
export Org files as HTML files, and this is done by the function
‘org-html-publish-to-html’, which calls the HTML exporter (*note HTML
export::).  But you also can publish your content as PDF files using
‘org-latex-publish-to-pdf’ or as ‘ascii’, ‘Texinfo’, etc., using the
corresponding functions.

   If you want to publish the Org file as an ‘.org’ file but with the
archived, commented and tag-excluded trees removed, use the function
‘org-org-publish-to-org’.  This will produce ‘file.org’ and put it in
the publishing directory.  If you want a htmlized version of this file,
set the parameter ‘:htmlized-source’ to ‘t’, it will produce
‘file.org.html’ in the publishing directory(1).

   Other files like images only need to be copied to the publishing
destination.  For this you can use ‘org-publish-attachment’.  For
non-org files, you always need to specify the publishing function:

‘:publishing-function’ Function executing the publication of a file.
                       This may also be a list of functions, which will
                       all be called in turn.
‘:htmlized-source’     non-‘nil’ means, publish htmlized source.

   The function must accept three arguments: a property list containing
at least a ‘:publishing-directory’ property, the name of the file to be
published and the path to the publishing directory of the output file.
It should take the specified file, make the necessary transformation (if
any) and place the result into the destination folder.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If the publishing directory is the same than the source
directory, ‘file.org’ will be exported as ‘file.org.org’, so probably
don’t want to do this.


File: org.info,  Node: Publishing options,  Next: Publishing links,  Prev: Publishing action,  Up: Configuration

13.1.5 Options for the exporters
--------------------------------

The property list can be used to set many export options for the
exporters.  In most cases, these properties correspond to user variables
in Org.  The first table below lists these properties along with the
variable they belong to.  The second table list HTML specific
properties.  See the documentation string of these options for details.

‘:archived-trees’       ‘org-export-with-archived-trees’
‘:exclude-tags’         ‘org-export-exclude-tags’
‘:headline-levels’      ‘org-export-headline-levels’
‘:language’             ‘org-export-default-language’
‘:preserve-breaks’      ‘org-export-preserve-breaks’
‘:section-numbers’      ‘org-export-with-section-numbers’
‘:select-tags’          ‘org-export-select-tags’
‘:with-author’          ‘org-export-with-author’
‘:with-creator’         ‘org-export-with-creator’
‘:with-drawers’         ‘org-export-with-drawers’
‘:with-email’           ‘org-export-with-email’
‘:with-emphasize’       ‘org-export-with-emphasize’
‘:with-fixed-width’     ‘org-export-with-fixed-width’
‘:with-footnotes’       ‘org-export-with-footnotes’
‘:with-latex’           ‘org-export-with-latex’
‘:with-planning’        ‘org-export-with-planning’
‘:with-priority’        ‘org-export-with-priority’
‘:with-special-strings’ ‘org-export-with-special-strings’
‘:with-sub-superscript’ ‘org-export-with-sub-superscripts’
‘:with-tables’          ‘org-export-with-tables’
‘:with-tags’            ‘org-export-with-tags’
‘:with-tasks’           ‘org-export-with-tasks’
‘:with-timestamps’      ‘org-export-with-timestamps’
‘:with-toc’             ‘org-export-with-toc’
‘:with-todo-keywords’   ‘org-export-with-todo-keywords’

‘:html-doctype’         ‘org-html-doctype’
‘:html-container’       ‘org-html-container-element’
‘:html-html5-fancy’     ‘org-html-html5-fancy’
‘:html-xml-declaration’ ‘org-html-xml-declaration’
‘:html-link-up’         ‘org-html-link-up’
‘:html-link-home’       ‘org-html-link-home’
‘:html-link-org-as-html’‘org-html-link-org-files-as-html’
‘:html-link-use-abs-url’‘org-html-link-use-abs-url’
‘:html-head’            ‘org-html-head’
‘:html-head-extra’      ‘org-html-head-extra’
‘:html-inline-images’   ‘org-html-inline-images’
‘:html-extension’       ‘org-html-extension’
‘:html-preamble’        ‘org-html-preamble’
‘:html-postamble’       ‘org-html-postamble’
‘:html-table-attributes’‘org-html-table-default-attributes’
‘:html-table-row-tags’  ‘org-html-table-row-tags’
‘:html-head-include-default-style’‘org-html-head-include-default-style’
‘:html-head-include-scripts’‘org-html-head-include-scripts’

   Most of the ‘org-export-with-*’ variables have the same effect in
each exporter.

   When a property is given a value in ‘org-publish-project-alist’, its
setting overrides the value of the corresponding user variable (if any)
during publishing.  Options set within a file (*note Export settings::),
however, override everything.


File: org.info,  Node: Publishing links,  Next: Sitemap,  Prev: Publishing options,  Up: Configuration

13.1.6 Links between published files
------------------------------------

To create a link from one Org file to another, you would use something
like ‘[[file:foo.org][The foo]]’ or simply ‘file:foo.org.’ (*note
Hyperlinks::).  When published, this link becomes a link to ‘foo.html’.
You can thus interlink the pages of your "org web" project and the links
will work as expected when you publish them to HTML.  If you also
publish the Org source file and want to link to it, use an ‘http:’ link
instead of a ‘file:’ link, because ‘file:’ links are converted to link
to the corresponding ‘html’ file.

   You may also link to related files, such as images.  Provided you are
careful with relative file names, and provided you have also configured
Org to upload the related files, these links will work too.  See *note
Complex example::, for an example of this usage.


File: org.info,  Node: Sitemap,  Next: Generating an index,  Prev: Publishing links,  Up: Configuration

13.1.7 Generating a sitemap
---------------------------

The following properties may be used to control publishing of a map of
files for a given project.

‘:auto-sitemap’           When non-‘nil’, publish a sitemap during
                          ‘org-publish-current-project’ or
                          ‘org-publish-all’.
                          
‘:sitemap-filename’       Filename for output of sitemap.  Defaults to
                          ‘sitemap.org’ (which becomes ‘sitemap.html’).
                          
‘:sitemap-title’          Title of sitemap page.  Defaults to name of
                          file.
                          
‘:sitemap-function’       Plug-in function to use for generation of the
                          sitemap.  Defaults to
                          ‘org-publish-org-sitemap’, which generates a
                          plain list of links to all files in the
                          project.
                          
‘:sitemap-sort-folders’   Where folders should appear in the sitemap.
                          Set this to ‘first’ (default) or ‘last’ to
                          display folders first or last, respectively.
                          Any other value will mix files and folders.
                          
‘:sitemap-sort-files’     How the files are sorted in the site map.
                          Set this to ‘alphabetically’ (default),
                          ‘chronologically’ or ‘anti-chronologically’.
                          ‘chronologically’ sorts the files with older
                          date first while ‘anti-chronologically’ sorts
                          the files with newer date first.
                          ‘alphabetically’ sorts the files
                          alphabetically.  The date of a file is
                          retrieved with ‘org-publish-find-date’.
                          
‘:sitemap-ignore-case’    Should sorting be case-sensitive?  Default
                          ‘nil’.
                          
‘:sitemap-file-entry-format’With this option one can tell how a sitemap’s
                          entry is formatted in the sitemap.  This is a
                          format string with some escape sequences:
                          ‘%t’ stands for the title of the file, ‘%a’
                          stands for the author of the file and ‘%d’
                          stands for the date of the file.  The date is
                          retrieved with the ‘org-publish-find-date’
                          function and formatted with
                          ‘org-publish-sitemap-date-format’.  Default
                          ‘%t’.
                          
‘:sitemap-date-format’    Format string for the ‘format-time-string’
                          function that tells how a sitemap entry’s
                          date is to be formatted.  This property
                          bypasses ‘org-publish-sitemap-date-format’
                          which defaults to ‘%Y-%m-%d’.
                          
‘:sitemap-sans-extension’ When non-‘nil’, remove filenames’ extensions
                          from the generated sitemap.  Useful to have
                          cool URIs (see
                          <http://www.w3.org/Provider/Style/URI>).
                          Defaults to ‘nil’.
                          


File: org.info,  Node: Generating an index,  Prev: Sitemap,  Up: Configuration

13.1.8 Generating an index
--------------------------

Org mode can generate an index across the files of a publishing project.

‘:makeindex’       When non-‘nil’, generate in index in the file
                   ‘theindex.org’ and publish it as ‘theindex.html’.

   The file will be created when first publishing a project with the
‘:makeindex’ set.  The file only contains a statement ‘#+INCLUDE:
"theindex.inc"’.  You can then build around this include statement by
adding a title, style information, etc.


File: org.info,  Node: Uploading files,  Next: Sample configuration,  Prev: Configuration,  Up: Publishing

13.2 Uploading files
====================

For those people already utilizing third party sync tools such as
‘rsync’ or ‘unison’, it might be preferable not to use the built in
remote publishing facilities of Org mode which rely heavily on Tramp.
Tramp, while very useful and powerful, tends not to be so efficient for
multiple file transfer and has been known to cause problems under heavy
usage.

   Specialized synchronization utilities offer several advantages.  In
addition to timestamp comparison, they also do content and
permissions/attribute checks.  For this reason you might prefer to
publish your web to a local directory (possibly even in place with your
Org files) and then use ‘unison’ or ‘rsync’ to do the synchronization
with the remote host.

   Since Unison (for example) can be configured as to which files to
transfer to a certain remote destination, it can greatly simplify the
project publishing definition.  Simply keep all files in the correct
location, process your Org files with ‘org-publish’ and let the
synchronization tool do the rest.  You do not need, in this scenario, to
include attachments such as ‘jpg’, ‘css’ or ‘gif’ files in the project
definition since the 3rd party tool syncs them.

   Publishing to a local directory is also much faster than to a remote
one, so that you can afford more easily to republish entire projects.
If you set ‘org-publish-use-timestamps-flag’ to ‘nil’, you gain the main
benefit of re-including any changed external files such as source
example files you might include with ‘#+INCLUDE:’.  The timestamp
mechanism in Org is not smart enough to detect if included files have
been modified.


File: org.info,  Node: Sample configuration,  Next: Triggering publication,  Prev: Uploading files,  Up: Publishing

13.3 Sample configuration
=========================

Below we provide two example configurations.  The first one is a simple
project publishing only a set of Org files.  The second example is more
complex, with a multi-component project.

* Menu:

* Simple example::              One-component publishing
* Complex example::             A multi-component publishing example


File: org.info,  Node: Simple example,  Next: Complex example,  Prev: Sample configuration,  Up: Sample configuration

13.3.1 Example: simple publishing configuration
-----------------------------------------------

This example publishes a set of Org files to the ‘public_html’ directory
on the local machine.

     (setq org-publish-project-alist
           '(("org"
              :base-directory "~/org/"
              :publishing-directory "~/public_html"
              :section-numbers nil
              :with-toc nil
              :html-head "<link rel=\"stylesheet\"
                         href=\"../other/mystyle.css\"
                         type=\"text/css\"/>")))


File: org.info,  Node: Complex example,  Prev: Simple example,  Up: Sample configuration

13.3.2 Example: complex publishing configuration
------------------------------------------------

This more complicated example publishes an entire website, including Org
files converted to HTML, image files, Emacs Lisp source code, and style
sheets.  The publishing directory is remote and private files are
excluded.

   To ensure that links are preserved, care should be taken to replicate
your directory structure on the web server, and to use relative file
paths.  For example, if your Org files are kept in ‘~/org’ and your
publishable images in ‘~/images’, you would link to an image with
     file:../images/myimage.png
   On the web server, the relative path to the image should be the same.
You can accomplish this by setting up an "images" folder in the right
place on the web server, and publishing images to it.

     (setq org-publish-project-alist
           '(("orgfiles"
               :base-directory "~/org/"
               :base-extension "org"
               :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/notebook/"
               :publishing-function org-html-publish-to-html
               :exclude "PrivatePage.org"   ;; regexp
               :headline-levels 3
               :section-numbers nil
               :with-toc nil
               :html-head "<link rel=\"stylesheet\"
                       href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\"/>"
               :html-preamble t)

              ("images"
               :base-directory "~/images/"
               :base-extension "jpg\\|gif\\|png"
               :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/images/"
               :publishing-function org-publish-attachment)

              ("other"
               :base-directory "~/other/"
               :base-extension "css\\|el"
               :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/other/"
               :publishing-function org-publish-attachment)
              ("website" :components ("orgfiles" "images" "other"))))


File: org.info,  Node: Triggering publication,  Prev: Sample configuration,  Up: Publishing

13.4 Triggering publication
===========================

Once properly configured, Org can publish with the following commands:

‘C-c C-e P x     (org-publish)’
     Prompt for a specific project and publish all files that belong to
     it.
‘C-c C-e P p     (org-publish-current-project)’
     Publish the project containing the current file.
‘C-c C-e P f     (org-publish-current-file)’
     Publish only the current file.
‘C-c C-e P a     (org-publish-all)’
     Publish every project.

   Org uses timestamps to track when a file has changed.  The above
functions normally only publish changed files.  You can override this
and force publishing of all files by giving a prefix argument to any of
the commands above, or by customizing the variable
‘org-publish-use-timestamps-flag’.  This may be necessary in particular
if files include other files via ‘#+SETUPFILE:’ or ‘#+INCLUDE:’.


File: org.info,  Node: Working With Source Code,  Next: Miscellaneous,  Prev: Publishing,  Up: Top

14 Working with source code
***************************

Source code can be included in Org mode documents using a ‘src’ block,
e.g.:

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
       (defun org-xor (a b)
          "Exclusive or."
          (if a (not b) b))
     #+END_SRC

   Org mode provides a number of features for working with live source
code, including editing of code blocks in their native major-mode,
evaluation of code blocks, converting code blocks into source files
(known as “tangling” in literate programming), and exporting code blocks
and their results in several formats.  This functionality was
contributed by Eric Schulte and Dan Davison, and was originally named
Org-babel.

   The following sections describe Org mode’s code block handling
facilities.

* Menu:

* Structure of code blocks::    Code block syntax described
* Editing source code::         Language major-mode editing
* Exporting code blocks::       Export contents and/or results
* Extracting source code::      Create pure source code files
* Evaluating code blocks::      Place results of evaluation in the Org mode buffer
* Library of Babel::            Use and contribute to a library of useful code blocks
* Languages::                   List of supported code block languages
* Header arguments::            Configure code block functionality
* Results of evaluation::       How evaluation results are handled
* Noweb reference syntax::      Literate programming in Org mode
* Key bindings and useful functions::  Work quickly with code blocks
* Batch execution::             Call functions from the command line


File: org.info,  Node: Structure of code blocks,  Next: Editing source code,  Prev: Working With Source Code,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.1 Structure of code blocks
=============================

Live code blocks can be specified with a ‘src’ block or inline.(1)  The
structure of a ‘src’ block is

     #+NAME: <name>
     #+BEGIN_SRC <language> <switches> <header arguments>
       <body>
     #+END_SRC

   The ‘#+NAME:’ line is optional, and can be used to name the code
block.  Live code blocks require that a language be specified on the
‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ line.  Switches and header arguments are optional.

   Live code blocks can also be specified inline using

     src_<language>{<body>}

   or

     src_<language>[<header arguments>]{<body>}

‘<#+NAME: name>’
     This line associates a name with the code block.  This is similar
     to the ‘#+NAME: Name’ lines that can be used to name tables in Org
     mode files.  Referencing the name of a code block makes it possible
     to evaluate the block from other places in the file, from other
     files, or from Org mode table formulas (see *note The
     spreadsheet::).  Names are assumed to be unique and the behavior of
     Org mode when two or more blocks share the same name is undefined.
‘<language>’
     The language of the code in the block (see *note Languages::).
‘<switches>’
     Optional switches control code block export (see the discussion of
     switches in *note Literal examples::)
‘<header arguments>’
     Optional header arguments control many aspects of evaluation,
     export and tangling of code blocks (see *note Header arguments::).
     Header arguments can also be set on a per-buffer or per-subtree
     basis using properties.
‘source code, header arguments’
‘<body>’
     Source code in the specified language.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Note that ‘src’ blocks may be inserted using Org mode’s *note
Easy Templates:: system


File: org.info,  Node: Editing source code,  Next: Exporting code blocks,  Prev: Structure of code blocks,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.2 Editing source code
========================

Use ‘C-c '’ to edit the current code block.  This brings up a language
major-mode edit buffer containing the body of the code block.  Manually
saving this buffer with <C-x C-s> will write the contents back to the
Org buffer.  You can also set ‘org-edit-src-auto-save-idle-delay’ to
save the base buffer after some idle delay, or
‘org-edit-src-turn-on-auto-save’ to auto-save this buffer into a
separate file using ‘auto-save-mode’.  Use ‘C-c '’ again to exit.

   The ‘org-src-mode’ minor mode will be active in the edit buffer.  The
following variables can be used to configure the behavior of the edit
buffer.  See also the customization group ‘org-edit-structure’ for
further configuration options.

‘org-src-lang-modes’
     If an Emacs major-mode named ‘<lang>-mode’ exists, where ‘<lang>’
     is the language named in the header line of the code block, then
     the edit buffer will be placed in that major-mode.  This variable
     can be used to map arbitrary language names to existing major
     modes.
‘org-src-window-setup’
     Controls the way Emacs windows are rearranged when the edit buffer
     is created.
‘org-src-preserve-indentation’
     By default, the value is ‘nil’, which means that when code blocks
     are evaluated during export or tangled, they are re-inserted into
     the code block, which may replace sequences of spaces with tab
     characters.  When non-nil, whitespace in code blocks will be
     preserved during export or tangling, exactly as it appears.  This
     variable is especially useful for tangling languages such as
     Python, in which whitespace indentation in the output is critical.
‘org-src-ask-before-returning-to-edit-buffer’
     By default, Org will ask before returning to an open edit buffer.
     Set this variable to ‘nil’ to switch without asking.

   To turn on native code fontification in the _Org_ buffer, configure
the variable ‘org-src-fontify-natively’.


File: org.info,  Node: Exporting code blocks,  Next: Extracting source code,  Prev: Editing source code,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.3 Exporting code blocks
==========================

It is possible to export the _code_ of code blocks, the _results_ of
code block evaluation, _both_ the code and the results of code block
evaluation, or _none_.  For most languages, the default exports code.
However, for some languages (e.g., ‘ditaa’) the default exports the
results of code block evaluation.  For information on exporting code
block bodies, see *note Literal examples::.

   The ‘:exports’ header argument can be used to specify export
behavior:

Header arguments:
.................

‘:exports code’
     The default in most languages.  The body of the code block is
     exported, as described in *note Literal examples::.
‘:exports results’
     The code block will be evaluated and the results will be placed in
     the Org mode buffer for export, either updating previous results of
     the code block located anywhere in the buffer or, if no previous
     results exist, placing the results immediately after the code
     block.  The body of the code block will not be exported.
‘:exports both’
     Both the code block and its results will be exported.
‘:exports none’
     Neither the code block nor its results will be exported.

   It is possible to inhibit the evaluation of code blocks during
export.  Setting the ‘org-export-babel-evaluate’ variable to ‘nil’ will
ensure that no code blocks are evaluated as part of the export process.
This can be useful in situations where potentially untrusted Org mode
files are exported in an automated fashion, for example when Org mode is
used as the markup language for a wiki.  It is also possible to set this
variable to ‘'inline-only’.  In that case, only inline code blocks will
be evaluated, in order to insert their results.  Non-inline code blocks
are assumed to have their results already inserted in the buffer by
manual evaluation.  This setting is useful to avoid expensive
recalculations during export, not to provide security.


File: org.info,  Node: Extracting source code,  Next: Evaluating code blocks,  Prev: Exporting code blocks,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.4 Extracting source code
===========================

Creating pure source code files by extracting code from source blocks is
referred to as “tangling”—a term adopted from the literate programming
community.  During “tangling” of code blocks their bodies are expanded
using ‘org-babel-expand-src-block’ which can expand both variable and
“noweb” style references (see *note Noweb reference syntax::).

Header arguments
................

‘:tangle no’
     The default.  The code block is not included in the tangled output.
‘:tangle yes’
     Include the code block in the tangled output.  The output file name
     is the name of the org file with the extension ‘.org’ replaced by
     the extension for the block language.
‘:tangle filename’
     Include the code block in the tangled output to file ‘filename’.

Functions
.........

‘org-babel-tangle’
     Tangle the current file.  Bound to ‘C-c C-v t’.

     With prefix argument only tangle the current code block.
‘org-babel-tangle-file’
     Choose a file to tangle.  Bound to ‘C-c C-v f’.

Hooks
.....

‘org-babel-post-tangle-hook’
     This hook is run from within code files tangled by
     ‘org-babel-tangle’.  Example applications could include
     post-processing, compilation or evaluation of tangled code files.

Jumping between code and Org
............................

When tangling code from an Org-mode buffer to a source code file, you’ll
frequently find yourself viewing the file of tangled source code (e.g.,
many debuggers point to lines of the source code file).  It is useful to
be able to navigate from the tangled source to the Org-mode buffer from
which the code originated.

   The ‘org-babel-tangle-jump-to-org’ function provides this jumping
from code to Org-mode functionality.  Two header arguments are required
for jumping to work, first the ‘padline’ (*note padline::) option must
be set to true (the default setting), second the ‘comments’ (*note
comments::) header argument must be set to ‘links’, which will insert
comments into the source code buffer which point back to the original
Org-mode file.


File: org.info,  Node: Evaluating code blocks,  Next: Library of Babel,  Prev: Extracting source code,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.5 Evaluating code blocks
===========================

Code blocks can be evaluated(1) and the results of evaluation optionally
placed in the Org mode buffer.  The results of evaluation are placed
following a line that begins by default with ‘#+RESULTS’ and optionally
a cache identifier and/or the name of the evaluated code block.  The
default value of ‘#+RESULTS’ can be changed with the customizable
variable ‘org-babel-results-keyword’.

   By default, the evaluation facility is only enabled for Lisp code
blocks specified as ‘emacs-lisp’.  However, source code blocks in many
languages can be evaluated within Org mode (see *note Languages:: for a
list of supported languages and *note Structure of code blocks:: for
information on the syntax used to define a code block).

   There are a number of ways to evaluate code blocks.  The simplest is
to press ‘C-c C-c’ or ‘C-c C-v e’ with the point on a code block(2).
This will call the ‘org-babel-execute-src-block’ function to evaluate
the block and insert its results into the Org mode buffer.

   It is also possible to evaluate named code blocks from anywhere in an
Org mode buffer or an Org mode table.  Live code blocks located in the
current Org mode buffer or in the “Library of Babel” (see *note Library
of Babel::) can be executed.  Named code blocks can be executed with a
separate ‘#+CALL:’ line or inline within a block of text.

   The syntax of the ‘#+CALL:’ line is

     #+CALL: <name>(<arguments>)
     #+CALL: <name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>) <end header arguments>

   The syntax for inline evaluation of named code blocks is

     ... call_<name>(<arguments>) ...
     ... call_<name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>)[<end header arguments>] ...

‘<name>’
     The name of the code block to be evaluated (see *note Structure of
     code blocks::).
‘<arguments>’
     Arguments specified in this section will be passed to the code
     block.  These arguments use standard function call syntax, rather
     than header argument syntax.  For example, a ‘#+CALL:’ line that
     passes the number four to a code block named ‘double’, which
     declares the header argument ‘:var n=2’, would be written as
     ‘#+CALL: double(n=4)’.
‘<inside header arguments>’
     Inside header arguments are passed through and applied to the named
     code block.  These arguments use header argument syntax rather than
     standard function call syntax.  Inside header arguments affect how
     the code block is evaluated.  For example, ‘[:results output]’ will
     collect the results of everything printed to ‘STDOUT’ during
     execution of the code block.
‘<end header arguments>’
     End header arguments are applied to the calling instance and do not
     affect evaluation of the named code block.  They affect how the
     results are incorporated into the Org mode buffer and how the call
     line is exported.  For example, ‘:results html’ will insert the
     results of the call line evaluation in the Org buffer, wrapped in a
     ‘BEGIN_HTML:’ block.

     For more examples of passing header arguments to ‘#+CALL:’ lines
     see *note Header arguments in function calls::.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Whenever code is evaluated there is a potential for that code to
do harm.  Org mode provides safeguards to ensure that code is only
evaluated after explicit confirmation from the user.  For information on
these safeguards (and on how to disable them) see *note Code evaluation
security::.

   (2) The option ‘org-babel-no-eval-on-ctrl-c-ctrl-c’ can be used to
remove code evaluation from the ‘C-c C-c’ key binding.


File: org.info,  Node: Library of Babel,  Next: Languages,  Prev: Evaluating code blocks,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.6 Library of Babel
=====================

The “Library of Babel” consists of code blocks that can be called from
any Org mode file.  Code blocks defined in the “Library of Babel” can be
called remotely as if they were in the current Org mode buffer (see
*note Evaluating code blocks:: for information on the syntax of remote
code block evaluation).

   The central repository of code blocks in the “Library of Babel” is
housed in an Org mode file located in the ‘contrib’ directory of Org
mode.

   Users can add code blocks they believe to be generally useful to
their “Library of Babel.” The code blocks can be stored in any Org mode
file and then loaded into the library with ‘org-babel-lob-ingest’.

   Code blocks located in any Org mode file can be loaded into the
“Library of Babel” with the ‘org-babel-lob-ingest’ function, bound to
‘C-c C-v i’.


File: org.info,  Node: Languages,  Next: Header arguments,  Prev: Library of Babel,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.7 Languages
==============

Code blocks in the following languages are supported.

Language             Identifier             Language         Identifier
Asymptote            asymptote              Awk              awk
Emacs Calc           calc                   C                C
C++                  C++                    Clojure          clojure
CSS                  css                    ditaa            ditaa
Graphviz             dot                    Emacs Lisp       emacs-lisp
gnuplot              gnuplot                Haskell          haskell
Java                 java
Javascript           js                     LaTeX            latex
Ledger               ledger                 Lisp             lisp
Lilypond             lilypond               MATLAB           matlab
Mscgen               mscgen                 Objective Caml   ocaml
Octave               octave                 Org mode         org
Oz                   oz                     Perl             perl
Plantuml             plantuml               Python           python
R                    R                      Ruby             ruby
Sass                 sass                   Scheme           scheme
GNU Screen           screen                 shell            sh
SQL                  sql                    SQLite           sqlite

   Language-specific documentation is available for some languages.  If
available, it can be found at
<http://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel/languages.html>.

   The option ‘org-babel-load-languages’ controls which languages are
enabled for evaluation (by default only ‘emacs-lisp’ is enabled).  This
variable can be set using the customization interface or by adding code
like the following to your emacs configuration.

     The following disables ‘emacs-lisp’ evaluation and enables
     evaluation of ‘R’ code blocks.

     (org-babel-do-load-languages
      'org-babel-load-languages
      '((emacs-lisp . nil)
        (R . t)))

   It is also possible to enable support for a language by loading the
related elisp file with ‘require’.

     The following adds support for evaluating ‘clojure’ code blocks.

     (require 'ob-clojure)


File: org.info,  Node: Header arguments,  Next: Results of evaluation,  Prev: Languages,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.8 Header arguments
=====================

Code block functionality can be configured with header arguments.  This
section provides an overview of the use of header arguments, and then
describes each header argument in detail.

* Menu:

* Using header arguments::      Different ways to set header arguments
* Specific header arguments::   List of header arguments


File: org.info,  Node: Using header arguments,  Next: Specific header arguments,  Prev: Header arguments,  Up: Header arguments

14.8.1 Using header arguments
-----------------------------

The values of header arguments can be set in several way.  When the
header arguments in each layer have been determined, they are combined
in order from the first, least specific (having the lowest priority) up
to the last, most specific (having the highest priority).  A header
argument with a higher priority replaces the same header argument
specified at lower priority.
* Menu:

* System-wide header arguments::  Set global default values
* Language-specific header arguments::  Set default values by language
* Header arguments in Org mode properties::  Set default values for a buffer or heading
* Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties::  Set language-specific default values for a buffer or heading
* Code block specific header arguments::  The most common way to set values
* Header arguments in function calls::  The most specific level


File: org.info,  Node: System-wide header arguments,  Next: Language-specific header arguments,  Prev: Using header arguments,  Up: Using header arguments

System-wide header arguments
............................

System-wide values of header arguments can be specified by adapting the
‘org-babel-default-header-args’ variable:

     :session    => "none"
     :results    => "replace"
     :exports    => "code"
     :cache      => "no"
     :noweb      => "no"

   For example, the following example could be used to set the default
value of ‘:noweb’ header arguments to ‘yes’.  This would have the effect
of expanding ‘:noweb’ references by default when evaluating source code
blocks.

     (setq org-babel-default-header-args
           (cons '(:noweb . "yes")
                 (assq-delete-all :noweb org-babel-default-header-args)))


File: org.info,  Node: Language-specific header arguments,  Next: Header arguments in Org mode properties,  Prev: System-wide header arguments,  Up: Using header arguments

Language-specific header arguments
..................................

Each language can define its own set of default header arguments in
variable ‘org-babel-default-header-args:<lang>’, where ‘<lang>’ is the
name of the language.  See the language-specific documentation available
online at <http://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel>.


File: org.info,  Node: Header arguments in Org mode properties,  Next: Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties,  Prev: Language-specific header arguments,  Up: Using header arguments

Header arguments in Org mode properties
.......................................

Buffer-wide header arguments may be specified as properties through the
use of ‘#+PROPERTY:’ lines placed anywhere in an Org mode file (see
*note Property syntax::).

   For example the following would set ‘session’ to ‘*R*’ (only for R
code blocks), and ‘results’ to ‘silent’ for every code block in the
buffer, ensuring that all execution took place in the same session, and
no results would be inserted into the buffer.

     #+PROPERTY: header-args:R  :session *R*
     #+PROPERTY: header-args    :results silent

   Header arguments read from Org mode properties can also be set on a
per-subtree basis using property drawers (see *note Property syntax::).
When properties are used to set default header arguments, they are
always looked up with inheritance, regardless of the value of
‘org-use-property-inheritance’.  Properties are evaluated as seen by the
outermost call or source block.(1)

   In the following example the value of the ‘:cache’ header argument
will default to ‘yes’ in all code blocks in the subtree rooted at the
following heading:

     * outline header
       :PROPERTIES:
       :header-args:    :cache yes
       :END:

   Properties defined in this way override the properties set in
‘org-babel-default-header-args’ and are applied for all activated
languages.  It is convenient to use the ‘org-set-property’ function
bound to ‘C-c C-x p’ to set properties in Org mode documents.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The deprecated syntax for default header argument properties,
using the name of the header argument as a property name directly,
evaluates the property as seen by the corresponding source block
definition.  This behavior has been kept for backwards compatibility.


File: org.info,  Node: Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties,  Next: Code block specific header arguments,  Prev: Header arguments in Org mode properties,  Up: Using header arguments

Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties
.........................................................

Language-specific header arguments are also read from properties
‘header-args:<lang>’ where ‘<lang>’ is the name of the language
targeted.  As an example

     * Heading
       :PROPERTIES:
       :header-args:clojure:    :session *clojure-1*
       :header-args:R:          :session *R*
       :END:
     ** Subheading
       :PROPERTIES:
       :header-args:clojure:    :session *clojure-2*
       :END:

   would independently set a default session header argument for R and
clojure for calls and source blocks under subtree “Heading” and change
to a different clojure setting for evaluations under subtree
“Subheading”, while the R session is inherited from “Heading” and
therefore unchanged.


File: org.info,  Node: Code block specific header arguments,  Next: Header arguments in function calls,  Prev: Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties,  Up: Using header arguments

Code block specific header arguments
....................................

The most common way to assign values to header arguments is at the code
block level.  This can be done by listing a sequence of header arguments
and their values as part of the ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ line.  Properties set in
this way override both the values of ‘org-babel-default-header-args’ and
header arguments specified as properties.  In the following example, the
‘:results’ header argument is set to ‘silent’, meaning the results of
execution will not be inserted in the buffer, and the ‘:exports’ header
argument is set to ‘code’, meaning only the body of the code block will
be preserved on export to HTML or LaTeX.

     #+NAME: factorial
     #+BEGIN_SRC haskell :results silent :exports code :var n=0
     fac 0 = 1
     fac n = n * fac (n-1)
     #+END_SRC
   Similarly, it is possible to set header arguments for inline code
blocks

     src_haskell[:exports both]{fac 5}

   Code block header arguments can span multiple lines using ‘#+HEADER:’
or ‘#+HEADERS:’ lines preceding a code block or nested between the
‘#+NAME:’ line and the ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ line of a named code block.

   Multi-line header arguments on an un-named code block:

      #+HEADERS: :var data1=1
      #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data2=2
        (message "data1:%S, data2:%S" data1 data2)
      #+END_SRC

      #+RESULTS:
      : data1:1, data2:2

   Multi-line header arguments on a named code block:

        #+NAME: named-block
        #+HEADER: :var data=2
        #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
          (message "data:%S" data)
        #+END_SRC

        #+RESULTS: named-block
        : data:2


File: org.info,  Node: Header arguments in function calls,  Prev: Code block specific header arguments,  Up: Using header arguments

Header arguments in function calls
..................................

At the most specific level, header arguments for “Library of Babel” or
‘#+CALL:’ lines can be set as shown in the two examples below.  For more
information on the structure of ‘#+CALL:’ lines see *note Evaluating
code blocks::.

   The following will apply the ‘:exports results’ header argument to
the evaluation of the ‘#+CALL:’ line.

     #+CALL: factorial(n=5) :exports results

   The following will apply the ‘:session special’ header argument to
the evaluation of the ‘factorial’ code block.

     #+CALL: factorial[:session special](n=5)


File: org.info,  Node: Specific header arguments,  Prev: Using header arguments,  Up: Header arguments

14.8.2 Specific header arguments
--------------------------------

Header arguments consist of an initial colon followed by the name of the
argument in lowercase letters.  The following header arguments are
defined:

* Menu:

* var::                         Pass arguments to code blocks
* results::                     Specify the type of results and how they will
                                be collected and handled
* file::                        Specify a path for file output
* file-desc::                   Specify a description for file results
* dir::                         Specify the default (possibly remote)
                                directory for code block execution
* exports::                     Export code and/or results
* tangle::                      Toggle tangling and specify file name
* mkdirp::                      Toggle creation of parent directories of target
                                files during tangling
* comments::                    Toggle insertion of comments in tangled
                                code files
* padline::                     Control insertion of padding lines in tangled
                                code files
* no-expand::                   Turn off variable assignment and noweb
                                expansion during tangling
* session::                     Preserve the state of code evaluation
* noweb::                       Toggle expansion of noweb references
* noweb-ref::                   Specify block’s noweb reference resolution target
* noweb-sep::                   String used to separate noweb references
* cache::                       Avoid re-evaluating unchanged code blocks
* sep::                         Delimiter for writing tabular results outside Org
* hlines::                      Handle horizontal lines in tables
* colnames::                    Handle column names in tables
* rownames::                    Handle row names in tables
* shebang::                     Make tangled files executable
* tangle-mode::                 Set permission of tangled files
* eval::                        Limit evaluation of specific code blocks
* wrap::                        Mark source block evaluation results
* post::                        Post processing of code block results
* prologue::                    Text to prepend to code block body
* epilogue::                    Text to append to code block body

   Additional header arguments are defined on a language-specific basis,
see *note Languages::.


File: org.info,  Node: var,  Next: results,  Prev: Specific header arguments,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.1 ‘:var’
...............

The ‘:var’ header argument is used to pass arguments to code blocks.
The specifics of how arguments are included in a code block vary by
language; these are addressed in the language-specific documentation.
However, the syntax used to specify arguments is the same across all
languages.  In every case, variables require a default value when they
are declared.

   The values passed to arguments can either be literal values,
references, or Emacs Lisp code (see *note Emacs Lisp evaluation of
variables: var.).  References include anything in the Org mode file that
takes a ‘#+NAME:’ or ‘#+RESULTS:’ line: tables, lists, ‘#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE’
blocks, other code blocks and the results of other code blocks.

   Note: When a reference is made to another code block, the referenced
block will be evaluated unless it has current cached results (see *note
cache::).

   Argument values can be indexed in a manner similar to arrays (see
*note Indexable variable values: var.).

   The following syntax is used to pass arguments to code blocks using
the ‘:var’ header argument.

     :var name=assign

   The argument, ‘assign’, can either be a literal value, such as a
string ‘"string"’ or a number ‘9’, or a reference to a table, a list, a
literal example, another code block (with or without arguments), or the
results of evaluating another code block.

   Here are examples of passing values by reference:

“table”
     an Org mode table named with either a ‘#+NAME:’ line

          #+NAME: example-table
          | 1 |
          | 2 |
          | 3 |
          | 4 |

          #+NAME: table-length
          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var table=example-table
          (length table)
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: table-length
          : 4

“list”
     a simple list named with a ‘#+NAME:’ line (note that nesting is not
     carried through to the source code block)

          #+NAME: example-list
            - simple
              - not
              - nested
            - list

          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=example-list
            (print x)
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS:
          | simple | list |

“code block without arguments”
     a code block name (from the example above), as assigned by
     ‘#+NAME:’, optionally followed by parentheses

          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var length=table-length()
          (* 2 length)
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS:
          : 8

“code block with arguments”
     a code block name, as assigned by ‘#+NAME:’, followed by
     parentheses and optional arguments passed within the parentheses
     following the code block name using standard function call syntax

          #+NAME: double
          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=8
          (* 2 input)
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: double
          : 16

          #+NAME: squared
          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=double(input=1)
          (* input input)
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: squared
          : 4

“literal example”
     a literal example block named with a ‘#+NAME:’ line

          #+NAME: literal-example
          #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE
          A literal example
          on two lines
          #+END_EXAMPLE

          #+NAME: read-literal-example
          #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=literal-example
            (concatenate 'string x " for you.")
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: read-literal-example
          : A literal example
          : on two lines for you.


Indexable variable values
.........................

It is possible to reference portions of variable values by “indexing”
into the variables.  Indexes are 0 based with negative values counting
back from the end.  If an index is separated by ‘,’s then each
subsequent section will index into the next deepest nesting or dimension
of the value.  Note that this indexing occurs _before_ other table
related header arguments like ‘:hlines’, ‘:colnames’ and ‘:rownames’ are
applied.  The following example assigns the last cell of the first row
the table ‘example-table’ to the variable ‘data’:

     #+NAME: example-table
     | 1 | a |
     | 2 | b |
     | 3 | c |
     | 4 | d |

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[0,-1]
       data
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     : a

   Ranges of variable values can be referenced using two integers
separated by a ‘:’, in which case the entire inclusive range is
referenced.  For example the following assigns the middle three rows of
‘example-table’ to ‘data’.

     #+NAME: example-table
     | 1 | a |
     | 2 | b |
     | 3 | c |
     | 4 | d |
     | 5 | 3 |

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[1:3]
       data
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     | 2 | b |
     | 3 | c |
     | 4 | d |

   Additionally, an empty index, or the single character ‘*’, are both
interpreted to mean the entire range and as such are equivalent to
‘0:-1’, as shown in the following example in which the entire first
column is referenced.

     #+NAME: example-table
     | 1 | a |
     | 2 | b |
     | 3 | c |
     | 4 | d |

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[,0]
       data
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |

   It is possible to index into the results of code blocks as well as
tables.  Any number of dimensions can be indexed.  Dimensions are
separated from one another by commas, as shown in the following example.

     #+NAME: 3D
     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
       '(((1  2  3)  (4  5  6)  (7  8  9))
         ((10 11 12) (13 14 15) (16 17 18))
         ((19 20 21) (22 23 24) (25 26 27)))
     #+END_SRC

     #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=3D[1,,1]
       data
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     | 11 | 14 | 17 |

Emacs Lisp evaluation of variables
..................................

Emacs lisp code can be used to initialize variable values.  When a
variable value starts with ‘(’, ‘[’, ‘'’ or ‘`’ it will be evaluated as
Emacs Lisp and the result of the evaluation will be assigned as the
variable value.  The following example demonstrates use of this
evaluation to reliably pass the file-name of the Org mode buffer to a
code block—note that evaluation of header arguments is guaranteed to
take place in the original Org mode file, while there is no such
guarantee for evaluation of the code block body.

     #+BEGIN_SRC sh :var filename=(buffer-file-name) :exports both
       wc -w $filename
     #+END_SRC

   Note that values read from tables and lists will not be evaluated as
Emacs Lisp, as shown in the following example.

     #+NAME: table
     | (a b c) |

     #+HEADERS: :var data=table[0,0]
     #+BEGIN_SRC perl
       $data
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     : (a b c)


File: org.info,  Node: results,  Next: file,  Prev: var,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.2 ‘:results’
...................

There are four classes of ‘:results’ header argument.  Only one option
per class may be supplied per code block.

   • collection header arguments specify how the results should be
     collected from the code block
   • type header arguments specify what type of result the code block
     will return—which has implications for how they will be processed
     before insertion into the Org mode buffer
   • format header arguments specify what type of result the code block
     will return—which has implications for how they will be inserted
     into the Org mode buffer
   • handling header arguments specify how the results of evaluating the
     code block should be handled.

Collection
..........

The following options are mutually exclusive, and specify how the
results should be collected from the code block.

   • ‘value’ This is the default.  The result is the value of the last
     statement in the code block.  This header argument places the
     evaluation in functional mode.  Note that in some languages, e.g.,
     Python, use of this result type requires that a ‘return’ statement
     be included in the body of the source code block.  E.g., ‘:results
     value’.
   • ‘output’ The result is the collection of everything printed to
     STDOUT during the execution of the code block.  This header
     argument places the evaluation in scripting mode.  E.g., ‘:results
     output’.

Type
....

The following options are mutually exclusive and specify what type of
results the code block will return.  By default, results are inserted as
either a table or scalar depending on their value.

   • ‘table’, ‘vector’ The results should be interpreted as an Org mode
     table.  If a single value is returned, it will be converted into a
     table with one row and one column.  E.g., ‘:results value table’.
   • ‘list’ The results should be interpreted as an Org mode list.  If a
     single scalar value is returned it will be converted into a list
     with only one element.
   • ‘scalar’, ‘verbatim’ The results should be interpreted
     literally—they will not be converted into a table.  The results
     will be inserted into the Org mode buffer as quoted text.  E.g.,
     ‘:results value verbatim’.
   • ‘file’ The results will be interpreted as the path to a file, and
     will be inserted into the Org mode buffer as a file link.  E.g.,
     ‘:results value file’.

Format
......

The following options are mutually exclusive and specify what type of
results the code block will return.  By default, results are inserted
according to the type as specified above.

   • ‘raw’ The results are interpreted as raw Org mode code and are
     inserted directly into the buffer.  If the results look like a
     table they will be aligned as such by Org mode.  E.g., ‘:results
     value raw’.
   • ‘org’ The results are will be enclosed in a ‘BEGIN_SRC org’ block.
     They are not comma-escaped by default but they will be if you hit
     ‘TAB’ in the block and/or if you export the file.  E.g., ‘:results
     value org’.
   • ‘html’ Results are assumed to be HTML and will be enclosed in a
     ‘BEGIN_HTML’ block.  E.g., ‘:results value html’.
   • ‘latex’ Results assumed to be LaTeX and are enclosed in a
     ‘BEGIN_LaTeX’ block.  E.g., ‘:results value latex’.
   • ‘code’ Result are assumed to be parsable code and are enclosed in a
     code block.  E.g., ‘:results value code’.
   • ‘pp’ The result is converted to pretty-printed code and is enclosed
     in a code block.  This option currently supports Emacs Lisp,
     Python, and Ruby.  E.g., ‘:results value pp’.
   • ‘drawer’ The result is wrapped in a RESULTS drawer.  This can be
     useful for inserting ‘raw’ or ‘org’ syntax results in such a way
     that their extent is known and they can be automatically removed or
     replaced.

Handling
........

The following results options indicate what happens with the results
once they are collected.

   • ‘silent’ The results will be echoed in the minibuffer but will not
     be inserted into the Org mode buffer.  E.g., ‘:results output
     silent’.
   • ‘replace’ The default value.  Any existing results will be removed,
     and the new results will be inserted into the Org mode buffer in
     their place.  E.g., ‘:results output replace’.
   • ‘append’ If there are pre-existing results of the code block then
     the new results will be appended to the existing results.
     Otherwise the new results will be inserted as with ‘replace’.
   • ‘prepend’ If there are pre-existing results of the code block then
     the new results will be prepended to the existing results.
     Otherwise the new results will be inserted as with ‘replace’.


File: org.info,  Node: file,  Next: file-desc,  Prev: results,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.3 ‘:file’
................

The header argument ‘:file’ is used to specify an external file in which
to save code block results.  After code block evaluation an Org mode
style ‘[[file:]]’ link (see *note Link format::) to the file will be
inserted into the Org mode buffer.  Some languages including R, gnuplot,
dot, and ditaa provide special handling of the ‘:file’ header argument
automatically wrapping the code block body in the boilerplate code
required to save output to the specified file.  This is often useful for
saving graphical output of a code block to the specified file.

   The argument to ‘:file’ should be either a string specifying the path
to a file, or a list of two strings in which case the first element of
the list should be the path to a file and the second a description for
the link.


File: org.info,  Node: file-desc,  Next: dir,  Prev: file,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.4 ‘:file-desc’
.....................

The value of the ‘:file-desc’ header argument is used to provide a
description for file code block results which are inserted as Org mode
links (see *note Link format::).  If the ‘:file-desc’ header argument is
given with no value the link path will be placed in both the “link” and
the “description” portion of the Org mode link.


File: org.info,  Node: dir,  Next: exports,  Prev: file-desc,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.5 ‘:dir’ and remote execution
....................................

While the ‘:file’ header argument can be used to specify the path to the
output file, ‘:dir’ specifies the default directory during code block
execution.  If it is absent, then the directory associated with the
current buffer is used.  In other words, supplying ‘:dir path’
temporarily has the same effect as changing the current directory with
‘M-x cd path RET’, and then not supplying ‘:dir’.  Under the surface,
‘:dir’ simply sets the value of the Emacs variable ‘default-directory’.

   When using ‘:dir’, you should supply a relative path for file output
(e.g., ‘:file myfile.jpg’ or ‘:file results/myfile.jpg’) in which case
that path will be interpreted relative to the default directory.

   In other words, if you want your plot to go into a folder called
‘Work’ in your home directory, you could use

     #+BEGIN_SRC R :file myplot.png :dir ~/Work
     matplot(matrix(rnorm(100), 10), type="l")
     #+END_SRC

Remote execution
................

A directory on a remote machine can be specified using tramp file
syntax, in which case the code will be evaluated on the remote machine.
An example is

     #+BEGIN_SRC R :file plot.png :dir /dand@yakuba.princeton.edu:
     plot(1:10, main=system("hostname", intern=TRUE))
     #+END_SRC

   Text results will be returned to the local Org mode buffer as usual,
and file output will be created on the remote machine with relative
paths interpreted relative to the remote directory.  An Org mode link to
the remote file will be created.

   So, in the above example a plot will be created on the remote
machine, and a link of the following form will be inserted in the org
buffer:

     [[file:/scp:dand@yakuba.princeton.edu:/home/dand/plot.png][plot.png]]

   Most of this functionality follows immediately from the fact that
‘:dir’ sets the value of the Emacs variable ‘default-directory’, thanks
to tramp.  Those using XEmacs, or GNU Emacs prior to version 23 may need
to install tramp separately in order for these features to work
correctly.

Further points
..............

   • If ‘:dir’ is used in conjunction with ‘:session’, although it will
     determine the starting directory for a new session as expected, no
     attempt is currently made to alter the directory associated with an
     existing session.
   • ‘:dir’ should typically not be used to create files during export
     with ‘:exports results’ or ‘:exports both’.  The reason is that, in
     order to retain portability of exported material between machines,
     during export links inserted into the buffer will _not_ be expanded
     against ‘default directory’.  Therefore, if ‘default-directory’ is
     altered using ‘:dir’, it is probable that the file will be created
     in a location to which the link does not point.


File: org.info,  Node: exports,  Next: tangle,  Prev: dir,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.6 ‘:exports’
...................

The ‘:exports’ header argument specifies what should be included in HTML
or LaTeX exports of the Org mode file.

   • ‘code’ The default.  The body of code is included into the exported
     file.  E.g., ‘:exports code’.
   • ‘results’ The result of evaluating the code is included in the
     exported file.  E.g., ‘:exports results’.
   • ‘both’ Both the code and results are included in the exported file.
     E.g., ‘:exports both’.
   • ‘none’ Nothing is included in the exported file.  E.g., ‘:exports
     none’.


File: org.info,  Node: tangle,  Next: mkdirp,  Prev: exports,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.7 ‘:tangle’
..................

The ‘:tangle’ header argument specifies whether or not the code block
should be included in tangled extraction of source code files.

   • ‘tangle’ The code block is exported to a source code file named
     after the full path (including the directory) and file name (w/o
     extension) of the Org mode file.  E.g., ‘:tangle yes’.
   • ‘no’ The default.  The code block is not exported to a source code
     file.  E.g., ‘:tangle no’.
   • other Any other string passed to the ‘:tangle’ header argument is
     interpreted as a path (directory and file name relative to the
     directory of the Org mode file) to which the block will be
     exported.  E.g., ‘:tangle path’.


File: org.info,  Node: mkdirp,  Next: comments,  Prev: tangle,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.8 ‘:mkdirp’
..................

The ‘:mkdirp’ header argument can be used to create parent directories
of tangled files when missing.  This can be set to ‘yes’ to enable
directory creation or to ‘no’ to inhibit directory creation.


File: org.info,  Node: comments,  Next: padline,  Prev: mkdirp,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.9 ‘:comments’
....................

By default code blocks are tangled to source-code files without any
insertion of comments beyond those which may already exist in the body
of the code block.  The ‘:comments’ header argument can be set as
follows to control the insertion of extra comments into the tangled code
file.

   • ‘no’ The default.  No extra comments are inserted during tangling.
   • ‘link’ The code block is wrapped in comments which contain pointers
     back to the original Org file from which the code was tangled.
   • ‘yes’ A synonym for “link” to maintain backwards compatibility.
   • ‘org’ Include text from the Org mode file as a comment.  The text
     is picked from the leading context of the tangled code and is
     limited by the nearest headline or source block as the case may be.
   • ‘both’ Turns on both the “link” and “org” comment options.
   • ‘noweb’ Turns on the “link” comment option, and additionally wraps
     expanded noweb references in the code block body in link comments.


File: org.info,  Node: padline,  Next: no-expand,  Prev: comments,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.10 ‘:padline’
....................

Control in insertion of padding lines around code block bodies in
tangled code files.  The default value is ‘yes’ which results in
insertion of newlines before and after each tangled code block.  The
following arguments are accepted.

   • ‘yes’ Insert newlines before and after each code block body in
     tangled code files.
   • ‘no’ Do not insert any newline padding in tangled output.


File: org.info,  Node: no-expand,  Next: session,  Prev: padline,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.11 ‘:no-expand’
......................

By default, code blocks are expanded with ‘org-babel-expand-src-block’
during tangling.  This has the effect of assigning values to variables
specified with ‘:var’ (see *note var::), and of replacing “noweb”
references (see *note Noweb reference syntax::) with their targets.  The
‘:no-expand’ header argument can be used to turn off this behavior.


File: org.info,  Node: session,  Next: noweb,  Prev: no-expand,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.12 ‘:session’
....................

The ‘:session’ header argument starts a session for an interpreted
language where state is preserved.

   By default, a session is not started.

   A string passed to the ‘:session’ header argument will give the
session a name.  This makes it possible to run concurrent sessions for
each interpreted language.


File: org.info,  Node: noweb,  Next: noweb-ref,  Prev: session,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.13 ‘:noweb’
..................

The ‘:noweb’ header argument controls expansion of “noweb” syntax
references (see *note Noweb reference syntax::) when the code block is
evaluated, tangled, or exported.  The ‘:noweb’ header argument can have
one of the five values: ‘no’, ‘yes’, ‘tangle’, or ‘no-export’
‘strip-export’.

   • ‘no’ The default.  “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the
     code block will not be expanded before the code block is evaluated,
     tangled or exported.
   • ‘yes’ “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the code block will
     be expanded before the code block is evaluated, tangled or
     exported.
   • ‘tangle’ “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the code block
     will be expanded before the code block is tangled.  However,
     “noweb” syntax references will not be expanded when the code block
     is evaluated or exported.
   • ‘no-export’ “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the code block
     will be expanded before the block is evaluated or tangled.
     However, “noweb” syntax references will not be expanded when the
     code block is exported.
   • ‘strip-export’ “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the code
     block will be expanded before the block is evaluated or tangled.
     However, “noweb” syntax references will be removed when the code
     block is exported.
   • ‘eval’ “Noweb” syntax references in the body of the code block will
     only be expanded before the block is evaluated.

Noweb prefix lines
..................

Noweb insertions are now placed behind the line prefix of the
‘<<reference>>’.  This behavior is illustrated in the following example.
Because the ‘<<example>>’ noweb reference appears behind the SQL comment
syntax, each line of the expanded noweb reference will be commented.

   This code block:

     -- <<example>>

   expands to:

     -- this is the
     -- multi-line body of example

   Note that noweb replacement text that does not contain any newlines
will not be affected by this change, so it is still possible to use
inline noweb references.


File: org.info,  Node: noweb-ref,  Next: noweb-sep,  Prev: noweb,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.14 ‘:noweb-ref’
......................

When expanding “noweb” style references the bodies of all code block
with _either_ a block name matching the reference name _or_ a
‘:noweb-ref’ header argument matching the reference name will be
concatenated together to form the replacement text.

   By setting this header argument at the sub-tree or file level, simple
code block concatenation may be achieved.  For example, when tangling
the following Org mode file, the bodies of code blocks will be
concatenated into the resulting pure code file(1).

      #+BEGIN_SRC sh :tangle yes :noweb yes :shebang #!/bin/sh
        <<fullest-disk>>
      #+END_SRC
      * the mount point of the fullest disk
        :PROPERTIES:
        :noweb-ref: fullest-disk
        :END:

      ** query all mounted disks
      #+BEGIN_SRC sh
        df \
      #+END_SRC

      ** strip the header row
      #+BEGIN_SRC sh
        |sed '1d' \
      #+END_SRC

      ** sort by the percent full
      #+BEGIN_SRC sh
        |awk '{print $5 " " $6}'|sort -n |tail -1 \
      #+END_SRC

      ** extract the mount point
      #+BEGIN_SRC sh
        |awk '{print $2}'
      #+END_SRC

   The ‘:noweb-sep’ (see *note noweb-sep::) header argument holds the
string used to separate accumulate noweb references like those above.
By default a newline is used.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) (The example needs property inheritance to be turned on for the
‘noweb-ref’ property, see *note Property inheritance::).


File: org.info,  Node: noweb-sep,  Next: cache,  Prev: noweb-ref,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.15 ‘:noweb-sep’
......................

The ‘:noweb-sep’ header argument holds the string used to separate
accumulate noweb references (see *note noweb-ref::).  By default a
newline is used.


File: org.info,  Node: cache,  Next: sep,  Prev: noweb-sep,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.16 ‘:cache’
..................

The ‘:cache’ header argument controls the use of in-buffer caching of
the results of evaluating code blocks.  It can be used to avoid
re-evaluating unchanged code blocks.  Note that the ‘:cache’ header
argument will not attempt to cache results when the ‘:session’ header
argument is used, because the results of the code block execution may be
stored in the session outside of the Org mode buffer.  The ‘:cache’
header argument can have one of two values: ‘yes’ or ‘no’.

   • ‘no’ The default.  No caching takes place, and the code block will
     be evaluated every time it is called.
   • ‘yes’ Every time the code block is run a SHA1 hash of the code and
     arguments passed to the block will be generated.  This hash is
     packed into the ‘#+RESULTS:’ line and will be checked on subsequent
     executions of the code block.  If the code block has not changed
     since the last time it was evaluated, it will not be re-evaluated.

   Code block caches notice if the value of a variable argument to the
code block has changed.  If this is the case, the cache is invalidated
and the code block is re-run.  In the following example, ‘caller’ will
not be re-run unless the results of ‘random’ have changed since it was
last run.

      #+NAME: random
      #+BEGIN_SRC R :cache yes
      runif(1)
      #+END_SRC

      #+RESULTS[a2a72cd647ad44515fab62e144796432793d68e1]: random
      0.4659510825295

      #+NAME: caller
      #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=random :cache yes
      x
      #+END_SRC

      #+RESULTS[bec9c8724e397d5df3b696502df3ed7892fc4f5f]: caller
      0.254227238707244


File: org.info,  Node: sep,  Next: hlines,  Prev: cache,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.17 ‘:sep’
................

The ‘:sep’ header argument can be used to control the delimiter used
when writing tabular results out to files external to Org mode.  This is
used either when opening tabular results of a code block by calling the
‘org-open-at-point’ function bound to ‘C-c C-o’ on the code block, or
when writing code block results to an external file (see *note file::)
header argument.

   By default, when ‘:sep’ is not specified output tables are tab
delimited.


File: org.info,  Node: hlines,  Next: colnames,  Prev: sep,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.18 ‘:hlines’
...................

Tables are frequently represented with one or more horizontal lines, or
hlines.  The ‘:hlines’ argument to a code block accepts the values ‘yes’
or ‘no’, with a default value of ‘no’.

   • ‘no’ Strips horizontal lines from the input table.  In most
     languages this is the desired effect because an ‘hline’ symbol is
     interpreted as an unbound variable and raises an error.  Setting
     ‘:hlines no’ or relying on the default value yields the following
     results.

          #+NAME: many-cols
          | a | b | c |
          |---+---+---|
          | d | e | f |
          |---+---+---|
          | g | h | i |

          #+NAME: echo-table
          #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols
            return tab
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: echo-table
          | a | b | c |
          | d | e | f |
          | g | h | i |

   • ‘yes’ Leaves hlines in the table.  Setting ‘:hlines yes’ has this
     effect.

          #+NAME: many-cols
          | a | b | c |
          |---+---+---|
          | d | e | f |
          |---+---+---|
          | g | h | i |

          #+NAME: echo-table
          #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols :hlines yes
            return tab
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: echo-table
          | a | b | c |
          |---+---+---|
          | d | e | f |
          |---+---+---|
          | g | h | i |


File: org.info,  Node: colnames,  Next: rownames,  Prev: hlines,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.19 ‘:colnames’
.....................

The ‘:colnames’ header argument accepts the values ‘yes’, ‘no’, or ‘nil’
for unassigned.  The default value is ‘nil’.  Note that the behavior of
the ‘:colnames’ header argument may differ across languages.

   • ‘nil’ If an input table looks like it has column names (because its
     second row is an hline), then the column names will be removed from
     the table before processing, then reapplied to the results.

          #+NAME: less-cols
          | a |
          |---|
          | b |
          | c |

          #+NAME: echo-table-again
          #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=less-cols
            return [[val + '*' for val in row] for row in tab]
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: echo-table-again
          | a  |
          |----|
          | b* |
          | c* |

     Please note that column names are not removed before the table is
     indexed using variable indexing *Note Indexable variable values:
     var.

   • ‘no’ No column name pre-processing takes place

   • ‘yes’ Column names are removed and reapplied as with ‘nil’ even if
     the table does not “look like” it has column names (i.e., the
     second row is not an hline)


File: org.info,  Node: rownames,  Next: shebang,  Prev: colnames,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.20 ‘:rownames’
.....................

The ‘:rownames’ header argument can take on the values ‘yes’ or ‘no’,
with a default value of ‘no’.  Note that Emacs Lisp code blocks ignore
the ‘:rownames’ header argument entirely given the ease with which
tables with row names may be handled directly in Emacs Lisp.

   • ‘no’ No row name pre-processing will take place.

   • ‘yes’ The first column of the table is removed from the table
     before processing, and is then reapplied to the results.

          #+NAME: with-rownames
          | one | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |  5 |
          | two | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 |

          #+NAME: echo-table-once-again
          #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=with-rownames :rownames yes
            return [[val + 10 for val in row] for row in tab]
          #+END_SRC

          #+RESULTS: echo-table-once-again
          | one | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 |
          | two | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |

     Please note that row names are not removed before the table is
     indexed using variable indexing *Note Indexable variable values:
     var.


File: org.info,  Node: shebang,  Next: tangle-mode,  Prev: rownames,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.21 ‘:shebang’
....................

Setting the ‘:shebang’ header argument to a string value (e.g.,
‘:shebang "#!/bin/bash"’) causes the string to be inserted as the first
line of any tangled file holding the code block, and the file
permissions of the tangled file are set to make it executable.


File: org.info,  Node: tangle-mode,  Next: eval,  Prev: shebang,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.22 ‘:tangle-mode’
........................

The ‘tangle-mode’ header argument controls the permission set on tangled
files.  The value of this header argument will be passed to
‘set-file-modes’.  For example, to set a tangled file as read only use
‘:tangle-mode (identity #o444)’, or to set a tangled file as executable
use ‘:tangle-mode (identity #o755)’.  Blocks with ‘shebang’ (*note
shebang::) header arguments will automatically be made executable unless
the ‘tangle-mode’ header argument is also used.  The behavior is
undefined if multiple code blocks with different values for the
‘tangle-mode’ header argument are tangled to the same file.


File: org.info,  Node: eval,  Next: wrap,  Prev: tangle-mode,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.23 ‘:eval’
.................

The ‘:eval’ header argument can be used to limit the evaluation of
specific code blocks.  The ‘:eval’ header argument can be useful for
protecting against the evaluation of dangerous code blocks or to ensure
that evaluation will require a query regardless of the value of the
‘org-confirm-babel-evaluate’ variable.  The possible values of ‘:eval’
and their effects are shown below.

‘never or no’
     The code block will not be evaluated under any circumstances.
‘query’
     Evaluation of the code block will require a query.
‘never-export or no-export’
     The code block will not be evaluated during export but may still be
     called interactively.
‘query-export’
     Evaluation of the code block during export will require a query.

   If this header argument is not set then evaluation is determined by
the value of the ‘org-confirm-babel-evaluate’ variable see *note Code
evaluation security::.


File: org.info,  Node: wrap,  Next: post,  Prev: eval,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.24 ‘:wrap’
.................

The ‘:wrap’ header argument is used to mark the results of source block
evaluation.  The header argument can be passed a string that will be
appended to ‘#+BEGIN_’ and ‘#+END_’, which will then be used to wrap the
results.  If not string is specified then the results will be wrapped in
a ‘#+BEGIN/END_RESULTS’ block.


File: org.info,  Node: post,  Next: prologue,  Prev: wrap,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.25 ‘:post’
.................

The ‘:post’ header argument is used to post-process the results of a
code block execution.  When a post argument is given, the results of the
code block will temporarily be bound to the ‘*this*’ variable.  This
variable may then be included in header argument forms such as those
used in *note var:: header argument specifications allowing passing of
results to other code blocks, or direct execution via Emacs Lisp.

   The following example illustrates the usage of the ‘:post’ header
argument.

     #+name: attr_wrap
     #+begin_src sh :var data="" :var width="\\textwidth" :results output
       echo "#+ATTR_LATEX :width $width"
       echo "$data"
     #+end_src

     #+header: :file /tmp/it.png
     #+begin_src dot :post attr_wrap(width="5cm", data=*this*) :results drawer
       digraph{
               a -> b;
               b -> c;
               c -> a;
       }
     #+end_src

     #+RESULTS:
     :RESULTS:
     #+ATTR_LATEX :width 5cm
     [[file:/tmp/it.png]]
     :END:


File: org.info,  Node: prologue,  Next: epilogue,  Prev: post,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.26 ‘:prologue’
.....................

The value of the ‘prologue’ header argument will be prepended to the
code block body before execution.  For example, ‘:prologue "reset"’ may
be used to reset a gnuplot session before execution of a particular code
block, or the following configuration may be used to do this for all
gnuplot code blocks.  Also see *note epilogue::.

     (add-to-list 'org-babel-default-header-args:gnuplot
                  '((:prologue . "reset")))


File: org.info,  Node: epilogue,  Prev: prologue,  Up: Specific header arguments

14.8.2.27 ‘:epilogue’
.....................

The value of the ‘epilogue’ header argument will be appended to the code
block body before execution.  Also see *note prologue::.


File: org.info,  Node: Results of evaluation,  Next: Noweb reference syntax,  Prev: Header arguments,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.9 Results of evaluation
==========================

The way in which results are handled depends on whether a session is
invoked, as well as on whether ‘:results value’ or ‘:results output’ is
used.  The following table shows the table possibilities.  For a full
listing of the possible results header arguments see *note results::.

                    Non-session              Session
‘:results value’    value of last            value of last expression
                    expression
‘:results output’   contents of STDOUT       concatenation of interpreter
                                             output

   Note: With ‘:results value’, the result in both ‘:session’ and
non-session is returned to Org mode as a table (a one- or
two-dimensional vector of strings or numbers) when appropriate.

14.9.1 Non-session
------------------

14.9.1.1 ‘:results value’
.........................

This is the default.  Internally, the value is obtained by wrapping the
code in a function definition in the external language, and evaluating
that function.  Therefore, code should be written as if it were the body
of such a function.  In particular, note that Python does not
automatically return a value from a function unless a ‘return’ statement
is present, and so a ‘return’ statement will usually be required in
Python.

   This is the only one of the four evaluation contexts in which the
code is automatically wrapped in a function definition.

14.9.1.2 ‘:results output’
..........................

The code is passed to the interpreter as an external process, and the
contents of the standard output stream are returned as text.  (In
certain languages this also contains the error output stream; this is an
area for future work.)

14.9.2 Session
--------------

14.9.2.1 ‘:results value’
.........................

The code is passed to an interpreter running as an interactive Emacs
inferior process.  Only languages which provide tools for interactive
evaluation of code have session support, so some language (e.g., C and
ditaa) do not support the ‘:session’ header argument, and in other
languages (e.g., Python and Haskell) which have limitations on the code
which may be entered into interactive sessions, those limitations apply
to the code in code blocks using the ‘:session’ header argument as well.

   Unless the ‘:results output’ option is supplied (see below) the
result returned is the result of the last evaluation performed by the
interpreter.  (This is obtained in a language-specific manner: the value
of the variable ‘_’ in Python and Ruby, and the value of ‘.Last.value’
in R).

14.9.2.2 ‘:results output’
..........................

The code is passed to the interpreter running as an interactive Emacs
inferior process.  The result returned is the concatenation of the
sequence of (text) output from the interactive interpreter.  Notice that
this is not necessarily the same as what would be sent to ‘STDOUT’ if
the same code were passed to a non-interactive interpreter running as an
external process.  For example, compare the following two blocks:

     #+BEGIN_SRC python :results output
      print "hello"
      2
      print "bye"
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     : hello
     : bye

   In non-session mode, the “2” is not printed and does not appear.

     #+BEGIN_SRC python :results output :session
      print "hello"
      2
      print "bye"
     #+END_SRC

     #+RESULTS:
     : hello
     : 2
     : bye

   But in ‘:session’ mode, the interactive interpreter receives input
“2” and prints out its value, “2”.  (Indeed, the other print statements
are unnecessary here).


File: org.info,  Node: Noweb reference syntax,  Next: Key bindings and useful functions,  Prev: Results of evaluation,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.10 Noweb reference syntax
============================

The “noweb” (see <http://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/>) Literate
Programming system allows named blocks of code to be referenced by using
the familiar Noweb syntax:

     <<code-block-name>>

   When a code block is tangled or evaluated, whether or not “noweb”
references are expanded depends upon the value of the ‘:noweb’ header
argument.  If ‘:noweb yes’, then a Noweb reference is expanded before
evaluation.  If ‘:noweb no’, the default, then the reference is not
expanded before evaluation.  See the *note noweb-ref:: header argument
for a more flexible way to resolve noweb references.

   It is possible to include the _results_ of a code block rather than
the body.  This is done by appending parenthesis to the code block name
which may optionally contain arguments to the code block as shown below.

     <<code-block-name(optional arguments)>>

   Note: the default value, ‘:noweb no’, was chosen to ensure that
correct code is not broken in a language, such as Ruby, where ‘<<arg>>’
is a syntactically valid construct.  If ‘<<arg>>’ is not syntactically
valid in languages that you use, then please consider setting the
default value.

   Note: if noweb tangling is slow in large Org mode files consider
setting the ‘org-babel-use-quick-and-dirty-noweb-expansion’ variable to
‘t’.  This will result in faster noweb reference resolution at the
expense of not correctly resolving inherited values of the ‘:noweb-ref’
header argument.


File: org.info,  Node: Key bindings and useful functions,  Next: Batch execution,  Prev: Noweb reference syntax,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.11 Key bindings and useful functions
=======================================

Many common Org mode key sequences are re-bound depending on the
context.

   Within a code block, the following key bindings are active:

‘C-c C-c’          ‘org-babel-execute-src-block’
‘C-c C-o’          ‘org-babel-open-src-block-result’
‘M-<up>’           ‘org-babel-load-in-session’
‘M-<down>’         ‘org-babel-switch-to-session’

   In an Org mode buffer, the following key bindings are active:

‘C-c C-v p’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-previous-src-block’
C-p’
‘C-c C-v n’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-next-src-block’
C-n’
‘C-c C-v e’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-execute-maybe’
C-e’
‘C-c C-v o’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-open-src-block-result’
C-o’
‘C-c C-v v’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-expand-src-block’
C-v’
‘C-c C-v u’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-goto-src-block-head’
C-u’
‘C-c C-v g’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-goto-named-src-block’
C-g’
‘C-c C-v r’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-goto-named-result’
C-r’
‘C-c C-v b’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-execute-buffer’
C-b’
‘C-c C-v s’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-execute-subtree’
C-s’
‘C-c C-v d’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-demarcate-block’
C-d’
‘C-c C-v t’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-tangle’
C-t’
‘C-c C-v f’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-tangle-file’
C-f’
‘C-c C-v c’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-check-src-block’
C-c’
‘C-c C-v j’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-insert-header-arg’
C-j’
‘C-c C-v l’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-load-in-session’
C-l’
‘C-c C-v i’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-lob-ingest’
C-i’
‘C-c C-v I’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-view-src-block-info’
C-I’
‘C-c C-v z’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-switch-to-session-with-code’
C-z’
‘C-c C-v a’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-sha1-hash’
C-a’
‘C-c C-v h’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-describe-bindings’
C-h’
‘C-c C-v x’   or   ‘C-c C-v      ‘org-babel-do-key-sequence-in-edit-buffer’
C-x’


File: org.info,  Node: Batch execution,  Prev: Key bindings and useful functions,  Up: Working With Source Code

14.12 Batch execution
=====================

It is possible to call functions from the command line.  This shell
script calls ‘org-babel-tangle’ on every one of its arguments.

   Be sure to adjust the paths to fit your system.

     #!/bin/sh
     # -*- mode: shell-script -*-
     #
     # tangle files with org-mode
     #
     DIR=`pwd`
     FILES=""

     # wrap each argument in the code required to call tangle on it
     for i in $@; do
         FILES="$FILES \"$i\""
     done

     emacs -Q --batch \
     --eval "(progn
     (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name \"~/src/org/lisp/\"))
     (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name \"~/src/org/contrib/lisp/\" t))
     (require 'org)(require 'org-exp)(require 'ob)(require 'ob-tangle)
     (mapc (lambda (file)
            (find-file (expand-file-name file \"$DIR\"))
            (org-babel-tangle)
            (kill-buffer)) '($FILES)))" 2>&1 |grep tangled


File: org.info,  Node: Miscellaneous,  Next: Hacking,  Prev: Working With Source Code,  Up: Top

15 Miscellaneous
****************

* Menu:

* Completion::                  M-TAB knows what you need
* Easy Templates::              Quick insertion of structural elements
* Speed keys::                  Electric commands at the beginning of a headline
* Code evaluation security::    Org mode files evaluate inline code
* Customization::               Adapting Org to your taste
* In-buffer settings::          Overview of the #+KEYWORDS
* The very busy C-c C-c key::   When in doubt, press C-c C-c
* Clean view::                  Getting rid of leading stars in the outline
* TTY keys::                    Using Org on a tty
* Interaction::                 Other Emacs packages
* org-crypt::                   Encrypting Org files


File: org.info,  Node: Completion,  Next: Easy Templates,  Prev: Miscellaneous,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.1 Completion
===============

Emacs would not be Emacs without completion, and Org mode uses it
whenever it makes sense.  If you prefer an iswitchb- or ido-like
interface for some of the completion prompts, you can specify your
preference by setting at most one of the variables
‘org-completion-use-iswitchb’ ‘org-completion-use-ido’.

   Org supports in-buffer completion.  This type of completion does not
make use of the minibuffer.  You simply type a few letters into the
buffer and use the key to complete text right there.

‘M-<TAB>’
     Complete word at point
        • At the beginning of a headline, complete TODO keywords.
        • After ‘\’, complete TeX symbols supported by the exporter.
        • After ‘*’, complete headlines in the current buffer so that
          they can be used in search links like ‘[[*find this
          headline]]’.
        • After ‘:’ in a headline, complete tags.  The list of tags is
          taken from the variable ‘org-tag-alist’ (possibly set through
          the ‘#+TAGS’ in-buffer option, *note Setting tags::), or it is
          created dynamically from all tags used in the current buffer.
        • After ‘:’ and not in a headline, complete property keys.  The
          list of keys is constructed dynamically from all keys used in
          the current buffer.
        • After ‘[’, complete link abbreviations (*note Link
          abbreviations::).
        • After ‘#+’, complete the special keywords like ‘TYP_TODO’ or
          ‘OPTIONS’ which set file-specific options for Org mode.  When
          the option keyword is already complete, pressing ‘M-<TAB>’
          again will insert example settings for this keyword.
        • In the line after ‘#+STARTUP: ’, complete startup keywords,
          i.e., valid keys for this line.
        • Elsewhere, complete dictionary words using Ispell.


File: org.info,  Node: Easy Templates,  Next: Speed keys,  Prev: Completion,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.2 Easy Templates
===================

Org mode supports insertion of empty structural elements (like
‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ and ‘#+END_SRC’ pairs) with just a few key strokes.  This
is achieved through a native template expansion mechanism.  Note that
Emacs has several other template mechanisms which could be used in a
similar way, for example ‘yasnippet’.

   To insert a structural element, type a ‘<’, followed by a template
selector and ‘<TAB>’.  Completion takes effect only when the above
keystrokes are typed on a line by itself.

   The following template selectors are currently supported.

‘s’     ‘#+BEGIN_SRC ... #+END_SRC’
‘e’     ‘#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE ... #+END_EXAMPLE’
‘q’     ‘#+BEGIN_QUOTE ... #+END_QUOTE’
‘v’     ‘#+BEGIN_VERSE ... #+END_VERSE’
‘c’     ‘#+BEGIN_CENTER ... #+END_CENTER’
‘l’     ‘#+BEGIN_LaTeX ... #+END_LaTeX’
‘L’     ‘#+LaTeX:’
‘h’     ‘#+BEGIN_HTML ... #+END_HTML’
‘H’     ‘#+HTML:’
‘a’     ‘#+BEGIN_ASCII ... #+END_ASCII’
‘A’     ‘#+ASCII:’
‘i’     ‘#+INDEX:’ line
‘I’     ‘#+INCLUDE:’ line

   For example, on an empty line, typing "<e" and then pressing TAB,
will expand into a complete EXAMPLE template.

   You can install additional templates by customizing the variable
‘org-structure-template-alist’.  See the docstring of the variable for
additional details.


File: org.info,  Node: Speed keys,  Next: Code evaluation security,  Prev: Easy Templates,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.3 Speed keys
===============

Single keys can be made to execute commands when the cursor is at the
beginning of a headline, i.e., before the first star.  Configure the
variable ‘org-use-speed-commands’ to activate this feature.  There is a
pre-defined list of commands, and you can add more such commands using
the variable ‘org-speed-commands-user’.  Speed keys do not only speed up
navigation and other commands, but they also provide an alternative way
to execute commands bound to keys that are not or not easily available
on a TTY, or on a small mobile device with a limited keyboard.

   To see which commands are available, activate the feature and press
‘?’ with the cursor at the beginning of a headline.


File: org.info,  Node: Code evaluation security,  Next: Customization,  Prev: Speed keys,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.4 Code evaluation and security issues
========================================

Org provides tools to work with the code snippets, including evaluating
them.

   Running code on your machine always comes with a security risk.
Badly written or malicious code can be executed on purpose or by
accident.  Org has default settings which will only evaluate such code
if you give explicit permission to do so, and as a casual user of these
features you should leave these precautions intact.

   For people who regularly work with such code, the confirmation
prompts can become annoying, and you might want to turn them off.  This
can be done, but you must be aware of the risks that are involved.

   Code evaluation can happen under the following circumstances:

Source code blocks
     Source code blocks can be evaluated during export, or when pressing
     ‘C-c C-c’ in the block.  The most important thing to realize here
     is that Org mode files which contain code snippets are, in a
     certain sense, like executable files.  So you should accept them
     and load them into Emacs only from trusted sources—just like you
     would do with a program you install on your computer.

     Make sure you know what you are doing before customizing the
     variables which take off the default security brakes.

      -- User Option: org-confirm-babel-evaluate
          When t (the default), the user is asked before every code
          block evaluation.  When ‘nil’, the user is not asked.  When
          set to a function, it is called with two arguments (language
          and body of the code block) and should return t to ask and
          ‘nil’ not to ask.

     For example, here is how to execute "ditaa" code (which is
     considered safe) without asking:

          (defun my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate (lang body)
            (not (string= lang "ditaa")))  ; don't ask for ditaa
          (setq org-confirm-babel-evaluate 'my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate)

Following ‘shell’ and ‘elisp’ links
     Org has two link types that can directly evaluate code (*note
     External links::).  These links can be problematic because the code
     to be evaluated is not visible.

      -- User Option: org-confirm-shell-link-function
          Function to queries user about shell link execution.
      -- User Option: org-confirm-elisp-link-function
          Functions to query user for Emacs Lisp link execution.

Formulas in tables
     Formulas in tables (*note The spreadsheet::) are code that is
     evaluated either by the calc interpreter, or by the Emacs Lisp
     interpreter.


File: org.info,  Node: Customization,  Next: In-buffer settings,  Prev: Code evaluation security,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.5 Customization
==================

There are more than 500 variables that can be used to customize Org.
For the sake of compactness of the manual, I am not describing the
variables here.  A structured overview of customization variables is
available with ‘M-x org-customize RET’.  Or select ‘Browse Org Group’
from the ‘Org->Customization’ menu.  Many settings can also be activated
on a per-file basis, by putting special lines into the buffer (*note
In-buffer settings::).


File: org.info,  Node: In-buffer settings,  Next: The very busy C-c C-c key,  Prev: Customization,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.6 Summary of in-buffer settings
==================================

Org mode uses special lines in the buffer to define settings on a
per-file basis.  These lines start with a ‘#+’ followed by a keyword, a
colon, and then individual words defining a setting.  Several setting
words can be in the same line, but you can also have multiple lines for
the keyword.  While these settings are described throughout the manual,
here is a summary.  After changing any of those lines in the buffer,
press ‘C-c C-c’ with the cursor still in the line to activate the
changes immediately.  Otherwise they become effective only when the file
is visited again in a new Emacs session.

‘#+ARCHIVE: %s_done::’
     This line sets the archive location for the agenda file.  It
     applies for all subsequent lines until the next ‘#+ARCHIVE’ line,
     or the end of the file.  The first such line also applies to any
     entries before it.  The corresponding variable is
     ‘org-archive-location’.
‘#+CATEGORY:’
     This line sets the category for the agenda file.  The category
     applies for all subsequent lines until the next ‘#+CATEGORY’ line,
     or the end of the file.  The first such line also applies to any
     entries before it.
‘#+COLUMNS: %25ITEM ...’
     Set the default format for columns view.  This format applies when
     columns view is invoked in locations where no ‘COLUMNS’ property
     applies.
‘#+CONSTANTS: name1=value1 ...’
     Set file-local values for constants to be used in table formulas.
     This line sets the local variable
     ‘org-table-formula-constants-local’.  The global version of this
     variable is ‘org-table-formula-constants’.
‘#+FILETAGS: :tag1:tag2:tag3:’
     Set tags that can be inherited by any entry in the file, including
     the top-level entries.
‘#+DRAWERS: NAME1 ...’
     Set the file-local set of additional drawers.  The corresponding
     global variable is ‘org-drawers’.
‘#+LINK: linkword replace’
     These lines (several are allowed) specify link abbreviations.
     *Note Link abbreviations::.  The corresponding variable is
     ‘org-link-abbrev-alist’.
‘#+PRIORITIES: highest lowest default’
     This line sets the limits and the default for the priorities.  All
     three must be either letters A–Z or numbers 0–9.  The highest
     priority must have a lower ASCII number than the lowest priority.
‘#+PROPERTY: Property_Name Value’
     This line sets a default inheritance value for entries in the
     current buffer, most useful for specifying the allowed values of a
     property.
‘#+SETUPFILE: file’
     This line defines a file that holds more in-buffer setup.  Normally
     this is entirely ignored.  Only when the buffer is parsed for
     option-setting lines (i.e., when starting Org mode for a file, when
     pressing ‘C-c C-c’ in a settings line, or when exporting), then the
     contents of this file are parsed as if they had been included in
     the buffer.  In particular, the file can be any other Org mode file
     with internal setup.  You can visit the file the cursor is in the
     line with ‘C-c '’.
‘#+STARTUP:’
     This line sets options to be used at startup of Org mode, when an
     Org file is being visited.

     The first set of options deals with the initial visibility of the
     outline tree.  The corresponding variable for global default
     settings is ‘org-startup-folded’, with a default value ‘t’, which
     means ‘overview’.
          overview         top-level headlines only
          content          all headlines
          showall          no folding of any entries
          showeverything   show even drawer contents

     Dynamic virtual indentation is controlled by the variable
     ‘org-startup-indented’(1)
          indent     start with ‘org-indent-mode’ turned on
          noindent   start with ‘org-indent-mode’ turned off

     Then there are options for aligning tables upon visiting a file.
     This is useful in files containing narrowed table columns.  The
     corresponding variable is ‘org-startup-align-all-tables’, with a
     default value ‘nil’.
          align      align all tables
          noalign    don’t align tables on startup

     When visiting a file, inline images can be automatically displayed.
     The corresponding variable is ‘org-startup-with-inline-images’,
     with a default value ‘nil’ to avoid delays when visiting a file.
          inlineimages   show inline images
          noinlineimages don’t show inline images on startup

     When visiting a file, LaTeX fragments can be converted to images
     automatically.  The variable ‘org-startup-with-latex-preview’ which
     controls this behavior, is set to ‘nil’ by default to avoid delays
     on startup.
          latexpreview   preview LaTeX fragments
          nolatexpreview don’t preview LaTeX fragments

     Logging the closing and reopening of TODO items and clock intervals
     can be configured using these options (see variables
     ‘org-log-done’, ‘org-log-note-clock-out’ and ‘org-log-repeat’)
          logdone             record a timestamp when an item is marked DONE
          lognotedone         record timestamp and a note when DONE
          nologdone           don’t record when items are marked DONE
          logrepeat           record a time when reinstating a repeating item
          lognoterepeat       record a note when reinstating a repeating item
          nologrepeat         do not record when reinstating repeating item
          lognoteclock-out    record a note when clocking out
          nolognoteclock-out  don’t record a note when clocking out
          logreschedule       record a timestamp when scheduling time changes
          lognotereschedule   record a note when scheduling time changes
          nologreschedule     do not record when a scheduling date changes
          logredeadline       record a timestamp when deadline changes
          lognoteredeadline   record a note when deadline changes
          nologredeadline     do not record when a deadline date changes
          logrefile           record a timestamp when refiling
          lognoterefile       record a note when refiling
          nologrefile         do not record when refiling
          logdrawer           store log into drawer
          nologdrawer         store log outside of drawer
          logstatesreversed   reverse the order of states notes
          nologstatesreversed do not reverse the order of states notes

     Here are the options for hiding leading stars in outline headings,
     and for indenting outlines.  The corresponding variables are
     ‘org-hide-leading-stars’ and ‘org-odd-levels-only’, both with a
     default setting ‘nil’ (meaning ‘showstars’ and ‘oddeven’).
          hidestars  make all but one of the stars starting a headline invisible.
          showstars  show all stars starting a headline
          indent     virtual indentation according to outline level
          noindent   no virtual indentation according to outline level
          odd        allow only odd outline levels (1,3,...)
          oddeven    allow all outline levels

     To turn on custom format overlays over timestamps (variables
     ‘org-put-time-stamp-overlays’ and
     ‘org-time-stamp-overlay-formats’), use
          customtime overlay custom time format

     The following options influence the table spreadsheet (variable
     ‘constants-unit-system’).
          constcgs   ‘constants.el’ should use the c-g-s unit system
          constSI    ‘constants.el’ should use the SI unit system

     To influence footnote settings, use the following keywords.  The
     corresponding variables are ‘org-footnote-define-inline’,
     ‘org-footnote-auto-label’, and ‘org-footnote-auto-adjust’.
          fninline    define footnotes inline
          fnnoinline  define footnotes in separate section
          fnlocal     define footnotes near first reference, but not inline
          fnprompt    prompt for footnote labels
          fnauto      create ‘[fn:1]’-like labels automatically (default)
          fnconfirm   offer automatic label for editing or confirmation
          fnplain     create ‘[1]’-like labels automatically
          fnadjust    automatically renumber and sort footnotes
          nofnadjust  do not renumber and sort automatically

     To hide blocks on startup, use these keywords.  The corresponding
     variable is ‘org-hide-block-startup’.
          hideblocks   Hide all begin/end blocks on startup
          nohideblocks Do not hide blocks on startup

     The display of entities as UTF-8 characters is governed by the
     variable ‘org-pretty-entities’ and the keywords
          entitiespretty  Show entities as UTF-8 characters where possible
          entitiesplain   Leave entities plain

‘#+TAGS: TAG1(c1) TAG2(c2)’
     These lines (several such lines are allowed) specify the valid tags
     in this file, and (potentially) the corresponding _fast tag
     selection_ keys.  The corresponding variable is ‘org-tag-alist’.
‘#+TBLFM:’
     This line contains the formulas for the table directly above the
     line.

     Table can have multiple lines containing ‘#+TBLFM:’.  Note that
     only the first line of ‘#+TBLFM:’ will be applied when you
     recalculate the table.  For more details see *note Using multiple
     #+TBLFM lines:: in *note Editing and debugging formulas::.

‘#+TITLE:, #+AUTHOR:, #+EMAIL:, #+LANGUAGE:, #+DATE:,’
‘#+OPTIONS:, #+BIND:,’
‘#+DESCRIPTION:, #+KEYWORDS:,’
‘#+LaTeX_HEADER:, #+LaTeX_HEADER_EXTRA:,’
‘#+HTML_HEAD:, #+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA:, #+HTML_LINK_UP:, #+HTML_LINK_HOME:,’
‘#+SELECT_TAGS:, #+EXCLUDE_TAGS:’
     These lines provide settings for exporting files.  For more details
     see *note Export settings::.
‘#+TODO: #+SEQ_TODO: #+TYP_TODO:’
     These lines set the TODO keywords and their interpretation in the
     current file.  The corresponding variable is ‘org-todo-keywords’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Emacs 23 and Org mode 6.29 are required


File: org.info,  Node: The very busy C-c C-c key,  Next: Clean view,  Prev: In-buffer settings,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.7 The very busy C-c C-c key
==============================

The key ‘C-c C-c’ has many purposes in Org, which are all mentioned
scattered throughout this manual.  One specific function of this key is
to add _tags_ to a headline (*note Tags::).  In many other circumstances
it means something like _“Hey Org, look here and update according to
what you see here”_.  Here is a summary of what this means in different
contexts.

   − If there are highlights in the buffer from the creation of a sparse
     tree, or from clock display, remove these highlights.
   − If the cursor is in one of the special ‘#+KEYWORD’ lines, this
     triggers scanning the buffer for these lines and updating the
     information.
   − If the cursor is inside a table, realign the table.  This command
     works even if the automatic table editor has been turned off.
   − If the cursor is on a ‘#+TBLFM’ line, re-apply the formulas to the
     entire table.
   − If the current buffer is a capture buffer, close the note and file
     it.  With a prefix argument, file it, without further interaction,
     to the default location.
   − If the cursor is on a ‘<<<target>>>’, update radio targets and
     corresponding links in this buffer.
   − If the cursor is in a property line or at the start or end of a
     property drawer, offer property commands.
   − If the cursor is at a footnote reference, go to the corresponding
     definition, and _vice versa_.
   − If the cursor is on a statistics cookie, update it.
   − If the cursor is in a plain list item with a checkbox, toggle the
     status of the checkbox.
   − If the cursor is on a numbered item in a plain list, renumber the
     ordered list.
   − If the cursor is on the ‘#+BEGIN’ line of a dynamic block, the
     block is updated.
   − If the cursor is at a timestamp, fix the day name in the timestamp.


File: org.info,  Node: Clean view,  Next: TTY keys,  Prev: The very busy C-c C-c key,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.8 A cleaner outline view
===========================

Some people find it noisy and distracting that the Org headlines start
with a potentially large number of stars, and that text below the
headlines is not indented.  While this is no problem when writing a
_book-like_ document where the outline headings are really section
headings, in a more _list-oriented_ outline, indented structure is a lot
cleaner:

     * Top level headline             |    * Top level headline
     ** Second level                  |      * Second level
     *** 3rd level                    |        * 3rd level
     some text                        |          some text
     *** 3rd level                    |        * 3rd level
     more text                        |          more text
     * Another top level headline     |    * Another top level headline

   If you are using at least Emacs 23.2(1) and version 6.29 of Org, this
kind of view can be achieved dynamically at display time using
‘org-indent-mode’.  In this minor mode, all lines are prefixed for
display with the necessary amount of space(2).  Also headlines are
prefixed with additional stars, so that the amount of indentation shifts
by two(3) spaces per level.  All headline stars but the last one are
made invisible using the ‘org-hide’ face(4); see below under ‘2.’ for
more information on how this works.  You can turn on ‘org-indent-mode’
for all files by customizing the variable ‘org-startup-indented’, or you
can turn it on for individual files using

     #+STARTUP: indent

   If you want a similar effect in an earlier version of Emacs and/or
Org, or if you want the indentation to be hard space characters so that
the plain text file looks as similar as possible to the Emacs display,
Org supports you in the following way:

  1. _Indentation of text below headlines_
     You may indent text below each headline to make the left boundary
     line up with the headline, like

          *** 3rd level
              more text, now indented

     Org supports this with paragraph filling, line wrapping, and
     structure editing(5), preserving or adapting the indentation as
     appropriate.

  2. _Hiding leading stars_
     You can modify the display in such a way that all leading stars
     become invisible.  To do this in a global way, configure the
     variable ‘org-hide-leading-stars’ or change this on a per-file
     basis with

          #+STARTUP: hidestars
          #+STARTUP: showstars

     With hidden stars, the tree becomes:

          * Top level headline
           * Second level
            * 3rd level
            ...

     The leading stars are not truly replaced by whitespace, they are
     only fontified with the face ‘org-hide’ that uses the background
     color as font color.  If you are not using either white or black
     background, you may have to customize this face to get the wanted
     effect.  Another possibility is to set this font such that the
     extra stars are almost invisible, for example using the color
     ‘grey90’ on a white background.

  3. Things become cleaner still if you skip all the even levels and use
     only odd levels 1, 3, 5..., effectively adding two stars to go from
     one outline level to the next(6).  In this way we get the outline
     view shown at the beginning of this section.  In order to make the
     structure editing and export commands handle this convention
     correctly, configure the variable ‘org-odd-levels-only’, or set
     this on a per-file basis with one of the following lines:

          #+STARTUP: odd
          #+STARTUP: oddeven

     You can convert an Org file from single-star-per-level to the
     double-star-per-level convention with ‘M-x
     org-convert-to-odd-levels RET’ in that file.  The reverse operation
     is ‘M-x org-convert-to-oddeven-levels’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Emacs 23.1 can actually crash with ‘org-indent-mode’

   (2) ‘org-indent-mode’ also sets the ‘wrap-prefix’ property, such that
‘visual-line-mode’ (or purely setting ‘word-wrap’) wraps long lines
(including headlines) correctly indented.

   (3) See the variable ‘org-indent-indentation-per-level’.

   (4) Turning on ‘org-indent-mode’ sets ‘org-hide-leading-stars’ to ‘t’
and ‘org-adapt-indentation’ to ‘nil’.

   (5) See also the variable ‘org-adapt-indentation’.

   (6) When you need to specify a level for a property search or refile
targets, ‘LEVEL=2’ will correspond to 3 stars, etc.


File: org.info,  Node: TTY keys,  Next: Interaction,  Prev: Clean view,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.9 Using Org on a tty
=======================

Because Org contains a large number of commands, by default many of
Org’s core commands are bound to keys that are generally not accessible
on a tty, such as the cursor keys (<left>, <right>, <up>, <down>), <TAB>
and <RET>, in particular when used together with modifiers like <Meta>
and/or <Shift>.  To access these commands on a tty when special keys are
unavailable, the following alternative bindings can be used.  The tty
bindings below will likely be more cumbersome; you may find for some of
the bindings below that a customized workaround suits you better.  For
example, changing a timestamp is really only fun with ‘S-<cursor>’ keys,
whereas on a tty you would rather use ‘C-c .’ to re-insert the
timestamp.

Default     Alternative    Speed   Alternative
            1              key     2
‘S-<TAB>’   ‘C-u <TAB>’    ‘C’
‘M-<left>’  ‘C-c C-x l’    ‘l’     ‘<Esc>
                                   <left>’
‘M-S-<left>’‘C-c C-x L’    ‘L’
‘M-<right>’ ‘C-c C-x r’    ‘r’     ‘<Esc>
                                   <right>’
‘M-S-<right>’‘C-c C-x R’   ‘R’
‘M-<up>’    ‘C-c C-x u’    ‘ ’     ‘<Esc> <up>’
‘M-S-<up>’  ‘C-c C-x U’    ‘U’
‘M-<down>’  ‘C-c C-x d’    ‘ ’     ‘<Esc>
                                   <down>’
‘M-S-<down>’‘C-c C-x D’    ‘D’
‘S-<RET>’   ‘C-c C-x c’    ‘ ’
‘M-<RET>’   ‘C-c C-x m’    ‘ ’     ‘<Esc>
                                   <RET>’
‘M-S-<RET>’ ‘C-c C-x M’    ‘ ’
‘S-<left>’  ‘C-c <left>’   ‘ ’
‘S-<right>’ ‘C-c           ‘ ’
            <right>’
‘S-<up>’    ‘C-c <up>’     ‘ ’
‘S-<down>’  ‘C-c <down>’   ‘ ’
‘C-S-<left>’‘C-c C-x       ‘ ’
            <left>’
‘C-S-<right>’‘C-c C-x      ‘ ’
            <right>’


File: org.info,  Node: Interaction,  Next: org-crypt,  Prev: TTY keys,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.10 Interaction with other packages
=====================================

Org lives in the world of GNU Emacs and interacts in various ways with
other code out there.

* Menu:

* Cooperation::                 Packages Org cooperates with
* Conflicts::                   Packages that lead to conflicts


File: org.info,  Node: Cooperation,  Next: Conflicts,  Prev: Interaction,  Up: Interaction

15.10.1 Packages that Org cooperates with
-----------------------------------------

‘calc.el’ by Dave Gillespie
     Org uses the Calc package for implementing spreadsheet
     functionality in its tables (*note The spreadsheet::).  Org checks
     for the availability of Calc by looking for the function
     ‘calc-eval’ which will have been autoloaded during setup if Calc
     has been installed properly.  As of Emacs 22, Calc is part of the
     Emacs distribution.  Another possibility for interaction between
     the two packages is using Calc for embedded calculations.  *Note
     Embedded Mode: (calc)Embedded Mode.
‘constants.el’ by Carsten Dominik
     In a table formula (*note The spreadsheet::), it is possible to use
     names for natural constants or units.  Instead of defining your own
     constants in the variable ‘org-table-formula-constants’, install
     the ‘constants’ package which defines a large number of constants
     and units, and lets you use unit prefixes like ‘M’ for ‘Mega’, etc.
     You will need version 2.0 of this package, available at
     <http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools>.  Org checks for the
     function ‘constants-get’, which has to be autoloaded in your setup.
     See the installation instructions in the file ‘constants.el’.
‘cdlatex.el’ by Carsten Dominik
     Org mode can make use of the CDLaTeX package to efficiently enter
     LaTeX fragments into Org files.  See *note CDLaTeX mode::.
‘imenu.el’ by Ake Stenhoff and Lars Lindberg
     Imenu allows menu access to an index of items in a file.  Org mode
     supports Imenu—all you need to do to get the index is the
     following:
          (add-hook 'org-mode-hook
                    (lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Imenu")))
     By default the index is two levels deep—you can modify the depth
     using the option ‘org-imenu-depth’.
‘remember.el’ by John Wiegley
     Org used to use this package for capture, but no longer does.
‘speedbar.el’ by Eric M. Ludlam
     Speedbar is a package that creates a special frame displaying files
     and index items in files.  Org mode supports Speedbar and allows
     you to drill into Org files directly from the Speedbar.  It also
     allows you to restrict the scope of agenda commands to a file or a
     subtree by using the command ‘<’ in the Speedbar frame.
‘table.el’ by Takaaki Ota

     Complex ASCII tables with automatic line wrapping, column- and
     row-spanning, and alignment can be created using the Emacs table
     package by Takaaki Ota (<http://sourceforge.net/projects/table>,
     and also part of Emacs 22).  Org mode will recognize these tables
     and export them properly.  Because of interference with other Org
     mode functionality, you unfortunately cannot edit these tables
     directly in the buffer.  Instead, you need to use the command ‘C-c
     '’ to edit them, similar to source code snippets.

     ‘C-c '     (org-edit-special)’
          Edit a ‘table.el’ table.  Works when the cursor is in a
          table.el table.
     ‘C-c ~     (org-table-create-with-table.el)’
          Insert a ‘table.el’ table.  If there is already a table at
          point, this command converts it between the ‘table.el’ format
          and the Org mode format.  See the documentation string of the
          command ‘org-convert-table’ for the restrictions under which
          this is possible.
     ‘table.el’ is part of Emacs since Emacs 22.
‘footnote.el’ by Steven L. Baur
     Org mode recognizes numerical footnotes as provided by this
     package.  However, Org mode also has its own footnote support
     (*note Footnotes::), which makes using ‘footnote.el’ unnecessary.


File: org.info,  Node: Conflicts,  Prev: Cooperation,  Up: Interaction

15.10.2 Packages that lead to conflicts with Org mode
-----------------------------------------------------

     In Emacs 23, ‘shift-selection-mode’ is on by default, meaning that
     cursor motions combined with the shift key should start or enlarge
     regions.  This conflicts with the use of ‘S-<cursor>’ commands in
     Org to change timestamps, TODO keywords, priorities, and item
     bullet types if the cursor is at such a location.  By default,
     ‘S-<cursor>’ commands outside special contexts don’t do anything,
     but you can customize the variable ‘org-support-shift-select’.  Org
     mode then tries to accommodate shift selection by (i) using it
     outside of the special contexts where special commands apply, and
     by (ii) extending an existing active region even if the cursor
     moves across a special context.

‘CUA.el’ by Kim. F. Storm
     Key bindings in Org conflict with the ‘S-<cursor>’ keys used by CUA
     mode (as well as ‘pc-select-mode’ and ‘s-region-mode’) to select
     and extend the region.  In fact, Emacs 23 has this built-in in the
     form of ‘shift-selection-mode’, see previous paragraph.  If you are
     using Emacs 23, you probably don’t want to use another package for
     this purpose.  However, if you prefer to leave these keys to a
     different package while working in Org mode, configure the variable
     ‘org-replace-disputed-keys’.  When set, Org will move the following
     key bindings in Org files, and in the agenda buffer (but not during
     date selection).

          S-UP      ⇒  M-p             S-DOWN     ⇒  M-n
          S-LEFT    ⇒  M--             S-RIGHT    ⇒  M-+
          C-S-LEFT  ⇒  M-S--           C-S-RIGHT  ⇒  M-S-+

     Yes, these are unfortunately more difficult to remember.  If you
     want to have other replacement keys, look at the variable
     ‘org-disputed-keys’.

‘ecomplete.el’ by Lars Magne Ingebrigtsen <larsi@gnus.org>

     Ecomplete provides “electric” address completion in address header
     lines in message buffers.  Sadly Orgtbl mode cuts ecompletes power
     supply: No completion happens when Orgtbl mode is enabled in
     message buffers while entering text in address header lines.  If
     one wants to use ecomplete one should _not_ follow the advice to
     automagically turn on Orgtbl mode in message buffers (see *note
     Orgtbl mode::), but instead—after filling in the message
     headers—turn on Orgtbl mode manually when needed in the messages
     body.

‘filladapt.el’ by Kyle Jones

     Org mode tries to do the right thing when filling paragraphs, list
     items and other elements.  Many users reported they had problems
     using both ‘filladapt.el’ and Org mode, so a safe thing to do is to
     disable it like this:

          (add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-off-filladapt-mode)

‘yasnippet.el’
     The way Org mode binds the <TAB> key (binding to ‘[tab]’ instead of
     ‘"\t"’) overrules YASnippet’s access to this key.  The following
     code fixed this problem:

          (add-hook 'org-mode-hook
                    (lambda ()
                      (org-set-local 'yas/trigger-key [tab])
                      (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field-or-maybe-expand)))

     The latest version of yasnippet doesn’t play well with Org mode.
     If the above code does not fix the conflict, start by defining the
     following function:

          (defun yas/org-very-safe-expand ()
            (let ((yas/fallback-behavior 'return-nil)) (yas/expand)))

     Then, tell Org mode what to do with the new function:

          (add-hook 'org-mode-hook
                    (lambda ()
                      (make-variable-buffer-local 'yas/trigger-key)
                      (setq yas/trigger-key [tab])
                      (add-to-list 'org-tab-first-hook 'yas/org-very-safe-expand)
                      (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field)))

‘windmove.el’ by Hovav Shacham
     This package also uses the ‘S-<cursor>’ keys, so everything written
     in the paragraph above about CUA mode also applies here.  If you
     want make the windmove function active in locations where Org mode
     does not have special functionality on ‘S-<cursor>’, add this to
     your configuration:

          ;; Make windmove work in org-mode:
          (add-hook 'org-shiftup-final-hook 'windmove-up)
          (add-hook 'org-shiftleft-final-hook 'windmove-left)
          (add-hook 'org-shiftdown-final-hook 'windmove-down)
          (add-hook 'org-shiftright-final-hook 'windmove-right)

‘viper.el’ by Michael Kifer
     Viper uses ‘C-c /’ and therefore makes this key not access the
     corresponding Org mode command ‘org-sparse-tree’.  You need to find
     another key for this command, or override the key in
     ‘viper-vi-global-user-map’ with

          (define-key viper-vi-global-user-map "C-c /" 'org-sparse-tree)


File: org.info,  Node: org-crypt,  Prev: Interaction,  Up: Miscellaneous

15.11 org-crypt.el
==================

Org-crypt will encrypt the text of an entry, but not the headline, or
properties.  Org-crypt uses the Emacs EasyPG library to encrypt and
decrypt files.

   Any text below a headline that has a ‘:crypt:’ tag will be
automatically be encrypted when the file is saved.  If you want to use a
different tag just customize the ‘org-crypt-tag-matcher’ setting.

   To use org-crypt it is suggested that you have the following in your
‘.emacs’:

     (require 'org-crypt)
     (org-crypt-use-before-save-magic)
     (setq org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance (quote ("crypt")))

     (setq org-crypt-key nil)
       ;; GPG key to use for encryption
       ;; Either the Key ID or set to nil to use symmetric encryption.

     (setq auto-save-default nil)
       ;; Auto-saving does not cooperate with org-crypt.el: so you need
       ;; to turn it off if you plan to use org-crypt.el quite often.
       ;; Otherwise, you'll get an (annoying) message each time you
       ;; start Org.

       ;; To turn it off only locally, you can insert this:
       ;;
       ;; # -*- buffer-auto-save-file-name: nil; -*-

   Excluding the crypt tag from inheritance prevents already encrypted
text being encrypted again.


File: org.info,  Node: Hacking,  Next: MobileOrg,  Prev: Miscellaneous,  Up: Top

Appendix A Hacking
******************

This appendix covers some aspects where users can extend the
functionality of Org.

* Menu:

* Hooks::                       How to reach into Org’s internals
* Add-on packages::             Available extensions
* Adding hyperlink types::      New custom link types
* Adding export back-ends::     How to write new export back-ends
* Context-sensitive commands::  How to add functionality to such commands
* Tables in arbitrary syntax::  Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs
* Dynamic blocks::              Automatically filled blocks
* Special agenda views::        Customized views
* Speeding up your agendas::    Tips on how to speed up your agendas
* Extracting agenda information::  Post-processing of agenda information
* Using the property API::      Writing programs that use entry properties
* Using the mapping API::       Mapping over all or selected entries


File: org.info,  Node: Hooks,  Next: Add-on packages,  Prev: Hacking,  Up: Hacking

A.1 Hooks
=========

Org has a large number of hook variables that can be used to add
functionality.  This appendix about hacking is going to illustrate the
use of some of them.  A complete list of all hooks with documentation is
maintained by the Worg project and can be found at
<http://orgmode.org/worg/org-configs/org-hooks.php>.


File: org.info,  Node: Add-on packages,  Next: Adding hyperlink types,  Prev: Hooks,  Up: Hacking

A.2 Add-on packages
===================

A large number of add-on packages have been written by various authors.

   These packages are not part of Emacs, but they are distributed as
contributed packages with the separate release available at
<http://orgmode.org>.  See the ‘contrib/README’ file in the source code
directory for a list of contributed files.  You may also find some more
information on the Worg page: <http://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/>.


File: org.info,  Node: Adding hyperlink types,  Next: Adding export back-ends,  Prev: Add-on packages,  Up: Hacking

A.3 Adding hyperlink types
==========================

Org has a large number of hyperlink types built-in (*note Hyperlinks::).
If you would like to add new link types, Org provides an interface for
doing so.  Let’s look at an example file, ‘org-man.el’, that will add
support for creating links like ‘[[man:printf][The printf manpage]]’ to
show Unix manual pages inside Emacs:

     ;;; org-man.el - Support for links to manpages in Org

     (require 'org)

     (org-add-link-type "man" 'org-man-open)
     (add-hook 'org-store-link-functions 'org-man-store-link)

     (defcustom org-man-command 'man
       "The Emacs command to be used to display a man page."
       :group 'org-link
       :type '(choice (const man) (const woman)))

     (defun org-man-open (path)
       "Visit the manpage on PATH.
     PATH should be a topic that can be thrown at the man command."
       (funcall org-man-command path))

     (defun org-man-store-link ()
       "Store a link to a manpage."
       (when (memq major-mode '(Man-mode woman-mode))
         ;; This is a man page, we do make this link
         (let* ((page (org-man-get-page-name))
                (link (concat "man:" page))
                (description (format "Manpage for %s" page)))
           (org-store-link-props
            :type "man"
            :link link
            :description description))))

     (defun org-man-get-page-name ()
       "Extract the page name from the buffer name."
       ;; This works for both `Man-mode' and `woman-mode'.
       (if (string-match " \\(\\S-+\\)\\*" (buffer-name))
           (match-string 1 (buffer-name))
         (error "Cannot create link to this man page")))

     (provide 'org-man)

     ;;; org-man.el ends here

You would activate this new link type in ‘.emacs’ with

     (require 'org-man)

Let’s go through the file and see what it does.
  1. It does ‘(require 'org)’ to make sure that ‘org.el’ has been
     loaded.
  2. The next line calls ‘org-add-link-type’ to define a new link type
     with prefix ‘man’.  The call also contains the name of a function
     that will be called to follow such a link.
  3. The next line adds a function to ‘org-store-link-functions’, in
     order to allow the command ‘C-c l’ to record a useful link in a
     buffer displaying a man page.

   The rest of the file defines the necessary variables and functions.
First there is a customization variable that determines which Emacs
command should be used to display man pages.  There are two options,
‘man’ and ‘woman’.  Then the function to follow a link is defined.  It
gets the link path as an argument—in this case the link path is just a
topic for the manual command.  The function calls the value of
‘org-man-command’ to display the man page.

   Finally the function ‘org-man-store-link’ is defined.  When you try
to store a link with ‘C-c l’, this function will be called to try to
make a link.  The function must first decide if it is supposed to create
the link for this buffer type; we do this by checking the value of the
variable ‘major-mode’.  If not, the function must exit and return the
value ‘nil’.  If yes, the link is created by getting the manual topic
from the buffer name and prefixing it with the string ‘man:’.  Then it
must call the command ‘org-store-link-props’ and set the ‘:type’ and
‘:link’ properties.  Optionally you can also set the ‘:description’
property to provide a default for the link description when the link is
later inserted into an Org buffer with ‘C-c C-l’.

   When it makes sense for your new link type, you may also define a
function ‘org-PREFIX-complete-link’ that implements special (e.g.,
completion) support for inserting such a link with ‘C-c C-l’.  Such a
function should not accept any arguments, and return the full link with
prefix.


File: org.info,  Node: Adding export back-ends,  Next: Context-sensitive commands,  Prev: Adding hyperlink types,  Up: Hacking

A.4 Adding export back-ends
===========================

Org 8.0 comes with a completely rewritten export engine which makes it
easy to write new export back-ends, either from scratch, or from
deriving them from existing ones.

   Your two entry points are respectively ‘org-export-define-backend’
and ‘org-export-define-derived-backend’.  To grok these functions, you
should first have a look at ‘ox-latex.el’ (for how to define a new
back-end from scratch) and ‘ox-beamer.el’ (for how to derive a new
back-end from an existing one.

   When creating a new back-end from scratch, the basic idea is to set
the name of the back-end (as a symbol) and an an alist of elements and
export functions.  On top of this, you will need to set additional
keywords like ‘:menu-entry’ (to display the back-end in the export
dispatcher), ‘:export-block’ (to specify what blocks should not be
exported by this back-end), and ‘:options-alist’ (to let the user set
export options that are specific to this back-end.)

   Deriving a new back-end is similar, except that you need to set
‘:translate-alist’ to an alist of export functions that should be used
instead of the parent back-end functions.

   For a complete reference documentation, see the Org Export Reference
on Worg (http://orgmode.org/worg/dev/org-export-reference.html).


File: org.info,  Node: Context-sensitive commands,  Next: Tables in arbitrary syntax,  Prev: Adding export back-ends,  Up: Hacking

A.5 Context-sensitive commands
==============================

Org has several commands that act differently depending on context.  The
most important example is the ‘C-c C-c’ (*note The very busy C-c C-c
key::).  Also the ‘M-cursor’ and ‘M-S-cursor’ keys have this property.

   Add-ons can tap into this functionality by providing a function that
detects special context for that add-on and executes functionality
appropriate for the context.  Here is an example from Dan Davison’s
‘org-R.el’ which allows you to evaluate commands based on the ‘R’
programming language (1).  For this package, special contexts are lines
that start with ‘#+R:’ or ‘#+RR:’.

     (defun org-R-apply-maybe ()
       "Detect if this is context for org-R and execute R commands."
       (if (save-excursion
             (beginning-of-line 1)
             (looking-at "#\\+RR?:"))
           (progn (call-interactively 'org-R-apply)
                  t) ;; to signal that we took action
         nil)) ;; to signal that we did not

     (add-hook 'org-ctrl-c-ctrl-c-hook 'org-R-apply-maybe)

   The function first checks if the cursor is in such a line.  If that
is the case, ‘org-R-apply’ is called and the function returns ‘t’ to
signal that action was taken, and ‘C-c C-c’ will stop looking for other
contexts.  If the function finds it should do nothing locally, it
returns ‘nil’ so that other, similar functions can have a try.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) ‘org-R.el’ has been replaced by the Org mode functionality
described in *note Working With Source Code:: and is now obsolete.


File: org.info,  Node: Tables in arbitrary syntax,  Next: Dynamic blocks,  Prev: Context-sensitive commands,  Up: Hacking

A.6 Tables and lists in arbitrary syntax
========================================

Since Orgtbl mode can be used as a minor mode in arbitrary buffers, a
frequent feature request has been to make it work with native tables in
specific languages, for example LaTeX.  However, this is extremely hard
to do in a general way, would lead to a customization nightmare, and
would take away much of the simplicity of the Orgtbl mode table editor.

   This appendix describes a different approach.  We keep the Orgtbl
mode table in its native format (the source table), and use a custom
function to translate the table to the correct syntax, and to install it
in the right location (the target table).  This puts the burden of
writing conversion functions on the user, but it allows for a very
flexible system.

   Bastien added the ability to do the same with lists, in Orgstruct
mode.  You can use Org’s facilities to edit and structure lists by
turning ‘orgstruct-mode’ on, then locally exporting such lists in
another format (HTML, LaTeX or Texinfo.)

* Menu:

* Radio tables::                Sending and receiving radio tables
* A LaTeX example::          Step by step, almost a tutorial
* Translator functions::        Copy and modify
* Radio lists::                 Sending and receiving lists


File: org.info,  Node: Radio tables,  Next: A LaTeX example,  Prev: Tables in arbitrary syntax,  Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax

A.6.1 Radio tables
------------------

To define the location of the target table, you first need to create two
lines that are comments in the current mode, but contain magic words
‘BEGIN/END RECEIVE ORGTBL’ for Orgtbl mode to find.  Orgtbl mode will
insert the translated table between these lines, replacing whatever was
there before.  For example in C mode where comments are between ‘/* ...
*/’:

     /* BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */
     /* END RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */

Just above the source table, we put a special line that tells Orgtbl
mode how to translate this table and where to install it.  For example:
     #+ORGTBL: SEND table_name translation_function arguments...

‘table_name’ is the reference name for the table that is also used in
the receiver lines.  ‘translation_function’ is the Lisp function that
does the translation.  Furthermore, the line can contain a list of
arguments (alternating key and value) at the end.  The arguments will be
passed as a property list to the translation function for
interpretation.  A few standard parameters are already recognized and
acted upon before the translation function is called:

‘:skip N’
     Skip the first N lines of the table.  Hlines do count as separate
     lines for this parameter!

‘:skipcols (n1 n2 ...)’
     List of columns that should be skipped.  If the table has a column
     with calculation marks, that column is automatically discarded as
     well.  Please note that the translator function sees the table
     _after_ the removal of these columns, the function never knows that
     there have been additional columns.

‘:no-escape t’
     When non-‘nil’, do not escape special characters ‘&%#_^’ when
     exporting the table.  The default value is ‘nil’.

The one problem remaining is how to keep the source table in the buffer
without disturbing the normal workings of the file, for example during
compilation of a C file or processing of a LaTeX file.  There are a
number of different solutions:

   • The table could be placed in a block comment if that is supported
     by the language.  For example, in C mode you could wrap the table
     between ‘/*’ and ‘*/’ lines.
   • Sometimes it is possible to put the table after some kind of END
     statement, for example ‘\bye’ in TeX and ‘\end{document}’ in LaTeX.
   • You can just comment the table line-by-line whenever you want to
     process the file, and uncomment it whenever you need to edit the
     table.  This only sounds tedious—the command ‘M-x
     orgtbl-toggle-comment RET’ makes this comment-toggling very easy,
     in particular if you bind it to a key.


File: org.info,  Node: A LaTeX example,  Next: Translator functions,  Prev: Radio tables,  Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax

A.6.2 A LaTeX example of radio tables
-------------------------------------

The best way to wrap the source table in LaTeX is to use the ‘comment’
environment provided by ‘comment.sty’.  It has to be activated by
placing ‘\usepackage{comment}’ into the document header.  Orgtbl mode
can insert a radio table skeleton(1) with the command ‘M-x
orgtbl-insert-radio-table RET’.  You will be prompted for a table name,
let’s say we use ‘salesfigures’.  You will then get the following
template:

     % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     \begin{comment}
     #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex
     | | |
     \end{comment}

The ‘#+ORGTBL: SEND’ line tells Orgtbl mode to use the function
‘orgtbl-to-latex’ to convert the table into LaTeX and to put it into the
receiver location with name ‘salesfigures’.  You may now fill in the
table—feel free to use the spreadsheet features(2):

     % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     \begin{comment}
     #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex
     | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day |
     |-------+------+---------+---------|
     | Jan   |   23 |      55 |     2.4 |
     | Feb   |   21 |      16 |     0.8 |
     | March |   22 |     278 |    12.6 |
     #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f
     % $ (optional extra dollar to keep font-lock happy, see footnote)
     \end{comment}

When you are done, press ‘C-c C-c’ in the table to get the converted
table inserted between the two marker lines.

   Now let’s assume you want to make the table header by hand, because
you want to control how columns are aligned, etc.  In this case we make
sure that the table translator skips the first 2 lines of the source
table, and tell the command to work as a splice, i.e., to not produce
header and footer commands of the target table:

     \begin{tabular}{lrrr}
     Month & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Days} & Nr.\ sold & per day\\
     % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
     \end{tabular}
     %
     \begin{comment}
     #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex :splice t :skip 2
     | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day |
     |-------+------+---------+---------|
     | Jan   |   23 |      55 |     2.4 |
     | Feb   |   21 |      16 |     0.8 |
     | March |   22 |     278 |    12.6 |
     #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f
     \end{comment}

   The LaTeX translator function ‘orgtbl-to-latex’ is already part of
Orgtbl mode.  It uses a ‘tabular’ environment to typeset the table and
marks horizontal lines with ‘\hline’.  Furthermore, it interprets the
following parameters (see also *note Translator functions::):

‘:splice nil/t’
     When set to t, return only table body lines, don’t wrap them into a
     tabular environment.  Default is ‘nil’.

‘:fmt fmt’
     A format to be used to wrap each field, it should contain ‘%s’ for
     the original field value.  For example, to wrap each field value in
     dollars, you could use ‘:fmt "$%s$"’.  This may also be a property
     list with column numbers and formats, for example ‘:fmt (2 "$%s$" 4
     "%s\\%%")’.  A function of one argument can be used in place of the
     strings; the function must return a formatted string.

‘:efmt efmt’
     Use this format to print numbers with exponentials.  The format
     should have ‘%s’ twice for inserting mantissa and exponent, for
     example ‘"%s\\times10^{%s}"’.  The default is ‘"%s\\,(%s)"’.  This
     may also be a property list with column numbers and formats, for
     example ‘:efmt (2 "$%s\\times10^{%s}$" 4 "$%s\\cdot10^{%s}$")’.
     After ‘efmt’ has been applied to a value, ‘fmt’ will also be
     applied.  Similar to ‘fmt’, functions of two arguments can be
     supplied instead of strings.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) By default this works only for LaTeX, HTML, and Texinfo.
Configure the variable ‘orgtbl-radio-table-templates’ to install
templates for other modes.

   (2) If the ‘#+TBLFM’ line contains an odd number of dollar
characters, this may cause problems with font-lock in LaTeX mode.  As
shown in the example you can fix this by adding an extra line inside the
‘comment’ environment that is used to balance the dollar expressions.
If you are using AUCTeX with the font-latex library, a much better
solution is to add the ‘comment’ environment to the variable
‘LaTeX-verbatim-environments’.


File: org.info,  Node: Translator functions,  Next: Radio lists,  Prev: A LaTeX example,  Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax

A.6.3 Translator functions
--------------------------

Orgtbl mode has several translator functions built-in: ‘orgtbl-to-csv’
(comma-separated values), ‘orgtbl-to-tsv’ (TAB-separated values)
‘orgtbl-to-latex’, ‘orgtbl-to-html’, and ‘orgtbl-to-texinfo’.  Except
for ‘orgtbl-to-html’(1), these all use a generic translator,
‘orgtbl-to-generic’.  For example, ‘orgtbl-to-latex’ itself is a very
short function that computes the column definitions for the ‘tabular’
environment, defines a few field and line separators and then hands
processing over to the generic translator.  Here is the entire code:

     (defun orgtbl-to-latex (table params)
       "Convert the Orgtbl mode TABLE to LaTeX."
       (let* ((alignment (mapconcat (lambda (x) (if x "r" "l"))
                                    org-table-last-alignment ""))
              (params2
               (list
                :tstart (concat "\\begin{tabular}{" alignment "}")
                :tend "\\end{tabular}"
                :lstart "" :lend " \\\\" :sep " & "
                :efmt "%s\\,(%s)" :hline "\\hline")))
         (orgtbl-to-generic table (org-combine-plists params2 params))))

   As you can see, the properties passed into the function (variable
PARAMS) are combined with the ones newly defined in the function
(variable PARAMS2).  The ones passed into the function (i.e., the ones
set by the ‘ORGTBL SEND’ line) take precedence.  So if you would like to
use the LaTeX translator, but wanted the line endings to be ‘\\[2mm]’
instead of the default ‘\\’, you could just overrule the default with

     #+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-latex :lend " \\\\[2mm]"

   For a new language, you can either write your own converter function
in analogy with the LaTeX translator, or you can use the generic
function directly.  For example, if you have a language where a table is
started with ‘!BTBL!’, ended with ‘!ETBL!’, and where table lines are
started with ‘!BL!’, ended with ‘!EL!’, and where the field separator is
a TAB, you could call the generic translator like this (on a single
line!):

     #+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-generic :tstart "!BTBL!" :tend "!ETBL!"
                                   :lstart "!BL! " :lend " !EL!" :sep "\t"

Please check the documentation string of the function
‘orgtbl-to-generic’ for a full list of parameters understood by that
function, and remember that you can pass each of them into
‘orgtbl-to-latex’, ‘orgtbl-to-texinfo’, and any other function using the
generic function.

   Of course you can also write a completely new function doing
complicated things the generic translator cannot do.  A translator
function takes two arguments.  The first argument is the table, a list
of lines, each line either the symbol ‘hline’ or a list of fields.  The
second argument is the property list containing all parameters specified
in the ‘#+ORGTBL: SEND’ line.  The function must return a single string
containing the formatted table.  If you write a generally useful
translator, please post it on <emacs-orgmode@gnu.org> so that others can
benefit from your work.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The HTML translator uses the same code that produces tables
during HTML export.


File: org.info,  Node: Radio lists,  Prev: Translator functions,  Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax

A.6.4 Radio lists
-----------------

Sending and receiving radio lists works exactly the same way as sending
and receiving radio tables (*note Radio tables::).  As for radio tables,
you can insert radio list templates in HTML, LaTeX and Texinfo modes by
calling ‘org-list-insert-radio-list’.

   Here are the differences with radio tables:

   − Orgstruct mode must be active.
   − Use the ‘ORGLST’ keyword instead of ‘ORGTBL’.
   − The available translation functions for radio lists don’t take
     parameters.
   − ‘C-c C-c’ will work when pressed on the first item of the list.

   Here is a LaTeX example.  Let’s say that you have this in your LaTeX
file:

     % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy
     % END RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy
     \begin{comment}
     #+ORGLST: SEND to-buy org-list-to-latex
     - a new house
     - a new computer
       + a new keyboard
       + a new mouse
     - a new life
     \end{comment}

   Pressing ‘C-c C-c’ on ‘a new house’ and will insert the converted
LaTeX list between the two marker lines.


File: org.info,  Node: Dynamic blocks,  Next: Special agenda views,  Prev: Tables in arbitrary syntax,  Up: Hacking

A.7 Dynamic blocks
==================

Org documents can contain _dynamic blocks_.  These are specially marked
regions that are updated by some user-written function.  A good example
for such a block is the clock table inserted by the command ‘C-c C-x
C-r’ (*note Clocking work time::).

   Dynamic blocks are enclosed by a BEGIN-END structure that assigns a
name to the block and can also specify parameters for the function
producing the content of the block.

     #+BEGIN: myblock :parameter1 value1 :parameter2 value2 ...

     #+END:

   Dynamic blocks are updated with the following commands

‘C-c C-x C-u     (org-dblock-update)’
     Update dynamic block at point.
‘C-u C-c C-x C-u’
     Update all dynamic blocks in the current file.

   Updating a dynamic block means to remove all the text between BEGIN
and END, parse the BEGIN line for parameters and then call the specific
writer function for this block to insert the new content.  If you want
to use the original content in the writer function, you can use the
extra parameter ‘:content’.

   For a block with name ‘myblock’, the writer function is
‘org-dblock-write:myblock’ with as only parameter a property list with
the parameters given in the begin line.  Here is a trivial example of a
block that keeps track of when the block update function was last run:

     #+BEGIN: block-update-time :format "on %m/%d/%Y at %H:%M"

     #+END:

The corresponding block writer function could look like this:

     (defun org-dblock-write:block-update-time (params)
       (let ((fmt (or (plist-get params :format) "%d. %m. %Y")))
         (insert "Last block update at: "
                 (format-time-string fmt))))

   If you want to make sure that all dynamic blocks are always
up-to-date, you could add the function ‘org-update-all-dblocks’ to a
hook, for example ‘before-save-hook’.  ‘org-update-all-dblocks’ is
written in a way such that it does nothing in buffers that are not in
‘org-mode’.

   You can narrow the current buffer to the current dynamic block (like
any other block) with ‘org-narrow-to-block’.


File: org.info,  Node: Special agenda views,  Next: Speeding up your agendas,  Prev: Dynamic blocks,  Up: Hacking

A.8 Special agenda views
========================

Org provides a special hook that can be used to narrow down the
selection made by these agenda views: ‘agenda’, ‘agenda*’(1), ‘todo’,
‘alltodo’, ‘tags’, ‘tags-todo’, ‘tags-tree’.  You may specify a function
that is used at each match to verify if the match should indeed be part
of the agenda view, and if not, how much should be skipped.  You can
specify a global condition that will be applied to all agenda views,
this condition would be stored in the variable
‘org-agenda-skip-function-global’.  More commonly, such a definition is
applied only to specific custom searches, using
‘org-agenda-skip-function’.

   Let’s say you want to produce a list of projects that contain a
WAITING tag anywhere in the project tree.  Let’s further assume that you
have marked all tree headings that define a project with the TODO
keyword PROJECT.  In this case you would run a TODO search for the
keyword PROJECT, but skip the match unless there is a WAITING tag
anywhere in the subtree belonging to the project line.

   To achieve this, you must write a function that searches the subtree
for the tag.  If the tag is found, the function must return ‘nil’ to
indicate that this match should not be skipped.  If there is no such
tag, return the location of the end of the subtree, to indicate that
search should continue from there.

     (defun my-skip-unless-waiting ()
       "Skip trees that are not waiting"
       (let ((subtree-end (save-excursion (org-end-of-subtree t))))
         (if (re-search-forward ":waiting:" subtree-end t)
             nil          ; tag found, do not skip
           subtree-end))) ; tag not found, continue after end of subtree

   Now you may use this function in an agenda custom command, for
example like this:

     (org-add-agenda-custom-command
      '("b" todo "PROJECT"
        ((org-agenda-skip-function 'my-skip-unless-waiting)
         (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))

   Note that this also binds ‘org-agenda-overriding-header’ to get a
meaningful header in the agenda view.

   A general way to create custom searches is to base them on a search
for entries with a certain level limit.  If you want to study all
entries with your custom search function, simply do a search for
‘LEVEL>0’(2), and then use ‘org-agenda-skip-function’ to select the
entries you really want to have.

   You may also put a Lisp form into ‘org-agenda-skip-function’.  In
particular, you may use the functions ‘org-agenda-skip-entry-if’ and
‘org-agenda-skip-subtree-if’ in this form, for example:

‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled)’
     Skip current entry if it has been scheduled.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'notscheduled)’
     Skip current entry if it has not been scheduled.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'deadline)’
     Skip current entry if it has a deadline.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled 'deadline)’
     Skip current entry if it has a deadline, or if it is scheduled.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'todo '("TODO" "WAITING"))’
     Skip current entry if the TODO keyword is TODO or WAITING.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'todo 'done)’
     Skip current entry if the TODO keyword marks a DONE state.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'timestamp)’
     Skip current entry if it has any timestamp, may also be deadline or
     scheduled.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'regexp "regular expression")’
     Skip current entry if the regular expression matches in the entry.
‘(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'notregexp "regular expression")’
     Skip current entry unless the regular expression matches.
‘(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if 'regexp "regular expression")’
     Same as above, but check and skip the entire subtree.

   Therefore we could also have written the search for WAITING projects
like this, even without defining a special function:

     (org-add-agenda-custom-command
      '("b" todo "PROJECT"
        ((org-agenda-skip-function '(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if
                                     'regexp ":waiting:"))
         (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The ‘agenda*’ view is the same than ‘agenda’ except that it only
considers _appointments_, i.e., scheduled and deadline items that have a
time specification ‘[h]h:mm’ in their time-stamps.

   (2) Note that, when using ‘org-odd-levels-only’, a level number
corresponds to order in the hierarchy, not to the number of stars.


File: org.info,  Node: Speeding up your agendas,  Next: Extracting agenda information,  Prev: Special agenda views,  Up: Hacking

A.9 Speeding up your agendas
============================

When your Org files grow in both number and size, agenda commands may
start to become slow.  Below are some tips on how to speed up the agenda
commands.

  1. Reduce the number of Org agenda files: this will reduce the
     slowness caused by accessing a hard drive.
  2. Reduce the number of DONE and archived headlines: this way the
     agenda does not need to skip them.
  3. Inhibit the dimming of blocked tasks:
          (setq org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks nil)
  4. Inhibit agenda files startup options:
          (setq org-agenda-inhibit-startup nil)
  5. Disable tag inheritance in agenda:
          (setq org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance nil)

   You can set these options for specific agenda views only.  See the
docstrings of these variables for details on why they affect the agenda
generation, and this dedicated Worg page
(http://orgmode.org/worg/agenda-optimization.html) for further
explanations.


File: org.info,  Node: Extracting agenda information,  Next: Using the property API,  Prev: Speeding up your agendas,  Up: Hacking

A.10 Extracting agenda information
==================================

Org provides commands to access agenda information for the command line
in Emacs batch mode.  This extracted information can be sent directly to
a printer, or it can be read by a program that does further processing
of the data.  The first of these commands is the function
‘org-batch-agenda’, that produces an agenda view and sends it as ASCII
text to STDOUT.  The command takes a single string as parameter.  If the
string has length 1, it is used as a key to one of the commands you have
configured in ‘org-agenda-custom-commands’, basically any key you can
use after ‘C-c a’.  For example, to directly print the current TODO
list, you could use

     emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda "t")' | lpr

   If the parameter is a string with 2 or more characters, it is used as
a tags/TODO match string.  For example, to print your local shopping
list (all items with the tag ‘shop’, but excluding the tag ‘NewYork’),
you could use

     emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs                                      \
           -eval '(org-batch-agenda "+shop-NewYork")' | lpr

You may also modify parameters on the fly like this:

     emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs                                      \
        -eval '(org-batch-agenda "a"                               \
                 org-agenda-span (quote month)                     \
                 org-agenda-include-diary nil                      \
                 org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))'  \
        | lpr

which will produce a 30-day agenda, fully restricted to the Org file
‘~/org/projects.org’, not even including the diary.

   If you want to process the agenda data in more sophisticated ways,
you can use the command ‘org-batch-agenda-csv’ to get a comma-separated
list of values for each agenda item.  Each line in the output will
contain a number of fields separated by commas.  The fields in a line
are:

     category     The category of the item
     head         The headline, without TODO keyword, TAGS and PRIORITY
     type         The type of the agenda entry, can be
                     todo               selected in TODO match
                     tagsmatch          selected in tags match
                     diary              imported from diary
                     deadline           a deadline
                     scheduled          scheduled
                     timestamp          appointment, selected by timestamp
                     closed             entry was closed on date
                     upcoming-deadline  warning about nearing deadline
                     past-scheduled     forwarded scheduled item
                     block              entry has date block including date
     todo         The TODO keyword, if any
     tags         All tags including inherited ones, separated by colons
     date         The relevant date, like 2007-2-14
     time         The time, like 15:00-16:50
     extra        String with extra planning info
     priority-l   The priority letter if any was given
     priority-n   The computed numerical priority

Time and date will only be given if a timestamp (or deadline/scheduled)
led to the selection of the item.

   A CSV list like this is very easy to use in a post-processing script.
For example, here is a Perl program that gets the TODO list from
Emacs/Org and prints all the items, preceded by a checkbox:

     #!/usr/bin/perl

     # define the Emacs command to run
     $cmd = "emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda-csv \"t\")'";

     # run it and capture the output
     $agenda = qx{$cmd 2>/dev/null};

     # loop over all lines
     foreach $line (split(/\n/,$agenda)) {
       # get the individual values
       ($category,$head,$type,$todo,$tags,$date,$time,$extra,
        $priority_l,$priority_n) = split(/,/,$line);
       # process and print
       print "[ ] $head\n";
     }


File: org.info,  Node: Using the property API,  Next: Using the mapping API,  Prev: Extracting agenda information,  Up: Hacking

A.11 Using the property API
===========================

Here is a description of the functions that can be used to work with
properties.

 -- Function: org-entry-properties &optional pom which
     Get all properties of the entry at point-or-marker POM.
     This includes the TODO keyword, the tags, time strings for
     deadline, scheduled, and clocking, and any additional properties
     defined in the entry.  The return value is an alist.  Keys may
     occur multiple times if the property key was used several times.
     POM may also be ‘nil’, in which case the current entry is used.  If
     WHICH is ‘nil’ or ‘all’, get all properties.  If WHICH is ‘special’
     or ‘standard’, only get that subclass.
 -- Function: org-entry-get pom property &optional inherit
     Get value of ‘PROPERTY’ for entry at point-or-marker ‘POM’.  By
     default, this only looks at properties defined locally in the
     entry.  If ‘INHERIT’ is non-‘nil’ and the entry does not have the
     property, then also check higher levels of the hierarchy.  If
     ‘INHERIT’ is the symbol ‘selective’, use inheritance if and only if
     the setting of ‘org-use-property-inheritance’ selects ‘PROPERTY’
     for inheritance.

 -- Function: org-entry-delete pom property
     Delete the property ‘PROPERTY’ from entry at point-or-marker POM.

 -- Function: org-entry-put pom property value
     Set ‘PROPERTY’ to ‘VALUE’ for entry at point-or-marker POM.

 -- Function: org-buffer-property-keys &optional include-specials
     Get all property keys in the current buffer.

 -- Function: org-insert-property-drawer
     Insert a property drawer for the current entry.  Also

 -- Function: org-entry-put-multivalued-property pom property &rest
          values
     Set ‘PROPERTY’ at point-or-marker ‘POM’ to ‘VALUES’.  ‘VALUES’
     should be a list of strings.  They will be concatenated, with
     spaces as separators.

 -- Function: org-entry-get-multivalued-property pom property
     Treat the value of the property ‘PROPERTY’ as a
     whitespace-separated list of values and return the values as a list
     of strings.

 -- Function: org-entry-add-to-multivalued-property pom property value
     Treat the value of the property ‘PROPERTY’ as a
     whitespace-separated list of values and make sure that ‘VALUE’ is
     in this list.

 -- Function: org-entry-remove-from-multivalued-property pom property
          value
     Treat the value of the property ‘PROPERTY’ as a
     whitespace-separated list of values and make sure that ‘VALUE’ is
     _not_ in this list.

 -- Function: org-entry-member-in-multivalued-property pom property
          value
     Treat the value of the property ‘PROPERTY’ as a
     whitespace-separated list of values and check if ‘VALUE’ is in this
     list.

 -- User Option: org-property-allowed-value-functions
     Hook for functions supplying allowed values for a specific
     property.  The functions must take a single argument, the name of
     the property, and return a flat list of allowed values.  If ‘:ETC’
     is one of the values, use the values as completion help, but allow
     also other values to be entered.  The functions must return ‘nil’
     if they are not responsible for this property.


File: org.info,  Node: Using the mapping API,  Prev: Using the property API,  Up: Hacking

A.12 Using the mapping API
==========================

Org has sophisticated mapping capabilities to find all entries
satisfying certain criteria.  Internally, this functionality is used to
produce agenda views, but there is also an API that can be used to
execute arbitrary functions for each or selected entries.  The main
entry point for this API is:

 -- Function: org-map-entries func &optional match scope &rest skip
     Call ‘FUNC’ at each headline selected by ‘MATCH’ in ‘SCOPE’.

     ‘FUNC’ is a function or a Lisp form.  The function will be called
     without arguments, with the cursor positioned at the beginning of
     the headline.  The return values of all calls to the function will
     be collected and returned as a list.

     The call to ‘FUNC’ will be wrapped into a save-excursion form, so
     ‘FUNC’ does not need to preserve point.  After evaluation, the
     cursor will be moved to the end of the line (presumably of the
     headline of the processed entry) and search continues from there.
     Under some circumstances, this may not produce the wanted results.
     For example, if you have removed (e.g., archived) the current
     (sub)tree it could mean that the next entry will be skipped
     entirely.  In such cases, you can specify the position from where
     search should continue by making ‘FUNC’ set the variable
     ‘org-map-continue-from’ to the desired buffer position.

     ‘MATCH’ is a tags/property/todo match as it is used in the agenda
     match view.  Only headlines that are matched by this query will be
     considered during the iteration.  When ‘MATCH’ is ‘nil’ or ‘t’, all
     headlines will be visited by the iteration.

     ‘SCOPE’ determines the scope of this command.  It can be any of:

          nil     the current buffer, respecting the restriction if any
          tree    the subtree started with the entry at point
          region  The entries within the active region, if any
          file    the current buffer, without restriction
          file-with-archives
                  the current buffer, and any archives associated with it
          agenda  all agenda files
          agenda-with-archives
                  all agenda files with any archive files associated with them
          (file1 file2 ...)
                  if this is a list, all files in the list will be scanned
     The remaining args are treated as settings for the skipping
     facilities of the scanner.  The following items can be given here:

          archive   skip trees with the archive tag
          comment   skip trees with the COMMENT keyword
          function or Lisp form
                    will be used as value for ‘org-agenda-skip-function’,
                    so whenever the function returns t, FUNC
                    will not be called for that entry and search will
                    continue from the point where the function leaves it

   The function given to that mapping routine can really do anything you
like.  It can use the property API (*note Using the property API::) to
gather more information about the entry, or in order to change metadata
in the entry.  Here are a couple of functions that might be handy:

 -- Function: org-todo &optional arg
     Change the TODO state of the entry.  See the docstring of the
     functions for the many possible values for the argument ‘ARG’.

 -- Function: org-priority &optional action
     Change the priority of the entry.  See the docstring of this
     function for the possible values for ‘ACTION’.

 -- Function: org-toggle-tag tag &optional onoff
     Toggle the tag ‘TAG’ in the current entry.  Setting ‘ONOFF’ to
     either ‘on’ or ‘off’ will not toggle tag, but ensure that it is
     either on or off.

 -- Function: org-promote
     Promote the current entry.

 -- Function: org-demote
     Demote the current entry.

   Here is a simple example that will turn all entries in the current
file with a tag ‘TOMORROW’ into TODO entries with the keyword
‘UPCOMING’.  Entries in comment trees and in archive trees will be
ignored.

     (org-map-entries
      '(org-todo "UPCOMING")
      "+TOMORROW" 'file 'archive 'comment)

   The following example counts the number of entries with TODO keyword
‘WAITING’, in all agenda files.

     (length (org-map-entries t "/+WAITING" 'agenda))


File: org.info,  Node: MobileOrg,  Next: History and Acknowledgments,  Prev: Hacking,  Up: Top

Appendix B MobileOrg
********************

MobileOrg is the name of the mobile companion app for Org mode,
currently available for iOS and for Android.  MobileOrg offers offline
viewing and capture support for an Org mode system rooted on a “real”
computer.  It does also allow you to record changes to existing entries.
The iOS implementation (https://github.com/MobileOrg/) for the
iPhone/iPod Touch/iPad series of devices, was started by Richard
Moreland and is now in the hands Sean Escriva.  Android users should
check out MobileOrg Android
(http://wiki.github.com/matburt/mobileorg-android/) by Matt Jones.  The
two implementations are not identical but offer similar features.

   This appendix describes the support Org has for creating agenda views
in a format that can be displayed by MobileOrg, and for integrating
notes captured and changes made by MobileOrg into the main system.

   For changing tags and TODO states in MobileOrg, you should have set
up the customization variables ‘org-todo-keywords’ and ‘org-tag-alist’
to cover all important tags and TODO keywords, even if individual files
use only part of these.  MobileOrg will also offer you states and tags
set up with in-buffer settings, but it will understand the logistics of
TODO state sets (*note Per-file keywords::) and mutually exclusive tags
(*note Setting tags::) only for those set in these variables.

* Menu:

* Setting up the staging area::  Where to interact with the mobile device
* Pushing to MobileOrg::        Uploading Org files and agendas
* Pulling from MobileOrg::      Integrating captured and flagged items


File: org.info,  Node: Setting up the staging area,  Next: Pushing to MobileOrg,  Prev: MobileOrg,  Up: MobileOrg

B.1 Setting up the staging area
===============================

MobileOrg needs to interact with Emacs through a directory on a server.
If you are using a public server, you should consider to encrypt the
files that are uploaded to the server.  This can be done with Org mode
7.02 and with MobileOrg 1.5 (iPhone version), and you need an ‘openssl’
installation on your system.  To turn on encryption, set a password in
MobileOrg and, on the Emacs side, configure the variable
‘org-mobile-use-encryption’(1).

   The easiest way to create that directory is to use a free Dropbox.com
(http://dropbox.com) account(2).  When MobileOrg first connects to your
Dropbox, it will create a directory MobileOrg inside the Dropbox.  After
the directory has been created, tell Emacs about it:

     (setq org-mobile-directory "~/Dropbox/MobileOrg")

   Org mode has commands to put files for MobileOrg into that directory,
and to read captured notes from there.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you can safely store the password in your Emacs setup, you
might also want to configure ‘org-mobile-encryption-password’.  Please
read the docstring of that variable.  Note that encryption will apply
only to the contents of the ‘.org’ files.  The file names themselves
will remain visible.

   (2) If you cannot use Dropbox, or if your version of MobileOrg does
not support it, you can use a webdav server.  For more information,
check out the documentation of MobileOrg and also this FAQ entry
(http://orgmode.org/worg/org-faq.html#mobileorg_webdav).


File: org.info,  Node: Pushing to MobileOrg,  Next: Pulling from MobileOrg,  Prev: Setting up the staging area,  Up: MobileOrg

B.2 Pushing to MobileOrg
========================

This operation copies all files currently listed in ‘org-mobile-files’
to the directory ‘org-mobile-directory’.  By default this list contains
all agenda files (as listed in ‘org-agenda-files’), but additional files
can be included by customizing ‘org-mobile-files’.  File names will be
staged with paths relative to ‘org-directory’, so all files should be
inside this directory(1).

   The push operation also creates a special Org file ‘agendas.org’ with
all custom agenda view defined by the user(2).

   Finally, Org writes the file ‘index.org’, containing links to all
other files.  MobileOrg first reads this file from the server, and then
downloads all agendas and Org files listed in it.  To speed up the
download, MobileOrg will only read files whose checksums(3) have
changed.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Symbolic links in ‘org-directory’ need to have the same name than
their targets.

   (2) While creating the agendas, Org mode will force ID properties on
all referenced entries, so that these entries can be uniquely identified
if MobileOrg flags them for further action.  If you do not want to get
these properties in so many entries, you can set the variable
‘org-mobile-force-id-on-agenda-items’ to ‘nil’.  Org mode will then rely
on outline paths, in the hope that these will be unique enough.

   (3) Checksums are stored automatically in the file ‘checksums.dat’


File: org.info,  Node: Pulling from MobileOrg,  Prev: Pushing to MobileOrg,  Up: MobileOrg

B.3 Pulling from MobileOrg
==========================

When MobileOrg synchronizes with the server, it not only pulls the Org
files for viewing.  It also appends captured entries and pointers to
flagged and changed entries to the file ‘mobileorg.org’ on the server.
Org has a _pull_ operation that integrates this information into an
inbox file and operates on the pointers to flagged entries.  Here is how
it works:

  1. Org moves all entries found in ‘mobileorg.org’(1) and appends them
     to the file pointed to by the variable ‘org-mobile-inbox-for-pull’.
     Each captured entry and each editing event will be a top-level
     entry in the inbox file.
  2. After moving the entries, Org will attempt to implement the changes
     made in MobileOrg.  Some changes are applied directly and without
     user interaction.  Examples are all changes to tags, TODO state,
     headline and body text that can be cleanly applied.  Entries that
     have been flagged for further action will receive a tag
     ‘:FLAGGED:’, so that they can be easily found again.  When there is
     a problem finding an entry or applying the change, the pointer
     entry will remain in the inbox and will be marked with an error
     message.  You need to later resolve these issues by hand.
  3. Org will then generate an agenda view with all flagged entries.
     The user should then go through these entries and do whatever
     actions are necessary.  If a note has been stored while flagging an
     entry in MobileOrg, that note will be displayed in the echo area
     when the cursor is on the corresponding agenda line.

     ‘?’
          Pressing ‘?’ in that special agenda will display the full
          flagging note in another window and also push it onto the kill
          ring.  So you could use ‘? z C-y C-c C-c’ to store that
          flagging note as a normal note in the entry.  Pressing ‘?’
          twice in succession will offer to remove the ‘:FLAGGED:’ tag
          along with the recorded flagging note (which is stored in a
          property).  In this way you indicate that the intended
          processing for this flagged entry is finished.

   If you are not able to process all flagged entries directly, you can
always return to this agenda view(2) using ‘C-c a ?’.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) ‘mobileorg.org’ will be empty after this operation.

   (2) Note, however, that there is a subtle difference.  The view
created automatically by ‘M-x org-mobile-pull RET’ is guaranteed to
search all files that have been addressed by the last pull.  This might
include a file that is not currently in your list of agenda files.  If
you later use ‘C-c a ?’ to regenerate the view, only the current agenda
files will be searched.


File: org.info,  Node: History and Acknowledgments,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: MobileOrg,  Up: Top

Appendix C History and acknowledgments
**************************************

C.1 From Carsten
================

Org was born in 2003, out of frustration over the user interface of the
Emacs Outline mode.  I was trying to organize my notes and projects, and
using Emacs seemed to be the natural way to go.  However, having to
remember eleven different commands with two or three keys per command,
only to hide and show parts of the outline tree, that seemed entirely
unacceptable to me.  Also, when using outlines to take notes, I
constantly wanted to restructure the tree, organizing it parallel to my
thoughts and plans.  _Visibility cycling_ and _structure editing_ were
originally implemented in the package ‘outline-magic.el’, but quickly
moved to the more general ‘org.el’.  As this environment became
comfortable for project planning, the next step was adding _TODO
entries_, basic _timestamps_, and _table support_.  These areas
highlighted the two main goals that Org still has today: to be a new,
outline-based, plain text mode with innovative and intuitive editing
features, and to incorporate project planning functionality directly
into a notes file.

   Since the first release, literally thousands of emails to me or to
<emacs-orgmode@gnu.org> have provided a constant stream of bug reports,
feedback, new ideas, and sometimes patches and add-on code.  Many thanks
to everyone who has helped to improve this package.  I am trying to keep
here a list of the people who had significant influence in shaping one
or more aspects of Org.  The list may not be complete, if I have
forgotten someone, please accept my apologies and let me know.

   Before I get to this list, a few special mentions are in order:

Bastien Guerry
     Bastien has written a large number of extensions to Org (most of
     them integrated into the core by now), including the LaTeX exporter
     and the plain list parser.  His support during the early days, when
     he basically acted as co-maintainer, was central to the success of
     this project.  Bastien also invented Worg, helped establishing the
     Web presence of Org, and sponsored hosting costs for the
     orgmode.org website.
Eric Schulte and Dan Davison
     Eric and Dan are jointly responsible for the Org-babel system,
     which turns Org into a multi-language environment for evaluating
     code and doing literate programming and reproducible research.
John Wiegley
     John has contributed a number of great ideas and patches directly
     to Org, including the attachment system (‘org-attach.el’),
     integration with Apple Mail (‘org-mac-message.el’), hierarchical
     dependencies of TODO items, habit tracking (‘org-habits.el’), and
     encryption (‘org-crypt.el’).  Also, the capture system is really an
     extended copy of his great ‘remember.el’.
Sebastian Rose
     Without Sebastian, the HTML/XHTML publishing of Org would be the
     pitiful work of an ignorant amateur.  Sebastian has pushed this
     part of Org onto a much higher level.  He also wrote ‘org-info.js’,
     a Java script for displaying web pages derived from Org using an
     Info-like or a folding interface with single-key navigation.

See below for the full list of contributions!  Again, please let me know
what I am missing here!

C.2 From Bastien
================

I (Bastien) have been maintaining Org since January 2011.  This appendix
would not be complete without adding a few more acknowledgements and
thanks to Carsten’s ones above.

   I am first grateful to Carsten for his trust while handing me over
the maintainership of Org.  His unremitting support is what really
helped me getting more confident over time, with both the community and
the code.

   When I took over maintainership, I knew I would have to make Org more
collaborative than ever, as I would have to rely on people that are more
knowledgeable than I am on many parts of the code.  Here is a list of
the persons I could rely on, they should really be considered
co-maintainers, either of the code or the community:

Eric Schulte
     Eric is maintaining the Babel parts of Org.  His reactivity here
     kept me away from worrying about possible bugs here and let me
     focus on other parts.

Nicolas Goaziou
     Nicolas is maintaining the consistency of the deepest parts of Org.
     His work on ‘org-element.el’ and ‘ox.el’ has been outstanding, and
     opened the doors for many new ideas and features.  He rewrote many
     of the old exporters to use the new export engine, and helped with
     documenting this major change.  More importantly (if that’s
     possible), he has been more than reliable during all the work done
     for Org 8.0, and always very reactive on the mailing list.

Achim Gratz
     Achim rewrote the building process of Org, turning some _ad hoc_
     tools into a flexible and conceptually clean process.  He patiently
     coped with the many hiccups that such a change can create for
     users.

Nick Dokos
     The Org mode mailing list would not be such a nice place without
     Nick, who patiently helped users so many times.  It is impossible
     to overestimate such a great help, and the list would not be so
     active without him.

   I received support from so many users that it is clearly impossible
to be fair when shortlisting a few of them, but Org’s history would not
be complete if the ones above were not mentioned in this manual.

C.3 List of contributions
=========================

   • Russel Adams came up with the idea for drawers.
   • Suvayu Ali has steadily helped on the mailing list, providing
     useful feedback on many features and several patches.
   • Luis Anaya wrote ‘ox-man.el’.
   • Thomas Baumann wrote ‘org-bbdb.el’ and ‘org-mhe.el’.
   • Michael Brand helped by reporting many bugs and testing many
     features.  He also implemented the distinction between empty fields
     and 0-value fields in Org’s spreadsheets.
   • Christophe Bataillon created the great unicorn logo that we use on
     the Org mode website.
   • Alex Bochannek provided a patch for rounding timestamps.
   • Jan Böcker wrote ‘org-docview.el’.
   • Brad Bozarth showed how to pull RSS feed data into Org mode files.
   • Tom Breton wrote ‘org-choose.el’.
   • Charles Cave’s suggestion sparked the implementation of templates
     for Remember, which are now templates for capture.
   • Pavel Chalmoviansky influenced the agenda treatment of items with
     specified time.
   • Gregory Chernov patched support for Lisp forms into table
     calculations and improved XEmacs compatibility, in particular by
     porting ‘nouline.el’ to XEmacs.
   • Sacha Chua suggested copying some linking code from Planner.
   • Toby S. Cubitt contributed to the code for clock formats.
   • Baoqiu Cui contributed the DocBook exporter.  It has been deleted
     from Org 8.0: you can now export to Texinfo and export the ‘.texi’
     file to DocBook using ‘makeinfo’.
   • Eddward DeVilla proposed and tested checkbox statistics.  He also
     came up with the idea of properties, and that there should be an
     API for them.
   • Nick Dokos tracked down several nasty bugs.
   • Kees Dullemond used to edit projects lists directly in HTML and so
     inspired some of the early development, including HTML export.  He
     also asked for a way to narrow wide table columns.
   • Jason Dunsmore has been maintaining the Org-Mode server at
     Rackspace for several years now.  He also sponsored the hosting
     costs until Rackspace started to host us for free.
   • Thomas S. Dye contributed documentation on Worg and helped
     integrating the Org-Babel documentation into the manual.
   • Christian Egli converted the documentation into Texinfo format,
     inspired the agenda, patched CSS formatting into the HTML exporter,
     and wrote ‘org-taskjuggler.el’, which has been rewritten by Nicolas
     Goaziou as ‘ox-taskjuggler.el’ for Org 8.0.
   • David Emery provided a patch for custom CSS support in exported
     HTML agendas.
   • Sean Escriva took over MobileOrg development on the iPhone
     platform.
   • Nic Ferrier contributed mailcap and XOXO support.
   • Miguel A. Figueroa-Villanueva implemented hierarchical checkboxes.
   • John Foerch figured out how to make incremental search show context
     around a match in a hidden outline tree.
   • Raimar Finken wrote ‘org-git-line.el’.
   • Mikael Fornius works as a mailing list moderator.
   • Austin Frank works as a mailing list moderator.
   • Eric Fraga drove the development of BEAMER export with ideas and
     testing.
   • Barry Gidden did proofreading the manual in preparation for the
     book publication through Network Theory Ltd.
   • Niels Giesen had the idea to automatically archive DONE trees.
   • Nicolas Goaziou rewrote much of the plain list code.  He also wrote
     ‘org-element.el’ and ‘org-export.el’, which was a huge step forward
     in implementing a clean framework for Org exporters.
   • Kai Grossjohann pointed out key-binding conflicts with other
     packages.
   • Brian Gough of Network Theory Ltd publishes the Org mode manual as
     a book.
   • Bernt Hansen has driven much of the support for auto-repeating
     tasks, task state change logging, and the clocktable.  His clear
     explanations have been critical when we started to adopt the Git
     version control system.
   • Manuel Hermenegildo has contributed various ideas, small fixes and
     patches.
   • Phil Jackson wrote ‘org-irc.el’.
   • Scott Jaderholm proposed footnotes, control over whitespace between
     folded entries, and column view for properties.
   • Matt Jones wrote MobileOrg Android.
   • Tokuya Kameshima wrote ‘org-wl.el’ and ‘org-mew.el’.
   • Jonathan Leech-Pepin wrote ‘ox-texinfo.el’.
   • Shidai Liu ("Leo") asked for embedded LaTeX and tested it.  He also
     provided frequent feedback and some patches.
   • Matt Lundin has proposed last-row references for table formulas and
     named invisible anchors.  He has also worked a lot on the FAQ.
   • David Maus wrote ‘org-atom.el’, maintains the issues file for Org,
     and is a prolific contributor on the mailing list with competent
     replies, small fixes and patches.
   • Jason F. McBrayer suggested agenda export to CSV format.
   • Max Mikhanosha came up with the idea of refiling and sticky
     agendas.
   • Dmitri Minaev sent a patch to set priority limits on a per-file
     basis.
   • Stefan Monnier provided a patch to keep the Emacs-Lisp compiler
     happy.
   • Richard Moreland wrote MobileOrg for the iPhone.
   • Rick Moynihan proposed allowing multiple TODO sequences in a file
     and being able to quickly restrict the agenda to a subtree.
   • Todd Neal provided patches for links to Info files and Elisp forms.
   • Greg Newman refreshed the unicorn logo into its current form.
   • Tim O’Callaghan suggested in-file links, search options for general
     file links, and TAGS.
   • Osamu Okano wrote ‘orgcard2ref.pl’, a Perl program to create a text
     version of the reference card.
   • Takeshi Okano translated the manual and David O’Toole’s tutorial
     into Japanese.
   • Oliver Oppitz suggested multi-state TODO items.
   • Scott Otterson sparked the introduction of descriptive text for
     links, among other things.
   • Pete Phillips helped during the development of the TAGS feature,
     and provided frequent feedback.
   • Francesco Pizzolante provided patches that helped speeding up the
     agenda generation.
   • Martin Pohlack provided the code snippet to bundle character
     insertion into bundles of 20 for undo.
   • Rackspace.com is hosting our website for free.  Thank you
     Rackspace!
   • T.V. Raman reported bugs and suggested improvements.
   • Matthias Rempe (Oelde) provided ideas, Windows support, and quality
     control.
   • Paul Rivier provided the basic implementation of named footnotes.
     He also acted as mailing list moderator for some time.
   • Kevin Rogers contributed code to access VM files on remote hosts.
   • Frank Ruell solved the mystery of the ‘keymapp nil’ bug, a conflict
     with ‘allout.el’.
   • Jason Riedy generalized the send-receive mechanism for Orgtbl
     tables with extensive patches.
   • Philip Rooke created the Org reference card, provided lots of
     feedback, developed and applied standards to the Org documentation.
   • Christian Schlauer proposed angular brackets around links, among
     other things.
   • Christopher Schmidt reworked ‘orgstruct-mode’ so that users can
     enjoy folding in non-org buffers by using Org headlines in
     comments.
   • Paul Sexton wrote ‘org-ctags.el’.
   • Linking to VM/BBDB/Gnus was first inspired by Tom Shannon’s
     ‘organizer-mode.el’.
   • Ilya Shlyakhter proposed the Archive Sibling, line numbering in
     literal examples, and remote highlighting for referenced code
     lines.
   • Stathis Sideris wrote the ‘ditaa.jar’ ASCII to PNG converter that
     is now packaged into Org’s ‘contrib’ directory.
   • Daniel Sinder came up with the idea of internal archiving by
     locking subtrees.
   • Dale Smith proposed link abbreviations.
   • James TD Smith has contributed a large number of patches for useful
     tweaks and features.
   • Adam Spiers asked for global linking commands, inspired the link
     extension system, added support for mairix, and proposed the
     mapping API.
   • Ulf Stegemann created the table to translate special symbols to
     HTML, LaTeX, UTF-8, Latin-1 and ASCII.
   • Andy Stewart contributed code to ‘org-w3m.el’, to copy HTML content
     with links transformation to Org syntax.
   • David O’Toole wrote ‘org-publish.el’ and drafted the manual chapter
     about publishing.
   • Jambunathan K contributed the ODT exporter and rewrote the HTML
     exporter.
   • Sebastien Vauban reported many issues with LaTeX and BEAMER export
     and enabled source code highlighting in Gnus.
   • Stefan Vollmar organized a video-recorded talk at the
     Max-Planck-Institute for Neurology.  He also inspired the creation
     of a concept index for HTML export.
   • Jürgen Vollmer contributed code generating the table of contents in
     HTML output.
   • Samuel Wales has provided important feedback and bug reports.
   • Chris Wallace provided a patch implementing the ‘QUOTE’ keyword.
   • David Wainberg suggested archiving, and improvements to the linking
     system.
   • Carsten Wimmer suggested some changes and helped fix a bug in
     linking to Gnus.
   • Roland Winkler requested additional key bindings to make Org work
     on a tty.
   • Piotr Zielinski wrote ‘org-mouse.el’, proposed agenda blocks and
     contributed various ideas and code snippets.


File: org.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Main Index,  Prev: History and Acknowledgments,  Up: Top

Appendix D GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************

                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

     Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     <http://fsf.org/>

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
     be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”.  You accept
     the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
     requiring permission under copyright law.

     A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
     If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
     is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may
     contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify
     any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
     of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
     available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
     formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
     suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise
     Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
     been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
     readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not Transparent if
     used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that is not
     “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
     simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
     Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
     Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
     the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
     processors for output purposes only.

     The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title
     Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies
     of the Document to the public.

     A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.)
     To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
     conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
     each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
     network-using public has access to download using public-standard
     network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
     of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
     reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
     copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
     remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
     year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
     through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
     Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
     the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
          versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
          History section of the Document).  You may use the same title
          as a previous version if the original publisher of that
          version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
          Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled “History” in the
          Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
          publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
          an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
          previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
          “History” section.  You may omit a network location for a work
          that was published at least four years before the Document
          itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
          to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”,
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
          all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
          in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
          equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”.  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s
     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
     section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
     a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
     the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     “History” in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”.  You
     must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
     in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
     document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
     storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”,
     “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
     permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
     same material does not give you any rights to use it.

  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     <http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/>.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
     Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
     decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
     proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

  11. RELICENSING

     “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any
     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
     A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the
     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
     site.

     “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
     published by that same organization.

     “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
     in part, as part of another Document.

     An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this
     License, and if all works that were first published under this
     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
     to November 1, 2008.

     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
their use in free software.


File: org.info,  Node: Main Index,  Next: Key Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top

Concept index
*************

[index]
* Menu:

* #+ARCHIVE:                             Moving subtrees.     (line  29)
* #+ASCII:                               ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  39)
* #+ATTR_ASCII:                          ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  50)
* #+ATTR_BEAMER:                         Beamer export.       (line 121)
* #+ATTR_HTML:                           Links in HTML export.
                                                              (line  21)
* #+ATTR_HTML <1>:                       Tables in HTML export.
                                                              (line  12)
* #+ATTR_HTML <2>:                       Images in HTML export.
                                                              (line  23)
* #+ATTR_LATEX:                          LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+ATTR_ODT:                            Tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line  17)
* #+ATTR_ODT <1>:                        Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line  30)
* #+ATTR_ODT <2>:                        Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line  73)
* #+ATTR_ODT <3>:                        Customizing tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+ATTR_TEXINFO:                        Texinfo specific attributes.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+BEAMER:                              Beamer export.       (line 106)
* #+BEAMER_COLOR_THEME:                  Beamer export.       (line  86)
* #+BEAMER_FONT_THEME:                   Beamer export.       (line  86)
* #+BEAMER_INNER_THEME:                  Beamer export.       (line  86)
* #+BEAMER_OUTER_THEME:                  Beamer export.       (line  86)
* #+BEAMER_THEME:                        Beamer export.       (line  86)
* #+BEGIN, clocktable:                   The clock table.     (line  33)
* #+BEGIN, columnview:                   Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  11)
* #+BEGIN:dynamic block:                 Dynamic blocks.      (line  15)
* #+BEGIN_ASCII:                         ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  39)
* #+BEGIN_BEAMER:                        Beamer export.       (line 106)
* #+BEGIN_CENTER:                        Paragraphs.          (line  31)
* #+BEGIN_COMMENT:                       Comment lines.       (line   6)
* #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE:                       Literal examples.    (line   8)
* #+BEGIN_HTML:                          Quoting HTML tags.   (line  12)
* #+BEGIN_HTML <1>:                      Quoting HTML tags.   (line  14)
* #+BEGIN_LATEX:                         Quoting LaTeX code.  (line  11)
* #+BEGIN_QUOTE:                         Paragraphs.          (line  26)
* #+BEGIN_SRC:                           Literal examples.    (line  28)
* #+BEGIN_SRC <1>:                       Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+BEGIN_TEXINFO:                       Quoting Texinfo code.
                                                              (line   9)
* #+BEGIN_VERSE:                         Paragraphs.          (line  13)
* #+BIND:                                Export settings.     (line 187)
* #+CALL:                                Evaluating code blocks.
                                                              (line  22)
* #+CAPTION:                             Images and tables.   (line   6)
* #+CAPTION <1>:                         Tables in HTML export.
                                                              (line  12)
* #+CAPTION <2>:                         Images in HTML export.
                                                              (line  23)
* #+CATEGORY:                            Categories.          (line   6)
* #+CINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* #+COLUMNS:                             Scope of column definitions.
                                                              (line   8)
* #+CONSTANTS:                           References.          (line 102)
* #+DRAWERS:                             Drawers.             (line   6)
* #+FILETAGS:                            Tag inheritance.     (line  20)
* #+FINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* #+HEADER::                             Code block specific header arguments.
                                                              (line  28)
* #+HEADERS::                            Code block specific header arguments.
                                                              (line  28)
* #+HTML:                                Quoting HTML tags.   (line  12)
* #+HTML_HEAD:                           CSS support.         (line  47)
* #+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA:                     CSS support.         (line  47)
* #+HTML_INCLUDE_STYLE:                  CSS support.         (line  41)
* #+INCLUDE:                             Include files.       (line   7)
* #+INFOJS_OPT:                          JavaScript support.  (line  23)
* #+KINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* #+LATEX:                               Quoting LaTeX code.  (line  11)
* #+LATEX_CLASS:                         Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  22)
* #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS:                 Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  22)
* #+LATEX_HEADER:                        Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  27)
* #+LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA:                  Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  27)
* #+LINK:                                Link abbreviations.  (line  49)
* #+MACRO:                               Macro replacement.   (line   6)
* #+NAME:                                Internal links.      (line  21)
* #+NAME <1>:                            Images and tables.   (line   6)
* #+NAME <2>:                            Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+NAME <3>:                            Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line  33)
* #+NAME, for table:                     References.          (line 123)
* #+ODT_STYLES_FILE:                     Applying custom styles.
                                                              (line  28)
* #+OPTIONS:                             Headings and sections.
                                                              (line  14)
* #+ORGLST:                              Radio lists.         (line  22)
* #+ORGTBL:                              Radio tables.        (line  17)
* #+ORGTBL, SEND:                        A LaTeX example.     (line  14)
* #+PINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* #+PLOT:                                Org-Plot.            (line   6)
* #+PRIORITIES:                          Priorities.          (line  43)
* #+PROPERTY:                            Property syntax.     (line  42)
* #+RESULTS:                             Evaluating code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+SEQ_TODO:                            Per-file keywords.   (line   6)
* #+SETUPFILE:                           Export settings.     (line  13)
* #+SETUPFILE <1>:                       In-buffer settings.  (line  53)
* #+STARTUP:                             In-buffer settings.  (line  64)
* #+SUBAUTHOR:                           Document preamble.   (line  42)
* #+SUBTITLE:                            Document preamble.   (line  35)
* #+TAGS:                                Setting tags.        (line  28)
* #+TBLFM:                               Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line  12)
* #+TBLFM <1>:                           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  84)
* #+TBLFM <2>:                           In-buffer settings.  (line 173)
* #+TBLFM line, multiple:                Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  84)
* #+TBLFM, switching:                    Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  84)
* #+TEXINFO:                             Quoting Texinfo code.
                                                              (line   9)
* #+TEXINFO_CLASS:                       Document preamble.   (line  22)
* #+TEXINFO_CLASS <1>:                   Headings and sectioning structure.
                                                              (line   6)
* #+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY:                Document preamble.   (line  69)
* #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC:                    Document preamble.   (line  69)
* #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE:                   Document preamble.   (line  69)
* #+TEXINFO_FILENAME:                    Document preamble.   (line  16)
* #+TEXINFO_HEADER:                      Document preamble.   (line  22)
* #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE:               Document preamble.   (line  35)
* #+TINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* #+TITLE:                               Document title.      (line   8)
* #+TOC:                                 Table of contents.   (line   6)
* #+TODO:                                Per-file keywords.   (line   6)
* #+TYP_TODO:                            Per-file keywords.   (line   6)
* #+VINDEX:                              Indices.             (line   6)
* abbreviation, links:                   Link abbreviations.  (line   6)
* abstract, in LaTeX export:             LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 167)
* acknowledgments:                       History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line   6)
* action, for publishing:                Publishing action.   (line   6)
* activation:                            Activation.          (line   6)
* active region:                         Structure editing.   (line 114)
* active region <1>:                     Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* active region <2>:                     ODT export commands. (line   9)
* add-on packages:                       Add-on packages.     (line   6)
* add-ons, context-sensitive commands:   Context-sensitive commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* agenda:                                Weekly/daily agenda. (line   6)
* agenda dispatcher:                     Agenda dispatcher.   (line   6)
* agenda files:                          Agenda files.        (line   6)
* agenda files, removing buffers:        Agenda commands.     (line 445)
* agenda views:                          Agenda Views.        (line   6)
* agenda views, custom:                  Custom agenda views. (line   6)
* agenda views, exporting:               Agenda commands.     (line 431)
* agenda views, exporting <1>:           Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line   6)
* agenda views, exporting <2>:           Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  13)
* agenda views, main example:            Storing searches.    (line   9)
* agenda views, optimization:            Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line   6)
* agenda views, user-defined:            Special agenda views.
                                                              (line   6)
* agenda*, as an agenda views:           Storing searches.    (line   9)
* agenda, as an agenda views:            Storing searches.    (line   9)
* agenda, column view:                   Agenda column view.  (line   6)
* agenda, pipe:                          Extracting agenda information.
                                                              (line   6)
* agenda, with block views:              Block agenda.        (line   6)
* ‘align’, STARTUP keyword:              In-buffer settings.  (line  84)
* alignment in tables:                   Column width and alignment.
                                                              (line   6)
* anniversaries, from BBDB:              Weekly/daily agenda. (line  73)
* API, for mapping:                      Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line   6)
* API, for properties:                   Property API.        (line   6)
* API, for properties <1>:               Using the property API.
                                                              (line   6)
* appointment:                           Timestamps.          (line  14)
* appointment <1>:                       Weekly/daily agenda. (line 107)
* appointment reminders:                 Weekly/daily agenda. (line 107)
* ‘appt.el’:                             Weekly/daily agenda. (line 107)
* archive locations:                     Moving subtrees.     (line  19)
* archiving:                             Archiving.           (line   6)
* ASCII export:                          ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line   6)
* Atom feeds:                            RSS Feeds.           (line   6)
* attachments:                           Attachments.         (line   6)
* author:                                Feedback.            (line   6)
* autoload:                              Activation.          (line   6)
* babel, languages:                      Languages.           (line   6)
* babel, library of:                     Library of Babel.    (line   6)
* backtrace of an error:                 Feedback.            (line  62)
* Baur, Steven L.:                       Cooperation.         (line  66)
* BBDB links:                            External links.      (line   6)
* BBDB, anniversaries:                   Weekly/daily agenda. (line  73)
* Beamer export:                         Beamer export.       (line   6)
* block agenda:                          Block agenda.        (line   6)
* blocking, of checkboxes:               Checkboxes.          (line  46)
* blocks, folding:                       Blocks.              (line   6)
* bold text, markup rules:               Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* Boolean logic, for tag/property searches: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  33)
* bug reports:                           Feedback.            (line   6)
* C-c C-c, overview:                     The very busy C-c C-c key.
                                                              (line   6)
* ‘calc’ package:                        The spreadsheet.     (line   6)
* ‘calc.el’:                             Cooperation.         (line   6)
* calculations, in tables:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* calculations, in tables <1>:           The spreadsheet.     (line   6)
* calendar commands, from agenda:        Agenda commands.     (line 386)
* calendar integration:                  Weekly/daily agenda. (line  32)
* calendar, for selecting date:          The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  76)
* capture:                               Capture - Refile - Archive.
                                                              (line   6)
* capture <1>:                           Capture.             (line   6)
* capturing, from agenda:                Agenda commands.     (line 297)
* category:                              Categories.          (line   6)
* category filtering, in agenda:         Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* category, require for tags/property match: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  66)
* CDLaTeX:                               CDLaTeX mode.        (line   6)
* ‘cdlatex.el’:                          Cooperation.         (line  26)
* checkbox blocking:                     Checkboxes.          (line  46)
* checkbox statistics:                   Checkboxes.          (line  30)
* checkboxes:                            Checkboxes.          (line   6)
* checkboxes and TODO dependencies:      TODO dependencies.   (line  43)
* children, subtree visibility state:    Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* clean outline view:                    Clean view.          (line   6)
* clocking time:                         Clocking work time.  (line   6)
* clocktable, dynamic block:             The clock table.     (line   6)
* code block, batch execution:           Batch execution.     (line   6)
* code block, editing:                   Editing source code. (line   6)
* code block, evaluating:                Evaluating code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, exporting:                 Exporting code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, extracting source code:    Extracting source code.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, header arguments:          Header arguments.    (line   6)
* code block, key bindings:              Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, languages:                 Languages.           (line   6)
* code block, library:                   Library of Babel.    (line   6)
* code block, noweb reference:           Noweb reference syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, results of evaluation:     Results of evaluation.
                                                              (line   6)
* code block, structure:                 Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* code line references, markup rules:    Literal examples.    (line   6)
* code text, markup rules:               Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* column formula:                        Column formulas.     (line   6)
* column view, for properties:           Defining columns.    (line   6)
* column view, in agenda:                Agenda column view.  (line   6)
* column, of field coordinates:          References.          (line  86)
* commands, in agenda buffer:            Agenda commands.     (line   6)
* comment lines:                         Comment lines.       (line   6)
* completion, of dictionary words:       Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of file names:             Handling links.      (line  87)
* completion, of link abbreviations:     Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of links:                  Handling links.      (line  65)
* completion, of option keywords:        Per-file keywords.   (line  24)
* completion, of option keywords <1>:    Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of property keys:          Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of tags:                   Setting tags.        (line  11)
* completion, of tags <1>:               Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of TeX symbols:            Completion.          (line   6)
* completion, of TODO keywords:          Workflow states.     (line  15)
* completion, of TODO keywords <1>:      Completion.          (line   6)
* constants, in calculations:            References.          (line 102)
* constants, in calculations <1>:        References.          (line 123)
* ‘constants.el’:                        Cooperation.         (line  16)
* ‘constcgs’, STARTUP keyword:           In-buffer settings.  (line 143)
* ‘constSI’, STARTUP keyword:            In-buffer settings.  (line 143)
* ‘content’, STARTUP keyword:            Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* ‘content’, STARTUP keyword <1>:        In-buffer settings.  (line  70)
* contents, global visibility state:     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* context-sensitive commands, hooks:     Context-sensitive commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* continuous clocking:                   Resolving idle time. (line  74)
* convert:                               Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line   6)
* converter:                             Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line   6)
* coordinates, of field:                 References.          (line  86)
* copying notes:                         Refile and copy.     (line   6)
* copying, of subtrees:                  Structure editing.   (line   6)
* Countdown timer:                       Countdown timer.     (line   6)
* creating timestamps:                   Creating timestamps. (line   6)
* CSS, for HTML export:                  CSS support.         (line   6)
* ‘CUA.el’:                              Conflicts.           (line  19)
* custom agenda views:                   Custom agenda views. (line   6)
* custom date/time format:               Custom time format.  (line   6)
* custom search strings:                 Custom searches.     (line   6)
* customization:                         Customization.       (line   6)
* ‘customtime’, STARTUP keyword:         In-buffer settings.  (line 139)
* cutting, of subtrees:                  Structure editing.   (line   6)
* cycling, in plain lists:               Plain lists.         (line  67)
* cycling, of agenda files:              Agenda files.        (line  21)
* cycling, of TODO states:               TODO basics.         (line  14)
* cycling, visibility:                   Visibility cycling.  (line   6)
* daily agenda:                          Weekly/daily agenda. (line   6)
* date format, custom:                   Custom time format.  (line   6)
* date range:                            Timestamps.          (line  43)
* date stamp:                            Dates and Times.     (line   6)
* date stamps:                           Timestamps.          (line   6)
* date tree:                             Using capture.       (line   9)
* date, reading in minibuffer:           The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line   6)
* dates:                                 Dates and Times.     (line   6)
* Davison, Dan:                          Working With Source Code.
                                                              (line   6)
* DEADLINE keyword:                      Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line   9)
* deadlines:                             Timestamps.          (line   6)
* debugging, of table formulas:          Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line 117)
* demotion, of subtrees:                 Structure editing.   (line   6)
* dependencies, of TODO states:          TODO dependencies.   (line   6)
* diary entries, creating from agenda:   Agenda commands.     (line 390)
* diary integration:                     Weekly/daily agenda. (line  32)
* dictionary word completion:            Completion.          (line   6)
* directories, for publishing:           Sources and destinations.
                                                              (line   6)
* dispatching agenda commands:           Agenda dispatcher.   (line   6)
* display changing, in agenda:           Agenda commands.     (line  58)
* doc, docx, rtf:                        Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line   6)
* document structure:                    Document Structure.  (line   6)
* document title, markup rules:          Document title.      (line   6)
* Dominik, Carsten:                      Cooperation.         (line  16)
* Dominik, Carsten <1>:                  Cooperation.         (line  26)
* DONE, final TODO keyword:              Per-file keywords.   (line  27)
* dragging, agenda lines:                Agenda commands.     (line 302)
* drawer, for properties:                Property syntax.     (line   6)
* drawer, for state change recording:    Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line   6)
* drawers:                               Drawers.             (line   6)
* Duration, computing:                   Durations and time values.
                                                              (line   6)
* dvipng:                                Math formatting in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* dvipng <1>:                            Working with LaTeX math snippets.
                                                              (line  44)
* dynamic blocks:                        Dynamic blocks.      (line   6)
* dynamic indentation:                   Clean view.          (line   6)
* ‘ecomplete.el’:                        Conflicts.           (line  39)
* editing tables:                        Tables.              (line   6)
* editing, of table formulas:            Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* edits, catching invisible:             Catching invisible edits.
                                                              (line   6)
* effort estimates:                      Effort estimates.    (line   6)
* effort filtering, in agenda:           Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* Elisp links:                           External links.      (line   6)
* ELPA:                                  Activation.          (line   6)
* emacsserver:                           Protocols.           (line   6)
* embedding images in ODT:               Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)
* ‘entitiesplain’, STARTUP keyword:      In-buffer settings.  (line 166)
* ‘entitiespretty’, STARTUP keyword:     Special symbols.     (line  31)
* ‘entitiespretty’, STARTUP keyword <1>: In-buffer settings.  (line 166)
* evaluate time range:                   Creating timestamps. (line  52)
* ‘even’, STARTUP keyword:               In-buffer settings.  (line 129)
* export back-ends, built-in:            Other built-in back-ends.
                                                              (line   6)
* Export, back-ends:                     Export back-ends.    (line   6)
* Export, dispatcher:                    The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line   6)
* export, OpenDocument:                  OpenDocument Text export.
                                                              (line   6)
* Export, settings:                      Export settings.     (line   6)
* Export, writing back-ends:             Adding export back-ends.
                                                              (line   6)
* exporting:                             Exporting.           (line   6)
* exporting agenda views:                Agenda commands.     (line 431)
* exporting agenda views <1>:            Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  13)
* exporting, not:                        Comment lines.       (line   6)
* extended TODO keywords:                TODO extensions.     (line   6)
* external archiving:                    Moving subtrees.     (line   6)
* external links:                        External links.      (line   6)
* external links, in HTML export:        Links in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* faces, for TODO keywords:              Faces for TODO keywords.
                                                              (line   6)
* FAQ:                                   Summary.             (line  53)
* feedback:                              Feedback.            (line   6)
* field coordinates:                     References.          (line  86)
* field formula:                         Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* field references:                      References.          (line  15)
* file links:                            External links.      (line   6)
* file links, searching:                 Search options.      (line   6)
* file name completion:                  Handling links.      (line  87)
* files for agenda:                      Agenda files.        (line   6)
* files, adding to agenda list:          Agenda files.        (line  15)
* files, selecting for publishing:       Selecting files.     (line   6)
* ‘filladapt.el’:                        Conflicts.           (line  51)
* filtering, by tag, category, top headline and effort, in agenda: Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* Filters, exporting:                    Advanced configuration.
                                                              (line  32)
* ‘fnadjust’, STARTUP keyword:           In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fnauto’, STARTUP keyword:             In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fnconfirm’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fninline’, STARTUP keyword:           In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fnlocal’, STARTUP keyword:            In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fnplain’, STARTUP keyword:            In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘fnprompt’, STARTUP keyword:           In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* folded, subtree visibility state:      Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* folding, sparse trees:                 Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* following links:                       Handling links.      (line  98)
* ‘footnote.el’:                         Footnote markup.     (line   6)
* ‘footnote.el’ <1>:                     Cooperation.         (line  66)
* footnotes:                             Footnotes.           (line   6)
* footnotes, markup rules:               Footnote markup.     (line   6)
* format specifier:                      Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line  14)
* format, of links:                      Link format.         (line   6)
* formatting source code, markup rules:  Literal examples.    (line  23)
* formula debugging:                     Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line 117)
* formula editing:                       Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* formula syntax, Calc:                  Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line   6)
* formula, for individual table field:   Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* formula, for range of fields:          Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* formula, for table column:             Column formulas.     (line   6)
* formula, in tables:                    Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* Gillespie, Dave:                       Cooperation.         (line   6)
* global cycling:                        Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* global key bindings:                   Activation.          (line   6)
* global TODO list:                      Global TODO list.    (line   6)
* global visibility states:              Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* Gnus links:                            External links.      (line   6)
* graph, in tables:                      Org-Plot.            (line   6)
* group tags:                            Tag groups.          (line   6)
* group tags, as regular expressions:    Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  60)
* grouping columns in tables:            Column groups.       (line   6)
* habits:                                Tracking your habits.
                                                              (line   6)
* hacking:                               Hacking.             (line   6)
* header, for LaTeX files:               Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line   6)
* headings and sections, markup rules:   Headings and sections.
                                                              (line   6)
* headline navigation:                   Motion.              (line   6)
* headline tagging:                      Tags.                (line   6)
* headline, promotion and demotion:      Structure editing.   (line   6)
* headlines:                             Headlines.           (line   6)
* hide text:                             Visibility cycling.  (line   6)
* ‘hideblocks’, STARTUP keyword:         Blocks.              (line  13)
* ‘hideblocks’, STARTUP keyword <1>:     In-buffer settings.  (line 161)
* ‘hidestars’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 129)
* hiding leading stars:                  Clean view.          (line   6)
* history:                               History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line   6)
* hooks:                                 Hooks.               (line   6)
* horizontal rules, in ASCII export:     ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  50)
* horizontal rules, in LaTeX export:     LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 204)
* horizontal rules, markup rules:        Horizontal rules.    (line   6)
* HTML entities:                         Special symbols.     (line   6)
* HTML export:                           HTML export.         (line   6)
* HTML export, CSS:                      CSS support.         (line   6)
* HTML, and Orgtbl mode:                 Translator functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* hyperlinks:                            Hyperlinks.          (line   6)
* hyperlinks, adding new types:          Adding hyperlink types.
                                                              (line   6)
* iCalendar export:                      iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* identify, ImageMagick:                 Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line  33)
* idle, resolve, dangling:               Resolving idle time. (line   9)
* imagemagick:                           Math formatting in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* imagemagick <1>:                       Working with LaTeX math snippets.
                                                              (line  44)
* images, embedding in ODT:              Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)
* images, inline in HTML:                Images in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* images, inline in LaTeX:               LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  93)
* images, inlining:                      Handling links.      (line 129)
* ‘imenu.el’:                            Cooperation.         (line  29)
* in-buffer settings:                    In-buffer settings.  (line   6)
* inactive timestamp:                    Timestamps.          (line  51)
* include files, markup rules:           Include files.       (line   6)
* ‘indent’, STARTUP keyword:             In-buffer settings.  (line  76)
* index entries, for publishing:         Index entries.       (line   6)
* index, in a publishing project:        Generating an index. (line   6)
* Info links:                            External links.      (line   6)
* inheritance, of properties:            Property inheritance.
                                                              (line   6)
* inheritance, of tags:                  Tag inheritance.     (line   6)
* inlined images, markup rules:          Images and tables.   (line  22)
* ‘inlineimages’, STARTUP keyword:       Handling links.      (line 129)
* ‘inlineimages’, STARTUP keyword <1>:   In-buffer settings.  (line  90)
* inlining images:                       Handling links.      (line 129)
* inlining images in HTML:               Images in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* inlining images in LaTeX:              LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  93)
* inserting links:                       Handling links.      (line  65)
* insertion, of templates:               Easy Templates.      (line   6)
* installation:                          Installation.        (line   6)
* internal links:                        Internal links.      (line   6)
* internal links, in HTML export:        Links in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* introduction:                          Introduction.        (line   6)
* iPhone:                                MobileOrg.           (line   6)
* IRC links:                             External links.      (line   6)
* italic text, markup rules:             Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* jumping, to headlines:                 Motion.              (line   6)
* key bindings, global:                  Activation.          (line   6)
* keyword options:                       Per-file keywords.   (line   6)
* LaTeX class:                           Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line   6)
* LaTeX entities:                        Special symbols.     (line   6)
* LaTeX export:                          LaTeX and PDF export.
                                                              (line   6)
* LaTeX fragments:                       LaTeX fragments.     (line   6)
* LaTeX fragments, markup rules:         Special symbols.     (line   6)
* LaTeX fragments, preview:              Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line   6)
* LaTeX header:                          Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line   6)
* LaTeX interpretation:                  Embedded LaTeX.      (line   6)
* LaTeX sectioning structure:            Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line   6)
* LaTeX, and Orgtbl mode:                A LaTeX example.     (line   6)
* ‘latexpreview’, STARTUP keyword:       In-buffer settings.  (line  97)
* Latin-1 export:                        ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line   6)
* level, require for tags/property match: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  66)
* LibreOffice:                           OpenDocument Text export.
                                                              (line   6)
* LibreOffice <1>:                       Extending ODT export.
                                                              (line  11)
* limits, in agenda:                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 118)
* link abbreviations:                    Link abbreviations.  (line   6)
* link abbreviations, completion of:     Completion.          (line   6)
* link completion:                       Handling links.      (line  65)
* link format:                           Link format.         (line   6)
* links, external:                       External links.      (line   6)
* links, finding next/previous:          Handling links.      (line 146)
* links, handling:                       Handling links.      (line   6)
* links, in HTML export:                 Links in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* links, in ODT export:                  Links in ODT export. (line   6)
* links, internal:                       Internal links.      (line   6)
* links, publishing:                     Publishing links.    (line   6)
* links, radio targets:                  Radio targets.       (line   6)
* links, returning to:                   Handling links.      (line 140)
* Lisp forms, as table formulas:         Formula syntax for Lisp.
                                                              (line   6)
* lists, in other modes:                 Tables in arbitrary syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* lists, markup rules:                   Lists.               (line   6)
* lists, ordered:                        Plain lists.         (line   6)
* lists, plain:                          Plain lists.         (line   6)
* literal examples, markup rules:        Literal examples.    (line   6)
* ‘logdone’, STARTUP keyword:            In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logdrawer’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* logging, of progress:                  Progress logging.    (line   6)
* ‘lognoteclock-out’, STARTUP keyword:   In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘lognotedone’, STARTUP keyword:        In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘lognoteredeadline’, STARTUP keyword:  In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘lognoterefile’, STARTUP keyword:      In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘lognoterepeat’, STARTUP keyword:      In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘lognotereschedule’, STARTUP keyword:  In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logredeadline’, STARTUP keyword:      In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logrefile’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logrepeat’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logreschedule’, STARTUP keyword:      In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘logstatesreversed’, STARTUP keyword:  In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* lookup functions in tables:            Lookup functions.    (line   6)
* Ludlam, Eric M.:                       Cooperation.         (line  39)
* macro replacement, during export:      Macro replacement.   (line   6)
* maintainer:                            Feedback.            (line   6)
* mapping entries, API:                  Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line   6)
* mark ring:                             Handling links.      (line 137)
* Markdown export:                       Markdown export.     (line   6)
* marking characters, tables:            Advanced features.   (line  39)
* match view:                            Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line   6)
* matching, of properties:               Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line   6)
* matching, of tags:                     Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line   6)
* matching, tags:                        Tags.                (line   6)
* math symbols:                          Special symbols.     (line   6)
* MathJax:                               Math formatting in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* MathML:                                Working with LaTeX math snippets.
                                                              (line   9)
* MH-E links:                            External links.      (line   6)
* minor mode for structure editing:      Orgstruct mode.      (line   6)
* minor mode for tables:                 Orgtbl mode.         (line   6)
* MobileOrg:                             MobileOrg.           (line   6)
* mode, for ‘calc’:                      Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line  14)
* motion commands in agenda:             Agenda commands.     (line  19)
* motion, between headlines:             Motion.              (line   6)
* name, of column or field:              References.          (line 102)
* name, of column or field <1>:          References.          (line 123)
* named references:                      References.          (line 102)
* names as TODO keywords:                TODO types.          (line   6)
* narrow columns in tables:              Column width and alignment.
                                                              (line   6)
* ‘noalign’, STARTUP keyword:            In-buffer settings.  (line  84)
* ‘nofnadjust’, STARTUP keyword:         In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘nofninline’, STARTUP keyword:         In-buffer settings.  (line 149)
* ‘nohideblocks’, STARTUP keyword:       Blocks.              (line  13)
* ‘nohideblocks’, STARTUP keyword <1>:   In-buffer settings.  (line 161)
* ‘noindent’, STARTUP keyword:           In-buffer settings.  (line  76)
* ‘noinlineimages’, STARTUP keyword:     Handling links.      (line 129)
* ‘noinlineimages’, STARTUP keyword <1>: In-buffer settings.  (line  90)
* ‘nolatexpreview’, STARTUP keyword:     In-buffer settings.  (line  97)
* ‘nologdone’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologdrawer’, STARTUP keyword:        In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nolognoteclock-out’, STARTUP keyword: In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologredeadline’, STARTUP keyword:    In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologrefile’, STARTUP keyword:        In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologrepeat’, STARTUP keyword:        In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologreschedule’, STARTUP keyword:    In-buffer settings.  (line 103)
* ‘nologstatesreversed’, STARTUP keyword: In-buffer settings. (line 103)
* occur, command:                        Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* occur-tree:                            Storing searches.    (line   9)
* ‘odd’, STARTUP keyword:                In-buffer settings.  (line 129)
* odd-levels-only outlines:              Clean view.          (line   6)
* ODT:                                   OpenDocument Text export.
                                                              (line   6)
* OpenDocument:                          OpenDocument Text export.
                                                              (line   6)
* option keyword completion:             Completion.          (line   6)
* options, for custom agenda views:      Setting Options.     (line   6)
* options, for customization:            Customization.       (line   6)
* options, for publishing:               Publishing options.  (line   6)
* ordered lists:                         Plain lists.         (line   6)
* Org export:                            Org export.          (line   6)
* Org mode, turning on:                  Activation.          (line  27)
* Org syntax:                            Org syntax.          (line   6)
* org-agenda, command:                   Weekly/daily agenda. (line   9)
* org-capture-last-stored:               Using capture.       (line  48)
* ‘org-crypt.el’:                        org-crypt.           (line   6)
* ‘org-decrypt-entry’:                   org-crypt.           (line   6)
* org-hide-block-startup:                In-buffer settings.  (line 160)
* org-insert-drawer:                     Drawers.             (line   6)
* org-insert-drawer <1>:                 Property syntax.     (line  85)
* org-list-insert-radio-list:            Radio lists.         (line   6)
* org-pretty-entities:                   In-buffer settings.  (line 165)
* org-publish-project-alist:             Project alist.       (line   6)
* Orgstruct mode:                        Orgstruct mode.      (line   6)
* Orgtbl mode:                           Orgtbl mode.         (line   6)
* Orgtbl mode <1>:                       Tables in arbitrary syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* Ota, Takaaki:                          Cooperation.         (line  45)
* Outline mode:                          Outlines.            (line   6)
* outline tree:                          Headlines.           (line   6)
* outlines:                              Outlines.            (line   6)
* overview, global visibility state:     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* ‘overview’, STARTUP keyword:           Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* ‘overview’, STARTUP keyword <1>:       In-buffer settings.  (line  70)
* packages, interaction with other:      Interaction.         (line   6)
* paragraphs, markup rules:              Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* pasting, of subtrees:                  Structure editing.   (line   6)
* PDF export:                            LaTeX and PDF export.
                                                              (line   6)
* per-file keywords:                     Per-file keywords.   (line   6)
* plain lists:                           Plain lists.         (line   6)
* plain lists, in LaTeX export:          LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 137)
* plain text external links:             External links.      (line  70)
* plot tables using Gnuplot:             Org-Plot.            (line   6)
* presentation, of agenda items:         Presentation and sorting.
                                                              (line   6)
* print edition:                         Summary.             (line  58)
* printing sparse trees:                 Sparse trees.        (line  49)
* priorities:                            Priorities.          (line   6)
* priorities, of agenda items:           Sorting agenda items.
                                                              (line   6)
* progress logging:                      Progress logging.    (line   6)
* projects, for publishing:              Project alist.       (line   6)
* promotion, of subtrees:                Structure editing.   (line   6)
* proof, in LaTeX export:                LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 167)
* properties:                            Properties and Columns.
                                                              (line   6)
* properties, API:                       Property API.        (line   6)
* properties, API <1>:                   Using the property API.
                                                              (line   6)
* properties, column view:               Defining columns.    (line   6)
* properties, inheritance:               Property inheritance.
                                                              (line   6)
* properties, searching:                 Property searches.   (line   6)
* properties, special:                   Special properties.  (line   6)
* property EXPORT_FILE_NAME:             ODT export commands. (line  10)
* property syntax:                       Property syntax.     (line   6)
* property, +:                           Property syntax.     (line  50)
* property, + <1>:                       Property syntax.     (line  56)
* property, ALT_TITLE:                   Table of contents.   (line  31)
* property, APPENDIX:                    Headings and sectioning structure.
                                                              (line  19)
* property, ARCHIVE:                     Property inheritance.
                                                              (line  32)
* property, ARCHIVE <1>:                 Moving subtrees.     (line  31)
* property, ATTACH_DIR:                  Attachments.         (line  71)
* property, ATTACH_DIR_INHERIT:          Attachments.         (line  76)
* property, BEAMER_ACT:                  Beamer export.       (line  60)
* property, BEAMER_COL:                  Beamer export.       (line  67)
* property, BEAMER_ENV:                  Beamer export.       (line  36)
* property, BEAMER_OPT:                  Beamer export.       (line  60)
* property, BEAMER_REF:                  Beamer export.       (line  47)
* property, CATEGORY:                    Property inheritance.
                                                              (line  29)
* property, CATEGORY <1>:                Categories.          (line  12)
* property, COLUMNS:                     Property inheritance.
                                                              (line  22)
* property, COLUMNS <1>:                 In-buffer settings.  (line  28)
* property, COOKIE_DATA:                 Breaking down tasks. (line  21)
* property, COOKIE_DATA <1>:             Checkboxes.          (line  30)
* property, COPYING:                     Document preamble.   (line  50)
* property, CUSTOM_ID:                   Internal links.      (line   6)
* property, CUSTOM_ID <1>:               Handling links.      (line  21)
* property, DESCRIPTION:                 Headings and sectioning structure.
                                                              (line  22)
* property, DESCRIPTION <1>:             iCalendar export.    (line  43)
* property, Effort:                      Effort estimates.    (line   6)
* property, EXPORT_FILE_NAME:            Export settings.     (line 192)
* property, EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS:          Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  22)
* property, EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS:  Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  22)
* property, EXPORT_TITLE:                Document title.      (line  13)
* property, ID:                          Handling links.      (line  21)
* property, ID <1>:                      Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  22)
* property, ID <2>:                      iCalendar export.    (line  20)
* property, INDEX:                       Indices.             (line  13)
* property, LOCATION:                    iCalendar export.    (line  43)
* property, LOGGING:                     Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line  45)
* property, LOGGING <1>:                 Property inheritance.
                                                              (line  35)
* property, LOG_INTO_DRAWER:             Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line   6)
* property, LOG_INTO_DRAWER <1>:         Clocking commands.   (line   7)
* property, ORDERED:                     TODO dependencies.   (line   6)
* property, ORDERED <1>:                 TODO dependencies.   (line  30)
* property, ORDERED <2>:                 Checkboxes.          (line  46)
* property, ORDERED <3>:                 Checkboxes.          (line  74)
* property, special, ALLTAGS:            Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, BLOCKED:            Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, CATEGORY:           Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, CLOCKSUM:           Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, CLOCKSUM <1>:       Agenda column view.  (line  27)
* property, special, CLOCKSUM_T:         Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, CLOCKSUM_T <1>:     Agenda column view.  (line  49)
* property, special, CLOSED:             Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, DEADLINE:           Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, FILE:               Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, ID:                 Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, ITEM:               Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, PRIORITY:           Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, SCHEDULED:          Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, TAGS:               Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, TIMESTAMP:          Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, TIMESTAMP_IA:       Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, special, TODO:               Special properties.  (line  13)
* property, SUMMARY:                     iCalendar export.    (line  43)
* property, VISIBILITY:                  Initial visibility.  (line  21)
* property, _ALL:                        Property syntax.     (line  42)
* property: CLOCK_MODELINE_TOTAL:        Clocking commands.   (line  20)
* property: LAST_REPEAT:                 Clocking commands.   (line  20)
* protocols, for external access:        Protocols.           (line   6)
* publishing:                            Publishing.          (line   6)
* query editing, in agenda:              Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* radio lists:                           Radio lists.         (line   6)
* radio tables:                          Radio tables.        (line   6)
* radio targets:                         Radio targets.       (line   6)
* range formula:                         Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* range references:                      References.          (line  63)
* ranges, time:                          Timestamps.          (line   6)
* recomputing table fields:              Updating the table.  (line   6)
* references:                            References.          (line   6)
* references, named:                     References.          (line 102)
* references, remote:                    References.          (line 123)
* references, to a different table:      References.          (line 123)
* references, to fields:                 References.          (line  15)
* references, to ranges:                 References.          (line  63)
* refiling notes:                        Refile and copy.     (line   6)
* region, active:                        Structure editing.   (line 114)
* region, active <1>:                    Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* region, active <2>:                    ODT export commands. (line   9)
* regular expressions, with tags search: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  56)
* relative timer:                        Relative timer.      (line   6)
* ‘remember.el’:                         Cooperation.         (line  37)
* reminders:                             Weekly/daily agenda. (line 107)
* remote editing, bulk, from agenda:     Agenda commands.     (line 313)
* remote editing, from agenda:           Agenda commands.     (line 205)
* remote editing, undo:                  Agenda commands.     (line 206)
* remote references:                     References.          (line 123)
* repeated tasks:                        Repeated tasks.      (line   6)
* report, of clocked time:               The clock table.     (line   6)
* resolve idle time:                     Resolving idle time. (line   9)
* revealing context:                     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  37)
* RMAIL links:                           External links.      (line   6)
* Rose, Sebastian:                       JavaScript support.  (line   6)
* row, of field coordinates:             References.          (line  86)
* RSS feeds:                             RSS Feeds.           (line   6)
* rsync:                                 Uploading files.     (line   6)
* SCHEDULED keyword:                     Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  30)
* scheduling:                            Timestamps.          (line   6)
* Schulte, Eric:                         Working With Source Code.
                                                              (line   6)
* Scripts, for agenda processing:        Extracting agenda information.
                                                              (line   6)
* search option in file links:           Search options.      (line   6)
* search strings, custom:                Custom searches.     (line   6)
* search view:                           Search view.         (line   6)
* searching for tags:                    Tag searches.        (line   6)
* searching, for text:                   Search view.         (line   6)
* searching, of properties:              Property searches.   (line   6)
* sectioning structure, for LaTeX export: Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line   6)
* set startup visibility, command:       Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  33)
* setting tags:                          Setting tags.        (line   6)
* SHELL links:                           External links.      (line   6)
* shift-selection-mode:                  Plain lists.         (line  90)
* ‘shift-selection-mode’:                Conflicts.           (line   6)
* show all, command:                     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  35)
* show all, global visibility state:     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* show branches, command:                Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  45)
* show children, command:                Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  48)
* show hidden text:                      Visibility cycling.  (line   6)
* ‘showall’, STARTUP keyword:            Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* ‘showall’, STARTUP keyword <1>:        In-buffer settings.  (line  70)
* ‘showeverything’, STARTUP keyword:     Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* ‘showeverything’, STARTUP keyword <1>: In-buffer settings.  (line  70)
* ‘showstars’, STARTUP keyword:          In-buffer settings.  (line 129)
* sitemap, of published pages:           Sitemap.             (line   6)
* sorting, of agenda items:              Sorting agenda items.
                                                              (line   6)
* sorting, of plain list:                Plain lists.         (line 142)
* sorting, of subtrees:                  Structure editing.   (line   6)
* source blocks, in LaTeX export:        LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 148)
* source code, batch execution:          Batch execution.     (line   6)
* source code, block header arguments:   Header arguments.    (line   6)
* source code, block structure:          Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, editing:                  Editing source code. (line   6)
* source code, evaluating:               Evaluating code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, exporting:                Exporting code blocks.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, extracting:               Extracting source code.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, inline:                   Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line  16)
* source code, language:                 Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line  35)
* source code, languages:                Languages.           (line   6)
* source code, library:                  Library of Babel.    (line   6)
* source code, noweb reference:          Noweb reference syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, results of evaluation:    Results of evaluation.
                                                              (line   6)
* source code, switches:                 Structure of code blocks.
                                                              (line  38)
* source code, working with:             Working With Source Code.
                                                              (line   6)
* sparse tree, for deadlines:            Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  30)
* sparse tree, for TODO:                 TODO basics.         (line  41)
* sparse tree, tag based:                Tags.                (line   6)
* sparse trees:                          Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* Special blocks:                        Special blocks.      (line   6)
* special blocks, in LaTeX export:       LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line 167)
* special keywords:                      In-buffer settings.  (line   6)
* special symbols:                       Special symbols.     (line   6)
* speed keys:                            Speed keys.          (line   6)
* ‘speedbar.el’:                         Cooperation.         (line  39)
* spreadsheet capabilities:              The spreadsheet.     (line   6)
* square brackets, around links:         External links.      (line  70)
* statistics, for checkboxes:            Checkboxes.          (line  30)
* statistics, for TODO items:            Breaking down tasks. (line   6)
* storing links:                         Handling links.      (line  10)
* Storm, Kim. F.:                        Conflicts.           (line  19)
* strike-through text, markup rules:     Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* structure editing:                     Structure editing.   (line   6)
* structure of document:                 Document Structure.  (line   6)
* styles, custom:                        Applying custom styles.
                                                              (line   6)
* styles, custom <1>:                    Working with OpenDocument style files.
                                                              (line   6)
* sublevels, inclusion into tags match:  Tag inheritance.     (line   6)
* sublevels, inclusion into TODO list:   Global TODO list.    (line  34)
* subscript:                             Subscripts and superscripts.
                                                              (line   6)
* subtree cycling:                       Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* subtree visibility states:             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* subtree, cut and paste:                Structure editing.   (line   6)
* subtree, subtree visibility state:     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* subtrees, cut and paste:               Structure editing.   (line   6)
* summary:                               Summary.             (line   6)
* superscript:                           Subscripts and superscripts.
                                                              (line   6)
* syntax, noweb:                         Noweb reference syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* syntax, of formulas:                   Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line   6)
* table editor, built-in:                Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line   6)
* table editor, ‘table.el’:              Cooperation.         (line  45)
* table lookup functions:                Lookup functions.    (line   6)
* table of contents, markup rules:       Table of contents.   (line   6)
* ‘table.el’:                            Cooperation.         (line  43)
* ‘table.el’ <1>:                        Cooperation.         (line  45)
* tables:                                Tables.              (line   6)
* tables, in HTML:                       Tables in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* tables, in LaTeX export:               LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  12)
* tables, in ODT export:                 Tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)
* tables, in ODT export <1>:             Customizing tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)
* tables, in other modes:                Tables in arbitrary syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* tables, markup rules:                  Images and tables.   (line   6)
* tag completion:                        Completion.          (line   6)
* tag filtering, in agenda:              Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* tag inheritance:                       Tag inheritance.     (line   6)
* tag searches:                          Tag searches.        (line   6)
* tags:                                  Tags.                (line   6)
* tags view:                             Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line   6)
* tags, as an agenda view:               Storing searches.    (line   9)
* tags, groups:                          Tag groups.          (line   6)
* tags, setting:                         Setting tags.        (line   6)
* tags-todo:                             Storing searches.    (line   9)
* tags-tree:                             Storing searches.    (line   9)
* tangling:                              Extracting source code.
                                                              (line   6)
* targets, for links:                    Internal links.      (line   6)
* targets, radio:                        Radio targets.       (line   6)
* tasks, breaking down:                  Breaking down tasks. (line   6)
* tasks, repeated:                       Repeated tasks.      (line   6)
* template insertion:                    Easy Templates.      (line   6)
* template, custom:                      Applying custom styles.
                                                              (line   6)
* template, custom <1>:                  Working with OpenDocument style files.
                                                              (line   6)
* templates, for Capture:                Capture templates.   (line   6)
* TeX interpretation:                    Embedded LaTeX.      (line   6)
* TeX macros:                            Special symbols.     (line   6)
* TeX symbol completion:                 Completion.          (line   6)
* Texinfo export:                        Texinfo export.      (line   6)
* text areas, in HTML:                   Text areas in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* text search:                           Search view.         (line   6)
* thanks:                                History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line   5)
* time clocking:                         Clocking work time.  (line   6)
* time format, custom:                   Custom time format.  (line   6)
* time grid:                             Time-of-day specifications.
                                                              (line  28)
* Time, computing:                       Durations and time values.
                                                              (line   6)
* time, reading in minibuffer:           The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line   6)
* time-of-day specification:             Time-of-day specifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* time-sorted view:                      Timeline.            (line   6)
* timeline, single file:                 Timeline.            (line   6)
* timerange:                             Timestamps.          (line  43)
* times:                                 Dates and Times.     (line   6)
* timestamp:                             Dates and Times.     (line   6)
* timestamp <1>:                         Timestamps.          (line  14)
* timestamp, inactive:                   Timestamps.          (line  51)
* timestamp, with repeater interval:     Timestamps.          (line  26)
* timestamps:                            Timestamps.          (line   6)
* timestamps, creating:                  Creating timestamps. (line   6)
* TODO dependencies:                     TODO dependencies.   (line   6)
* TODO items:                            TODO Items.          (line   6)
* TODO keyword matching:                 Global TODO list.    (line  17)
* TODO keyword matching, with tags search: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  66)
* TODO keyword sets:                     Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line   6)
* TODO keywords completion:              Completion.          (line   6)
* TODO list, global:                     Global TODO list.    (line   6)
* TODO types:                            TODO types.          (line   6)
* TODO workflow:                         Workflow states.     (line   6)
* todo, as an agenda view:               Storing searches.    (line   9)
* todo-tree:                             Storing searches.    (line   9)
* top headline filtering, in agenda:     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* transient mark mode:                   Structure editing.   (line 114)
* transient mark mode <1>:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* transient-mark-mode:                   ODT export commands. (line   9)
* translator function:                   Translator functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* trees, sparse:                         Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* trees, visibility:                     Visibility cycling.  (line   6)
* tty key bindings:                      TTY keys.            (line   6)
* types as TODO keywords:                TODO types.          (line   6)
* underlined text, markup rules:         Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* undoing remote-editing events:         Agenda commands.     (line 206)
* unison:                                Uploading files.     (line   6)
* ‘unoconv’:                             Extending ODT export.
                                                              (line  11)
* updating, table:                       Updating the table.  (line   6)
* URL links:                             External links.      (line   6)
* USENET links:                          External links.      (line   6)
* UTF-8 export:                          ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line   6)
* variables, for customization:          Customization.       (line   6)
* vectors, in table calculations:        Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line  11)
* verbatim text, markup rules:           Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* ‘viper.el’:                            Conflicts.           (line  99)
* visibility cycling:                    Visibility cycling.  (line   6)
* visibility cycling, drawers:           Drawers.             (line   6)
* visibility, initialize:                Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* visible text, printing:                Sparse trees.        (line  49)
* VM links:                              External links.      (line  43)
* WANDERLUST links:                      External links.      (line  43)
* weekly agenda:                         Weekly/daily agenda. (line   6)
* Wiegley, John:                         Cooperation.         (line  37)
* ‘windmove.el’:                         Conflicts.           (line  86)
* workflow states as TODO keywords:      Workflow states.     (line   6)
* XEmacs:                                Installation.        (line   6)
* ‘yasnippet.el’:                        Conflicts.           (line  60)
* zip:                                   Pre-requisites for ODT export.
                                                              (line   6)


File: org.info,  Node: Key Index,  Next: Command and Function Index,  Prev: Main Index,  Up: Top

Key index
*********

[index]
* Menu:

* $:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 231)
* %:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 325)
* ':                                     CDLaTeX mode.        (line  38)
* *:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 315)
* +:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 248)
* ,:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 242)
* -:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 252)
* .:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  87)
* /:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* / <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 173)
* ::                                     Agenda commands.     (line 239)
* ;:                                     Countdown timer.     (line   6)
* <:                                     Using column view.   (line  60)
* < <1>:                                 The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* < <2>:                                 Agenda files.        (line  53)
* < <3>:                                 Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  91)
* < <4>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 180)
* <TAB>:                                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  58)
* =:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 102)
* = <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 189)
* >:                                     Using column view.   (line  60)
* > <1>:                                 The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* > <2>:                                 Agenda files.        (line  57)
* > <3>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 281)
* ?:                                     Pulling from MobileOrg.
                                                              (line  32)
* [:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  82)
* [ <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 106)
* \:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  75)
* \ <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 177)
* ]:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  82)
* ^:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  98)
* ^ <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 185)
* ^ <2>:                                 CDLaTeX mode.        (line  30)
* _:                                     CDLaTeX mode.        (line  30)
* `:                                     CDLaTeX mode.        (line  35)
* {:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  82)
* |:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 112)
* | <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 199)
* }:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  82)
* ~:                                     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 150)
* a:                                     Using column view.   (line  50)
* A:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  58)
* a <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 222)
* b:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  85)
* B:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 327)
* c:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 386)
* c <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 387)
* C:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 415)
* C-#:                                   Advanced features.   (line  10)
* C-':                                   Agenda files.        (line  21)
* C-,:                                   Agenda files.        (line  21)
* C-0 C-c C-w:                           Refile and copy.     (line  42)
* C-c !:                                 Creating timestamps. (line  15)
* C-c #:                                 Checkboxes.          (line  79)
* C-c $:                                 Moving subtrees.     (line   9)
* C-c %:                                 Handling links.      (line 135)
* C-c &:                                 Handling links.      (line 139)
* C-c ':                                 Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  32)
* C-c ' <1>:                             Literal examples.    (line  70)
* C-c ' <2>:                             Include files.       (line  36)
* C-c ' <3>:                             Editing source code. (line   6)
* C-c ' <4>:                             Cooperation.         (line  55)
* C-c *:                                 Structure editing.   (line 104)
* C-c * <1>:                             Plain lists.         (line 130)
* C-c * <2>:                             Updating the table.  (line  13)
* C-c +:                                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* ‘C-c ,’:                               Priorities.          (line  24)
* C-c -:                                 Plain lists.         (line 119)
* C-c - <1>:                             Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  91)
* C-c .:                                 Creating timestamps. (line  10)
* C-c /:                                 Sparse trees.        (line  15)
* C-c / <1>:                             Conflicts.           (line  99)
* C-c / a:                               Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  36)
* C-c / b:                               Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-c / d:                               Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  28)
* C-c / m:                               Tag searches.        (line   9)
* C-c / m <1>:                           Property searches.   (line  10)
* C-c / p:                               Property searches.   (line  27)
* C-c / r:                               Sparse trees.        (line  17)
* C-c / t:                               TODO basics.         (line  39)
* C-c ;:                                 Comment lines.       (line  12)
* C-c <:                                 Creating timestamps. (line  25)
* C-c =:                                 Column formulas.     (line  32)
* C-c = <1>:                             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  13)
* C-c >:                                 Creating timestamps. (line  28)
* C-c ?:                                 Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  21)
* C-c @:                                 Structure editing.   (line  52)
* C-c a:                                 Conventions.         (line  33)
* C-c a !:                               Stuck projects.      (line  14)
* C-c a #:                               Stuck projects.      (line  13)
* C-c a ?:                               Pulling from MobileOrg.
                                                              (line  42)
* C-c a a:                               Weekly/daily agenda. (line   9)
* C-c a C:                               Storing searches.    (line   9)
* C-c a e:                               Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  63)
* C-c a L:                               Timeline.            (line  10)
* C-c a m:                               Tag searches.        (line  13)
* C-c a M:                               Tag searches.        (line  16)
* C-c a m <1>:                           Property searches.   (line  12)
* C-c a M <1>:                           Property searches.   (line  15)
* C-c a m <2>:                           Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-c a M <2>:                           Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  17)
* C-c a s:                               Search view.         (line   9)
* C-c a t:                               TODO basics.         (line  49)
* C-c a t <1>:                           Global TODO list.    (line   9)
* C-c a T:                               Global TODO list.    (line  15)
* C-c c:                                 Conventions.         (line  33)
* C-c c <1>:                             Using capture.       (line   6)
* C-c c C:                               Capture templates.   (line  10)
* C-c C-*:                               Plain lists.         (line 134)
* C-c C-a:                               Attachments.         (line  26)
* C-c C-a <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 258)
* C-c C-a a:                             Attachments.         (line  31)
* C-c C-a c:                             Attachments.         (line  37)
* C-c C-a d:                             Attachments.         (line  63)
* C-c C-a D:                             Attachments.         (line  66)
* C-c C-a f:                             Attachments.         (line  57)
* C-c C-a F:                             Attachments.         (line  60)
* C-c C-a i:                             Attachments.         (line  75)
* C-c C-a l:                             Attachments.         (line  37)
* C-c C-a m:                             Attachments.         (line  37)
* C-c C-a n:                             Attachments.         (line  41)
* C-c C-a o:                             Attachments.         (line  48)
* C-c C-a O:                             Attachments.         (line  54)
* C-c C-a s:                             Attachments.         (line  70)
* C-c C-a z:                             Attachments.         (line  44)
* C-c C-b:                               Motion.              (line  13)
* C-c C-b <1>:                           Beamer export.       (line 139)
* C-c C-c:                               Plain lists.         (line 115)
* C-c C-c <1>:                           Footnotes.           (line  82)
* C-c C-c <2>:                           Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  57)
* C-c C-c <3>:                           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  41)
* C-c C-c <4>:                           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  77)
* C-c C-c <5>:                           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  84)
* C-c C-c <6>:                           Checkboxes.          (line  52)
* C-c C-c <7>:                           Setting tags.        (line  19)
* C-c C-c <8>:                           Property syntax.     (line  87)
* C-c C-c <9>:                           Using column view.   (line  45)
* C-c C-c <10>:                          Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  46)
* C-c C-c <11>:                          Creating timestamps. (line  23)
* C-c C-c <12>:                          Clocking commands.   (line  48)
* C-c C-c <13>:                          Clocking commands.   (line  48)
* C-c C-c <14>:                          The clock table.     (line  16)
* C-c C-c <15>:                          Using capture.       (line  15)
* C-c C-c <16>:                          Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line  15)
* C-c C-c <17>:                          Evaluating code blocks.
                                                              (line  19)
* C-c C-c <18>:                          Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* C-c C-c <19>:                          The very busy C-c C-c key.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-c C-c <20>:                          Cooperation.         (line  45)
* C-c C-c c:                             Property syntax.     (line 100)
* C-c C-c d:                             Property syntax.     (line  96)
* C-c C-c D:                             Property syntax.     (line  98)
* C-c C-c s:                             Property syntax.     (line  90)
* C-c C-d:                               Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-c C-d <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 263)
* C-c C-e:                               The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  11)
* C-c C-e c a:                           iCalendar export.    (line  33)
* C-c C-e c c:                           iCalendar export.    (line  37)
* C-c C-e c f:                           iCalendar export.    (line  31)
* C-c C-e C-v:                           Sparse trees.        (line  49)
* C-c C-e h h:                           HTML Export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-c C-e h H:                           HTML Export commands.
                                                              (line  10)
* C-c C-e i i:                           Texinfo export commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-c C-e i t:                           Texinfo export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-c C-e l b:                           Beamer export.       (line  13)
* C-c C-e l B:                           Beamer export.       (line  16)
* C-c C-e l l:                           LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-c C-e l L:                           LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-c C-e l P:                           Beamer export.       (line  18)
* C-c C-e l p:                           LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line  11)
* C-c C-e m m:                           Markdown export.     (line  16)
* C-c C-e m M:                           Markdown export.     (line  19)
* C-c C-e o o:                           ODT export commands. (line   9)
* C-c C-e O o:                           Org export.          (line  13)
* C-c C-e O O:                           Org export.          (line  16)
* C-c C-e P a:                           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  14)
* C-c C-e P f:                           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-c C-e P p:                           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  10)
* C-c C-e P x:                           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line   8)
* C-c C-e t a/l/u:                       ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  17)
* C-c C-e t A/L/U:                       ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  21)
* C-c C-f:                               Motion.              (line  11)
* C-c C-j:                               Motion.              (line  17)
* C-c C-k:                               Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  45)
* C-c C-k <1>:                           Using capture.       (line  31)
* C-c C-l:                               Handling links.      (line  64)
* C-c C-n:                               Motion.              (line   8)
* C-c C-o:                               Footnotes.           (line  86)
* C-c C-o <1>:                           Handling links.      (line  98)
* C-c C-o <2>:                           Creating timestamps. (line  32)
* C-c C-o <3>:                           Agenda commands.     (line  50)
* C-c C-o <4>:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* C-c C-p:                               Motion.              (line   9)
* C-c C-q:                               Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  44)
* C-c C-q <1>:                           Setting tags.        (line  10)
* C-c C-r:                               Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  37)
* C-c C-r <1>:                           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  45)
* C-c C-s:                               Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  17)
* C-c C-s <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 260)
* C-c C-t:                               TODO basics.         (line  13)
* C-c C-t <1>:                           Clocking commands.   (line  61)
* C-c C-u:                               Motion.              (line  15)
* C-c C-v a:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  55)
* C-c C-v b:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* C-c C-v c:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  42)
* C-c C-v C-a:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  55)
* C-c C-v C-b:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* C-c C-v C-c:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  42)
* C-c C-v C-d:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  36)
* C-c C-v C-e:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  20)
* C-c C-v C-f:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  40)
* C-c C-v C-g:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* C-c C-v C-h:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  56)
* C-c C-v C-i:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* C-c C-v C-I:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* C-c C-v C-j:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  44)
* C-c C-v C-l:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  46)
* C-c C-v C-n:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* C-c C-v C-o:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* C-c C-v C-p:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* C-c C-v C-r:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  30)
* C-c C-v C-s:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-c C-v C-t:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* C-c C-v C-u:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  26)
* C-c C-v C-v:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-c C-v C-x:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* C-c C-v C-z:                           Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  52)
* C-c C-v d:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  36)
* C-c C-v e:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  20)
* C-c C-v f:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  40)
* C-c C-v g:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* C-c C-v h:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  56)
* C-c C-v i:                             Library of Babel.    (line  20)
* C-c C-v i <1>:                         Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* C-c C-v I:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* C-c C-v j:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  44)
* C-c C-v l:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  46)
* C-c C-v n:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* C-c C-v o:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* C-c C-v p:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* C-c C-v r:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  30)
* C-c C-v s:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-c C-v t:                             Extracting source code.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-c C-v t <1>:                         Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* C-c C-v u:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  26)
* C-c C-v v:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-c C-v x:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* C-c C-v z:                             Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  52)
* C-c C-w:                               Structure editing.   (line  84)
* C-c C-w <1>:                           Using capture.       (line  22)
* C-c C-w <2>:                           Refile and copy.     (line  14)
* C-c C-w <3>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 220)
* C-c C-x ,:                             Relative timer.      (line  19)
* C-c C-x -:                             Relative timer.      (line  13)
* C-c C-x .:                             Relative timer.      (line  10)
* C-c C-x 0:                             Relative timer.      (line  26)
* C-c C-x ;:                             Countdown timer.     (line   6)
* C-c C-x <:                             Agenda files.        (line  39)
* C-c C-x >:                             Agenda files.        (line  46)
* C-c C-x > <1>:                         Agenda commands.     (line 163)
* C-c C-x a:                             Internal archiving.  (line  32)
* C-c C-x A:                             Internal archiving.  (line  43)
* C-c C-x a <1>:                         Agenda commands.     (line 226)
* C-c C-x A <1>:                         Agenda commands.     (line 228)
* C-c C-x b:                             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  51)
* C-c C-x b <1>:                         Agenda commands.     (line  42)
* C-c C-x c:                             Structure editing.   (line  77)
* C-c C-x C-a:                           Archiving.           (line  11)
* C-c C-x C-a <1>:                       Agenda commands.     (line 222)
* C-c C-x C-b:                           Checkboxes.          (line  56)
* C-c C-x C-c:                           Using column view.   (line   9)
* C-c C-x C-c <1>:                       Agenda commands.     (line 153)
* C-c C-x C-c <2>:                       Agenda column view.  (line  11)
* C-c C-x C-d:                           Clocking commands.   (line  71)
* C-c C-x C-e:                           Clocking commands.   (line  46)
* C-c C-x C-e <1>:                       Effort estimates.    (line  17)
* C-c C-x C-i:                           Clocking commands.   (line   6)
* C-c C-x C-j:                           Clocking commands.   (line  67)
* C-c C-x C-k:                           Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  23)
* C-c C-x C-l:                           Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-c C-x C-n:                           Handling links.      (line 143)
* C-c C-x C-o:                           Clocking commands.   (line  34)
* C-c C-x C-p:                           Handling links.      (line 143)
* C-c C-x C-q:                           Clocking commands.   (line  64)
* C-c C-x C-r:                           The clock table.     (line  10)
* C-c C-x C-s:                           Moving subtrees.     (line   9)
* C-c C-x C-s <1>:                       Agenda commands.     (line 231)
* C-c C-x C-t:                           Custom time format.  (line  12)
* C-c C-x C-u:                           Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  46)
* C-c C-x C-u <1>:                       The clock table.     (line  16)
* C-c C-x C-u <2>:                       Dynamic blocks.      (line  21)
* C-c C-x C-v:                           Handling links.      (line 127)
* C-c C-x C-w:                           Structure editing.   (line  55)
* C-c C-x C-w <1>:                       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 117)
* C-c C-x C-x:                           Clocking commands.   (line  41)
* C-c C-x C-y:                           Structure editing.   (line  61)
* C-c C-x C-y <1>:                       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 121)
* C-c C-x d:                             Drawers.             (line   6)
* C-c C-x e:                             Effort estimates.    (line  14)
* C-c C-x f:                             Footnotes.           (line  48)
* C-c C-x g:                             RSS Feeds.           (line  23)
* C-c C-x G:                             RSS Feeds.           (line  26)
* C-c C-x i:                             Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  44)
* C-c C-x M-w:                           Structure editing.   (line  58)
* C-c C-x M-w <1>:                       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 113)
* C-c C-x o:                             TODO dependencies.   (line  29)
* C-c C-x o <1>:                         Checkboxes.          (line  72)
* C-c C-x p:                             Property syntax.     (line  80)
* C-c C-x p <1>:                         Header arguments in Org mode properties.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-c C-x q:                             Tag groups.          (line  34)
* C-c C-x v:                             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  56)
* C-c C-x \:                             Special symbols.     (line  31)
* C-c C-x \ <1>:                         Subscripts and superscripts.
                                                              (line  21)
* C-c C-y:                               Creating timestamps. (line  50)
* C-c C-y <1>:                           Clocking commands.   (line  48)
* C-c C-y <2>:                           Clocking commands.   (line  48)
* C-c C-z:                               Drawers.             (line  35)
* C-c C-z <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 254)
* C-c l:                                 Handling links.      (line   9)
* C-c l <1>:                             Literal examples.    (line  78)
* C-c M-w:                               Refile and copy.     (line  12)
* C-c <RET>:                             Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  94)
* C-c <TAB>:                             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  48)
* C-c [:                                 Agenda files.        (line  15)
* C-c \:                                 Tag searches.        (line   9)
* C-c \ <1>:                             Property searches.   (line  10)
* C-c ]:                                 Agenda files.        (line  19)
* C-c ^:                                 Structure editing.   (line  87)
* C-c ^ <1>:                             Plain lists.         (line 142)
* C-c ^ <2>:                             Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  97)
* C-c `:                                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 156)
* C-c {:                                 Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  29)
* C-c { <1>:                             CDLaTeX mode.        (line  20)
* C-c |:                                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  41)
* C-c | <1>:                             Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 172)
* C-c }:                                 Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-c } <1>:                             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  67)
* C-c ~:                                 Cooperation.         (line  57)
* C-k:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 215)
* C-<RET>:                               Structure editing.   (line  19)
* C-S-<left>:                            Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line  25)
* C-S-<left> <1>:                        Agenda commands.     (line 214)
* C-S-<RET>:                             Structure editing.   (line  26)
* C-S-<right>:                           Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line  25)
* C-S-<right> <1>:                       Agenda commands.     (line 212)
* C-S-<up/down>:                         Clocking commands.   (line  52)
* C-‘TAB’:                               Internal archiving.  (line  41)
* C-u C-c !:                             Creating timestamps. (line  17)
* C-u C-c *:                             Updating the table.  (line  16)
* C-u C-c .:                             Creating timestamps. (line  17)
* C-u C-c =:                             Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line  27)
* C-u C-c = <1>:                         Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  13)
* C-u C-c c:                             Using capture.       (line  42)
* C-u C-c C-c:                           Updating the table.  (line  18)
* C-u C-c C-l:                           Handling links.      (line  85)
* C-u C-c C-t:                           TODO basics.         (line  28)
* C-u C-c C-w:                           Refile and copy.     (line  32)
* C-u C-c C-x ,:                         Relative timer.      (line  22)
* C-u C-c C-x a:                         Internal archiving.  (line  35)
* C-u C-c C-x C-s:                       Moving subtrees.     (line  11)
* C-u C-c C-x C-u:                       Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  49)
* C-u C-c C-x C-u <1>:                   The clock table.     (line  19)
* C-u C-c C-x C-u <2>:                   Dynamic blocks.      (line  22)
* C-u C-u C-c *:                         Updating the table.  (line  21)
* C-u C-u C-c =:                         Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  16)
* C-u C-u C-c c:                         Using capture.       (line  44)
* C-u C-u C-c C-c:                       Updating the table.  (line  21)
* C-u C-u C-c C-t:                       Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line  25)
* C-u C-u C-c C-w:                       Refile and copy.     (line  34)
* C-u C-u C-u C-c C-t:                   TODO dependencies.   (line  34)
* C-u C-u C-u <TAB>:                     Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  35)
* C-u C-u <TAB>:                         Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  33)
* C-u C-u <TAB> <1>:                     Initial visibility.  (line  25)
* C-v:                                   The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* C-x C-s:                               Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  41)
* C-x C-s <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line 150)
* C-x C-w:                               Agenda commands.     (line 430)
* C-x C-w <1>:                           Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-x n b:                               Structure editing.   (line 100)
* C-x n s:                               Structure editing.   (line  98)
* C-x n w:                               Structure editing.   (line 102)
* C-y:                                   Structure editing.   (line  66)
* C-_:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 206)
* d:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  62)
* D:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  93)
* e:                                     Using column view.   (line  40)
* E:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 133)
* F:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  36)
* f:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  80)
* g:                                     Using column view.   (line  22)
* G:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 139)
* g <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 148)
* H:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 418)
* I:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 284)
* i:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 390)
* j:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  89)
* J:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  91)
* J <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 291)
* k:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 293)
* k a:                                   Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  25)
* k s:                                   Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  25)
* L:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  30)
* l:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  96)
* m:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 313)
* M:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 408)
* M-*:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 323)
* M-<down>:                              Agenda commands.     (line 306)
* M-<up>:                                Agenda commands.     (line 302)
* M-a:                                   Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  67)
* M-<down> <1>:                          Plain lists.         (line  93)
* M-<down> <2>:                          Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  83)
* M-<down> <3>:                          Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  64)
* M-down:                                Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  13)
* M-e:                                   Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  70)
* M-g M-n:                               Sparse trees.        (line  28)
* M-g M-p:                               Sparse trees.        (line  30)
* M-g n:                                 Sparse trees.        (line  28)
* M-g p:                                 Sparse trees.        (line  30)
* M-h:                                   Structure editing.   (line  47)
* M-<left>:                              Structure editing.   (line  35)
* M-<left> <1>:                          Plain lists.         (line  98)
* M-<left> <2>:                          Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  77)
* M-m:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 321)
* M-<RET>:                               Structure editing.   (line   6)
* M-<RET> <1>:                           Plain lists.         (line  77)
* M-<RET> <2>:                           Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 126)
* M-<RET> <3>:                           Relative timer.      (line  16)
* M-<right>:                             Structure editing.   (line  37)
* M-<right> <1>:                         Plain lists.         (line  98)
* M-<right> <2>:                         Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  77)
* M-S-<down>:                            Structure editing.   (line  45)
* M-S-<down> <1>:                        Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  88)
* M-S-<down> <2>:                        Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  60)
* M-S-<left>:                            Structure editing.   (line  39)
* M-S-<left> <1>:                        Plain lists.         (line 102)
* M-S-<left> <2>:                        Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  79)
* M-S-<left> <3>:                        The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* M-S-<RET>:                             Structure editing.   (line  23)
* M-S-<RET> <1>:                         Plain lists.         (line  86)
* M-S-<RET> <2>:                         Checkboxes.          (line  70)
* M-S-<right>:                           Structure editing.   (line  41)
* M-S-<right> <1>:                       Plain lists.         (line 102)
* M-S-<right> <2>:                       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  81)
* M-S-<right> <3>:                       The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* M-S-<up>:                              Structure editing.   (line  43)
* M-S-<up> <1>:                          Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  86)
* M-S-<up> <2>:                          Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  60)
* M-<TAB>:                               Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  54)
* M-<TAB> <1>:                           Per-file keywords.   (line  24)
* M-<TAB> <2>:                           Setting tags.        (line   6)
* M-<TAB> <3>:                           Property syntax.     (line  78)
* M-<TAB> <4>:                           Completion.          (line  16)
* M-<up> <1>:                            Plain lists.         (line  93)
* M-<up> <2>:                            Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  83)
* M-<up> <3>:                            Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  64)
* M-up:                                  Key bindings and useful functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* M-v:                                   The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* M-x org-iswitchb:                      Agenda files.        (line  24)
* mouse-1:                               Footnotes.           (line  86)
* mouse-1 <1>:                           Handling links.      (line 120)
* mouse-1 <2>:                           The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* mouse-2:                               Footnotes.           (line  86)
* mouse-2 <1>:                           Handling links.      (line 120)
* mouse-2 <2>:                           Agenda commands.     (line  32)
* mouse-3:                               Handling links.      (line 124)
* mouse-3 <1>:                           Agenda commands.     (line  27)
* n:                                     Using column view.   (line  37)
* n <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line  19)
* o:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  60)
* O:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 287)
* p:                                     Using column view.   (line  37)
* p <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line  20)
* P:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 246)
* q:                                     Using column view.   (line  24)
* q <1>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 444)
* r:                                     Using column view.   (line  19)
* r <1>:                                 Global TODO list.    (line  22)
* R:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 115)
* r <2>:                                 Agenda commands.     (line 142)
* <RET>:                                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  63)
* <RET> <1>:                             Handling links.      (line 118)
* <RET> <2>:                             Setting tags.        (line 114)
* <RET> <3>:                             The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* <RET> <4>:                             Agenda commands.     (line  34)
* s:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 150)
* S:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 411)
* S-<down>:                              Plain lists.         (line  87)
* S-<down> <1>:                          Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* S-<down> <2>:                          Priorities.          (line  29)
* S-<down> <3>:                          Creating timestamps. (line  39)
* S-<down> <4>:                          The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* S-<down> <5>:                          Agenda commands.     (line 252)
* S-<left>:                              Plain lists.         (line 138)
* S-<left> <1>:                          Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* S-<left> <2>:                          TODO basics.         (line  34)
* S-<left> <3>:                          Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line  32)
* S-<left> <4>:                          Property syntax.     (line  93)
* S-<left> <5>:                          Using column view.   (line  32)
* S-<left> <6>:                          Creating timestamps. (line  35)
* S-<left> <7>:                          The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* S-<left> <8>:                          The clock table.     (line  22)
* S-<left> <9>:                          Agenda commands.     (line 278)
* S-M-<left>:                            Using column view.   (line  64)
* S-M-<RET>:                             TODO basics.         (line  56)
* S-M-<right>:                           Using column view.   (line  62)
* S-M-<up/down>:                         Clocking commands.   (line  55)
* S-<RET>:                               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 143)
* S-<right>:                             Plain lists.         (line 138)
* S-<right> <1>:                         Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* S-<right> <2>:                         TODO basics.         (line  34)
* S-<right> <3>:                         Multiple sets in one file.
                                                              (line  32)
* S-<right> <4>:                         Property syntax.     (line  93)
* S-<right> <5>:                         Using column view.   (line  32)
* S-<right> <6>:                         Creating timestamps. (line  35)
* S-<right> <7>:                         The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* S-<right> <8>:                         The clock table.     (line  22)
* S-<right> <9>:                         Agenda commands.     (line 266)
* S-<TAB>:                               Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* S-<TAB> <1>:                           Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  61)
* S-<up>:                                Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* S-<up> <1>:                            Priorities.          (line  29)
* S-<up> <2>:                            Creating timestamps. (line  39)
* S-<up> <3>:                            The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  82)
* S-<up> <4>:                            Agenda commands.     (line 248)
* <SPC>:                                 Setting tags.        (line 113)
* <SPC> <1>:                             Agenda commands.     (line  27)
* t:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 209)
* T:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 235)
* <TAB> <1>:                             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* <TAB> <2>:                             Structure editing.   (line  30)
* <TAB> <3>:                             Plain lists.         (line  66)
* <TAB> <4>:                             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  48)
* <TAB> <5>:                             Setting tags.        (line 106)
* <TAB> <6>:                             Agenda commands.     (line  32)
* <TAB> <7>:                             CDLaTeX mode.        (line  21)
* u:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 317)
* U:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 319)
* v:                                     Using column view.   (line  47)
* v a:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 109)
* v A:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 111)
* v c:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 125)
* v d:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  62)
* v E:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 133)
* v l:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  96)
* v L:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  98)
* v m:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  66)
* v R:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 115)
* v SPC:                                 Agenda commands.     (line  68)
* v t:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  65)
* v w:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  64)
* v y:                                   Agenda commands.     (line  67)
* v [:                                   Agenda commands.     (line 106)
* w:                                     Agenda commands.     (line  64)
* X:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 289)
* x:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 445)
* z:                                     Agenda commands.     (line 254)


File: org.info,  Node: Command and Function Index,  Next: Variable Index,  Prev: Key Index,  Up: Top

Command and function index
**************************

[index]
* Menu:

* lisp-complete-symbol:                  Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  54)
* next-error:                            Sparse trees.        (line  28)
* org-agenda:                            Activation.          (line   6)
* org-agenda <1>:                        Conventions.         (line  33)
* org-agenda-add-note:                   Agenda commands.     (line 254)
* org-agenda-archive:                    Agenda commands.     (line 231)
* org-agenda-archive-default-with-confirmation: Agenda commands.
                                                              (line 222)
* org-agenda-archive-to-archive-sibling: Agenda commands.     (line 228)
* org-agenda-archives-mode:              Agenda commands.     (line 109)
* org-agenda-archives-mode 'files:       Agenda commands.     (line 111)
* org-agenda-bulk-action:                Agenda commands.     (line 327)
* org-agenda-bulk-mark:                  Agenda commands.     (line 313)
* org-agenda-bulk-mark-all:              Agenda commands.     (line 315)
* org-agenda-bulk-mark-regexp:           Agenda commands.     (line 325)
* org-agenda-bulk-remove-all-marks:      Agenda commands.     (line 319)
* org-agenda-bulk-toggle:                Agenda commands.     (line 321)
* org-agenda-bulk-toggle-all:            Agenda commands.     (line 323)
* org-agenda-bulk-unmark:                Agenda commands.     (line 317)
* org-agenda-capture:                    Agenda commands.     (line 293)
* org-agenda-clock-cancel:               Agenda commands.     (line 289)
* org-agenda-clock-goto:                 Agenda commands.     (line  91)
* org-agenda-clock-goto <1>:             Agenda commands.     (line 291)
* org-agenda-clock-in:                   Agenda commands.     (line 284)
* org-agenda-clock-out:                  Agenda commands.     (line 287)
* org-agenda-clockreport-mode:           Agenda commands.     (line 115)
* org-agenda-columns:                    Agenda commands.     (line 153)
* org-agenda-columns <1>:                Agenda column view.  (line  11)
* org-agenda-convert-date:               Agenda commands.     (line 415)
* org-agenda-date-prompt:                Agenda commands.     (line 281)
* org-agenda-day-view:                   Agenda commands.     (line  62)
* org-agenda-deadline:                   Agenda commands.     (line 263)
* org-agenda-diary-entry:                Agenda commands.     (line 390)
* org-agenda-do-date-earlier:            Agenda commands.     (line 278)
* org-agenda-do-date-later:              Agenda commands.     (line 266)
* org-agenda-drag-line-backward:         Agenda commands.     (line 302)
* org-agenda-drag-line-forward:          Agenda commands.     (line 306)
* org-agenda-earlier:                    Agenda commands.     (line  85)
* org-agenda-entry-text-mode:            Agenda commands.     (line 133)
* org-agenda-exit:                       Agenda commands.     (line 445)
* org-agenda-file-to-front:              Agenda files.        (line  15)
* org-agenda-filter-by-category:         Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  91)
* org-agenda-filter-by-category <1>:     Agenda commands.     (line 180)
* org-agenda-filter-by-regexp:           Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 102)
* org-agenda-filter-by-regexp <1>:       Agenda commands.     (line 189)
* org-agenda-filter-by-tag:              Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-agenda-filter-by-tag <1>:          Agenda commands.     (line 173)
* org-agenda-filter-by-tag-refine:       Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  75)
* org-agenda-filter-by-tag-refine <1>:   Agenda commands.     (line 177)
* org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline:     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  98)
* org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline <1>: Agenda commands.     (line 185)
* org-agenda-filter-remove-all:          Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 112)
* org-agenda-filter-remove-all <1>:      Agenda commands.     (line 199)
* org-agenda-follow-mode:                Agenda commands.     (line  36)
* org-agenda-fortnight-view:             Agenda commands.     (line  65)
* org-agenda-goto:                       Agenda commands.     (line  32)
* org-agenda-goto-calendar:              Agenda commands.     (line 386)
* org-agenda-goto-date:                  Agenda commands.     (line  89)
* org-agenda-goto-today:                 Agenda commands.     (line  87)
* org-agenda-holidays:                   Agenda commands.     (line 418)
* org-agenda-kill:                       Agenda commands.     (line 215)
* org-agenda-later:                      Agenda commands.     (line  80)
* org-agenda-limit-interactively:        Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 150)
* org-agenda-list:                       Weekly/daily agenda. (line   9)
* org-agenda-list-stuck-projects:        Stuck projects.      (line  13)
* org-agenda-log-mode:                   Agenda commands.     (line  96)
* org-agenda-manipulate-query-add:       Agenda commands.     (line 106)
* org-agenda-month-view:                 Agenda commands.     (line  66)
* org-agenda-next-line:                  Agenda commands.     (line  19)
* org-agenda-open-link:                  Agenda commands.     (line  50)
* org-agenda-phases-of-moon:             Agenda commands.     (line 408)
* org-agenda-previous-line:              Agenda commands.     (line  20)
* org-agenda-priority-down:              Agenda commands.     (line 252)
* org-agenda-priority-up:                Agenda commands.     (line 248)
* org-agenda-quit:                       Agenda commands.     (line 444)
* org-agenda-recenter:                   Agenda commands.     (line  30)
* org-agenda-redo:                       Agenda commands.     (line 142)
* org-agenda-redo <1>:                   Agenda commands.     (line 148)
* org-agenda-refile:                     Agenda commands.     (line 220)
* org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock:    Agenda files.        (line  46)
* org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock <1>: Agenda files.       (line  57)
* org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock <2>: Agenda commands.    (line 163)
* org-agenda-reset-view:                 Agenda commands.     (line  68)
* org-agenda-schedule:                   Agenda commands.     (line 260)
* org-agenda-set-restriction-lock:       Agenda files.        (line  39)
* org-agenda-set-tags:                   Agenda commands.     (line 239)
* org-agenda-show-and-scroll-up:         Agenda commands.     (line  27)
* org-agenda-show-priority:              Agenda commands.     (line 246)
* org-agenda-show-tags:                  Agenda commands.     (line 235)
* org-agenda-sunrise-sunset:             Agenda commands.     (line 411)
* org-agenda-switch-to:                  Agenda commands.     (line  34)
* org-agenda-todo:                       Agenda commands.     (line 209)
* org-agenda-todo-nextset:               Agenda commands.     (line 212)
* org-agenda-todo-previousset:           Agenda commands.     (line 214)
* org-agenda-toggle-archive-tag:         Agenda commands.     (line 226)
* org-agenda-toggle-diary:               Agenda commands.     (line  93)
* org-agenda-toggle-time-grid:           Agenda commands.     (line 139)
* org-agenda-tree-to-indirect-buffer:    Agenda commands.     (line  42)
* org-agenda-undo:                       Agenda commands.     (line 206)
* org-agenda-week-view:                  Agenda commands.     (line  64)
* org-agenda-write:                      Agenda commands.     (line 430)
* org-agenda-write <1>:                  Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  12)
* org-agenda-year-view:                  Agenda commands.     (line  67)
* org-archive-subtree:                   Moving subtrees.     (line   9)
* org-archive-subtree-default:           Archiving.           (line  11)
* org-archive-to-archive-sibling:        Internal archiving.  (line  43)
* org-ascii-export-as-ascii:             ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  21)
* org-ascii-export-to-ascii:             ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-attach:                            Attachments.         (line  26)
* org-attach <1>:                        Agenda commands.     (line 258)
* org-attach-attach:                     Attachments.         (line  31)
* org-attach-delete-all:                 Attachments.         (line  66)
* org-attach-delete-one:                 Attachments.         (line  63)
* org-attach-new:                        Attachments.         (line  41)
* org-attach-open:                       Attachments.         (line  48)
* org-attach-open-in-emacs:              Attachments.         (line  54)
* org-attach-reveal:                     Attachments.         (line  57)
* org-attach-reveal-in-emacs:            Attachments.         (line  60)
* org-attach-set-directory:              Attachments.         (line  70)
* org-attach-set-inherit:                Attachments.         (line  75)
* org-attach-sync:                       Attachments.         (line  44)
* org-backward-same-level:               Motion.              (line  13)
* org-beamer-export-as-latex:            Beamer export.       (line  16)
* org-beamer-export-to-latex:            Beamer export.       (line  13)
* org-beamer-export-to-pdf:              Beamer export.       (line  18)
* org-beamer-select-environment:         Beamer export.       (line 139)
* org-buffer-property-keys:              Using the property API.
                                                              (line  33)
* org-calendar-goto-agenda:              Agenda commands.     (line 387)
* org-capture:                           Activation.          (line   6)
* org-capture <1>:                       Conventions.         (line  33)
* org-capture <2>:                       Using capture.       (line   6)
* org-capture-finalize:                  Using capture.       (line  15)
* org-capture-kill:                      Using capture.       (line  31)
* org-capture-refile:                    Using capture.       (line  22)
* org-check-after-date:                  Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  36)
* org-check-before-date:                 Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  34)
* org-check-deadlines:                   Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  28)
* org-clock-cancel:                      Clocking commands.   (line  64)
* org-clock-display:                     Clocking commands.   (line  71)
* org-clock-goto:                        Clocking commands.   (line  67)
* org-clock-in:                          Clocking commands.   (line   6)
* org-clock-in-last:                     Clocking commands.   (line  41)
* org-clock-modify-effort-estimate:      Clocking commands.   (line  46)
* org-clock-modify-effort-estimate <1>:  Effort estimates.    (line  17)
* org-clock-out:                         Clocking commands.   (line  34)
* org-clock-report:                      The clock table.     (line  10)
* org-clock-timestamps-up/down:          Clocking commands.   (line  52)
* org-clocktable-try-shift:              The clock table.     (line  22)
* org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift:     Structure editing.   (line  77)
* org-columns:                           Using column view.   (line   9)
* org-columns-delete:                    Using column view.   (line  64)
* org-columns-edit-allowed:              Using column view.   (line  50)
* org-columns-edit-value:                Using column view.   (line  40)
* org-columns-narrow:                    Using column view.   (line  60)
* org-columns-new:                       Using column view.   (line  62)
* org-columns-next-allowed-value:        Using column view.   (line  37)
* org-columns-previous-allowed-value:    Using column view.   (line  37)
* org-columns-quit:                      Using column view.   (line  24)
* org-columns-redo:                      Using column view.   (line  19)
* org-columns-redo <1>:                  Using column view.   (line  22)
* org-columns-set-tags-or-toggle:        Using column view.   (line  45)
* org-columns-show-value:                Using column view.   (line  47)
* org-columns-widen:                     Using column view.   (line  60)
* org-compute-property-at-point:         Property syntax.     (line 100)
* org-copy:                              Refile and copy.     (line  12)
* org-copy <1>:                          Refile and copy.     (line  13)
* org-copy-subtree:                      Structure editing.   (line  58)
* org-copy-visible:                      Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  56)
* org-cut-subtree:                       Structure editing.   (line  55)
* org-cycle:                             Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  10)
* org-cycle <1>:                         Structure editing.   (line  30)
* org-cycle <2>:                         Plain lists.         (line  66)
* org-cycle-agenda-files:                Agenda files.        (line  21)
* org-date-from-calendar:                Creating timestamps. (line  25)
* org-dblock-update:                     Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  46)
* org-dblock-update <1>:                 The clock table.     (line  16)
* org-dblock-update <2>:                 Dynamic blocks.      (line  21)
* org-deadline:                          Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-delete-property:                   Property syntax.     (line  96)
* org-delete-property-globally:          Property syntax.     (line  98)
* org-demote:                            Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  81)
* org-demote-subtree:                    Structure editing.   (line  41)
* org-do-demote:                         Structure editing.   (line  37)
* org-do-promote:                        Structure editing.   (line  35)
* org-edit-special:                      Cooperation.         (line  55)
* org-entry-add-to-multivalued-property: Using the property API.
                                                              (line  50)
* org-entry-delete:                      Using the property API.
                                                              (line  27)
* org-entry-get:                         Using the property API.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-entry-get-multivalued-property:    Using the property API.
                                                              (line  45)
* org-entry-member-in-multivalued-property: Using the property API.
                                                              (line  61)
* org-entry-properties:                  Using the property API.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-entry-put:                         Using the property API.
                                                              (line  30)
* org-entry-put-multivalued-property:    Using the property API.
                                                              (line  39)
* org-entry-remove-from-multivalued-property: Using the property API.
                                                              (line  55)
* org-evaluate-time-range:               Creating timestamps. (line  50)
* org-evaluate-time-range <1>:           Clocking commands.   (line  48)
* org-export-dispatch:                   The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  11)
* org-feed-goto-inbox:                   RSS Feeds.           (line  26)
* org-feed-update-all:                   RSS Feeds.           (line  23)
* org-force-cycle-archived:              Internal archiving.  (line  41)
* org-forward-same-level:                Motion.              (line  11)
* org-global-cycle:                      Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  22)
* org-goto:                              Motion.              (line  17)
* org-goto-calendar:                     Creating timestamps. (line  28)
* org-html-export-as-html:               HTML Export commands.
                                                              (line  10)
* org-html-export-to-html:               HTML Export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-icalendar-combine-agenda-files:    iCalendar export.    (line  37)
* org-icalendar-export-agenda-files:     iCalendar export.    (line  33)
* org-icalendar-export-to-ics:           iCalendar export.    (line  31)
* org-insert-columns-dblock:             Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  44)
* org-insert-heading:                    Structure editing.   (line   6)
* org-insert-heading <1>:                Plain lists.         (line  77)
* org-insert-heading <2>:                Relative timer.      (line  16)
* org-insert-heading-respect-content:    Structure editing.   (line  19)
* org-insert-link:                       Handling links.      (line  64)
* org-insert-property-drawer:            Using the property API.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-insert-property-drawer <1>:        Using the property API.
                                                              (line  36)
* org-insert-todo-heading:               Structure editing.   (line  23)
* org-insert-todo-heading <1>:           TODO basics.         (line  56)
* org-insert-todo-heading <2>:           Checkboxes.          (line  70)
* org-insert-todo-heading-respect-content: Structure editing. (line  26)
* org-iswitchb:                          Activation.          (line   6)
* org-latex-export-as-latex:             LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-latex-export-to-latex:             LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-latex-export-to-pdf:               LaTeX export commands.
                                                              (line  11)
* org-lookup-all:                        Lookup functions.    (line  20)
* org-lookup-first:                      Lookup functions.    (line   8)
* org-lookup-last:                       Lookup functions.    (line  17)
* org-map-entries:                       Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  12)
* org-mark-element:                      Structure editing.   (line  47)
* org-mark-entry-for-agenda-action:      Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  23)
* org-mark-ring-goto:                    Handling links.      (line 139)
* org-mark-ring-push:                    Handling links.      (line 135)
* org-mark-subtree:                      Structure editing.   (line  52)
* org-match-sparse-tree:                 Tag searches.        (line   9)
* org-match-sparse-tree <1>:             Property searches.   (line  10)
* org-md-export-as-markdown:             Markdown export.     (line  19)
* org-md-export-to-markdown:             Markdown export.     (line  16)
* org-move-subtree-down:                 Structure editing.   (line  45)
* org-move-subtree-up:                   Structure editing.   (line  43)
* org-narrow-to-block:                   Structure editing.   (line 100)
* org-narrow-to-subtree:                 Structure editing.   (line  98)
* org-next-link:                         Handling links.      (line 143)
* org-occur:                             Sparse trees.        (line  17)
* org-odt-export-to-odt:                 ODT export commands. (line   9)
* org-open-at-point:                     Handling links.      (line  98)
* org-open-at-point <1>:                 Creating timestamps. (line  32)
* org-org-export-as-org:                 Org export.          (line  16)
* org-org-export-to-org:                 Org export.          (line  13)
* org-paste-subtree:                     Structure editing.   (line  61)
* org-previous-link:                     Handling links.      (line 143)
* org-priority:                          Priorities.          (line  24)
* org-priority <1>:                      Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  69)
* org-priority-down:                     Priorities.          (line  29)
* org-priority-up:                       Priorities.          (line  29)
* org-promote:                           Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  78)
* org-promote-subtree:                   Structure editing.   (line  39)
* org-property-action:                   Property syntax.     (line  87)
* org-property-next-allowed-value:       Property syntax.     (line  93)
* org-property-previous-allowed-value:   Property syntax.     (line  93)
* org-publish:                           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line   8)
* org-publish-all:                       Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  14)
* org-publish-current-file:              Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  12)
* org-publish-current-project:           Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  10)
* org-refile:                            Structure editing.   (line  84)
* org-refile <1>:                        Refile and copy.     (line  14)
* org-refile <2>:                        Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-refile-cache-clear:                Refile and copy.     (line  42)
* org-refile-goto-last-stored:           Refile and copy.     (line  34)
* org-remove-file:                       Agenda files.        (line  19)
* org-reveal:                            Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  37)
* org-save-all-org-buffers:              Agenda commands.     (line 150)
* org-schedule:                          Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-search-view:                       Search view.         (line   9)
* org-set-effort:                        Effort estimates.    (line  14)
* org-set-property:                      Property syntax.     (line  80)
* org-set-property <1>:                  Property syntax.     (line  90)
* org-set-startup-visibility:            Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  33)
* org-set-startup-visibility <1>:        Initial visibility.  (line  25)
* org-set-tags-command:                  Setting tags.        (line  10)
* org-set-tags-command <1>:              Setting tags.        (line  19)
* org-show-todo-tree:                    TODO basics.         (line  39)
* org-sort:                              Structure editing.   (line  87)
* org-sparse-tree:                       Sparse trees.        (line  15)
* org-speedbar-set-agenda-restriction:   Agenda files.        (line  53)
* org-store-agenda-views:                Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  63)
* org-store-link:                        Activation.          (line   6)
* org-store-link <1>:                    Handling links.      (line   9)
* org-table-align:                       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  57)
* org-table-beginning-of-field:          Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  67)
* org-table-copy-down:                   Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 143)
* org-table-copy-region:                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 113)
* org-table-create-or-convert-from-region: Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  41)
* org-table-create-or-convert-from-region <1>: Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 172)
* org-table-create-with-table.el:        Cooperation.         (line  57)
* org-table-cut-region:                  Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 117)
* org-table-delete-column:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  79)
* org-table-edit-field:                  Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 156)
* org-table-edit-formulas:               Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  32)
* org-table-end-of-field:                Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  70)
* org-table-eval-formula:                Field and range formulas.
                                                              (line  27)
* org-table-eval-formula <1>:            Column formulas.     (line  32)
* org-table-eval-formula <2>:            Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-table-eval-formula <3>:            Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-table-export:                      Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 178)
* org-table-fedit-abort:                 Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  44)
* org-table-fedit-finish:                Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  41)
* org-table-fedit-line-down:             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  60)
* org-table-fedit-line-up:               Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  60)
* org-table-fedit-lisp-indent:           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  48)
* org-table-fedit-ref-down:              Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* org-table-fedit-ref-left:              Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* org-table-fedit-ref-right:             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* org-table-fedit-ref-up:                Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  56)
* org-table-fedit-scroll-down:           Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  64)
* org-table-fedit-scroll-up:             Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  64)
* org-table-fedit-toggle-ref-type:       Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  45)
* org-table-field-info:                  Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  21)
* org-table-hline-and-move:              Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  94)
* org-table-insert-column:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  81)
* org-table-insert-hline:                Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  91)
* org-table-insert-row:                  Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  88)
* org-table-iterate:                     Updating the table.  (line  21)
* org-table-iterate-buffer-tables:       Updating the table.  (line  29)
* org-table-kill-row:                    Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  86)
* org-table-move-column-left:            Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  77)
* org-table-move-column-right:           Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  77)
* org-table-move-row-down:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  83)
* org-table-move-row-up:                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  83)
* org-table-next-field:                  Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  58)
* org-table-next-row:                    Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  63)
* org-table-paste-rectangle:             Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 121)
* org-table-previous-field:              Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  61)
* org-table-recalculate:                 Updating the table.  (line  13)
* org-table-recalculate-buffer-tables:   Updating the table.  (line  27)
* org-table-rotate-recalc-marks:         Advanced features.   (line  10)
* org-table-sort-lines:                  Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  97)
* org-table-sum:                         Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 140)
* org-table-toggle-coordinate-overlays:  Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  24)
* org-table-toggle-coordinate-overlays <1>: Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  67)
* org-table-toggle-formula-debugger:     Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line  29)
* org-table-wrap-region:                 Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 126)
* org-tags-view:                         Tag searches.        (line  13)
* org-tags-view <1>:                     Tag searches.        (line  16)
* org-tags-view <2>:                     Property searches.   (line  12)
* org-tags-view <3>:                     Property searches.   (line  15)
* org-tags-view <4>:                     Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  12)
* org-tags-view <5>:                     Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-texinfo-export-to-info:            Texinfo export commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-texinfo-export-to-texinfo:         Texinfo export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-time-stamp:                        Creating timestamps. (line  10)
* org-time-stamp-inactive:               Creating timestamps. (line  15)
* org-timeline:                          Timeline.            (line  10)
* org-timer:                             Relative timer.      (line  10)
* org-timer-item:                        Relative timer.      (line  13)
* org-timer-start:                       Relative timer.      (line  26)
* org-timestamp-down-day:                Creating timestamps. (line  35)
* org-timestamp-down-down:               Creating timestamps. (line  39)
* org-timestamp-up:                      Creating timestamps. (line  39)
* org-timestamp-up-day:                  Creating timestamps. (line  35)
* org-timestamp-up/down:                 Clocking commands.   (line  55)
* org-todo:                              TODO basics.         (line  13)
* org-todo <1>:                          Clocking commands.   (line  61)
* org-todo <2>:                          Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  65)
* org-todo-list:                         TODO basics.         (line  49)
* org-todo-list <1>:                     Global TODO list.    (line   9)
* org-todo-list <2>:                     Global TODO list.    (line  15)
* org-toggle-archive-tag:                Internal archiving.  (line  32)
* org-toggle-checkbox:                   Checkboxes.          (line  52)
* org-toggle-checkbox <1>:               Checkboxes.          (line  56)
* org-toggle-heading:                    Structure editing.   (line 104)
* org-toggle-inline-images:              Handling links.      (line 127)
* org-toggle-ordered-property:           TODO dependencies.   (line  29)
* org-toggle-ordered-property <1>:       Checkboxes.          (line  72)
* org-toggle-tag:                        Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  73)
* org-toggle-time-stamp-overlays:        Custom time format.  (line  12)
* org-tree-to-indirect-buffer:           Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  51)
* org-update-all-dblocks:                Capturing column view.
                                                              (line  49)
* org-update-statistics-cookies:         Checkboxes.          (line  79)
* org-yank:                              Structure editing.   (line  66)
* outline-next-visible-heading:          Motion.              (line   8)
* outline-previous-visible-heading:      Motion.              (line   9)
* outline-up-heading:                    Motion.              (line  15)
* pcomplete:                             Property syntax.     (line  78)
* previous-error:                        Sparse trees.        (line  30)
* show-all:                              Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  35)
* show-branches:                         Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  45)
* show-children:                         Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  48)
* widen:                                 Structure editing.   (line 102)


File: org.info,  Node: Variable Index,  Prev: Command and Function Index,  Up: Top

Variable index
**************

This is not a complete index of variables and faces, only the ones that
are mentioned in the manual.  For a more complete list, use ‘M-x
org-customize <RET>’ and then click yourself through the tree.

[index]
* Menu:

* cdlatex-simplify-sub-super-scripts:    CDLaTeX mode.        (line  30)
* constants-unit-system:                 References.          (line 109)
* constants-unit-system <1>:             In-buffer settings.  (line 142)
* htmlize-output-type:                   Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  20)
* LaTeX-verbatim-environments:           A LaTeX example.     (line  21)
* org-adapt-indentation:                 Clean view.          (line  46)
* org-agenda-add-entry-text-maxlines:    Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  20)
* org-agenda-bulk-custom-functions:      Agenda commands.     (line 313)
* org-agenda-category-filter-preset:     Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  92)
* org-agenda-category-filter-preset <1>: Agenda commands.     (line 181)
* org-agenda-clock-consistency-checks:   Agenda commands.     (line 127)
* org-agenda-columns-add-appointments-to-effort-sum: Effort estimates.
                                                              (line  40)
* org-agenda-confirm-kill:               Agenda commands.     (line 217)
* org-agenda-custom-commands:            Sparse trees.        (line  34)
* org-agenda-custom-commands <1>:        Storing searches.    (line   9)
* org-agenda-custom-commands <2>:        Setting Options.     (line   6)
* org-agenda-custom-commands <3>:        Setting Options.     (line  32)
* org-agenda-custom-commands <4>:        Extracting agenda information.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts:   Setting Options.     (line  61)
* org-agenda-diary-file:                 Agenda commands.     (line 392)
* org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks:          TODO dependencies.   (line  38)
* org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks <1>:      Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line  14)
* org-agenda-entry-text-maxlines:        Agenda commands.     (line 134)
* org-agenda-exporter-settings:          Agenda commands.     (line 431)
* org-agenda-exporter-settings <1>:      Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-agenda-files:                      Agenda files.        (line   6)
* org-agenda-files <1>:                  Sorting agenda items.
                                                              (line   8)
* org-agenda-files <2>:                  iCalendar export.    (line  35)
* org-agenda-inhibit-startup:            Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* org-agenda-inhibit-startup <1>:        Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-agenda-log-mode-items:             Agenda commands.     (line  98)
* org-agenda-max-effort:                 Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 118)
* org-agenda-max-entries:                Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 118)
* org-agenda-max-tags:                   Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 118)
* org-agenda-max-todos:                  Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 118)
* org-agenda-ndays:                      Weekly/daily agenda. (line  15)
* org-agenda-overriding-header:          Special agenda views.
                                                              (line  45)
* org-agenda-prefix-format:              Presentation and sorting.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-agenda-regexp-filter-preset:       Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line 103)
* org-agenda-regexp-filter-preset <1>:   Agenda commands.     (line 190)
* org-agenda-restore-windows-after-quit: Agenda Views.        (line  34)
* org-agenda-show-inherited-tags:        Agenda commands.     (line 237)
* org-agenda-show-inherited-tags <1>:    Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-agenda-skip-archived-trees:        Internal archiving.  (line  19)
* org-agenda-skip-deadline-prewarning-if-scheduled: Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-agenda-skip-function:              Special agenda views.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-agenda-skip-function <1>:          Special agenda views.
                                                              (line  48)
* org-agenda-skip-function <2>:          Using the mapping API.
                                                              (line  52)
* org-agenda-skip-function-global:       Special agenda views.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-agenda-skip-scheduled-delay-if-deadline: Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  42)
* org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-deadline-is-shown: Repeated tasks.
                                                              (line  62)
* org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done:     Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  34)
* org-agenda-sorting-strategy:           Sorting agenda items.
                                                              (line  25)
* org-agenda-span:                       Weekly/daily agenda. (line  15)
* org-agenda-span <1>:                   Agenda commands.     (line  69)
* org-agenda-start-day:                  Weekly/daily agenda. (line  15)
* org-agenda-start-on-weekday:           Weekly/daily agenda. (line  15)
* org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode: Agenda commands.    (line 117)
* org-agenda-start-with-entry-text-mode: Agenda commands.     (line 134)
* org-agenda-start-with-follow-mode:     Agenda commands.     (line  38)
* org-agenda-sticky:                     Agenda dispatcher.   (line  45)
* org-agenda-tag-filter-preset:          Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-agenda-tag-filter-preset <1>:      Agenda commands.     (line 174)
* org-agenda-tags-column:                Presentation and sorting.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-agenda-tags-todo-honor-ignore-options: Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  19)
* org-agenda-text-search-extra-files:    Agenda dispatcher.   (line  27)
* org-agenda-text-search-extra-files <1>: Search view.        (line  24)
* org-agenda-time-grid:                  Time-of-day specifications.
                                                              (line  43)
* org-agenda-time-grid <1>:              Agenda commands.     (line 141)
* org-agenda-todo-ignore-deadlines:      Global TODO list.    (line  37)
* org-agenda-todo-ignore-scheduled:      Global TODO list.    (line  37)
* org-agenda-todo-ignore-timestamp:      Global TODO list.    (line  37)
* org-agenda-todo-ignore-with-date:      Global TODO list.    (line  37)
* org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels:        Breaking down tasks. (line   6)
* org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels <1>:    Global TODO list.    (line  45)
* org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance:        Tag inheritance.     (line  32)
* org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance <1>:    Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-agenda-use-time-grid:              Time-of-day specifications.
                                                              (line  43)
* org-agenda-use-time-grid <1>:          Agenda commands.     (line 141)
* org-agenda-window-setup:               Agenda Views.        (line  34)
* org-archive-default-command:           Archiving.           (line  12)
* org-archive-default-command <1>:       Agenda commands.     (line 224)
* org-archive-location:                  Moving subtrees.     (line  10)
* org-archive-location <1>:              In-buffer settings.  (line  16)
* org-archive-save-context-info:         Moving subtrees.     (line  35)
* org-ascii-links-to-notes:              ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export.
                                                              (line  10)
* org-attach-directory:                  Attachments.         (line   6)
* org-attach-method:                     Attachments.         (line  32)
* org-babel-default-header-args:         System-wide header arguments.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-babel-default-header-args <1>:     Header arguments in Org mode properties.
                                                              (line  34)
* org-beamer-environments-default:       Beamer export.       (line  41)
* org-beamer-environments-extra:         Beamer export.       (line  41)
* org-beamer-frame-level:                Beamer export.       (line  32)
* org-calc-default-modes:                Formula syntax for Calc.
                                                              (line  14)
* org-capture-bookmark:                  Using capture.       (line  48)
* org-capture-templates-contexts:        Templates in contexts.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-capture-use-agenda-date:           Agenda commands.     (line 297)
* org-catch-invisible-edits:             Catching invisible edits.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-checkbox-hierarchical-statistics:  Checkboxes.          (line  30)
* org-clock-continuously:                Clocking commands.   (line   7)
* org-clock-continuously <1>:            Clocking commands.   (line  43)
* org-clock-continuously <2>:            Resolving idle time. (line  74)
* org-clock-idle-time:                   Resolving idle time. (line  14)
* org-clock-into-drawer:                 Clocking commands.   (line   7)
* org-clock-modeline-total:              Clocking commands.   (line  20)
* org-clock-report-include-clocking-task: Agenda commands.    (line 117)
* org-clock-x11idle-program-name:        Resolving idle time. (line   9)
* org-clocktable-defaults:               The clock table.     (line  35)
* org-closed-keep-when-no-todo:          Closing items.       (line  11)
* org-coderef-label-format:              Literal examples.    (line  58)
* org-columns-default-format:            Using column view.   (line  10)
* org-columns-default-format <1>:        Effort estimates.    (line  30)
* org-columns-default-format <2>:        Agenda commands.     (line 155)
* org-columns-default-format <3>:        Agenda column view.  (line  18)
* org-columns-skip-archived-trees:       Internal archiving.  (line  27)
* org-confirm-babel-evaluate:            Code evaluation security.
                                                              (line  32)
* org-confirm-elisp-link-function:       Code evaluation security.
                                                              (line  53)
* org-confirm-shell-link-function:       Code evaluation security.
                                                              (line  51)
* org-create-file-search-functions:      Custom searches.     (line  12)
* org-ctrl-c-ctrl-c-hook:                Context-sensitive commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-ctrl-k-protect-subtree:            Headlines.           (line   6)
* org-cycle-emulate-tab:                 Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-cycle-global-at-bob:               Global and local cycling.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-cycle-include-plain-lists:         Plain lists.         (line  67)
* org-cycle-open-archived-trees:         Internal archiving.  (line  11)
* org-cycle-separator-lines:             Headlines.           (line  22)
* org-deadline-warning-days:             Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-deadline-warning-days <1>:         Inserting deadline/schedule.
                                                              (line  30)
* org-default-notes-file:                Setting up capture.  (line   9)
* org-default-notes-file <1>:            Template elements.   (line  45)
* org-default-priority:                  Priorities.          (line  37)
* org-default-priority <1>:              In-buffer settings.  (line  47)
* org-display-custom-times:              Custom time format.  (line   6)
* org-display-custom-times <1>:          Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-display-internal-link-with-indirect-buffer: Handling links.
                                                              (line 126)
* org-disputed-keys:                     Conflicts.           (line  34)
* org-done (face):                       Faces for TODO keywords.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-drawers:                           Drawers.             (line   6)
* org-drawers <1>:                       In-buffer settings.  (line  40)
* org-edit-src-auto-save-idle-delay:     Editing source code. (line   6)
* org-edit-src-turn-on-auto-save:        Editing source code. (line   6)
* org-effort-property:                   Effort estimates.    (line   6)
* org-emphasis-alist:                    Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-emphasis-regexp-components:        Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-enable-table-editor:               Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  30)
* org-enforce-todo-dependencies:         TODO dependencies.   (line   6)
* org-enforce-todo-dependencies <1>:     TODO dependencies.   (line  43)
* org-entities:                          Special symbols.     (line  15)
* org-execute-file-search-functions:     Custom searches.     (line  12)
* org-export-allow-bind-keywords:        Export settings.     (line 187)
* org-export-async-init-file:            The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  26)
* org-export-backends:                   Export back-ends.    (line  10)
* org-export-backends <1>:               Other built-in back-ends.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-export-before-parsing-hook:        Advanced configuration.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-export-before-processing-hook:     Advanced configuration.
                                                              (line   9)
* org-export-copy-to-kill-ring:          The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  54)
* org-export-creator-string:             Export settings.     (line  28)
* org-export-creator-string <1>:         HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-export-date-timestamp-format:      Export settings.     (line  32)
* org-export-default-language:           Export settings.     (line  48)
* org-export-default-language <1>:       Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-dispatch-use-expert-ui:     The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-export-exclude-tags:               Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-headline-levels:            Headings and sections.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-export-headline-levels <1>:        Export settings.     (line 129)
* org-export-headline-levels <2>:        Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-in-background:              The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  35)
* org-export-initial-scope:              The Export Dispatcher.
                                                              (line  45)
* org-export-preserve-breaks:            Export settings.     (line  91)
* org-export-preserve-breaks <1>:        Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-publishing-directory:       Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-select-tags:                Export settings.     (line  54)
* org-export-select-tags <1>:            Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-time-stamp-file:            Export settings.     (line 167)
* org-export-time-stamp-file <1>:        HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-export-with-archived-trees:        Internal archiving.  (line  24)
* org-export-with-archived-trees <1>:    Export settings.     (line  99)
* org-export-with-archived-trees <2>:    Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-author:                Export settings.     (line 104)
* org-export-with-author <1>:            Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-clocks:                Export settings.     (line 108)
* org-export-with-creator:               Export settings.     (line 111)
* org-export-with-creator <1>:           Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-drawers:               Drawers.             (line  38)
* org-export-with-drawers <1>:           Export settings.     (line 115)
* org-export-with-drawers <2>:           Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-email:                 Export settings.     (line 122)
* org-export-with-email <1>:             Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-emphasize:             Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-entities:              Export settings.     (line 119)
* org-export-with-fixed-width:           Export settings.     (line  84)
* org-export-with-fixed-width <1>:       Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-footnotes:             Export settings.     (line 126)
* org-export-with-footnotes <1>:         Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-inlinetasks:           Export settings.     (line 134)
* org-export-with-latex:                 LaTeX fragments.     (line  38)
* org-export-with-latex <1>:             Export settings.     (line 163)
* org-export-with-latex <2>:             Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-planning:              Export settings.     (line 142)
* org-export-with-planning <1>:          Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-priority:              Export settings.     (line 147)
* org-export-with-priority <1>:          Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-section-numbers:       Export settings.     (line 137)
* org-export-with-section-numbers <1>:   Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-smart-quotes:          Export settings.     (line  74)
* org-export-with-special-strings:       Export settings.     (line  80)
* org-export-with-special-strings <1>:   Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-statistics-cookies:    Export settings.     (line 150)
* org-export-with-sub-superscripts:      Export settings.     (line  94)
* org-export-with-sub-superscripts <1>:  Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-tables:                Export settings.     (line 179)
* org-export-with-tables <1>:            Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-tags:                  Export settings.     (line 154)
* org-export-with-tags <1>:              Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-tasks:                 Export settings.     (line 158)
* org-export-with-tasks <1>:             Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-timestamps:            Export settings.     (line  87)
* org-export-with-timestamps <1>:        Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-toc:                   Table of contents.   (line   6)
* org-export-with-toc <1>:               Export settings.     (line 171)
* org-export-with-toc <2>:               Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-export-with-todo-keywords:         Export settings.     (line 175)
* org-export-with-todo-keywords <1>:     Publishing options.  (line  12)
* org-fast-tag-selection-include-todo:   Fast access to TODO states.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-fast-tag-selection-single-key:     Setting tags.        (line 137)
* org-file-apps:                         Handling links.      (line 100)
* org-file-apps <1>:                     Attachments.         (line  49)
* org-fontify-emphasized-text:           Emphasis and monospace.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-footnote-auto-adjust:              Footnotes.           (line  54)
* org-footnote-auto-adjust <1>:          In-buffer settings.  (line 147)
* org-footnote-auto-label:               Footnotes.           (line  41)
* org-footnote-auto-label <1>:           In-buffer settings.  (line 147)
* org-footnote-define-inline:            Footnotes.           (line  54)
* org-footnote-define-inline <1>:        In-buffer settings.  (line 147)
* org-footnote-section:                  Footnotes.           (line  54)
* org-format-latex-header:               LaTeX fragments.     (line   6)
* org-format-latex-options:              Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line  19)
* org-from-is-user-regexp:               Template expansion.  (line  49)
* org-global-properties:                 Property syntax.     (line  73)
* org-global-properties <1>:             Effort estimates.    (line  30)
* org-goto-auto-isearch:                 Motion.              (line  21)
* org-goto-interface:                    Motion.              (line  32)
* org-group-tags:                        Tag groups.          (line  34)
* org-hide (face):                       Clean view.          (line  66)
* org-hide-block-startup:                Blocks.              (line   6)
* org-hide-leading-stars:                In-buffer settings.  (line 126)
* org-hide-leading-stars <1>:            Clean view.          (line  50)
* org-hierarchical-todo-statistics:      Breaking down tasks. (line  25)
* org-highest-priority:                  Priorities.          (line  37)
* org-highest-priority <1>:              In-buffer settings.  (line  47)
* org-html-container-element:            Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-doctype:                      HTML doctypes.       (line   6)
* org-html-doctype <1>:                  Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-doctype-alist:                HTML doctypes.       (line   6)
* org-html-extension:                    Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-head:                         CSS support.         (line  41)
* org-html-head <1>:                     Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-head-extra:                   CSS support.         (line  41)
* org-html-head-extra <1>:               Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-head-include-default-style:   CSS support.         (line  41)
* org-html-head-include-default-style <1>: Publishing options.
                                                              (line  38)
* org-html-head-include-scripts:         Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-html5-elements:               HTML doctypes.       (line  31)
* org-html-html5-fancy:                  HTML doctypes.       (line  31)
* org-html-html5-fancy <1>:              Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-infojs-options:               JavaScript support.  (line  54)
* org-html-inline-images:                Images in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-inline-images <1>:            Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-link-home:                    Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-link-org-files-as-html:       Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-link-up:                      Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-link-use-abs-url:             Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-postamble:                    HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-postamble <1>:                Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-postamble-format:             HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-preamble:                     HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-preamble <1>:                 Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-preamble-format:              HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-style-default:                CSS support.         (line  41)
* org-html-table-default-attributes:     Tables in HTML export.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-table-default-attributes <1>: Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-table-row-tags:               Tables in HTML export.
                                                              (line  15)
* org-html-table-row-tags <1>:           Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-html-tag-class-prefix:             CSS support.         (line   6)
* org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix:        CSS support.         (line   6)
* org-html-use-infojs:                   JavaScript support.  (line  54)
* org-html-validation-link:              HTML preamble and postamble.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-html-xml-declaration:              Publishing options.  (line  38)
* org-icalendar-alarm-time:              iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* org-icalendar-categories:              iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* org-icalendar-combined-agenda-file:    iCalendar export.    (line  39)
* org-icalendar-include-body:            iCalendar export.    (line  43)
* org-icalendar-include-todo:            iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* org-icalendar-store-UID:               iCalendar export.    (line  20)
* org-icalendar-use-deadline:            iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* org-icalendar-use-scheduled:           iCalendar export.    (line   6)
* org-id-link-to-org-use-id:             Handling links.      (line  21)
* org-imenu-depth:                       Cooperation.         (line  34)
* org-insert-mode-line-in-empty-file:    Activation.          (line  32)
* org-irc-link-to-logs:                  Handling links.      (line  45)
* org-keep-stored-link-after-insertion:  Handling links.      (line  65)
* org-latex-classes:                     Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-latex-create-formula-image-program: Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-latex-default-class:               Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-latex-default-packages-alist:      Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-latex-default-table-environment:   LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  25)
* org-latex-default-table-mode:          LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-latex-packages-alist:              Header and sectioning.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-latex-tables-booktabs:             LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  54)
* org-latex-tables-centered:             LaTeX specific attributes.
                                                              (line  54)
* org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command:   Working with LaTeX math snippets.
                                                              (line  20)
* org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file:          Working with LaTeX math snippets.
                                                              (line  20)
* org-link-abbrev-alist:                 Link abbreviations.  (line  12)
* org-link-abbrev-alist <1>:             In-buffer settings.  (line  43)
* org-link-frame-setup:                  Handling links.      (line 100)
* org-list-allow-alphabetical:           Plain lists.         (line  13)
* org-list-automatic-rules:              Plain lists.         (line  60)
* org-list-automatic-rules <1>:          Plain lists.         (line  79)
* org-list-automatic-rules <2>:          Checkboxes.          (line   6)
* org-list-demote-modify-bullet:         Plain lists.         (line  54)
* org-list-empty-line-terminates-plain-lists: Plain lists.    (line  28)
* org-list-indent-offset:                Plain lists.         (line  54)
* org-list-use-circular-motion:          Plain lists.         (line  90)
* org-log-done:                          Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line  29)
* org-log-done <1>:                      Agenda commands.     (line  98)
* org-log-done <2>:                      In-buffer settings.  (line 101)
* org-log-into-drawer:                   Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-log-into-drawer <1>:               Agenda commands.     (line 256)
* org-log-note-clock-out:                Clocking commands.   (line  36)
* org-log-note-clock-out <1>:            In-buffer settings.  (line 101)
* org-log-refile:                        Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-log-repeat:                        Repeated tasks.      (line  34)
* org-log-repeat <1>:                    In-buffer settings.  (line 101)
* org-log-states-order-reversed:         Tracking TODO state changes.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-lowest-priority:                   Priorities.          (line  37)
* org-lowest-priority <1>:               In-buffer settings.  (line  47)
* org-M-RET-may-split-line:              Structure editing.   (line   7)
* org-M-RET-may-split-line <1>:          Plain lists.         (line  79)
* org-md-headline-style:                 Markdown export.     (line  28)
* org-odd-levels-only:                   Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  66)
* org-odd-levels-only <1>:               In-buffer settings.  (line 126)
* org-odd-levels-only <2>:               Clean view.          (line  74)
* org-odd-levels-only <3>:               Special agenda views.
                                                              (line  48)
* org-odt-category-map-alist:            Labels and captions in ODT export.
                                                              (line  25)
* org-odt-convert:                       Extending ODT export.
                                                              (line  39)
* org-odt-convert-capabilities:          Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line  20)
* org-odt-convert-process:               Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line  30)
* org-odt-convert-processes:             Configuring a document converter.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-odt-create-custom-styles-for-srcblocks: Literal examples in ODT export.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-odt-fontify-srcblocks:             Literal examples in ODT export.
                                                              (line  13)
* org-odt-pixels-per-inch:               Images in ODT export.
                                                              (line  33)
* org-odt-preferred-output-format:       ODT export commands. (line  13)
* org-odt-preferred-output-format <1>:   ODT export commands. (line  27)
* org-odt-preferred-output-format <2>:   Extending ODT export.
                                                              (line  22)
* org-odt-schema-dir:                    Validating OpenDocument XML.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-odt-styles-file:                   Applying custom styles.
                                                              (line  28)
* org-odt-table-styles:                  Customizing tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-odt-table-styles <1>:              Customizing tables in ODT export.
                                                              (line  89)
* org-outline-path-complete-in-steps:    Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-overriding-columns-format:         Agenda column view.  (line  18)
* org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator: Plain lists.        (line  13)
* org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator <1>: Plain lists.    (line 119)
* org-popup-calendar-for-date-prompt:    The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  76)
* org-priority-faces:                    Priorities.          (line  13)
* org-priority-start-cycle-with-default: Priorities.          (line  32)
* org-property-allowed-value-functions:  Using the property API.
                                                              (line  67)
* org-publish-project-alist:             Project alist.       (line   6)
* org-publish-project-alist <1>:         Publishing options.  (line  60)
* org-publish-use-timestamps-flag:       Triggering publication.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-put-time-stamp-overlays:           In-buffer settings.  (line 137)
* org-read-date-display-live:            The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  90)
* org-read-date-force-compatible-dates:  The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  61)
* org-read-date-prefer-future:           The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-refile-allow-creating-parent-nodes: Refile and copy.    (line  16)
* org-refile-keep:                       Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-refile-targets:                    Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-refile-use-cache:                  Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-refile-use-outline-path:           Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-remove-highlights-with-change:     Sparse trees.        (line  19)
* org-remove-highlights-with-change <1>: Clocking commands.   (line  73)
* org-replace-disputed-keys:             Conflicts.           (line  19)
* org-return-follows-link:               Handling links.      (line 119)
* org-reverse-note-order:                Refile and copy.     (line  16)
* org-scheduled-delay-days:              Deadlines and scheduling.
                                                              (line  42)
* org-show-entry-below:                  Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* org-show-following-heading:            Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* org-show-hierarchy-above:              Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* org-show-siblings:                     Sparse trees.        (line   6)
* org-sort-agenda-noeffort-is-high:      Filtering/limiting agenda items.
                                                              (line  35)
* org-sparse-tree-open-archived-trees:   Internal archiving.  (line  16)
* org-special-ctrl-a/e:                  Headlines.           (line   6)
* org-special-ctrl-k:                    Headlines.           (line   6)
* org-speed-commands-user:               Speed keys.          (line   6)
* org-startup-align-all-tables:          Column width and alignment.
                                                              (line  33)
* org-startup-align-all-tables <1>:      In-buffer settings.  (line  81)
* org-startup-folded:                    Initial visibility.  (line   6)
* org-startup-folded <1>:                In-buffer settings.  (line  70)
* org-startup-folded <2>:                Speeding up your agendas.
                                                              (line  16)
* org-startup-indented:                  In-buffer settings.  (line  76)
* org-startup-with-inline-images:        Handling links.      (line 129)
* org-startup-with-inline-images <1>:    In-buffer settings.  (line  88)
* org-startup-with-latex-preview:        Previewing LaTeX fragments.
                                                              (line  24)
* org-startup-with-latex-preview <1>:    In-buffer settings.  (line  94)
* org-store-link-functions:              Adding hyperlink types.
                                                              (line  62)
* org-stuck-projects:                    Stuck projects.      (line  16)
* org-support-shift-select:              Plain lists.         (line  90)
* org-support-shift-select <1>:          Plain lists.         (line 140)
* org-support-shift-select <2>:          Conflicts.           (line   6)
* org-table-auto-blank-field:            Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line  30)
* org-table-copy-increment:              Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 145)
* org-table-duration-custom-format:      Durations and time values.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-table-export-default-format:       Built-in table editor.
                                                              (line 178)
* org-table-formula:                     In-buffer settings.  (line  32)
* org-table-formula-constants:           References.          (line 102)
* org-table-formula-constants <1>:       In-buffer settings.  (line  32)
* org-table-formula-constants <2>:       Cooperation.         (line  16)
* org-table-use-standard-references:     References.          (line  17)
* org-table-use-standard-references <1>: Editing and debugging formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-tag-alist:                         Setting tags.        (line  22)
* org-tag-alist <1>:                     In-buffer settings.  (line 171)
* org-tag-faces:                         Tags.                (line  10)
* org-tag-persistent-alist:              Setting tags.        (line  37)
* org-tags-column:                       Setting tags.        (line  11)
* org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance:     Tag inheritance.     (line  22)
* org-tags-match-list-sublevels:         Tag inheritance.     (line  26)
* org-tags-match-list-sublevels <1>:     Tag searches.        (line  18)
* org-tags-match-list-sublevels <2>:     Property searches.   (line  17)
* org-tags-match-list-sublevels <3>:     Matching tags and properties.
                                                              (line  19)
* org-texinfo-classes:                   Document preamble.   (line  22)
* org-texinfo-classes <1>:               Headings and sectioning structure.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-texinfo-coding-system:             Document preamble.   (line  22)
* org-texinfo-def-table-markup:          Texinfo specific attributes.
                                                              (line  17)
* org-texinfo-default-class:             Headings and sectioning structure.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-texinfo-info-process:              Texinfo export commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-time-stamp-custom-formats:         Custom time format.  (line   6)
* org-time-stamp-overlay-formats:        In-buffer settings.  (line 137)
* org-time-stamp-rounding-minutes:       Creating timestamps. (line  20)
* org-todo (face):                       Faces for TODO keywords.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-todo-keyword-faces:                Faces for TODO keywords.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-todo-keywords:                     TODO basics.         (line  41)
* org-todo-keywords <1>:                 TODO extensions.     (line   6)
* org-todo-keywords <2>:                 Global TODO list.    (line  17)
* org-todo-keywords <3>:                 In-buffer settings.  (line 192)
* org-todo-repeat-to-state:              Repeated tasks.      (line  19)
* org-todo-state-tags-triggers:          TODO basics.         (line  60)
* org-track-ordered-property-with-tag:   TODO dependencies.   (line  30)
* org-track-ordered-property-with-tag <1>: Checkboxes.        (line  74)
* org-treat-insert-todo-heading-as-state-change: Structure editing.
                                                              (line  25)
* org-treat-S-cursor-todo-selection-as-state-change: TODO basics.
                                                              (line  35)
* org-use-fast-todo-selection:           TODO basics.         (line  14)
* org-use-property-inheritance:          Property inheritance.
                                                              (line   6)
* org-use-property-inheritance <1>:      iCalendar export.    (line  43)
* org-use-property-inheritance <2>:      Header arguments in Org mode properties.
                                                              (line  19)
* org-use-property-inheritance <3>:      Using the property API.
                                                              (line  18)
* org-use-speed-commands:                Speed keys.          (line   6)
* org-use-sub-superscripts:              Subscripts and superscripts.
                                                              (line  15)
* org-use-tag-inheritance:               Tag inheritance.     (line  22)
* org-yank-adjusted-subtrees:            Structure editing.   (line  68)
* org-yank-folded-subtrees:              Structure editing.   (line  68)
* orgstruct-heading-prefix-regexp:       Orgstruct mode.      (line  26)
* parse-time-months:                     The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  57)
* parse-time-weekdays:                   The date/time prompt.
                                                              (line  57)
* ps-landscape-mode:                     Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  20)
* ps-number-of-columns:                  Exporting Agenda Views.
                                                              (line  20)
* user-full-name:                        Export settings.     (line  25)
* user-mail-address:                     Export settings.     (line  40)
* user-mail-address <1>:                 Publishing options.  (line  12)



Tag Table:
Node: Top884
Node: Introduction24004
Node: Summary24450
Node: Installation27530
Node: Activation30299
Ref: Activation-Footnote-132181
Node: Feedback32309
Ref: Feedback-Footnote-135951
Node: Conventions36078
Ref: Conventions-Footnote-138168
Node: Document Structure38264
Node: Outlines39264
Node: Headlines39929
Ref: Headlines-Footnote-140942
Ref: Headlines-Footnote-241142
Node: Visibility cycling41213
Node: Global and local cycling41597
Ref: Global and local cycling-Footnote-144520
Ref: Global and local cycling-Footnote-244582
Ref: Global and local cycling-Footnote-344636
Node: Initial visibility44887
Ref: Initial visibility-Footnote-146188
Node: Catching invisible edits46377
Node: Motion46854
Node: Structure editing48234
Ref: Structure editing-Footnote-155231
Node: Sparse trees55335
Ref: Sparse trees-Footnote-157895
Ref: Sparse trees-Footnote-258117
Ref: Sparse trees-Footnote-358192
Node: Plain lists58307
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-165878
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-266240
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-366340
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-466607
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-566784
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-666851
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-767041
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-867145
Ref: Plain lists-Footnote-967251
Node: Drawers67321
Ref: Drawers-Footnote-169191
Node: Blocks69300
Node: Footnotes69868
Ref: Footnotes-Footnote-174344
Ref: Footnotes-Footnote-274449
Node: Orgstruct mode74534
Node: Org syntax76194
Node: Tables77129
Node: Built-in table editor77779
Ref: Built-in table editor-Footnote-187449
Node: Column width and alignment87557
Ref: Column width and alignment-Footnote-190170
Ref: Column width and alignment-Footnote-290216
Node: Column groups90313
Node: Orgtbl mode91886
Node: The spreadsheet92704
Node: References94175
Ref: References-Footnote-1100492
Ref: References-Footnote-2100722
Ref: References-Footnote-3101003
Ref: References-Footnote-4101106
Node: Formula syntax for Calc101424
Ref: Formula syntax for Calc-Footnote-1106759
Node: Formula syntax for Lisp107103
Node: Durations and time values108888
Node: Field and range formulas110000
Node: Column formulas112483
Node: Lookup functions114615
Node: Editing and debugging formulas116661
Ref: Using multiple #+TBLFM lines121003
Node: Updating the table122252
Node: Advanced features123625
Ref: Advanced features-Footnote-1128242
Node: Org-Plot128348
Node: Hyperlinks131344
Node: Link format132106
Node: Internal links133429
Ref: Internal links-Footnote-1135772
Ref: Internal links-Footnote-2136016
Node: Radio targets136162
Node: External links136869
Ref: External links-Footnote-1140952
Node: Handling links141354
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-1149424
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-2149584
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-3149783
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-4150080
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-5150338
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-6150419
Ref: Handling links-Footnote-7150495
Node: Using links outside Org150591
Node: Link abbreviations151081
Node: Search options153833
Ref: Search options-Footnote-1155780
Node: Custom searches155861
Node: TODO Items156896
Ref: TODO Items-Footnote-1158009
Node: TODO basics158123
Node: TODO extensions161052
Node: Workflow states162091
Ref: Workflow states-Footnote-1163435
Node: TODO types163528
Ref: TODO types-Footnote-1165161
Node: Multiple sets in one file165247
Node: Fast access to TODO states167213
Ref: Fast access to TODO states-Footnote-1168099
Ref: Fast access to TODO states-Footnote-2168187
Node: Per-file keywords168484
Ref: Per-file keywords-Footnote-1169902
Node: Faces for TODO keywords170111
Node: TODO dependencies171172
Node: Progress logging173370
Node: Closing items174087
Ref: Closing items-Footnote-1175346
Ref: Closing items-Footnote-2175419
Node: Tracking TODO state changes175497
Ref: Tracking TODO state changes-Footnote-1178590
Ref: Tracking TODO state changes-Footnote-2178649
Ref: Tracking TODO state changes-Footnote-3178794
Node: Tracking your habits179091
Node: Priorities183421
Ref: Priorities-Footnote-1185485
Node: Breaking down tasks185558
Ref: Breaking down tasks-Footnote-1187578
Node: Checkboxes187678
Ref: Checkboxes-Footnote-1192300
Ref: Checkboxes-Footnote-2192428
Ref: Checkboxes-Footnote-3192606
Node: Tags192724
Node: Tag inheritance193817
Ref: Tag inheritance-Footnote-1195692
Ref: Tag inheritance-Footnote-2195796
Node: Setting tags195922
Ref: Setting tags-Footnote-1202411
Node: Tag groups202494
Node: Tag searches203989
Node: Properties and Columns205322
Node: Property syntax206783
Node: Special properties211050
Node: Property searches212901
Node: Property inheritance214351
Node: Column view216217
Node: Defining columns217466
Node: Scope of column definitions217869
Node: Column attributes218812
Ref: Column attributes-Footnote-1223730
Node: Using column view223864
Node: Capturing column view226800
Ref: Capturing column view-Footnote-1229864
Node: Property API230000
Node: Dates and Times230359
Node: Timestamps231343
Ref: Timestamps-Footnote-1233801
Ref: Timestamps-Footnote-2233987
Ref: Timestamps-Footnote-3234118
Node: Creating timestamps234923
Node: The date/time prompt237773
Ref: The date/time prompt-Footnote-1242354
Ref: The date/time prompt-Footnote-2242525
Ref: The date/time prompt-Footnote-3242637
Node: Custom time format242735
Node: Deadlines and scheduling244491
Ref: Deadlines and scheduling-Footnote-1247911
Node: Inserting deadline/schedule248072
Ref: Inserting deadline/schedule-Footnote-1250435
Ref: Inserting deadline/schedule-Footnote-2250597
Ref: Inserting deadline/schedule-Footnote-3250721
Node: Repeated tasks250845
Ref: Repeated tasks-Footnote-1254632
Ref: Repeated tasks-Footnote-2254889
Node: Clocking work time255112
Ref: Clocking work time-Footnote-1256305
Ref: Clocking work time-Footnote-2256457
Node: Clocking commands256599
Ref: Clocking commands-Footnote-1261683
Ref: Clocking commands-Footnote-2261798
Ref: Clocking commands-Footnote-3261852
Ref: Clocking commands-Footnote-4261914
Node: The clock table261996
Ref: The clock table-Footnote-1269378
Ref: The clock table-Footnote-2269476
Node: Resolving idle time269602
Ref: Resolving idle time-Footnote-1273536
Node: Effort estimates274023
Ref: Effort estimates-Footnote-1276831
Ref: Effort estimates-Footnote-2276923
Node: Relative timer277030
Node: Countdown timer278899
Node: Capture - Refile - Archive279412
Node: Capture280407
Node: Setting up capture281546
Ref: Setting up capture-Footnote-1281975
Node: Using capture282045
Node: Capture templates284515
Node: Template elements286515
Ref: Template elements-Footnote-1292348
Node: Template expansion292531
Ref: Template expansion-Footnote-1296574
Ref: Template expansion-Footnote-2296665
Ref: Template expansion-Footnote-3296851
Node: Templates in contexts296953
Node: Attachments297794
Ref: Attachments-Footnote-1301264
Node: RSS Feeds301418
Node: Protocols303053
Node: Refile and copy303777
Ref: Refile and copy-Footnote-1306250
Node: Archiving306362
Node: Moving subtrees307073
Ref: Moving subtrees-Footnote-1308958
Node: Internal archiving309402
Node: Agenda Views312092
Node: Agenda files314306
Ref: Agenda files-Footnote-1317184
Ref: Agenda files-Footnote-2317333
Node: Agenda dispatcher317534
Ref: Agenda dispatcher-Footnote-1320430
Ref: Agenda dispatcher-Footnote-2320528
Node: Built-in agenda views320634
Node: Weekly/daily agenda321288
Ref: Weekly/daily agenda-Footnote-1326704
Ref: Weekly/daily agenda-Footnote-2326935
Node: Global TODO list327122
Node: Matching tags and properties329703
Ref: Matching tags and properties-Footnote-1337431
Node: Timeline337511
Node: Search view338214
Node: Stuck projects339558
Ref: Stuck projects-Footnote-1341644
Node: Presentation and sorting341674
Node: Categories342644
Ref: Categories-Footnote-1343458
Node: Time-of-day specifications343895
Node: Sorting agenda items345893
Node: Filtering/limiting agenda items347491
Ref: Filtering/limiting agenda items-Footnote-1354927
Ref: Filtering/limiting agenda items-Footnote-2355347
Node: Agenda commands355415
Ref: Agenda commands-Footnote-1377193
Ref: Agenda commands-Footnote-2377274
Ref: Agenda commands-Footnote-3377397
Ref: Agenda commands-Footnote-4377501
Node: Custom agenda views377588
Node: Storing searches378234
Ref: Storing searches-Footnote-1381295
Ref: Storing searches-Footnote-2381412
Node: Block agenda381664
Node: Setting Options382951
Node: Exporting Agenda Views386647
Ref: Exporting Agenda Views-Footnote-1391616
Ref: Exporting Agenda Views-Footnote-2391680
Ref: Exporting Agenda Views-Footnote-3391840
Ref: Exporting Agenda Views-Footnote-4392027
Node: Agenda column view392109
Node: Markup395227
Node: Structural markup elements396261
Node: Document title396936
Node: Headings and sections397522
Node: Table of contents398201
Node: Lists399720
Node: Paragraphs400018
Node: Footnote markup401176
Node: Emphasis and monospace401518
Node: Horizontal rules402408
Node: Comment lines402670
Node: Images and tables403203
Node: Literal examples404945
Ref: Literal examples-Footnote-1408917
Ref: Literal examples-Footnote-2409249
Ref: Literal examples-Footnote-3409425
Ref: Literal examples-Footnote-4409612
Ref: Literal examples-Footnote-5409882
Node: Include files409980
Node: Index entries411683
Node: Macro replacement412154
Ref: Macro replacement-Footnote-1413015
Node: Embedded LaTeX413245
Ref: Embedded LaTeX-Footnote-1414213
Node: Special symbols414409
Ref: Special symbols-Footnote-1416103
Node: Subscripts and superscripts416270
Node: LaTeX fragments417410
Ref: LaTeX fragments-Footnote-1419681
Ref: LaTeX fragments-Footnote-2419858
Ref: LaTeX fragments-Footnote-3420243
Node: Previewing LaTeX fragments420467
Ref: Previewing LaTeX fragments-Footnote-1421728
Node: CDLaTeX mode421839
Ref: CDLaTeX mode-Footnote-1424408
Node: Special blocks424560
Node: Exporting425488
Node: The Export Dispatcher427456
Ref: The Export Dispatcher-Footnote-1429859
Node: Export back-ends430130
Node: Export settings431080
Ref: Export settings-Footnote-1438490
Ref: Export settings-Footnote-2438596
Ref: Export settings-Footnote-3438695
Node: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export438742
Node: Beamer export440815
Ref: Beamer export-Footnote-1448461
Ref: Beamer export-Footnote-2448628
Node: HTML export448750
Node: HTML Export commands449842
Node: HTML doctypes450410
Node: HTML preamble and postamble452752
Node: Quoting HTML tags453849
Node: Links in HTML export454507
Node: Tables in HTML export455673
Node: Images in HTML export456404
Ref: Images in HTML export-Footnote-1457736
Node: Math formatting in HTML export457795
Ref: Math formatting in HTML export-Footnote-1459312
Node: Text areas in HTML export459447
Node: CSS support460252
Ref: CSS support-Footnote-1463346
Ref: CSS support-Footnote-2463526
Node: JavaScript support463788
Node: LaTeX and PDF export467243
Ref: LaTeX and PDF export-Footnote-1468388
Node: LaTeX export commands468731
Node: Header and sectioning469442
Ref: Header and sectioning-Footnote-1471111
Ref: Header and sectioning-Footnote-2471231
Node: Quoting LaTeX code471402
Node: LaTeX specific attributes472002
Ref: LaTeX specific attributes-Footnote-1480437
Ref: LaTeX specific attributes-Footnote-2480523
Ref: LaTeX specific attributes-Footnote-3480605
Node: Markdown export480767
Ref: Markdown export-Footnote-1482108
Node: OpenDocument Text export482194
Ref: OpenDocument Text export-Footnote-1483344
Ref: OpenDocument Text export-Footnote-2483374
Node: Pre-requisites for ODT export483518
Node: ODT export commands483885
Ref: x-export-to-odt484119
Ref: ODT export commands-Footnote-1485145
Ref: ODT export commands-Footnote-2485209
Node: Extending ODT export485264
Ref: x-export-to-other-formats486300
Ref: x-convert-to-other-formats486848
Node: Applying custom styles487309
Node: Links in ODT export489509
Node: Tables in ODT export490164
Ref: Tables in ODT export-Footnote-1492325
Node: Images in ODT export492418
Ref: Images in ODT export-Footnote-1495225
Node: Math formatting in ODT export495466
Node: Working with LaTeX math snippets495933
Ref: Working with LaTeX math snippets-Footnote-1498087
Node: Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files498162
Node: Labels and captions in ODT export498747
Node: Literal examples in ODT export500231
Ref: Literal examples in ODT export-Footnote-1501157
Node: Advanced topics in ODT export501272
Node: Configuring a document converter502031
Ref: x-odt-converter-capabilities502871
Node: Working with OpenDocument style files503461
Ref: x-factory-styles503962
Ref: x-orgodtstyles-xml504198
Ref: x-orgodtcontenttemplate-xml504544
Ref: x-overriding-factory-styles505237
Ref: x-org-odt-styles-file505511
Ref: x-org-odt-content-template-file506450
Node: Creating one-off styles506601
Node: Customizing tables in ODT export508858
Ref: Customizing tables in ODT export-Footnote-1514167
Ref: Customizing tables in ODT export-Footnote-2514271
Ref: Customizing tables in ODT export-Footnote-3514363
Node: Validating OpenDocument XML514710
Ref: Validating OpenDocument XML-Footnote-1515754
Node: Org export515814
Node: Texinfo export516599
Node: Texinfo export commands517232
Ref: Texinfo export commands-Footnote-1517789
Node: Document preamble517901
Ref: Document preamble-Footnote-1521258
Node: Headings and sectioning structure521324
Node: Indices522824
Node: Quoting Texinfo code523662
Node: Texinfo specific attributes524151
Ref: Texinfo specific attributes-Footnote-1525398
Node: An example525464
Node: iCalendar export527441
Ref: iCalendar export-Footnote-1530218
Ref: iCalendar export-Footnote-2530316
Ref: iCalendar export-Footnote-3530420
Node: Other built-in back-ends530561
Node: Export in foreign buffers531173
Node: Advanced configuration532197
Node: Publishing538351
Node: Configuration539226
Node: Project alist540013
Node: Sources and destinations541197
Node: Selecting files542752
Node: Publishing action543859
Ref: Publishing action-Footnote-1545753
Node: Publishing options545920
Node: Publishing links549330
Node: Sitemap550331
Node: Generating an index553978
Node: Uploading files554594
Node: Sample configuration556407
Node: Simple example556901
Node: Complex example557586
Node: Triggering publication559649
Node: Working With Source Code560661
Node: Structure of code blocks562368
Ref: Structure of code blocks-Footnote-1564266
Node: Editing source code564366
Node: Exporting code blocks566553
Node: Extracting source code568697
Node: Evaluating code blocks571013
Ref: Evaluating code blocks-Footnote-1574459
Ref: Evaluating code blocks-Footnote-2574756
Node: Library of Babel574890
Node: Languages575907
Node: Header arguments578216
Node: Using header arguments578706
Node: System-wide header arguments579765
Node: Language-specific header arguments580624
Node: Header arguments in Org mode properties581146
Ref: Header arguments in Org mode properties-Footnote-1582923
Node: Language-specific header arguments in Org mode properties583195
Node: Code block specific header arguments584236
Node: Header arguments in function calls586126
Node: Specific header arguments586908
Node: var589544
Node: results596515
Node: file601574
Node: file-desc602511
Node: dir603001
Node: exports606026
Node: tangle606729
Node: mkdirp607581
Node: comments607933
Node: padline609121
Node: no-expand609677
Node: session610194
Node: noweb610658
Node: noweb-ref612950
Ref: noweb-ref-Footnote-1614437
Node: noweb-sep614570
Node: cache614877
Node: sep616665
Node: hlines617262
Node: colnames618813
Node: rownames620175
Node: shebang621390
Node: tangle-mode621810
Node: eval622598
Node: wrap623678
Node: post624143
Node: prologue625281
Node: epilogue625870
Node: Results of evaluation626138
Node: Noweb reference syntax629984
Node: Key bindings and useful functions631684
Node: Batch execution634092
Node: Miscellaneous635135
Node: Completion635969
Node: Easy Templates638014
Node: Speed keys639540
Node: Code evaluation security640384
Node: Customization643118
Node: In-buffer settings643730
Ref: In-buffer settings-Footnote-1654123
Node: The very busy C-c C-c key654171
Node: Clean view656198
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-1660229
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-2660294
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-3660494
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-4660559
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-5660691
Ref: Clean view-Footnote-6660750
Node: TTY keys660879
Node: Interaction662924
Node: Cooperation663323
Node: Conflicts667212
Node: org-crypt672304
Node: Hacking673632
Node: Hooks674627
Node: Add-on packages675048
Node: Adding hyperlink types675611
Node: Adding export back-ends679634
Node: Context-sensitive commands681116
Ref: Context-sensitive commands-Footnote-1682745
Node: Tables in arbitrary syntax682883
Node: Radio tables684306
Node: A LaTeX example687135
Ref: A LaTeX example-Footnote-1691179
Ref: A LaTeX example-Footnote-2691340
Node: Translator functions691791
Ref: Translator functions-Footnote-1695104
Node: Radio lists695192
Node: Dynamic blocks696359
Node: Special agenda views698601
Ref: x-agenda-skip-entry-regexp702157
Ref: Special agenda views-Footnote-1702971
Ref: Special agenda views-Footnote-2703180
Node: Speeding up your agendas703319
Node: Extracting agenda information704423
Node: Using the property API708534
Node: Using the mapping API712028
Node: MobileOrg716547
Node: Setting up the staging area718262
Ref: Setting up the staging area-Footnote-1719374
Ref: Setting up the staging area-Footnote-2719683
Node: Pushing to MobileOrg719945
Ref: Pushing to MobileOrg-Footnote-1720978
Ref: Pushing to MobileOrg-Footnote-2721071
Ref: Pushing to MobileOrg-Footnote-3721495
Node: Pulling from MobileOrg721570
Ref: Pulling from MobileOrg-Footnote-1724034
Ref: Pulling from MobileOrg-Footnote-2724098
Node: History and Acknowledgments724481
Node: GNU Free Documentation License739705
Node: Main Index765072
Node: Key Index843950
Node: Command and Function Index896878
Node: Variable Index932803

End Tag Table


Local Variables:
coding: utf-8
End:
